JP2022113839A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine where attraction between a rotation member and a game ball can be made hard to be released.

SOLUTION: A second rolling part 381c for transferring a game ball to a rotation member 370 by rolling the game ball is designed to be located on the upper side in the direction of gravity than the axis of the rotation member. In this way, an attraction position between the rotation member 370 and the game ball can be arranged on the upper side in the direction of gravity relative to the rotational axis of the rotation member. Therefore, the game ball can be placed on a semicircular part on the upper side in the direction of gravity of the rotation member 370. Accordingly, a load applied to the attraction portion between the rotation member 370 and the game ball can be reduced. As the result, when a following game ball is attracted to a preceding game ball attracted to the rotation member 370, it is possible to suppress a release of the attraction between the rotation member 370 and the preceding game ball.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 79

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a substantially columnar rotary member formed to be rotatable with its rotary shaft oriented in the horizontal direction, and a game ball being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member disposed on the rotary member. A game machine is known in which a game ball is rotated in a state in which a game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface thereof, and a game ball is thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotary member (Patent Document 1). ).

JP 2012-231890 A

However, the game machine described above has a problem that the attraction between the rotating member and the game ball is released.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which attraction between a rotating member and a game ball is difficult to be released.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a substantially cylindrical rotating member formed rotatably in a posture with a rotating shaft directed in a horizontal direction, and a rotating member disposed on the rotating member. and a magnet for attracting a game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, by rotating the rotating member in a state where the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface, the attracted game ball is moved in the rotating direction of the rotating member. It is provided with a rolling surface on which the game ball rolls and is arranged side by side on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the rolling surface is above the rotating shaft of the rotating member in the direction of gravity. To position.

In the gaming machine according to claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, the rollers are arranged side by side on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the side opposite to the rolling surface with the rotating member interposed therebetween, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. A receiving surface for receiving a game ball that is attracted to and thrown by the ball is provided, and the receiving surface is positioned above the rotating shaft of the rotating member in the direction of gravity.

A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the receiving surface is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the rotating member.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to make it difficult to release the attraction between the rotating member and the game ball.

According to the game machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 1, it is possible to suppress bouncing of the game ball on the receiving surface.

According to the game machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 2, the game ball can be smoothly thrown to the receiving surface.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. It is a front view of a movable ball entry accessory device. It is a rear view of a movable ball entry accessory device. It is a perspective view of the front of the movable ball entry accessory device. It is a back perspective view of a movable ball entry accessory device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the movable ball entry accessory device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the movable ball entry accessory device. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame; FIG. (a) to (c) are partially enlarged rear views of the center frame. (a) to (c) are partially enlarged front views of the center frame. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the center frame in a first state, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the center frame in a third state. (a) is a front view of an intermediate member, (b) is a rear view of the intermediate member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member taken along line XIXc-XIXc of FIG. 19(a). (a) is an exploded front perspective view of an intermediate member, and FIG. 20(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the intermediate member. (a) is a front view of the center frame and the intermediate member, (b) is a side view of the center frame and the intermediate member, and (c) is the center frame along line XXIc-XXIc in FIG. 21(a). and a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of an intermediate member. (a) to (c) are front views of a center frame and an intermediate member. (a) to (c) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of a center frame and an intermediate member. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of a center frame and an intermediate member. (a) is a front view of the rear member, (b) is a rear view of the rear member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member taken along line XXVc-XXVc of FIG. 25(a). Fig. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear member; Fig. 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear member; 26(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the rear member taken along line XXVIII--XXVIII of FIG. 25; FIG. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the rear member. (a) is a front view of the intermediate member and the rear member, and (b) is a side view of the intermediate member and the rear member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member taken along the line XXXIa-XXXIa of FIG. 30(a), and (b) is a cross-section of the intermediate member and the rear member taken along the line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 30(b); It is a diagram. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; (a) is a front view of the rear base, and (b) is a side view of the rear base. Fig. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear base; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear base; 53(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the rear base taken along the LV-LV line in FIG. 52. FIG. (a) is a front view of a variable unit, and (b) is a top view of the variable unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the main body of the variable unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body of the variable unit; FIG. It is a top view of a distribution part. It is a top view of a distribution part. It is a top view of a distribution part. It is a top view of a variable unit. It is a top view of a variable unit. It is a top view of a variable unit. (a) to (c) are top views of the variable unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a turning ball portion of the variable unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a turning ball portion of the variable unit; (a) is a side view of the rotating body, (b) is a top view of the rotating body, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line LXVIIIc-LXVIIIc in FIG. 68(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line LXVIIId-LXVIIId of FIG. 68(b). 56(a) to 56(c) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the displacement unit along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 56(a). (a) to (c) are partial top views of the displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the variable unit and the rear base, and (b) is a top view of the variable unit and the rear base. (a) to (c) are top views of the variable unit and the rear base. 72(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the variable unit and the rear base taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII of FIG. 72(a). 71(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the variable unit and the rear base taken along line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. 71(b); FIG. (a) is a sectional view of the variable unit and the rear base before the stopper portion is displaced, and (b) is a sectional view of the variable unit and the rear base after the stopper portion is displaced. FIG. 4 is a top view of the variable unit and the rear base; FIG. 4 is a top view of the variable unit and the rear base; FIG. 4 is a top view of the variable unit and the rear base; (a) to (c) are sectional views of the variable unit and the rear base. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and rear base; (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a back view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the prize winning opening unit. (a) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (b) is a top view of the variable winning device. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device. (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a top view of the winning opening unit. 87(a) and (b) are partial front views of the winning opening unit in range LXXXVII of FIG. 86. FIG. (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit, (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb of FIG. 88(a), and FIG. ) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along line LXXXVIIIc-LXXXVIIIc. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the prize winning unit. (a) is a front view of the variable unit in the second embodiment, (b) is a top view of the variable unit, and (c) is the variable unit taken along line XCIc-XCIc in FIG. 91(b). It is a sectional view. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable unit; FIG. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable unit. (a) is a front view of the magnet, (b) is a top view of the magnet, and (c) is a side view of the magnet. (a) to (c) are top views of the variable unit. 95(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 along line XCVIa-XCVIa in FIG. 95(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit along line XCVIb-XCVIb in FIG. 95(b). , (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit taken along line XCVIc--XCVIc in FIG. 95(c). (a) is a side view of the rotating body in the third embodiment, (b) is a top view of the rotating body, and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XCVIIc-XCVIIc in FIG. 97(b). 97(d) is a sectional view taken along line XCVIId--XCVIId in FIG. 97(b). (a) and (b) are sectional views of a variable unit. (a) is a side view of the rotating body in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a top view of the rotating body, and (c) is the rotating body taken along line XCIXc-XCIXc in FIG. 99(b). 99(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line XCIXd--XCIXd in FIG. 99(b); FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and rear base; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and rear base; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and rear base; It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating body in a 5th embodiment. (a) is a side view of the rotating body, (b) is a top view of the rotating body, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line CIVc-CIVc in FIG. 104(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line CIVd-CIVd of FIG. 104(b). FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and rear base; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and rear base; (a) is a front view of a winning opening unit in a sixth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the prize winning opening unit. FIG. 20 is a front view of a prize winning unit in the seventh embodiment; It is an exploded perspective front view of the prize winning opening unit. 109(a) to (c) are sectional views of the winning opening unit taken along line CXI-CXI in FIG. 109. FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective front view of a winning opening unit in an eighth embodiment; 113(a) is a front view of the path member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the path member taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113(a). (a) is a front view of a path member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the path member. (a) is a front view of a path member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the path member. (a) is a front view of a path member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the path member. It is a front view of the prize-winning unit in the ninth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the prize winning opening unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a path member. (a) and (b) are front views of a path member. (a) and (b) are front views of the prize winning unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the prize winning unit. (a) is a top view of the path switching member in the tenth embodiment, (b) is a front view of the path switching member, and (c) is an exploded perspective front view of the path switching member. (a) is a top view of the route switching member and each route, (b) is a side view of the route switching member and each route as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVb in FIG. 124 (a), and (c) is a 124(a) is a side view of the path switching member and each path as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc of FIG. 124(a); FIG. (a) is a top view of the route switching member and each route, and (b) is a side view of the route switching member and each route. (a) is a top view of the route switching member and each route, and (b) is a side view of the route switching member and each route. (a) is a top view of the route switching member and each route, and (b) is a side view of the route switching member and each route. (a) is a top view of the route switching member and each route, and (b) is a side view of the route switching member and each route. (a) is a top view of the route switching member and each route, and (b) is a side view of the route switching member and each route. (a) is a top view of the route switching member and each route, and (b) is a side view of the route switching member and each route. It is a front view of the prize winning unit in the eleventh embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the prize winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the prize winning opening unit. 131(a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit taken along line CXXXIV-CXXXIV in FIG. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) and (c) are cross-sectional views of the prize winning unit. (a) is a time chart showing the time change of the displacement amount of the variable plate, and (b) is a time chart showing the time change of the displacement amount of the variable plate in the first embodiment. (a) is a side view of the rotating body, (b) is a top view of the rotating body, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line CXXXVIIIc-CXXXVIIIc in FIG. 138(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line CXXXVIIId-CXXXVIIId of FIG. 138(b).

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 90, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 26, 27, 28, 63 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and guides the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A firing rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right in front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the game ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device (not shown) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. .

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When a ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, game balls are operated in accordance with the operation. will be lent out. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the game balls during the pressing operation, and the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) based on changes in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extracting lever 52 is provided at the front lower portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when the game balls stored in the lower tray 50 are ejected downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. Game balls naturally fall from the bottom opening and are discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the game balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and two rails. A general winning opening 63, a relatively large movable ball-entering accessory device 300, a left-start winning opening 26 disposed at the lower left position of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, and a medium-start winning opening disposed at the center position. An opening 28 is provided with a right starting winning opening 27 disposed at the lower right position, and its peripheral edge portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof.

The general winning opening 63, the left starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, the middle starting winning opening 28, and the movable ball entry accessory device 300 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are used to play games. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the board 13 .

The game ball thrown into the game area randomly enters the normal winning hole 63, the left starting winning hole 26, the middle starting winning hole 28 or the right starting winning hole 27 in the process of flowing down. Or, the ball enters the movable ball entry accessory device 300 when activated (when opened).

A game ball entering each winning hole is recovered to the back side of the game board 13 through a through hole formed in the game board 13. - 特許庁

On the other hand, the game ball that has flowed into the movable ball entry accessory device 300 is discharged after being subjected to a sorting operation through processes such as flowing down, rolling, rising, etc., and collected to the back side of the game board 13. be. Note that the sorting operation in the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 will be described later with reference to another drawing.

When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the left start winning opening 26, the middle starting winning opening 28, or the right starting winning opening 27, the movable ball entry accessory device 300 receives a predetermined is stopped in the form of a small win), allowing the inflow of game balls. That is, the movable ball entry accessory device 300 has a wing portion 312 (so-called wing member) provided at an upper position of the game area, and the wing portion 312 uses, for example, a solenoid 317 (see FIG. 14). Due to the action of the link mechanism, it reciprocates along the board surface by a predetermined angle.

The wings 312 are in a substantially upright state, and the inflow of game balls into the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 is always disabled. When the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 operates, the wing portion 312 is displaced so as to fall down in the left-right direction in the game area centering on the base end portion thereof, thereby allowing the game ball to flow into the movable ball-entering accessory device 300. enable Since the wing portion 312 is located at the upper position within the game area, particularly near the position where the game ball is first hit, the game ball hit into the game area when the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 is activated is positioned at the upper position. Guided by the nail, it easily reaches the wing portion 312, and is guided by the wing portion 312 as it is and flows into the movable ball entry accessory device 300. - 特許庁

The movable ball-entering accessory device 300 operates even when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a game ball passes through any specific area provided inside the movable ball-entering accessory device 300), and the movable It enables the ball to be entered into the ball entry accessory device 300. - 特許庁The specific area in the movable ball entry accessory device 300 will be further described later.

A variable plate 352 (see FIG. 12), which will be described later, is arranged in the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 . The variable plate 352 performs a sorting operation to guide the game ball to the normal route or to the special route. If the game ball is guided to the normal route, the probability of winning a big hit after that is low, but if the game ball is guided to the special route, the big win is after that compared with the case where the game ball is guided to the normal route. more likely to become

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). This is the area where the game ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the game ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. prevented. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. The momentum is attenuated and bounces back to the central part side.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the left and right start prize openings 26 and 27 or the middle start prize opening 28. . Specifically, when the ball enters the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the middle starting winning opening 28, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use the LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving mode or the normal mode by the lighting state, indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing by the lighting state, or display the stop symbols. The lighting state indicates whether or not the symbol corresponds to the small win, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the big win and an error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (a lottery to determine whether or not a game ball flowing down the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 passes through a specific area) is performed when the first sensor 311b wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. A 16R jackpot, a 7R jackpot, and a 3R jackpot are prepared as the jackpot types determined here. In the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, symbols corresponding to the type of the jackpot are displayed in the case of a jackpot.

Here, the “16R jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, the “7R jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds, and the “3R jackpot” is The maximum number of rounds is 3 rounds.

One round is a unit that divides the number of prize balls for a jackpot. In this embodiment, during one round, the wing portion 312 is tilted, the first sensor 311b (see FIG. 14) is opened, and 30 seconds have passed, or 10 game balls have passed the first sensor 311b. becomes. Since there are 10 prize balls when one game ball passes through the first sensor 311b, about 100 prize balls can be obtained in each round.

In this embodiment, the first round ends when the game ball passes through the V winning member 382 (see FIG. 10), so there is no prize ball in the first round. That is, a maximum of about 200 prize balls can be obtained with a 3R jackpot, a maximum of about 600 prize balls can be obtained with a 7R jackpot, and a maximum of about 1500 prize balls can be obtained with a 16R jackpot.

The time-saving state (during time-saving) refers to a game state in which only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased while the big winning probability remains as it is, and the game ball is likely to enter the medium start winning opening 28.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is not in the time-saving state (the state in which the winning probability of the second symbol is not increased).

During time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the variable board 652 of the variable winning device 650 attached to the medium start winning opening 28 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during the normal time. is set. When the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is in an open state (open state), compared with the case where the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is in a closed state (closed state), middle start A game ball is easily entered into the winning hole 28.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the time saving, it becomes a state in which the game ball is likely to enter the medium start winning opening 28, and the feather portion 312 can be easily opened.

In addition, during the time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 associated with the middle start winning opening 28, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the variable plate 652 of the variable prize winning device 650 is opened. In addition, during the time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the variable winning device 650 is variable according to the time when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 attached to the medium start winning port 28 is opened and one time. At least one of the number of times the plate 652 is opened may be changed. In addition, during the time saving, the time during which the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 attached to the middle start winning port 28 is opened and the number of times the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is opened per time are not changed. , only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal state.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In addition, a movable ball entry accessory device 300 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, the winning (starting winning) to the left and right starting winning openings 26, 27 and the middle starting winning opening 28 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, A wing portion 312 that opens and closes, and a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays a second symbol triggered by passage of a game ball through the through gate 67 are provided. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer circumference of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 .

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. If the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the variable plate of the variable winning device 650 attached to the middle start winning port 28 652 is configured to be activated (open) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the time saving than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbols is performed in a short period of time during the time saving, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during the normal period. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given more chances to open the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 of the middle start winning opening 28 . Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which the game ball is likely to enter the middle start winning opening 28.例文帳に追加

In addition, during time saving, by other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and opening times of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 for one time, etc. is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be set constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be kept constant regardless of the game state, or the variable winning for one winning. The opening time and number of openings of the variable plate 652 of the device 650 may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are assembled to the game board on the left and right sides of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, and are configured so that part of the game balls launched to the game board can pass through. When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps corresponding to the maximum number of holdings are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 .

The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. You may make it perform using a part of the ball role device 300. FIG. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the movable ball entry accessory device 300 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of game balls through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, and may be above the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Left and right start winning openings 26 and 27 in which balls can win are provided at the left and right lower sides of the movable ball entry accessory device 300 . When the game ball enters the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27, the left starting winning opening switch 210a and the right starting winning opening switch 210b provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on, and the left starting winning opening switch 210a and the right starting winning opening switch 210a are turned on. A lottery is made by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) due to the turning on of the winning opening switch 210b, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A, and the wings 312 are displayed a predetermined number of times ( It is opened once in this embodiment) and closed after a predetermined period of time (after 0.5 second in this embodiment).

On the other hand, on the center side of the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 in a front view, a middle starting winning opening 28 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the game ball enters the middle starting winning opening 28, the middle starting winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the starting winning opening switch). A lottery is made by the device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first pattern display device 37B, and the wings 312 are opened and closed a predetermined number of times (twice in this embodiment). Repeat (0.5 sec release period, 2 sec interval between first and second).

Each starting prize-winning opening 26, 27, 28 draws a lottery so as to give a small prize at 1/1. Therefore, in this embodiment, there is no jackpot lottery due to game balls passing through the start winning openings 26 , 27 , 28 . After the lottery, and after a randomly selected opening period (1 to 5 seconds), the wings 312 repeat opening and closing a predetermined number of times.

In addition, the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 and the middle starting winning opening 28 are also one of the winning openings from which five game balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls enter the left and right starting prize openings 26 and 27 is the same as the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls enter the middle start prize opening 28. However, the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the left and right start prize-winning ports 26, 27 and the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the middle start prize-winning port 28 are different numbers, e.g. , the number of prize balls put out when the game balls enter the left and right start prize-winning ports 26, 27 is set to 3, and the number of prize balls put out when the game balls enter the middle start prize-winning port 28 is set to 5. may

A variable prize winning device 650 is attached to the middle starting prize winning port 28 . The variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the medium start winning opening 28. state. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "O" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the variable board 652 of the variable winning device 650 is displayed. is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the middle start winning port 28.例文帳に追加

As described above, during time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so the symbol "○" in the variable display of the second symbol is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is opened becomes longer than during the normal time during the time saving. Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which the game balls are more likely to enter the middle start winning opening 28 than in the normal time.

The probability of winning a 16R jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a game ball enters the middle start prize opening 28 than when a game ball enters the left and right start prize openings 26, 27. It is set high (it is made easy to collectively enter a plurality of game balls into the movable ball entry accessory device 300). On the other hand, the left and right starting prize-winning ports 26 and 27 do not have an electric accessory like the middle-starting prize-winning port 28, and the ball can always win a prize.

A first sensor 311b is arranged on the upper part of the movable ball entry accessory device 300 . In the pachinko machine 10, after winning the left and right start winning openings 26, 27 or the middle starting winning opening 28, the game ball entering the movable ball entry accessory device 300 passes through the V winning member 382. When the jackpot hits, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on so that the jackpot stop pattern is displayed after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is movably entered. It is displayed on a part of the ball role device 300 to show the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot, jackpot game) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the wings 312 normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The wing portion 312 is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after being closed, the wing portion 312 is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the wings 312 can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (for 16 rounds excluding the first round). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the wing portion 312 is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the wing portion 312 is opened for a predetermined time, and the wing portion is opened. A game state is formed as a special game state in which a large opening provided separately from the wings 312 is opened for a predetermined period of time and a predetermined number of times, triggered by a ball entering the first sensor 311b during the opening of the 312. You can do it. In addition, the number of the first sensor 311b is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper side of the movable ball entry accessory device 300. For example, it may be below the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . A game ball that flows down the game area and has not won a prize in any of the winning holes 26, 27, 28, 63 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 71. - 特許庁In addition, all the game balls hit into the game area, including the game balls entered into the movable ball entry accessory device 300, are recovered to the back side of the game board 13.例文帳に追加The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

An example of the game of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. The purpose of the game of this embodiment is to pass the game ball through the V winning member 382, shift the game state to the special game state, and obtain the prize ball. Therefore, the player adjusts the strength of the game ball so that the game ball slides down the upper surface of the center frame 86 and shoots it. As a result, when the game ball hits a large number of nails and enters each of the start winning openings 26, 27, 28, the feather portion 312 is opened. At this time, if the game ball can enter the movable ball entry device 300 with good timing, the game ball passes through the V prize winning member 382 according to the flow of the subsequent game ball, so that the player can play the game. By visually recognizing the flow of the ball, it is possible to enjoy whether a big hit is obtained or not while watching the movement of the actual game ball.

That is, the first condition for obtaining a big hit is to open the wing portion 312, and the second condition is to allow the game ball to enter the movable ball entry accessory device 300 when the movable piece 190b is opened.

Therefore, a hitting method that does not allow the game ball to reach the center frame 86 (so-called “choro hitting”) or a hitting method that allows the game ball to reach the return rubber 69 (so-called “right hitting”) is used to obtain a big hit in this embodiment. is disadvantageous.

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted in which two game balls are easily entered into the movable ball entry accessory device 300 at the same time to obtain a big win. Therefore, the player shoots the game ball toward the upper end of the center frame 86 (the triangular pointed apex), causing the game ball to spread to the left and right. The aim is to hit two balls in total, one at a time, so that the game can be played so as to easily obtain a big win.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out game balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). I have. The tank 130 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of game balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the lottery of the display results in the second symbol display device.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 4) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 4) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the wing portion 312 of the first sensor 311b. Various solenoid motors 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid 209a for opening and closing rotationally driving to the left and right as a shaft, an electric accessory solenoid 209b for driving the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650, or a motor are connected, The MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input/output port 205 .

Various direct switches 210 which are different from the various switches 208 and are directly involved in the benefits given to the players are directly connected to the MPU 201 without going through the input/output port 205 .

The various solenoid motors 209 include at least a solenoid 317 for opening and closing rotationally driving left and right about the lower side of the wing portion 312 of the first sensor 311b, and a solenoid for opening and closing the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650. 655, and a drive motor 376R that rotationally drives the rotating bodies 372R and 372L.

Incidentally, the various direct switches 210 include a left-start winning slot switch, a right-start winning slot switch, and a middle-start winning slot switch (not shown).

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the game ball corresponds to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to shoot the game ball. is. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the 7-segment display performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, and uses 12 volts to drive various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the various solenoid motors 209, motors, and the like. voltage, 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are applied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like. supply.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the game board 13 includes a movable ball entry accessory device 300 disposed inside an opening 60a in the center of a base plate 60 made of transparent flexible resin, Mainly includes a winning opening unit 600 located on the lower side of the movable ball entry accessory device 300 in the direction of gravity and arranged on the base plate 60, and an irradiation unit 900 arranged on the back side of the base plate 60. .

The movable ball-entering accessory device 300 is inserted from the front side into an opening 60a penetrating through the central portion of the base plate 60 in a front view. The movable ball-entering accessory device 300 has an outer edge larger than the opening 60 a , and the edge is disposed in contact with the front surface of the base plate 60 . As a result, the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 can be positioned and arranged in the front-rear direction with respect to the base plate 60 . A detailed description of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 will be given later.

The winning opening unit 600 is a unit including the start winning openings 26 , 27 , 28 described above, is positioned below the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 in the direction of gravity, and is arranged on the base plate 60 . A detailed description of the prize winning unit 600 will be given later.

The irradiation unit 900 is formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, and its outer shape is formed smaller than the outer shape of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. This makes it impossible for the player to directly view the irradiation unit 900 through the base plate 60 .

Further, a base (not shown) having an LED is arranged inside the irradiation unit 900, and the light emitted from the LED is irradiated to the front side (player side). As described above, since the base plate 60 is made of transparent flexible resin, the light emitted from the LEDs of the irradiation unit 900 can be emitted to the player through the base plate 60 .

Next, detailed configurations of the movable ball entry accessory device 300 and the winning opening unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 90. FIG. First, the movable ball entry accessory device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 80. FIG.

First, referring to FIGS. 8 to 13, the overall configuration of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 will be described. 8 is a front view of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, and FIG. 9 is a rear view of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300. FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 8 to 13, the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 is superimposed on a center frame 310 formed in a substantially rectangular frame state when viewed from the front, and on the upper side of the center frame 310 on the back side in the direction of gravity. a rear member 350 arranged on the rear side of the intermediate member 330; a variable unit 360 arranged on the rear side of the center frame 310; and a control board 410 arranged on the rear side of the rear base 390 .

In the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, the player can visually recognize the intermediate member 330, the rear member 350, and the variable unit 360 arranged on the back side through the inside of the center frame 310 in the frame state (see FIG. 8). .

Next, a detailed configuration of the center frame 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of center frame 310, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of center frame 310. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the center frame 310 includes a frame 311 that is shaped like a frame when viewed from the front, and vanes 312 that are rotatably supported on the front side of the frame 311 in the direction of gravity. , an upper front cover 313 arranged to cover the front side of the frame 311 and interposing the wing portion 312 between itself and the frame 311; and a solenoid 317 generating a driving force for rotating the wing portion 312. , a shaft portion 315 for transmitting the driving force of the solenoid 317 to the wing portion 312 , a back cover 316 accommodating the solenoid 317 , and the solenoid 317 being covered on the back side of the back cover 316 so that the solenoid 317 can escape from the back cover 316 . and a ventilation cover 318 that suppresses the

The frame body 311 is formed in a frame state when viewed from the front, and is provided at a recess 311a recessed toward the back side on the front surface on the upper side in the direction of gravity, and on the edge portion on the lower side in the direction of gravity of the recess 311a. A pair of first sensors 311b, an upper inclined portion 311c formed between the pair of first sensors 311b, a downward inclined portion 311d formed on the inner peripheral surface on the lower side in the gravity direction, and the downward inclined portion 311d. , and a recovery hole 311e opened to a size through which a game ball can pass, and a through hole 311f formed through the concave portion 311a from the front side to the back side.

The concave portion 311a is a concave portion for forming a gap through which a game ball can pass between the concave portion 311a and an upper front cover 313, which will be described later, and the concave dimension is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the concave portion 311a is formed in a crescent shape that curves downward in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 8) toward both ends in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 8) when viewed from the front. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the edge of the recess 311a can flow down along the curved shape while being rolled to the outside of the frame 311. As shown in FIG.

The upwardly inclined portion 311c is positioned at the center of the frame 311 in the left-right direction, and is formed on the other side edge of the recess 311a (the surface connecting the front of the recess 311a and the front of the frame 311). The upper inclined portion 311c is formed so as to incline downward in the direction of gravity from the central portion of the frame 311 toward both ends in the left-right direction. As a result, when a game ball is thrown between the recessed portion 311a (frame body 311) and the upper front cover 313, the thrown game ball rolls on the upper surface of the upper inclined portion 311c due to gravity, and moves upward. It drops from the ends (both left and right ends) of the inclined portion 311c.

The first sensor 311b is formed with a first detection hole 311b1 having an opening large enough for a game ball to pass through. The first sensor 311b can detect the passage of the game ball by passing the game ball inside the first detection hole 311b1.

The first sensor 311b is arranged in such a manner that the first detection hole 311b1 opens in the direction of gravity outside both left and right ends of the upper inclined portion 311c, and is positioned below the lower inclined end of the upper inclined portion 311c. are arranged. Therefore, as described above, when the game ball rolling on the upper inclined portion 311c rolls to the end of the upper inclined portion 311c and falls from the upper inclined portion 311c, the inside of the first detection hole 311b1 of the first sensor 311b pass through. As a result, the game ball thrown between the concave portion 311a and the upper front cover 313 can be detected by the first sensor 311b.

The through hole 311f is a hole through which a rotating shaft 315a of the shaft portion 315, which will be described later, is inserted. formed larger than

The descending inclined portion 311d is a surface that receives a game ball thrown from the upper portion of the variable unit 360 described below and, when the game ball falls from the front of the variable unit 360, throws the game ball into the recovery hole 311e. It is formed on the inner peripheral surface on the other side of 310 . The descending inclined portion 311d is formed so as to incline downward in the gravitational direction as it extends outward from the substantially central position in the left-right direction. Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the descending slope portion 311d can roll along the slope to the end position of the descending slope portion 311d.

The recovery hole 311e is a hole through which the game ball thrown to the descending slope portion 311d is next thrown as described above, and is formed in an opening larger than the outer diameter of the ball, and is located in the horizontal direction of the descending slope portion 311d. Formed at both ends. Therefore, as described above, the game ball rolling on the upper portion of the descending slope portion 311d rolls to the end of the descending slope portion 311d and falls from the descending slope portion 311d, and is thrown into the recovery hole 311e.

The wing portion 312 is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and its thickness is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. Further, the feather portion 312 is formed with a shaft support hole 312a which is recessed circularly toward the front side on the other side (lower side in the direction of gravity) of the rear side.

The shaft support hole 312a is a hole into which a rotating shaft 315a of the shaft portion 315, which will be described later, is fitted, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially equal to or smaller than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 315a. Accordingly, when the rotary shaft 315a of the shaft portion 315 is rotated, the feather portion 312 can be rotationally displaced about the shaft support hole 312a. A detailed description of the operation of the wings 312 will be given later.

The upper front cover 313 is a plate for forming a flow-down path of the game ball on the front side of the frame 311, and is arranged with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball from the front of the recess 311a of the frame 311. be. As a result, a gap is formed between the concave portion 311a and the upper front cover 313 facing each other so that the game ball can flow down. Further, the upper front cover 313 is formed of a transparent plate-like body so that the game ball flowing down between the concave portion 311a and the upper front cover 313 can be visually recognized by the player.

The upper front cover 313 is formed in a semicircular shape with one side (upper side in the direction of gravity) curved, and has a bulging portion 313a that protrudes toward the back side of one side end.

The protrusions 313a are protrusions for preventing game balls flowing down from above the upper front cover 313 in the gravitational direction from entering between the opposing recesses 311a and the upper front cover 313. The protrusions 313a are arranged in pairs. It is formed on the upper part between the opposing wings 312 . Further, when the wing portion 312 is positioned in the first state (a state in which the wing portion 312 is not rotationally displaced and the tip portion A1 is positioned above the pivot hole 312a in the gravitational direction), the wing portion 312 and the bulging portion 313a is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 cannot enter between the recess 311a and the upper front cover 313 (FIG. 17). (a)).

The solenoid 317 is driving means for applying a driving force to the wing portion 312, and is formed mainly of a shaft portion 317a that displaces the piston and a transmission portion 317b that is formed below the shaft portion 317a in the direction of gravity. be.

The shaft portion 317 a is formed in a columnar shape, and one side of the shaft portion 317 a is inserted through the solenoid 317 . The shaft portion 317 a is arranged so that its axial direction is parallel to the direction of gravity, and when the solenoid 317 is supplied with power, it is displaced upward in the direction of gravity and drawn into the solenoid 317 . That is, the shaft portion 317a can perform piston movement in the direction of gravity.

The transmission portion 317b is formed to protrude from the other side of the shaft portion 317a in a D shape having an opening 317b1 inside. An opening 317b1 of the transmission portion 317b is formed so as to open from the front side to the back side, and a variable shaft 315b, which will be described later, is inserted therein. Therefore, when the shaft portion 317a makes a piston motion in the gravitational direction, the variable shaft 315b inserted into the transmission portion 317b is displaced in the gravitational direction.

The shaft portion 315 is a shaft that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 317 to the blade portion 312. The shaft portion 315 is provided at one end on the front side and connected to the blade portion 312, and is provided at one end on the back side. It mainly includes a variable shaft 315b that engages with the solenoid 317 and a connecting portion 315c that connects the rotating shaft 315a and the variable shaft 315b.

As described above, the rotating shaft 315a is a shaft that transmits the driving force that rotates the wing portion 312, and one end on the front side is inserted from the back side of the through hole 311f of the frame 311 and protrudes to the front side. At the same time, the axial support hole 312 a of the feather portion 312 is fitted onto the end portion of the frame 311 protruding from the front side.

The variable shaft 315b has the end on the back side inserted into the transmission portion 317b of the solenoid 317 as described above, and is displaced when the solenoid 317 is driven.

The connecting portion 315c is a connecting portion that connects the rotating shaft 315a and the variable shaft 315b, and the rear end of the rotating shaft 315a and the front end of the variable shaft 315b are connected. The rotating shaft 315a and the variable shaft 315b are connected so that their axes are parallel to each other. That is, the rotating shaft 315a and the variable shaft 315b are connected by the connecting portion 315c at an eccentric position. As a result, when the variable shaft 315b is displaced in the gravitational direction, the displacement is transmitted to the rotating shaft 315a through the connecting portion 315c, and the rotating shaft 315a is rotationally displaced. As a result, the wings 312 can be rotationally displaced.

The rear cover 316 is a plate for arranging the solenoid 317 inside, and is arranged in such a manner as to cover the upper side of the rear surface of the frame 311 in the direction of gravity, and the solenoid 317 is arranged on the rear side. A recessed portion 316a is provided, and an opening 316b is formed below the recessed portion 316a in the gravitational direction.

The recessed portion 316 a is a recess for arranging the solenoid 317 inside, and is recessed at a position facing the solenoid 317 . The recessed depth of the recessed portion 316a is set to be substantially the same as the thickness dimension of the solenoid 317 in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the rear cover 316 and the rear side of the solenoid 317 are arranged at positions substantially aligned with each other. be. Therefore, the ventilation cover 318 formed of a plate-like body is provided on the back side of the back cover 316 so that the solenoid 317 cannot be removed from the back cover 316 .

The opening 316b is an opening for engaging the variable shaft 315b of the shaft portion 315 with the transmission portion 317b of the solenoid 317, and is formed to be larger than the displacement region of the variable shaft 315b. Thereby, the driving force of the solenoid 317 arranged on the back side of the back cover 316 can be transmitted to the shaft portion 315 .

Next, referring to FIGS. 16 and 17, the displacement operation of the wing portion 312 will be described. 16A to 16C are partially enlarged rear views of the center frame 310, and FIGS. 17A to 17C are partially enlarged front views of the center frame 310. FIG.

16(a) and 17(a) show the first state before the wing portion 312 is displaced, and FIGS. 16(c) and 17(c) show the third state after the wing portion 312 is displaced. However, FIGS. 16(b) and 17(b) show the second state at an intermediate position during the displacement from the first state to the third state. Also, in FIG. 17, the end portion of the feather portion 312 on the side opposite to the shaft support hole 312a will be described as the tip portion A1.

Further, FIGS. 16(a) to 16(c) show the ventilation cover 318, and FIGS. 17(a) to 17(c) show the upper front cover 313 in a transparent state. 16 and 17, the rotating shaft 315a is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 17(a), in the first state, the shaft portion 317a of the solenoid 317 is arranged to protrude downward in the direction of gravity. As a result, the variable shaft 315b inserted through the opening 317b1 of the transmission portion 317b is positioned below the rotating shaft 315a in the direction of gravity. In this case, the tip portion A1 of the wing portion 312 to which the rotating shaft 315a is fitted is located above the shaft support hole 312a (rotating shaft 315a) in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 17A) and opposite to the pair of wing portions 312 located inside the

From the state shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 17(a), when power is applied to the solenoid 317 and the shaft portion 317a is displaced upward in the gravitational direction, the second position shown in FIGS. state.

As shown in FIGS. 16B and 17B, in the second state, the variable shaft 315b of the shaft portion 315 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity and accommodated inside the solenoid 317. , is displaced upward in the direction of gravity while rotating about the axis of the rotating shaft 315a. When the variable shaft 315b is rotationally displaced, the rotational displacement is transmitted to the rotary shaft 315a through the connecting portion 315c, thereby rotating the rotary shaft 315a. As a result, the feather portion 312 is rotationally displaced around the shaft support hole 312a.

In the second state, the tip portion A1 of the wing portion 312 is positioned outside between the pair of wing portions 312 facing each other, and the gap between the tip portion A1 and the bulging portion 313a of the upper front cover 313 is outside the game ball. made larger than the diameter. That is, in the second state, a game ball flowing down from above in the direction of gravity can enter between the recess 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover.

The second state is an intermediate position in the displacement from the first state to the third state. In other words, the displacement of the wing portion 312 is performed as a series of operations between the position of the first state described above and the position of the third state described later.

From the state shown in FIGS. 16(b) and 17(b), when power continues to be applied to the solenoid 317 and the shaft portion 317a is further displaced upward in the gravitational direction, FIGS. A third state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 16B and 17B, in the third state, the shaft portion 317a is displaced further upward in the gravitational direction than in the second state described above and accommodated inside the solenoid 317 . As a result, the variable shaft 315b of the shaft portion 315 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity while further rotating around the axis of the rotating shaft 315a. When the variable shaft 315b is rotationally displaced, the rotational displacement of the variable shaft 315b is transmitted to the rotary shaft 315a via the connecting portion 315c, similarly to the displacement from the first state to the second state described above, and the rotary shaft 315a is rotated. further rotated. Therefore, the vane portion 312 is further rotationally displaced about the shaft support hole 312a than in the second state.

In the third state, the tip A1 of the vane portion 312 is positioned outside the space between the pair of vane portions 312 facing each other, and the imaginary line S1 connecting the tip A1 and the shaft support hole 312a (rotating shaft 315a) is It is in a state of being inclined outward in the horizontal direction by approximately 45 degrees with respect to the direction of gravity. As a result, the area where the wing portion 312 can catch the game ball flowing down above the game board 13 is enlarged, so that the game ball can easily flow into the space between the recess 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover 313. can.

Next, referring to FIG. 18, game balls flowing down the game board 13 in the first state and the third state will be described. 18(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the center frame 310 in the first state, and FIG. 18(b) is a partially enlarged front view of the center frame 310 in the third state.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), in the first state, the gap between the tip A1 of the wing portion 312 and the bulging portion 313a of the upper front cover 313 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. A game ball cannot flow into between the concave portion 311a and the upper front cover 313 facing each other.

Therefore, the game ball flowing down from above the center frame 310 does not flow into the space between the recess 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover 313, and the center frame 310 (movable ball entry accessory device 300) moves in the horizontal direction. flow down both sides.

On the other hand, in the third state, as described above, the imaginary line S1 connecting the tip portion A1 of the vane portion 312 and the shaft support hole 312a is inclined approximately 45 degrees with respect to the direction of gravity. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18(b), the game ball can flow into the space between the concave portion 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover 313 facing each other.

Therefore, the game ball that flows down from above the center frame 310 and collides with the upper portion of the wing portion 312 is rolled by the wing portion 312 between the concave portion 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover 313 and thrown. be.

Next, a detailed configuration of the intermediate member 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. 19(a) is a front view of the intermediate member 330, FIG. 19(b) is a rear view of the intermediate member 330, and FIG. 19(c) is a line XIXc-XIXc of FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of an intermediate member 330; FIG. 20(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the intermediate member 330, and FIG. 20(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the intermediate member 330. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the intermediate member 330 includes a body portion 331 formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the body portion 331 disposed on both laterally outer sides of the body portion 331 to irradiate the inside of the body portion 331. A decorative base 332 is mainly provided.

The main body part 331 picks up the game ball thrown between the recessed part 311a of the frame body 311 of the center frame 310 and the upper front cover 313 under the gravity direction of the first sensor 311b and throws the ball to the back side. A receiving portion 331a which is a plate and protrudes from a substantially central position on the front side and whose tip is disposed below the first detection hole 311b1 (first sensor 311b) in the direction of gravity, and a portion below the receiving portion 331a in the direction of gravity. and a guide portion 331b that guides a game ball thrown from the receiving portion 331a to a plurality of flow paths.

Also, the body portion 331 is made of a transparent flexible material. As a result, the light emitted from the decoration base 332 arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction of the body portion 331 can be emitted to the inside of the body portion 331 .

The receiving portion 331a is formed to have a substantially U-shaped cross-section with an open upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the vertical direction in FIG. 19A) when viewed from the front. The projecting front end of the receiving portion 331a is inserted into the opening of the frame 311 of the center frame 310 and positioned below the first detection hole 311b1 (first sensor 311b) of the frame 311 in the direction of gravity. are arranged. Thereby, as described above, the game ball passing through the first detection hole 311b1 of the frame 311 (center frame 310) can be dropped to the inner surface (U-shaped inner portion) of the receiving portion 331a.

Further, the receiving portion 331a is formed such that the bottom surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity is inclined downward from the front side toward the back side (see FIG. 19C). As a result, the game ball dropped onto the receiving portion 331 a can be rolled along the downward slope and thrown to the back side of the main body portion 331 .

The guide portion 331b is formed so as to protrude from the back side of the main body portion 331 on the lower side of the receiving portion 331a in the direction of gravity (lower side in the vertical direction in FIG. 19B). The guide part 331b is formed by protruding two large and small U-shapes, which are open at the lower side in the gravity direction, at a predetermined interval larger than the diameter of the game ball.

The small U-shaped inner guide portion 331b1 of the guide portion 331b has an upper surface that slopes downward from the substantially central position in the left-right direction toward the outside. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the inner guide part 331b1 can roll in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the inner guide part 331b1.

The large U-shaped outer guide portion 331b2 of the guide portion 331b is formed with an interval larger than the diameter of the game ball from the inner guide portion 331b1, as described above. Thereby, the game ball can be guided between the inner guide portion 331b1 and the outer guide portion 331b2 facing each other. A game ball guided between the inner guide portion 331b1 and the outer guide portion 331b2 facing each other flows down between the facing portions and is thrown to the first rolling portion 381a of the main body portion 380, which will be described later.

A standing wall 331c protruding from the back side of the body portion 331 extends in the direction of gravity outside the outer guide portion 331b2 in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 19(b)). The standing wall 331c is formed with an interval larger than the diameter of the outer guide portion 331b2 and the game ball. As a result, the game ball that is thrown to the upper surface of the outer guide portion 331b2 and falls from the upper surface of the outer guide portion 331b2 can be thrown between the opposing outer guide portion 331b2 and the standing wall 331c and flow down.

Next, throwing a game ball from the center frame 310 to the intermediate member 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 23. FIG. 21(a) is a front view of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330, FIG. 21(b) is a side view of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330 along line XXIc-XXIc of a). 22(a) to 22(c) are front views of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330. FIG. 23(a) to 23(c) are partially enlarged sectional views of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330. FIG.

21 to 23 illustrate a state in which the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330 are combined. 22 and 23 show the center frame 310 in the third state (the state in which the wings 312 are rotated about the shaft support holes 312a), and FIGS. A cross-section corresponding to the cross-section of FIG. 21(c) is shown. Further, in Figures 22 and 23, the ball pitched transition state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) to 21(c), when the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330 are assembled, the protruding tip of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is attached to the upper front cover 313 of the center frame 310. The positions in the front and the direction of gravity are substantially the same. That is, the receiving portion 331a protrudes to a position facing the first sensor 311b in the direction of gravity. Therefore, as described above, the game ball flowing down through the inside of the first sensor 311b can be dropped onto the receiving portion 331a.

As shown in FIGS. 22(a) and 23(a), in the wing portion 312 in the third state, a game ball flowing down from the upper side of the center frame in the direction of gravity comes into contact with the wing portion 312, The ball is thrown between 312 opposing sides. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 22(b) and 23(b), the ball is thrown between the recess 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover 313 facing each other.

As shown in FIGS. 22(b) and 23(b), the game ball thrown between the upper front cover 313 and the concave portion 311a of the frame 311 facing each other is arranged at the lower edge of the concave portion 311a in the direction of gravity. The ball passes through the inside guide portion 331b1 of the first sensor 311b provided and is thrown to the inside of the receiving portion 331a shown in FIGS. 22(c) and 23(c).

As shown in FIGS. 22(c) and 23(c), the curved portion of the receiving portion 331a (curved portion having a U shape when viewed from the front) is located below the inner guide portion 331b1 of the first sensor 311b in the gravitational direction. be located. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball falling on the receiving portion 331a from rebounding and rebounding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the slowing down of the rolling speed of the game ball rolling inside the receiving portion 331a.

Next, referring to FIG. 24, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a will be described. 24(a) to 24(c) are sectional views of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330. FIG. 24(a) to 24(c) illustrate transition states of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a. 24(a) to 24(c) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 21(c).

As shown in FIGS. 24(a) to 24(c), the game ball thrown to the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a rolls on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a due to the downward inclination toward the base side (back side). and rolls toward the base of the receiving portion 331a. At this time, as described above, the curved portion of the receiving portion 331a is positioned below the inner guide portion 331b1 of the first sensor 311b in the direction of gravity, so that the game ball flowing down from the inner guide portion 331b1 is received by the receiving portion 331a. It can collide with curved parts. As a result, the game ball flowing down in the direction of gravity can be displaced in the left-right direction. Therefore, the rolling motion of the game ball flowing down on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a can be caused not only to roll toward the base portion of the receiving portion 331a but also to roll in the left-right direction. It is possible to improve the interest of the player by showing it.

In addition, since the curved portion has higher rigidity than the flat surface, by making the curved portion the position where the game ball flows down to the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a, when the game ball falls to the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a, the receiving portion 331a can be suppressed from being damaged by the impact.

The rear member 350 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 25-27. 25(a) is a front view of the rear member 350, FIG. 25(b) is a rear view of the rear member 350, and FIG. 25(c) is a view taken along line XXVc-XXVc of FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of rear member 350. FIG. 26 is an exploded front perspective view of rear member 350, and FIG. 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of rear member 350. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the rear member 350 includes a rear main body portion 351 formed of a substantially trapezoidal plate-like body when viewed from the front, and an opening 351b opening in the front-rear direction at the central portion of the rear main body portion 351. A variable plate 352 arranged to be displaceable inside, and a winning prize in which the variable plate 352 is attached to the back body portion 351 in a manner sandwiching the variable plate 352, and a game ball is thrown into the inside of the variable plate 352 as the variable plate 352 is displaced. A member 353, a decorative member 354 attached to the prize winning member 353 and forming a ball throwing path of the game ball inside the prize winning member 353, and a light beam to the player side through the decorative member 354 and attached to the decorative member 354. a light-emitting member 355 that emits light, a solenoid 356 that applies a driving force to the variable plate 352, and a cover member 357 that is attached between the decorative member 354 via the solenoid 356 and holds the solenoid 356 so that it cannot fall off. is formed mainly with

The rear body portion 351 includes a standing portion 351a that protrudes in a U-shaped cross section toward the front side, an opening 351b that is formed inside the standing portion 351a and opens from the front to the back, and the lateral direction of the opening 351b. Bearing portions 352f that are positioned on both outer sides and hold a shaft portion 352a of a variable plate 352, which will be described later, and a game ball that opens from the front to the back of the opening 351b in the direction of gravity and is thrown from the opening 351b to the back side. and a first recess 351d and a second recess 351e recessed from the front toward the back at the lower end of the back main body 351 in the direction of gravity. .

The back body portion 351 is a member that causes a game ball rolling (thrown through the intermediate member 330) to roll on the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 (body portion 331) downward in the direction of gravity. It is attached to the intermediate member 330 with a space larger than the diameter of the game ball from the back side. As a result, the game ball can flow down between the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351 facing each other.

Further, the rear main body portion 351 is formed so that the external shape in a front view is substantially the same as or smaller than the external shape of the intermediate member 330 . As a result, the members are prevented from protruding outside the center frame 310 of the assembled movable ball-entering accessory device 300 in front view, and the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 is attached to the opening 60a of the base plate 60. The movable ball-entering accessory device 300 can be placed by simply inserting it from the front when wearing, and the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 can be easily attached to the base plate 60. - 特許庁

The erected portion 351a is formed in a U shape that opens downward when viewed from the front. The erected portion 351a includes a first erected portion 351a1 having a small width dimension between the opposed portions and a second erected portion 351a2 having a larger distance dimension between the opposed portions than the first erected portion 351a1.

The first upright portion 351a1 is set so that the distance dimension between the left and right sides facing each other is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the left and right sides facing the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330, and the left and right ends of the first standing portion 351a1 are set to the receiving portions 331a. It is disposed at a position opposed to the left and right ends in the front-rear direction. Also, the height position in the direction of gravity of the upper end of the first standing portion 351a1 is set to be substantially the same as the upper end of the receiving portion 331a. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 and is thrown can flow down between the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351, and the inside of the standing portion 351a. can flow down to

The second upright portion 351a2 is formed in connection with the lower end portion of the first upright portion 352a1 in the gravity direction. The dimension of the distance between the opposing second standing portions 351a2 is set to be substantially the same as the dimension of the longitudinal direction of the opening 351b. It is possible to suppress the game ball from flowing down in the direction outside. As a result, when the variable plate 352 is displaced, the game ball flowing down between the rear body portion 351 and the intermediate member 330 facing each other can be reliably thrown to the opening 351b.

The opening 351b is an opening for allowing a game ball flowing down between the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351 to be thrown to the back side of the back body portion 351. The width dimension in the hand direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, as described above, the opening 351b is formed between the left and right opposing second standing portions 351a2.

The connecting hole 351c is a hole through which a game ball passed through the inside of the opening 351b and sent to the back side of the back body portion is sent to the front side via a winning member 353 described later. It is positioned and formed with a rectangular opening that is larger than the diameter of the sphere. Two connecting holes 351c are arranged side by side in the left-right direction.

The first recessed portion 351d is a path along which a game ball sent from the connecting hole 351c to the front side of the back body portion 351 is guided by the upper surface of the inner guide portion of the intermediate member 330 described above and flows down. is positioned at the lower end in the direction of gravity of the , and recessed toward the rear side.

In addition, the first recessed portion 351d is positioned between the inner guide portion 331b1 and the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330 in a front view when the back body portion 351 (rear member 350) is arranged in the intermediate member 330. formed by Therefore, the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down between the inner guide portion 331b1 and the outer guide portion 331b2 facing each other can be displaced to the rear side. As a result, when the game ball thrown between the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351 facing each other flows down to the later-described variable unit 360, the flow-down speed in the direction of gravity can be slowed down. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown to the variable unit 360, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the variable unit 360 and bouncing, and the ball from the rear member 350 to the variable unit 360 can be stabilized.

The second recessed portion 351e is a path along which the game ball flowing down between the opposing intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 is guided by the upper surface of the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330 and flows down, and the left and right direction of the first recessed portion 351d It is located outside and recessed toward the rear side.

In addition, the second recessed portion 351e is positioned between the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330 and the erected wall 331c in a front view when the back body portion 351 (rear member 350) is arranged on the intermediate member 330. formed by Therefore, it is possible to displace the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down between the opposing outer guide portion 331b2 and the erected wall 331c to the rear side. As a result, when the game ball thrown between the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351 facing each other flows down to the later-described variable unit 360, the flow-down speed in the direction of gravity can be slowed down. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown to the variable unit 360, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the variable unit 360 and bouncing, and the ball from the rear member 359 to the variable unit 360 can be stabilized.

As described above, the variable plate 352 is a guide member for throwing the game ball flowing down between the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351 (rear member 350) into the opening 351b of the back body portion 351. It is disposed inside the opening 351b of the back body portion 351 in a rotatable state.

The variable plate 352 is formed from a transparent flexible material. The variable plate 352 includes a plate portion 352d which is disposed inside the opening 351b of the back main body portion 351 and which is formed into a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front. and a first shaft portion 352a which is rotatably supported and which protrudes radially outwardly from the shaft portion 352a and engages with the rear body portion 351 when the variable plate 352 is displaced to regulate the amount of displacement of the variable plate 352. It mainly includes a protrusion 352b and a second protrusion 352c that protrudes in a radial direction different from that of the first protrusion 352b and transmits a driving force of a solenoid 356 of a driving means, which will be described later.

The plate portion 352d is a plate-like body that guides the game ball that is rotationally displaced and flows down between the intermediate member 330 and the back main body portion 351 to the opening 351b. formed in

The plate portion 352d has a front portion 352d2 facing the intermediate member 330 before being displaced, and a bulging portion 352d1 bulging toward the intermediate member 330 from the end opposite to the rotation shaft (shaft portion 352a). Prepare. A detailed description of the bulging portion 352d1 and the front portion 352d2 will be given later.

The shaft portion 352a is a shaft portion on which the plate portion 352d is rotatably supported, and protrudes from one end of the plate portion 352d on the lower side in the direction of gravity. The shaft portion 352a is arranged inside the bearing portion 351f of the back body portion 351, and the winning member 353 described later is arranged from the back side, so that the shaft portion 352a is rotatable between the back body portion 351 and the winning member 353. retained. Thereby, the variable plate 352 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the back body portion 351 .

The first protrusions 352b are protrusions that, when the variable plate 352 is rotationally displaced, come into contact with the rear main body portion 351 to limit the amount of displacement of the variable plate 352 during rotation. formed to protrude. In addition, the projecting directions of the first projections 352b of the shaft portions 352a at both ends are set to be substantially the same when viewed in the axial direction of the shaft portions 352a.

Furthermore, one first projection 352b (in this embodiment, the first projection 352b on the right side in front view) is engaged with a transmission portion 356a of a solenoid 356, which will be described later. Thereby, the driving force of the solenoid 356 can be transmitted to the variable plate 352 . Therefore, the driving force of the solenoid 356 can rotate the variable plate 352 about the axis of the shaft portion 352a.

A second projection 352c is formed on the shaft portion 352a of one of the first projections 352b so as to project radially from the shaft portion 352a. When viewed in the axial direction of the shaft portion 352a, the first projection 352b and the second projection 352c are formed with a predetermined gap around the shaft, and the tip of the transmission portion 356a of the solenoid 356 is inserted into the gap. . As a result, the driving force is applied from the solenoid 356 and the transmission portion 356a is displaced, so that the variable plate 352 can be rotated around the axis of the shaft portion 252a. A detailed description of the operation of the variable plate 352 will be given later.

The prize-winning member 353 is a member that forms a path along which game balls thrown into the opening 351b of the back main body 351 by displacing the variable plate 352 flow down, and is connected to the opening 351b of the back main body 351. A hole 353a, a second detection hole 353b opening downward at the inner edge of the connecting hole 353a, a front side opening 353c having one end connected to the second detection hole 353b and the other end opening to the front side, and a rear side. A first irregular reflection portion 353d formed on the side, a through hole 353e through which the transmission portion 356a of the solenoid 356 is inserted, and an erected wall 353f erected from the edge of the first irregular reflection portion 353d. be done.

The connecting hole 353a is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the opening 351b of the back body portion 351 in a front view, and is formed at a position facing the opening 351b. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the opening 351b can be thrown into the connecting hole 353a.

The second detection hole 353b is a hole formed by a sensor that detects passage of the ball, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the ball. The second detection hole 353b is formed in the lower inner edge portion of the connecting hole 353a in the direction of gravity, and is formed so as to open in the direction of gravity. As a result, the game ball thrown into the connecting hole 353a can be passed through the second detection hole 353b and thrown, and the sensor detects the number of balls when passing through the second detection hole 353b. The number of balls passing through the opening 351b can be measured.

The front opening 353c is a hole for throwing a game ball sent to the second detection hole 353b into the connecting hole 351c of the back body portion 351, and one end of the opening is connected to the second detection hole 353b. The other end is connected to the connecting hole 351c of the back body portion 351 from the back side. Therefore, the game ball sent to the inside of the opening 351b of the back body portion 351 can pass through the inside of the front side opening 353c through the second detection hole 353b and be discharged from the connecting hole 351c of the back body portion 351.

The first irregular reflection portion 353d is an irregular reflection surface that diffusely reflects light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 described later and emits it forward. be. Light emitted from the LEDs 355a of the light emitting member 355 is made incident on a plurality of uneven surfaces, so that the direction of travel of the light emitted from the front side of the first irregular reflection portion 353d toward the player side is dispersed, and the first irregular reflection portion 353d can be illuminated efficiently.

The through-hole 353e is an opening through which the transmission portion 356a of the solenoid 356 is inserted from the back side to the front side, and is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape larger than the outer shape of the transmission portion 356a when viewed from the front. Penetrations are formed at opposing positions.

The standing wall 353f is a wall that prevents the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 from escaping to the outside. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 355a toward the first irregular reflection portion 353d can be prevented from escaping outward from the standing wall 353f.

The decorative member 354 is formed in a plate-like body that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and has substantially the same outer shape as the winning member 353 when viewed from the front. The decorative member 354 includes a second irregular reflection portion 354b formed on a surface facing a light emitting member 355, which will be described later, an opening 354a formed through a position facing a first irregular reflection portion 353d of the winning member 353, and a solenoid 356. It is mainly formed with a through hole 354c penetratingly formed at a position facing the transmission portion 356a.

The opening 354a is an opening for directly irradiating the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 to the first irregular reflection portion 353d of the prize winning member 353. The opening 354a has substantially the same rectangular outer shape as the first irregular reflection portion 353d when viewed from the front. It is opened and formed at a position facing the first irregular reflection portion 353d.

The second diffused reflection part 354b is a diffused reflection surface that diffusely reflects the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 arranged on the back side and emits it forward. Unevenness is formed. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 is caused to enter the plurality of irregularities, so that the direction of travel of the light emitted from the front side of the second irregular reflection portion 354b is dispersed, and the second irregular reflection portion 354b is efficiently displaced. It can illuminate well.

The through-hole 354c is an opening through which the transmission portion 356a of the solenoid 356 is inserted from the back side to the front side. Penetrations are formed at opposing positions.

The light emitting member 355 has an LED 355 a that emits light on the front side (the side facing the decorative member 354 ) and is attached to the back side of the decorative member 354 . As a result, light can be emitted to the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b.

The solenoid 356 has a transmission portion 356 a that transmits driving force to the variable plate 352 . As described above, the solenoid 356 is driving means for applying a rotational driving force to the variable plate 352. When electric power is applied, the transmission portion 356a is displaced in the direction of gravity.

The transmission part 356 a is inserted through the through hole 353 e of the winning member 353 and the through hole 354 c of the decorative member 354 and arranged between the first protrusion 352 b and the second protrusion 352 c of the variable plate 352 . Therefore, when the transmission portion 356a is displaced, the variable plate 352 is rotated around the axis of the shaft portion 352a.

Next, the displacement mode of the variable plate 352 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. FIGS. 28(a)-28(c) are cross-sectional views of rear member 350 taken along line XXVIII--XXVIII of FIG. 29(a) to 29(c) are cross-sectional views of the rear member 350. FIG. 28(a) and 29(a) show the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state, and FIGS. 28(b) and 29(b) show the variable plate 352 in the second rotation state. c) and FIG. 29(c) respectively illustrate the variable plate 352 in the third rotational state. 29(a) to 29(c) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 25(c).

As shown in FIG. 28(a), in the first rotation state in which the transmission portion 356a of the solenoid 356 is positioned downward in the direction of gravity, the transmission portion 356a contacts one side of the second projection 352c of the variable plate 352 and The other side of the two projections 352c and the back side of the back body portion 351 are brought into contact with each other. That is, the second projection 352c is sandwiched between the transmission portion 356a and the rear body portion 351. As shown in FIG. As a result, the variable plate 352 can be prevented from being wobbly and rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 352a.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the variable plate 352 in the first rotating state has the bulging portion 352d1 positioned above the shaft portion 352a in the gravitational direction, and the front portion 352d2 is the opening of the back body portion 351. As shown in FIG. 351b is covered (closed). In this case, the shortest distance dimension L1 between the upper end face of the opening 351b in the gravity direction and the variable plate 352 is set smaller than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the game ball thrown between the intermediate member 330 and the back main body portion 351 is not thrown into the opening 351b, and flows down in front of the variable plate 352. As shown in FIG.

In addition, in the first rotation state, the front portion 352d2 is tilted forward as it separates from the shaft portion 352a, and the tip portion of the bulging portion 352d1 is positioned on the front plane of the back body portion 351. .

28(a) and 29(a), electric power is applied to the solenoid 356, the transmission portion 356a is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, and the transmission portion 356a is displaced by half of the total displacement. In the second rotation state shown in 28(b) and 29(b), the transmission portion 356a contacts the first projection 352b of the variable plate 352 to rotate the first projection 352b around the axis of the shaft portion 352a. As a result, the variable plate 352 is rotated around the axis of the shaft portion 352a.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), in the variable plate 352 in the second rotation state, the bulge portion 352d1 is positioned on the front side with respect to the shaft portion 352a, and the front portion 352d2 is inclined upward toward the front side. is made smaller than in the first rotation state. In this case, the shortest distance dimension L2 between the upper end surface of the opening 351b in the gravity direction and the variable plate 352 is set smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

28(b) and 29(b), power continues to be applied to the solenoid 356, the transmission portion 356a is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, and the transmission portion 356a is displaced to the end. In the third rotation state shown in 28(c) and 29(c), the transmission portion 356a contacts the first projection 352b of the variable plate 352 to further rotate the first projection 352b around the axis of the shaft portion 352a. As a result, the variable plate 352 is further rotated around the axis of the shaft portion 352a than in the second rotation state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28(c), in the third rotation state, the transmitting portion 356a and one end of the first projection 352b are in contact with each other, and the intermediate member 330 and the other end of the first projection 352b are in contact with each other. be. That is, the first projection 352b is sandwiched between the rear body portion 351 and the transmission portion 356a. As a result, the variable plate 352 can be prevented from being wobbly and rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 352a.

As shown in FIG. 29(c), in the variable plate 352 in the third rotation state, the bulging portion 352d1 is located on the front side with respect to the shaft portion 352a. In this case, the shortest distance dimension L3 between the upper end face of the opening 351b in the gravity direction and the variable plate 352 is set larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the game ball thrown between the intermediate member 330 and the back main body portion 351 is thrown into the opening 351b.

In addition, in the third rotation state, the opposite surface of the front surface portion 352d2 is inclined upward with increasing distance from the shaft portion 352a. Therefore, a game ball thrown upward from the plate portion 352 d can be thrown inside the opening 351 b of the back body portion 351 .

Therefore, the distance between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the light emitting means is made larger than the distance between the second irregular reflection portion 354b and the light emitting means, and the space between the variable plate 352 and the second irregular reflection portion 354b faces the game surface. Since it is the first flow-down path of the sphere, it is possible to reduce the size of the unit composed of the variable plate 352, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b. That is, the space between the variable plate 352 and the second irregular reflection portion 354b, which are formed in order to change the aspect of the light visually recognized by the player, is used as the first flow-down path of the game ball, thereby making the dead space effective. There is no need to secure a separate space for the flow-down route. Therefore, the size of the unit can be reduced accordingly.

30 and 31, a detailed description of intermediate member 330 and rear member 350 will now be provided. 30(a) is a front view of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350, and FIG. 30(b) is a side view of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350. FIG. 31(a) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 taken along line XXXIa-XXXIa of FIG. 30(a), and FIG. 31(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view of member 330 and rear member 350;

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the distance dimension L4 between the LED 355a and the second irregular reflection portion 354b is set smaller than the distance dimension L5 between the LED 355a and the first irregular reflection portion 353d (L4 <L5). Also, the variable plate 352 is arranged in the light transmission direction of the second irregular reflection portion 354b.

Here, a game machine is known which includes a displacement member (variable plate 352) displaceably disposed at a position visible to the player and switching the flow path of the game ball according to the displaced position. In this case, by arranging the displacement member on the front side of the transmissive member made of a transparent flexible material and irradiating the light from the back side of the transmissive member, the player moves the displacement member along with the light transmitted through the transmissive member. There is also known a technique of visually recognizing the displacement member and focusing attention on the displacement member. However, in the conventional technology described above, since the displacement member is formed of a non-transmissive material that does not transmit light, the region (area) of the light visible to the player is reduced by the size of the displacement member. Performance effects are hindered.

In response to this, by forming the displacement member (variable plate 352) from a transparent flexible material, not only the transmission member but also the light transmitted through the displacement member can be visually recognized by the player. A technique for securing a region (area) was developed (unknown at the time of filing). However, it has been found that when the displacement member is formed of a transparent flexible material, it is difficult for the player to identify the position of the displacement member.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a substrate member (light emitting member 355) on which one or a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 355a) capable of emitting light is mounted with the light emitting surface facing the front side; A first transparent member (first irregular reflection portion 353d) and a second transparent member (second irregular reflection portion 354b) are provided on the front side of the substrate member and formed of a light-transmitting material, and the displacement member is transparent and flexible. and is disposed on the front side of the second transmission member, and the distance between the second transmission member and the substrate member is different from the distance between the first transmission member and the substrate member. Since it is set, it is possible to allow the player to easily identify the position of the displacement member while ensuring the region (area) of the light to be visually recognized by the player.

That is, since the distance from the light emitting means (LED 355a) differs between the first transmitting member (first diffuse reflection portion 353d) and the second transmitting member (second irregular reflecting portion 354b), the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member are separated from each other. It is possible to vary the mode of light diffusion during transmission. Therefore, the mode of light transmitted through the first transmissive member and visually recognized by the player can be made different from the mode of light transmitted through the second transmissive member and visually recognized by the player. As a result, the player can easily identify the position of the displacement member (variable plate 352) disposed on the front side of the second transmission member.

Also, here, the light emitting member 355, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b formed of a transparent flexible material on the light irradiation side of the light emitting member 355 (LED 355a), and flowing down the game area In a gaming machine provided with a variable plate 352 that guides a game ball to either the first ball throwing route KR1 or the second ball throwing route KR2, the second light emitting member is used to make it easier for the player to recognize the variable plate 352. , and change the color of the light emitted from the second light emitting member or change the angle of irradiation so that the position of the variable plate 352 can be easily recognized by the player. Therefore, there is a problem that the number of parts increases due to the provision of the second light emitting member, and the manufacturing process becomes complicated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the distance L4 between the light emitting member 355 (LED 355a) and the second irregular reflection portion 354b is different from the distance L5 between the LED 355a and the first irregular reflection portion 353d. , and the variable plate 352 is arranged in front of the second irregular reflection portion 354b. As a result, the form (amount) of the light emitted from the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b can be made different, so that the visibility of the variable plate 352 from the player can be improved.

That is, the farther the first irregular reflection portion 353d is arranged from the light emitting member 355, the more the light from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 diffuses outward, and the less the amount of transmitted light is. Since the second irregular reflection portion 354b is arranged at different distances from the light emitting means, the brightness of the light transmitted through the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b is determined by the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b. It can be made different by the second irregular reflection portion 354b. Therefore, the player can recognize the variable plate 352 arranged on the light transmission side by the brightness of the light.

Therefore, the player can be made to recognize the variable plate 352 and the surroundings of the variable plate 352 by the light emitted from the one light emitting member 355 without providing a new second light emitting member. As a result, there is no need to provide a new second light-emitting member, the number of parts can be suppressed from increasing, and the manufacturing process can be simplified.

Furthermore, since unevenness is formed on the rear side of the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b, the light emitted from the LED 355a and transmitted through the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b is It can be easily diffused. In this case, since the distance from the LED 355a differs between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b, the diffusion of the light transmitted through the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the diffusion of the light transmitted through the second irregular reflection portion 354b can be different from the aspect of Therefore, the difference between the form of light transmitted through the first irregular reflection portion 353d and visually recognized by the player and the form of light transmitted through the second irregular reflection portion 354b and visually recognized by the player can be made larger. As a result, the player can easily specify the position of the variable plate 352 arranged on the front side of the second irregular reflection portion 354b.

Further, since the unevenness formed on the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the unevenness formed on the second irregular reflection portion 354b are substantially the same, in a state where the LED 355a does not emit light, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 353d It is possible for the player to visually recognize the second irregular reflection portion 354b (the second irregular reflection portion 354b that is visually recognized through the variable plate 352) as having the same appearance. That is, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b, which have different appearances (light modes) after the LED 355a emits light, can have the same appearance before the LED 355a emits light. The appearance (mode of light) of the second diffused reflection portion 354b can be enhanced.

Even if the unevenness is the same between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b, the distance from the LED 355a differs between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b. The mode of diffusion of light when passing through each of the second irregular reflection portions 354b can be made different. That is, the mode of light transmitted through the first irregular reflection portion 353d and visually recognized by the player can be made different from the mode of light transmitted through the second irregular reflection portion 354b and visually recognized by the player.

Furthermore, since the variable plate 352 can be arranged at a position that is substantially flush with the first diffused reflection portion 353d, the variable plate 352 and the first diffused reflection portion 353d are visually recognized integrally, and light is emitted from the LED 355a. The region (area) of the light to be visually recognized can be visually recognized as a larger region.

An upright wall 353f standing on the side of the decorative member 354 is formed at the edge of the first diffused reflection portion 353d of the winning member 353, and the tip surface of the upright wall 353f on the lower end side of the decorative member 354 It is disposed in contact with one end of the second irregular reflection portion 354b. As a result, the light from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 that passes through the second irregular reflection portion 354b is suppressed from entering the first irregular reflection portion 353d, and the brightness of the light from the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b is adjusted. can be made larger.

That is, of the light transmitted through the second irregular reflection portion 354b arranged near the light emitting member 355, the light directed toward the first irregular reflection portion 353d arranged far from the light emitting member 355 enters the standing wall 353f. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the light to enter the first irregular reflection portion 353d, and the brightness of the light of the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b can be increased. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the variable plate 352 and the surroundings of the variable plate 352 by the light emitted from one light emitting means.

In other words, since the standing wall 353f connecting the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b is provided, one of the first irregular reflection portion 353d or the second irregular reflection portion 354b (the distance between the LED 355a and the LED 355a is The standing wall 353ff prevents the light transmitted through the first irregular reflection portion 353d or the second irregular reflection portion 354b (the one with the larger distance from the LED 355a) from entering between the LED 355a and the LED 355a. can be suppressed. As a result, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b can be easily made different in the mode (in particular, brightness) of the light transmitted through them and visually recognized by the player. As a result, the player can easily specify the position of the displacement member arranged on the front side of the second irregular reflection portion 354b.

In addition, since unevenness is not formed on the rear surface of the standing wall 353f, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b (the second irregular reflection portion 354b visible through the variable plate 352) and the vertical reflection portion 354b are not formed. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the external appearance of the installation wall 353f as a different appearance. As a result, the vertical wall 353f can be used to clearly define the boundary between the first transmitting member and the second irregular reflection portion 354b. The position can be easily specified by the player.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the distance between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the LED 355a is made larger than the distance between the second irregular reflection portion 354b and the LED 355a, and the first irregular reflection portion 353d is arranged on the upper side in the gravitational direction. damage can be suppressed.

That is, on the side where the distance to the LED 355a is small (narrow), the temperature in the space increases due to the heat generated from the LED 355a, and the risk of damaging the LED 355a increases. On the other hand, the air whose temperature is raised in the space on the side where the distance between the LED 355a is small (narrow) is replaced with the space located above in the direction of gravity (that is, the distance between the LED 355a is large (wide) ) side space) to escape. As a result, damage to the LED 355a on the side where the distance is small (narrow) can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a space is formed through the opening 354a of the decorative member 354 between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the light emitting member 355 (LED 355a) facing each other. As a result, the heat associated with the irradiation of light from the LEDs 355a of the light-emitting member 355 can be released to the space between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the LEDs 355a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent heat from accumulating in the light emitting member 355 . As a result, damage to the light emitting member 355 can be suppressed.

That is, the first irregular reflection portion 353d has a larger distance between the light emitting member 355 than the second irregular reflection portion 354b. can be done easily. As a result, the air between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the light emitting member 355 can be moved to release the heat of the light emitting member 355 to the outside. In addition, since the first irregular reflection portion 353d, which has a large distance between the light emitting member 355 and the opposed light emitting member 355, is arranged on the upper side in the direction of gravity, the air warmed by the light emitting member 355 can be efficiently heated. It is possible to efficiently cool the light emitting member 355 by discharging it to the outside. As a result, damage to the light emitting member 355 can be suppressed.

Since the variable plate 352 has the bulging portion 352d1, the light passing through the variable plate 352 is shaded, and the shift of the shadow of the light makes it possible for the player to recognize that the variable plate 352 has been displaced.

That is, since the bulging portion 352d1 is formed to bulge in a semicircular shape toward the light transmission side, it is possible to partially change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the variable plate 352. FIG. As a result, of the light transmitted through the variable plate 352 and emitted toward the player, the amount of light emitted from the bulging portion 352d1 can be reduced, and the light transmitted through the variable plate can be shaded. . In addition, since the bulging portion 352d1 is formed at the far end of the variable plate 352 from the shaft portion 352a, it is possible to change the shadow of the light emitted to the player side as the variable plate 352 is displaced. . As a result, the player can recognize the displacement of the variable plate 352 by visually recognizing the displacement of the shadow of the light emitted from the variable plate 352 .

In other words, the variable plate 352 is formed as a plate-like body rotatably supported on the base end side and formed with a bulging portion 352d1 having an increased plate thickness on the distal end side. Of the light that is transmitted and visually recognized by the player, the light that is transmitted through the swelling portion 352d1 and is visually recognized by the player is the light that is transmitted through portions other than the swelling portion 352d1 and is visually recognized by the player. can be different from In addition, as the variable plate 352 rotates around the base end side, the position of light that is visually recognized through the tip end side (the bulging portion 352d1) can be displaced. In other words, the displacement (rotation) of the variable plate 352 can be easily recognized by the player by utilizing the fact that the position of the light that is visually recognized through the front end side (bulging portion 352d1) of the variable plate 352 is displaced. can.

Further, since the bulging portion 352d1 is formed to have a curved arc shape in cross section, the bulging portion 352d1 functions as a lens (that is, the light incident on the bulging portion 352d1 is refracted to diverge or diverge). It can be converged (in this embodiment, by converging the light incident on the bulging portion 352d1, the light can be visually recognized as linear light with increased light intensity (brightness)). As a result, of the light that passes through the variable plate 352 and is visually recognized by the player, the light that is transmitted through the bulging portion 352d1 and is visually recognized by the player, and the light that is transmitted through the bulging portion 352d1 and other portions other than the bulging portion 352d1 are transmitted. The difference from the light visually recognized by the player can be made clearer. As a result, the player can easily recognize the displacement (rotation) motion of the variable plate 352 .

The base portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is set at a height position in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 31(a)) that is approximately the same as the approximately center position in the direction of gravity of the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state. be done.

The first ball-throwing path KR1 is connected to the third ball-throwing path KR3 inside the second concave portion 351e of the back main body portion 351 arranged laterally outside of the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330. As shown in FIG. The second ball-throwing path KR2 is connected to a fourth ball-throwing path KR4 formed between the inner guide portion 331b1 and the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330 facing each other.

Next, game balls thrown from the first ball-throwing route KR1 to the fourth ball-throwing route KR4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 43. FIG. 32-34 are cross-sectional views of intermediate member 330 and rear member 350. FIG.

32 to 34 and 38 to 40 correspond to the cross section of FIG. 31(a), and FIGS. 35 to 37 and 41 to 43 correspond to the cross section of FIG. 31(b). 32 to 34 and 35 to 37 show the transition states of the game ball thrown through the first ball throwing route KR1 and the third ball throwing route KR3, and FIGS. 38 to 40 and 41 to 43. , transition states of a game ball thrown through the second ball throwing route KR2 and the fourth ball throwing route KR4 are illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 35, when the variable plate 352 of the rear member 350 is in the first rotation state, the game ball thrown by rolling on the upper portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is the first thrown ball. The ball is thrown on the route KR1. That is, the game ball that rolls on the upper portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 and is thrown flows down into the gap between the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351 facing each other.

From the state shown in FIGS. 32 and 35, the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 flows down to the upper surface of the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330, and as shown in FIGS. , and is thrown to the third throwing path KR3. As described above, the outer guide portion 331b2 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the central portion in the left-right direction toward the outer side, so that a game ball flowing down the left side of the first ball throwing path KR1 in a front view is the left side. A game ball that is thrown to the third ball path KR3 and flows down the right side of the first ball path KR1 is thrown to the third ball path KR3 on the right side.

From the state shown in FIGS. 33 and 36, the game ball thrown to the third ball-throwing route KR3 flows down the third ball-throwing route KR3 as shown in FIGS. is thrown to the variable unit 360.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 41, when the variable plate 352 of the rear member 350 is in the third rotation state, the game ball thrown by rolling on the upper portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is the second thrown ball. The ball is thrown on route KR2. That is, the game ball thrown by rolling on the upper portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 rolls on the upper portion of the variable plate 352 of the rear member 350 and is thrown to the second ball path KR2.

From the state shown in FIGS. 38 and 41, the game ball flowing down the third throwing path KR3 passes through the inside of the second detection hole 353b of the winning member 353, and as shown in FIGS. 353c and is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4.

In this case, as described above, the base portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 has a height position in the gravitational direction (vertical direction in FIG. 31(a)) that is approximately the center position in the gravitational direction of the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state. Since they are set at substantially the same height position, the first ball throwing path KR1 that flows down between the intermediate member 330 and the back main body 351 and the second ball throwing path KR2 that causes the ball to be thrown inside the opening 351b of the back main body 351. The distance dimension in the gravitational direction of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 when changing the path in the displaced state of the variable plate 352 can be reduced.

That is, when the game ball rolling on the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is distributed to the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2 by the variable plate 352 disposed on the back side, the variable plate 331a is variable in the third state. By lowering the end of the plate 352 farther from the shaft portion 352a than the base portion of the receiving portion 331a, the disposing position of the variable plate 352 can be increased in the direction of gravity. As a result, the distance dimension in the direction of gravity between the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 can be reduced.

From the state shown in FIGS. 39 and 42, the game ball thrown to the fourth ball-throwing route KR4 moves along the upper surface of the inner guide portion 331b1 of the intermediate member 330 of the fourth ball-throwing route KR4 as shown in FIGS. The ball rolls and is thrown to a rotating ball section 370 which will be described later. In addition, as described above, the inner guide portion 331b1 is formed so as to slope downward from the central portion in the left-right direction toward the outside. The ball that passes through the second detection hole 353b and is discharged from the left front opening 353c is thrown to the left fourth ball path KR4, and the ball that flows down the right side of the second ball path KR2 (the ball that flows down the right side of the second ball path KR2) 353b and discharged from the right front opening 353c) is thrown to the right fourth throw path KR4.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 51, the game ball rolled on the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 and thrown to the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2 will be described. 44 and 45 are cross-sectional views of intermediate member 330 and rear member 350. FIG. 44 and 45 correspond to the cross section of FIG. 31(a).

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the game ball that is thrown by rolling on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 rolls to the rear side and comes into contact with the variable plate 352 to reach the first ball-throwing path KR1. is thrown to

In this case, as described above, the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state is arranged such that the front portion 352d2 is tilted forward as the front portion 352d2 is separated from the shaft portion 352a. The game ball to be thrown can be easily made to collide with the front part 352d2 and flow downward.

In addition, since the portion of the bulging portion 352d1 connected to the front portion 351d2 is positioned above the base end of the receiving portion 331a by the radius of the game ball, when the ball rolls vigorously on the receiving portion 331a, can cause the ball to collide with the bulging portion 352d1 and flow downward. At this time, damage to the plate portion 352d can be suppressed by causing a game ball with a relatively strong momentum to collide with the bulging portion 352d1 that bulges from the plate portion 352d. In other words, when the rolling speed of the ball is relatively high, damage to the plate portion 352d can be prevented by causing the ball to collide with the bulging portion 352d1, which has high rigidity.

Next, referring to FIGS. 46 to 51, when the variable plate 352 is displaced from the first rotation state to the third rotation state, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 and is thrown. will be explained. 46-51 are cross-sectional views of intermediate member 330 and rear member 350. FIG. 46 to 48 and 49 to 51 correspond to the cross section of FIG. 31(a). 46 to 48 and 49 to 51 illustrate the rolling state of the game ball when the variable plate 352 is displaced from the first rotation state to the third rotation state.

Here, as described above, if the end portion of the variable plate 352 far from the shaft portion 352a is made lower than the base portion of the receiving portion 331a in the third state, the base portion of the receiving portion 331a and the variable plate 352 that is being displaced will be displaced. There was a possibility that a game ball could be caught between them and cause a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 49, the base of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is in the first rotation state at the height position in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 31(a)). Since the height position is set at substantially the same height position as the substantially center position of the variable plate 352 in the direction of gravity of the variable plate 352, the game ball and the bulging portion when the game ball is sandwiched between the variable plate 352 in the middle of displacement and the receiving portion 331a. The contact position with 352d1 can be either the front side or the back side of the game ball divided by the imaginary line S2 connecting the base end of the receiving part 331a and the center of the game ball, and the ball is on the receiving part. Sandwiching between the base of 331a and variable plate 352 can be suppressed.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 46 to 48, when the front side of the game ball divided by the imaginary line S2 and the bulging portion 352d1 abut, the connection side of the bulging portion 352d1 with the front portion 352d2 is the game ball. collide with the ball. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 48, the ball can be thrown to the first ball path KR1 using the curved surface of the bulging portion 352d1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, when the back side of the game ball divided by the imaginary line S2 abuts against the bulging portion 352d1, the side of the bulging portion 352d1 away from the shaft portion 352a It abuts against a curved surface. Thereby, the game ball about to fall from the receiving portion 331a can be pushed back to the front side by utilizing the displacement of the variable plate 352.例文帳に追加As a result, the variable plate 352 is displaced to the third rotation state, and the ball can be guided to the second ball throwing path KR2.

A detailed description of the rear base 390 will now be provided with reference to Figures 52-54. 52(a) is a front view of the rear base 390, and FIG. 52(b) is a side view of the rear base 390. FIG. 53 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear base 390. FIG. 54 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear base 390. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the rear base 390 includes a plate-shaped rear plate 391 arranged on the rear side, and a rear plate 391 arranged at one end of the rear plate 391 on the lower side in the gravitational direction. a holding member 392 for holding a solenoid 397 of the drive means, two annular members 394 fastened to both ends of the holding member 392, and stoppers arranged outside between the opposing two annular members 394. A portion 396 is mainly provided.

The back plate 391 is formed of a plate-like body that is substantially trapezoidal when viewed from the front. The rear plate 391 is a plate that covers the rear side of the rear member 350 described above, and is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the front view of the rear member 350 .

The solenoid 397 is driving means for applying a driving force to a stopper portion 396 to be described later, and includes a transmission portion 397 a for transmitting the driving force to the stopper portion 396 . Also, the solenoids 397 are arranged on the rear side of the two stopper portions 396 respectively.

The transmission portion 397a is a protrusion that is displaced in the direction of gravity when power is supplied to the solenoid 397, and is inserted between a first engagement portion 396a and a second engagement portion 396b of the stopper portion 396, which will be described later. .

The holding member 392 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes recesses 392a recessed on the front side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and openings 392b formed through the recesses 392a from the front to the back. It is formed.

The recess 392 a is a recess into which the solenoid 397 is inserted, and is recessed in the outer shape of the solenoid 397 . Therefore, by attaching the holding member 392 to the back plate 391 after inserting the solenoid 397 into the recess 392a, the solenoid 397 can be held so as not to fall off.

The opening 392b is an opening through which the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 is inserted forward, and is formed in a vertically long rectangular opening larger than the transmission portion 397a. Therefore, when the solenoid 397 is arranged inside the concave portion 392a, the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 protrudes to the front side.

The annular member 394 is a ball-throwing portion to which a game ball is thrown from the third ball-throwing path KR3, is formed in a substantially annular shape in a side view, and has a shaft support hole 394a penetrating through the axis. The shaft support hole 394a is a hole for rotatably holding a shaft B1, which will be described later, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft B1.

The shaft B1 is formed in a columnar shape, one end is inserted into the shaft support hole 394a of the annular member 394 as described above, and the other end is externally fitted into the shaft hole 396c of the stopper portion 396 described later. Therefore, the shaft B1 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the shaft support hole 394a as the stopper portion 396 is rotationally displaced.

The stopper portion 396 is a ball throwing path blocking means that disables ball throwing on a ball throwing path KR6 of the variable unit 460, which will be described later, by being rotationally displaced. placed outside.

The stopper portion 396 includes a substantially circular shaft hole 396c that penetrates the annular member 394 in the axial direction, and a first engaging portion 396a and a second engaging portion that protrude radially outward from the axis of the shaft hole 396c. A portion 396b is mainly provided.

The first engaging portion 396a is a protrusion that engages with the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 described above to transmit the driving force of the solenoid 397, and is positioned above the transmission portion 397a in the direction of gravity. .

The second engaging portion 396b, like the first engaging portion 396a, is a protrusion that engages with the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 to transmit the driving force of the solenoid 397, and is downward in the gravity direction of the transmission member 397b. placed on the side.

The first engaging portion 396a and the second engaging portion 396b are formed with a predetermined gap around the axis of the shaft hole 396c. It is set larger than the vertical dimension of the portion 397a. Accordingly, the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 can be inserted between the first engaging portion 396a and the second engaging portion 396b to transmit the driving force to the stopper portion 396. As shown in FIG.

Next, transition of the stopper portion 396 will be described with reference to FIG. 55(a) to 55(c) are cross-sectional views of the rear base 390 taken along line LV-LV in FIG. 55(a) to 55(c) illustrate transition states of the stopper portion 396. As shown in FIG. Also, in FIG. 55, the end far from the shaft hole 396c of the stopper portion 396 will be described with reference to end A2.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), in the first blocking state in which the transmitting portion 397a of the solenoid 397 is positioned downward, the transmitting portion 397a contacts the second engaging portion 396b of the stopper portion 396, and the stopper portion 396 is closed. is displaced upward (in FIG. 55(a), the end A2 rotates clockwise about the axis of the shaft hole 396c). As a result, the end A2 is positioned above the shaft hole 396c in the direction of gravity.

55(a), the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 is displaced upward, and the transmission portion 397a shown in FIG. The portion 397a comes into contact with the first engaging portion 396a of the stopper portion 396, and the end portion A2 of the stopper portion 396 is displaced downward (in FIG. A driving force is applied in the direction of left rotation. As a result, the height of the end A2 in the gravity direction is closer to that of the shaft hole 396c than in the first blocked state.

From the state shown in FIG. 55(b), the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 is displaced further upward, and in the third blocking state in which the transmission portion 397a shown in FIG. 55(c) is displaced to the terminal end, the transmission portion 397a Contacting the first engaging portion 396a of the stopper portion 396, the end portion A2 of the stopper portion 396 is displaced downward (in FIG. 55(b), the end portion A2 rotates counterclockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 396c). A driving force is applied in the direction. In this case, the end A2 is displaced to a height position substantially equal to the height of the axis of the shaft hole 396c in the direction of gravity.

On the other hand, when shifting from the third blocking state to the first blocking state, the transmitting portion 397a of the solenoid 397 pushes down the second engaging portion 396b, thereby pushing up the tip portion A1 around the axis of the shaft hole 396c. be done.

Next, the body portion 380 of the variable unit 360 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. FIG. 56(a) is a front view of the variable unit 360, and FIG. 56(b) is a top view of the variable unit 360. FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the main body portion 380 of the variable unit 360. FIG. FIG. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the body portion 380 of the variable unit 360. FIG.

The variable unit 360 includes a main body 380 having a path for throwing the game ball thrown from the third ball-throwing path KR3 and the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 to the front side, and a rotating rotating body that attracts the game ball to move the game ball. It is mainly formed with a rolling ball portion 370 for throwing.

The body portion 380 is arranged on one side of the back surface of the center frame 310 on the lower side in the direction of gravity, and is visible to the player through the center opening of the center frame 310 (see FIG. 8). The body portion 380 includes an upper surface base 381 on which a rolling surface for game balls is formed, a first lower surface base 383 arranged to face the upper surface base 381, an upper surface base 381 and a first lower surface base 383. A V winning member 382 whose one end is pivotally supported and displaceably arranged between, a first driving motor M1 for applying a driving force to the V winning member 382, and a driving force of the first driving motor M1. A first transmission means 384 that transmits to the V winning member 382, a distribution section 389 that is rotatably disposed on the main body section 380, a second drive motor M2 that applies a driving force to the distribution section 389, and the A second transmission means 387 for transmitting the driving force of the second drive motor M2 to the distribution portion 389 is mainly provided.

As described above, the upper base 381 is a plate member having a rolling surface on which game balls thrown from the third ball-throwing path KR3 and the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 are thrown. It is formed. The upper surface base 381 includes two first rolling portions 381a that are recessed from the back side to the front side, a standing portion 381b that surrounds the back side of the first rolling portions 381a, and A second rolling portion 381c branched from the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rolling portion 381a and recessed, and a second rolling portion 381c formed at a position sandwiching the rotating bodies 372R and 372L on the front side of the second rolling portion 381c. a third rolling portion 381d, a fourth rolling portion 381e formed adjacent to the third rolling portion 381d and connected to the first rolling portion 381a, and a base side of the second rolling portion 381c. It is mainly formed with a shaft support hole 381f that opens in the direction of dynamic force at a position sandwiching the first rolling portion 381a.

The first rolling portion 381a is a ball-throwing path through which a game ball thrown on the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 is thrown, and the first rolling part 381a extends from the back side end to which the game ball is thrown from the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 toward the front side. sloped downwards. As a result, a fifth ball-throwing route KR5 is formed in which a game ball that is thrown through the fourth ball-throwing route KR4 is thrown to the front side.

Further, as described above, the fourth throwing path KR4 is split into two in the left-right direction, and the first rolling portions 381a are formed below the two fourth throwing paths KR4 in the gravitational direction. As a result, each fourth ball throwing route KR4 is connected to each fifth ball throwing route KR5.

The two first rolling portions 381a extend toward the front side, and merge before being connected to the fourth rolling portion 381e to form one rolling surface.

The upright portion 381b is a wall that guides the game ball thrown from the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 to the first rolling portion 381a. is disposed in contact with the guide portion 330b. As a result, the game ball flowing down the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 can be reliably thrown to the fifth ball-throwing path KR5 of the first rolling portion 381a.

The second rolling portion 381c is a surface extending outward from the upper base 381 from a substantially central position of the first rolling portion 381a extending from the back side to the front side. , and is inclined downward toward the outer side of the upper base 381 . Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the upper portion of the first rolling portion 381a and is thrown to the front side can collide with the distributing portion 389, which will be described later, and can be thrown to the second rolling portion 381c.

In addition, since the second rolling portion 381c is formed to be inclined downward toward the outside in the left-right direction as described above, the game ball thrown to the second rolling portion 381c is The ball is thrown by rolling in the direction of separation. That is, the second rolling portion 381c forms a sixth throwing path KR6 along which the ball is thrown.

The second rolling portion 381c is formed to have a recessed shape at the center position in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction, so that the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c is less likely to swing. As a result, the game ball thrown through the sixth ball path KR6 can be stabilized.

The third rolling portion 381d is a surface for receiving game balls thrown by rotating bodies 372R and 372L, which will be described later. It is formed with a downward slope toward Therefore, game balls thrown from the rotating bodies 372R and 372L to the upper surface of the third rolling portion 381d roll on the upper surface of the third rolling portion 381d and are thrown to the fourth rolling portion 381e. That is, the third rolling portion 381d forms a seventh ball throwing path KR7 for throwing the game ball to the fourth rolling portion 381e.

The fourth rolling portion 381e is an inclined surface for dropping the game ball rolled on the third rolling portion 381d and the first rolling portion 381a to the front side. It is formed at a position lower than the first rolling portion 381a in the gravity direction, and is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side. Thereby, the game ball thrown from the third rolling portion 381d and the first rolling portion 381a is smoothly rolled on the upper surface of the fourth rolling portion 381e, and rolled to the front side of the fourth rolling portion 381e. can be moved. That is, the fourth rolling portion 381e forms an eighth ball throwing path KR8 through which game balls thrown from the first rolling portion 381a and the third rolling portion 381d flow down to the front side of the main body portion 380.

The shaft support hole 381f is formed to penetrate in the direction of gravity at an intermediate position between the two second rolling portions 381c formed on both sides of the main body portion 380 .

The V winning member 382 is a ball receiving portion that throws part of the game ball thrown forward from the fourth rolling portion 381e of the upper base 381 into the inside of the V winning member 382. It is formed in a box-like body with the base 381 side open. The V-winning member 382 mainly includes a shaft portion 382c that protrudes downward in the direction of gravity, and a curved portion 382b that protrudes in a semicircular shape around the shaft portion 382c.

The shaft portion 382c is a shaft portion that is connected to a part of the transmission means for transmitting the driving force from the first drive motor M1, and extends downward in the direction of gravity from the bottom surface of the V winning member 382 that is formed in a substantially box shape. formed to protrude. Therefore, the V winning member 382 can be rotationally displaced about the shaft portion 382c by applying the driving force from the first driving motor M1.

The curved portion 382b is a projecting portion that prevents a gap from being formed on the front side of the main body portion 380 when the V winning member 382 rotates about the shaft portion 382c. is formed to protrude in a circle around the axis of the shaft portion 382c.

The first lower surface base 383 is provided to cover the lower surface of the upper surface base 381, and has a concave portion 383a that is recessed downward in the direction of gravity at a part of the front side.

The recess 383a is a recess that forms an opening for allowing the V winning member 382 to protrude from between the upper surface base 381 and the first lower surface base 383, and is a recess that is larger than the height dimension of the V winning member 382 in the direction of gravity. set to depth. As a result, when the V winning member 382 is arranged between the upper surface base 381 and the first lower surface base 383, a part of the V winning member 382 can protrude through the recess 383a.

The first transmission means 384 is composed of a first gear 384a connected to the first drive motor M1 and a second gear 384b connected to the shaft support hole 381f of the V winning member 382. As shown in FIG. In addition, the first transmission means 384 is covered and held by a cover plate 385 arranged to face the first lower surface base 383 .

The first gear 384a is formed in a circular shape and has gear teeth 384a1 engraved on its outer peripheral surface. The second gear 384b is formed in a substantially fan shape when viewed from above. The second gear 384b has gear teeth 384b1 that engage with the first gear 384a on its outer peripheral surface, and a through hole 384b2 penetrating in the gravitational direction is formed on the axial side of the gear teeth 384b1.

The through hole 384b2 is a hole that fits over the shaft portion 382c of the V winning member 382, and is formed with an inner diameter that is substantially the same as or smaller than the diameter of the shaft portion 382c. Therefore, when the first drive motor M1 is rotated, the driving force is transmitted from the first gear 384a to the second gear 384b, and the shaft portion 382c fitted on the shaft portion 382c of the second gear 384b is rotated. The winning member 382 is rotated.

The distributing portion 389 mainly includes a shaft portion 389a that can be inserted into the shaft support hole 381f of the upper base 381, and a path switching portion 390b that protrudes radially outward from the base portion of the shaft portion 389a in a fan shape. be. Also, the distributing portion 389 is arranged between the two second rolling portions 381c.

A portion of the path switching portion 390b, which expands in a fan shape as the distributing portion 389 is displaced, is positioned on the fifth ball throwing path KR5. Thereby, the game ball to be thrown on the fifth ball-throwing path KR5 can be thrown to the second rolling portion 381c. A detailed description of the distribution unit 389 will be given later.

The tip of the shaft portion 389 a is inserted through the shaft support hole 381 f of the upper base 381 and is connected to a part of the second transmission means 387 . Accordingly, when the driving force is applied to the second driving motor M2, the shaft portion 389a is rotated via the transmission means 387. As shown in FIG.

The second transmission means 387 is composed of a first gear 387a connected to the second drive motor M2 and a second gear 387b connected to the shaft portion 389a of the distribution portion 389. As shown in FIG. In addition, the second transmission means 387 is covered and held by a second lower surface base 388 arranged to face the upper surface base 381 .

The first gear 387a is formed in a circular shape and has gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof. The second gear 387b is formed in a substantially fan shape when viewed from above. The second gear 387b has gear teeth 387b1 that engage with the first gear 387a on its outer peripheral surface, and a through hole 387b2 that penetrates in the direction of gravity.

The through-hole 387b2 is a hole that fits over the shaft portion 389a of the distribution portion 389, and is formed to have an inner diameter that is substantially the same as or smaller than the diameter of the shaft portion 389a. Therefore, when the second drive motor M2 rotates, the driving force is transmitted from the first gear 387a to the second gear 387b, and the shaft portion 389a fitted on the shaft portion 389a of the second gear 387b rotates and vibrates. Section 389 is rotated.

Next, operation of the sorting section 389 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. FIG. 59 to 61 are top views of the distribution section 389. FIG. 59 to 61, the second transmission means 387 is illustrated with broken lines. 59 shows a state in which the distributing portion 389 is rotated counterclockwise about the shaft portion 389a with FIG. 60 as the initial position, and FIG. , respectively, are illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the gear teeth 387b1 of the second gear 387b mesh with the gear teeth of the first gear 387a at a substantially central position, the path switching portion 389b of the distribution portion 389 is centered on the center line in the horizontal direction. is symmetrical to the left and right.

Next, from the initial position, the rotational driving force is transmitted to the second transmission means 387, and as shown in FIG. The switching portion 389b is positioned on the right side when viewed from the front.

In this case, the distance between the left end of the path switching portion 389b and the left end of the fifth left throwing path KR5 is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the game ball thrown along the left fifth throwing path KR5 cannot pass through the fifth throwing path KR5 and is thrown along the sixth throwing path KR6. On the other hand, the distance dimension between the right end of the distribution portion 389 and the right end of the fifth right throwing path KR5 is made larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the game ball that is thrown through the fifth throwing route KR5 on the right side is not thrown through the sixth throwing route KR6, but is thrown through the fifth throwing route KR5 and then onto the eighth throwing route KR8.

In the state shown in FIG. 61 (the state rotated in the opposite direction to that shown in FIG. 59), the path switching portion 389b is located on the left side when viewed from the front.

In this case, the distance dimension between the right end of the path switching portion 389b and the right end of the right fifth ball throwing path KR5 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball thrown through the fifth ball throwing path KR5 on the right side cannot pass through the fifth ball throwing path KR5 and is thrown to the sixth ball throwing path KR6. On the other hand, the distance dimension between the left end of the distribution portion 389 and the left end of the fifth left throwing path KR5 is made larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the game ball that is thrown through the fifth throwing route KR5 on the left side is not thrown through the sixth throwing route KR6, but through the fifth throwing route KR5 and is thrown through the eighth throwing route KR8.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, a description will be given of a game ball flowing down the second fifth throwing path KR5 when the distributing portion 389 is rotated leftward in top view about the shaft portion 389a. .

62 to 64 are top views of variable unit 360. FIG. 62 to 64 show the transition state of the game ball flowing down.

As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, when the distribution portion 389 is rotated to the left about the shaft portion 389a in top view, when a game ball is thrown to the second ball-throwing route KR5, one of the fifth ball-throwing routes A game ball passing through (fifth ball throwing route KR5 on the right side in FIGS. 62 to 64) is thrown to eighth ball throwing route KR8 without interfering with route switching section 389b.

On the other hand, the game ball passing through the other fifth ball route KR5 (fifth ball route KR5 on the left side in FIGS. 62 to 64) interferes with the route switching unit 389b and is thrown to the sixth ball route KR6. .

That is, in the present embodiment, by rotationally displacing the distribution part 389, the path along which the ball flows can be switched, and the player can be shown the plurality of paths of the game ball flowing down, thereby arousing the interest of the player. can improve.

Next, referring to FIG. 65, driving of the V winning member 382 will be described. 65(a) to 65(c) are top views of the variable unit 360. FIG. 65(a) to 65(c), the first transmission means 384 is illustrated by broken lines. FIG. 65(a) shows a state in which the V winning member 382 is rotated to the right around the shaft portion 382c with FIG. 65(b) as the initial position, and FIG. 65(c) shows a state in which FIG. As an initial position, a state in which the V winning member 382 is rotated to the left around the shaft portion 382c is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c), when the driving force of the first drive motor M1 is transmitted by the first transmission means 384, the tip of the V winning member 382 moves through the shaft portion 382c. It is rotated on an axis and displaced left and right.

As a result, game balls falling from the eighth ball-throwing route KR8 to the front side (from FIG. 65(a) to the bottom of FIG. 65(c)) can be irregularly positioned inside the V winning member 382. Therefore, the player can have a sense of anticipation until the end as to whether or not the player will enter the inside of the V winning member 382, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, the rotation ball section 370 of the variable unit 360 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG. 66 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating ball portion 370 of the variable unit 360, and FIG. 67 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating ball portion 370 of the variable unit 360. FIG.

The rotary ball portion 370 is divided and disposed on both sides in the left-right direction of the main body portion 380. A rod-like connecting rod 371 for inserting and connecting the rotary ball portion 370 divided on both sides into the main body portion 380, A left rotating ball portion 370L disposed on one axial end side of the connecting rod 371 (left side in the left-right direction with respect to the main body portion) and the other axial end side of the connecting rod 371 (right in the left-right direction with respect to the main body portion 380) It is mainly formed with a right rotating ball portion 370R disposed in the .

The right rotating ball portion 370R and the left rotating ball portion 370L are arranged only with the driving means and the transmission means for transmitting the drive to the right rotating ball portion 370R. A detailed description of the left rotating ball portion 370L is omitted because it is formed line-symmetrically about the axis. Also, in the configuration of the left rotating ball portion 370L, the symbol R assigned to the configuration of the right rotating ball portion 370R is changed to L in the drawing.

The right rotating ball portion 370R includes a rotating body 372R that is connected to the other axial end side of the connecting rod 371 and is rotatable around the axis of the connecting rod 371, and a driving motor 376R that is a driving means that applies a driving force to the rotating body 372R. a transmission means 377R for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 376R to the rotating body; an inner cover 373R for mounting the drive motor 376R; It is mainly formed with an outer cover 374R that holds 377R so that it cannot fall off.

The rotating body 372R includes a first rotating body 372Ra disposed on the main body portion 380 side, a second rotating body 372Rc connected to the first rotating body 372Ra, and a second rotating body 372Rc disposed inside the second rotating body 372Rc. and a magnet 372Rb having a magnetic force that

The first rotating body 372Ra is a columnar rotating body that rotates while being connected to the connecting rod 371, and has a through hole 372Ra1 opening in the shaft. The through-hole 372Ra1 is an opening into which the other end of the connecting rod 371 is fitted, and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the connecting rod 371 or smaller than the outer shape of the connecting rod 371 . Therefore, the first rotating body 372Ra is connected by fitting the connecting rod 371 on the outside.

The second rotating body 372Rc is formed in a columnar shape having substantially the same outer shape as the first rotating body 372Ra, and is arranged coaxially with the first rotating body 372Ra and attached to the first rotating body 372Ra. .

In addition, the second rotating body 372Rc is a portion that attracts and throws a game ball on its outer peripheral surface, and has a concave portion 372Rc1 into which a magnet 372Rb, which will be described later, is inserted, and a concave portion on the outer peripheral surface radially outside of the concave portion 372Rc1. and a groove portion 372Rc2 provided.

The recessed part 372Rc1 is recessed in the surface of the second rotating body 372Rc attached to the first rotating body 372Ra, and has an inner shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the magnet 372Rb. Therefore, after the magnet 372Rb is inserted into the concave portion 372Rc1 of the second rotating body 372Rc, the second rotating body 372Rc is attached to the first rotating body 372Ra, so that the magnet 372Rb is arranged inside the rotating body 372R. is assembled with

The magnet 372Rb is disc-shaped and is inserted into the recess 372Rc1 of the second rotor 372Rc with its flat surface facing radially outward.

The transmission means 377R is a gear train that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 376R to the rotating body 372R, and is composed of transmission gears 377Ra to 377Rc. The front transmission gear 377Ra is connected to the drive motor 376R, and the rear transmission gear 377Rc is connected to the second rotating body Rc2. Therefore, when the drive motor 376R rotates, its driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 377Ra to the transmission gear 377Rc to rotate the rotating body 372R.

Here, as described above, since the rotating body 372R is connected to the connecting rod 371, the rotating body 372L of the left rotating ball portion 370L is also connected to one end of the connecting rod 371. Thereby, the rotating body 372R and the rotating body 372L can be rotated synchronously.

The inner cover 373R has an opening for collecting game balls rolling on the main body 380, and is a plate on which the transmission means 377R of the right rotating ball portion 370R is arranged. A hole 373Ra, a guide wall 373Rb protruding from the edge of the recovery hole 373Ra to the outside in the axial direction of the first rotating body 372Ra, and a first opening 373Rc opened on the axis between the second rotating body 372Rc and the transmission gear 377Rc. and a second opening 373Rd opened on the shaft of the drive motor 376R.

The recovery hole 373Ra is an opening through which a game ball passing through the fifth ball-throwing route KR5 is inserted, is formed at the end of the fifth ball-throwing route KR5, and has an internal shape larger than the diameter of the ball.

The guide wall 373Rb is a wall that causes the game ball inserted inside the recovery hole 373Ra to flow downward in the direction of gravity. Formed in the shape of a letter. Therefore, when the outer cover 374R is covered with the inner cover 373R from the axially outer side of the connecting rod 371, a sixth ball throwing route KR6 for throwing a game ball can be formed between the opposing guide walls 373Rb.

The first opening 373Rc is an opening that enables connection between the second rotating body 372Rc and the transmission gear 377Rc, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the second rotating body 372Rc. Thereby, the transmission gear 377Rc arranged outside the inner cover 373R and the second rotating body 372Rc can be connected.

The second opening 373Rd is an opening that enables connection between the drive motor 376R and the transmission gear 377Ra, and is formed in a circular shape that is larger than the rotation shaft of the drive motor 376R. Thereby, the transmission gear 377Ra arranged outside the inner cover 373R and the drive motor 376R can be connected.

The outer cover 374R is a plate member arranged laterally outward of the inner cover 373R, and has substantially the same outer shape as the inner cover 373R when viewed from the side. Further, by covering the outer cover 374R from the outside of the inner cover 373R, the sixth ball throwing path KR6 described above is formed, and each transmission gear of the transmission means 377R is formed between the outer cover 374R and the inner cover 373R. 377Ra to 377Rc can be rotatably held.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the rotating body 372R will be described in detail. 68(a) is a side view of the rotating body 372R, FIG. 68(b) is a top view of the rotating body 372R, and FIG. 68(c) is a line LXVIIIc-LXVIIIc in FIG. 68(b). FIG. 68(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 372R taken along line LXVIIId-LXVIIId of FIG. 68(b). In addition, in FIGS. 68(a) and 68(b), the outline of the magnet 372Rb is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 68, the groove portion 372Rc2 formed in the second rotating body 372Rc of the rotating body 372R is recessed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed in the radial direction of the rotating body 372R, and its outer shape is set larger than the outer shape of the magnet 372Rb. be done. Further, the groove portion 372Rc2 has a flat surface located radially inward of the rotating body 372R.

Next, rotation of the rotor 372R will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. FIGS. 69(a) to (c) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the displacement unit 560 along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 56(a). 70(a) to (c) are partial top views of the displacement unit 560. FIG.

FIG. 69(a) shows the state where the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc is adjacent to the sixth throwing path KR6, and FIG. 69(b) shows the state where the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc is positioned at the upper end. 69(c), the state where the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc is adjacent to the ball throwing path KR7 is illustrated. 70(a) is shown in FIG. 69(a), FIG. 70(b) is shown in FIG. 69(b), and FIG. 70(c) is shown in FIG. 69(c).

As shown in FIGS. 69(a) and 70(a), the second rolling portion 381c of the sixth ball path KR6 is arranged above the rotating shaft of the rotor 372R in the direction of gravity. Therefore, when the sixth ball path KR6 and the groove portion 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc are adjacent to each other, the radially inner flat surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 is inclined upward toward the front side.

From the state shown in FIGS. 69(a) and 70(a), when the driving force is applied from the drive motor 376R, the rotating body 372R is rotated counterclockwise around the axis when viewed in the right direction (viewed in the direction of FIG. 69). . Accordingly, the states shown in FIGS. 69(c) and 70(c) are formed through the states shown in FIGS. 69(b) and 70(b).

As shown in FIGS. 69(c) and 70(c), the third rolling part 381d of the seventh throwing path KR6 is disposed above the rotating shaft of the rotating body 372R in the direction of gravity, and the second rolling part 381d It is formed above the moving portion 381c. Therefore, when the seventh ball path KR7 and the groove portion 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc are adjacent to each other, the radially inner flat surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 is inclined upward toward the back side.

Next, a state in which the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 are combined will be described with reference to FIG. 71(a) is a front view of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390, and FIG. 71(b) is a top view of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b), the variable unit 360 is arranged on one side of the rear base 390 on the lower side in the gravitational direction. Also, the two annular members 394 of the rear base 390 are disposed laterally outside the first rolling portion 381a.

Also, the annular member 394 is disposed below the above-described third ball throwing path KR3. More specifically, the third ball throwing path KR3 is connected to the side surface of the annular member 394 formed in a substantially circular shape on the side of the second rolling portion 392c. Therefore, a game ball thrown inside the third ball-throwing path KR3 is guided by the upper surface of the annular member 394 and can be thrown to the second rolling portion 381c on the front side. As described above, the fourth throwing path KR4 is connected to the fifth throwing path formed by the first rolling portion 382a. That is, the third throwing route KR3 is connected to the sixth throwing route KR6, and the fourth throwing route KR4 is connected to the fifth throwing route KR5.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, game balls passing through the sixth throwing path will be described. FIGS. 72(a) to 72(c) are top views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390, and FIGS. 73(a) to 73(c) are taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 74(a) to 74(c) are cross-sectional views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 71(b). 72(a) to 72(c), FIGS. 73(a) to 73(c), and FIGS. 74(a) to 74(c) respectively show transition states of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 72(a), 73(a) and 74(a), the game ball thrown from the third ball-throwing path KR3 is guided to the upper surface of the annular member 394 as described above. , is guided to the upper portion of the second rolling portion 381c.

As shown in FIGS. 72(b), 73(b) and 74(b), the game ball rolling on the upper part of the second rolling part 392c is inclined downwards (FIG. 74) of the second rolling part 381c. (b)) and is thrown along the sixth throwing path KR6.

As shown in FIGS. 72(c), 73(c) and 74(c), the game ball thrown to the end of the sixth ball path KR6 is thrown to the recovery hole 373Ra formed in the inner cover 373R, It is recovered by flowing down a passage formed between the inner cover 373R and the outer cover 374R. That is, the recovery hole 373Ra of the inner cover 373R opens at the end of the sixth throwing path KR6, and the lower end surface of the recovery hole 373Ra is formed at substantially the same height as or slightly lower than the second rolling portion 381c. be done. Therefore, the game ball thrown through the sixth ball-throwing path KR6 can be smoothly thrown into the recovery hole 373Ra.

In addition, since the second rolling portion 381c is formed as an inclined surface that rolls the game ball in a direction substantially parallel to the direction of the rotation axis of the rotating body 372R, the game ball that rolls on the second rolling portion 381c and the throwing direction of the game ball that is thrown with the rotation of the rotating body 372R can be substantially perpendicular to each other. As a result, it is possible to change the movement of the game ball and secure the number of game balls that can be visually recognized at once, thereby improving the interest of the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 75, the case where the stopper portion 396 of the rear base 390 is displaced will be described. 75(a) is a sectional view of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 before the stopper portion 396 is displaced, and FIG. 75(b) is a sectional view of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 after the stopper portion 396 is displaced. 4 is a cross-sectional view of base 390. FIG. 75(a) and 75(b) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 73(a).

As shown in FIG. 75(a), in the state before the stopper portion 396 is displaced, the end portion A2 is arranged above the axis of the shaft hole 396c in the gravitational direction as described above. Therefore, the sixth ball-throwing path KR6 and the recovery hole 373Ra of the inner cover 373R are brought into communication with each other, and game balls passing through the sixth ball-throwing path KR6 can be passed through the inside of the recovery hole 373Ra and recovered.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 75(b), when the stopper portion 396 is displaced, the end portion A2 has substantially the same height in the gravity direction as the axis of the shaft hole 396c, as described above. be. Therefore, the stopper portion 396 is interposed between the sixth ball-throwing path KR6 and the recovery hole 373Ra, and the sixth ball-throwing path KR6 and the recovery hole 373Ra are blocked. As a result, the game ball that is thrown through the sixth ball-throwing path KR6 comes into contact with the stopper portion 396 and stops.

Therefore, a stopper portion 396 is provided to block the rolling of the game ball in the second rolling portion 381c, and the magnet of the rotating body 372R is arranged at a position where it can attract the game ball whose rolling is blocked by the stopper portion 396. Therefore, there is a form in which the game ball rolling on the second rolling part 381c is directly attracted to the rotating body 372R, and a game ball rolling on the second rolling part 381c is blocked by the stopper part 396 and then rotates. Form to be attracted to the body 372R (that is, if there is no blocking by the stopper portion 396, the game ball that would have passed without being attracted to the rotating body 372R is blocked by the stopper portion 396, so that it can be attracted to the rotating body 372R. ) can be formed, and as a result, the amusement of the player can be improved.

Next, the game ball thrown by the rotor 372R will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79. FIG. 76 to 78 are top views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390, and FIGS. 79(a) to 79(c) are sectional views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390. FIG.

79(a) corresponds to the section of FIG. 69(a), FIG. 79(b) corresponds to the section of FIG. 69(b), and FIG. 79(c) corresponds to the section of FIG. 69(c). . 76-78 and 79(a)-79(c) also illustrate the transition states of the sphere.

As shown in FIGS. 76 and 79(a), when the groove portion 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc is adjacent to the sixth ball throwing route KR6, the game ball thrown through the sixth ball route KR6 is the second It is attracted to a magnet 372Rb arranged inside the rotor 372Rc. That is, the game ball is attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc.

When the rotating body 372R is rotated from the state shown in FIGS. 76 and 79(a), the rotating body 372R is rotated while the ball is attracted to the magnet 372Rb of the second rotating body 372Rc.

Here, substantially cylindrical rotating members (rotating bodies 372R, 372L) formed to be rotatable with their rotating shafts oriented in the horizontal direction, and game balls disposed on the rotating members and placed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating members. A game machine is known which includes an attracting magnet (372Rb) and throws a game ball in the direction of rotation of the rotating member by rotating the rotating member while the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. there is When two game balls roll continuously toward the rotating member, the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the game ball following the preceding game ball is attracted. Sometimes. In this case, when the rotating member is rotated, there is a problem that the weight of two balls is applied, and the suction between the rotating member and the preceding game ball is released.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the second rolling portion 381c is arranged side by side on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R and the game ball rolls, and the second rolling portion 381c is the rotating member. Since it is located above the rotating shaft in the direction of gravity, for example, two game balls are rolled in a row toward the rotating body 372R on the second rolling portion 381c, and the preceding game ball rolls on the rotating body 372R. When the game ball following the preceding game ball is attracted while being attracted to the outer peripheral surface, the preceding game ball can be easily placed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to release the attraction between the rotating body 372R and the preceding game ball.

Here, the game ball attracted to and thrown by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R is placed in parallel with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R on the side opposite to the second rolling portion 381c with the rotating body 372R interposed therebetween. When received by the moving part 381d, the game ball easily bounces on the third rolling part 381d at this time, and it is difficult to smoothly throw the game ball from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R to the third rolling part 381d. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the third rolling portion 381d is positioned above the rotating shaft of the rotating body 372R in the direction of gravity, the game ball is prevented from bouncing on the third rolling portion 381d and rotates. A game ball can be smoothly thrown from the outer peripheral surface of the body 372R to the third rolling portion 381d. That is, it is possible to cause the third rolling portion 381d to receive the game ball before the downward displacement component in the direction of gravity increases with the rotation of the rotating body 372R (that is, at the stage when the horizontal component is relatively large). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the bouncing of the game ball on the third rolling portion 381d. In addition, before the game ball is received by the third rolling part 381d, the attraction of the game ball is released, and the game ball can be prevented from falling from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R to the third rolling part 381d. . Also from this point, it is possible to suppress the bouncing of the game ball on the third rolling portion 381d.

In addition, since the third rolling portion 381d is inclined downward in a direction away from the rotating body 372R, it is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R and thrown as the rotating body 372R rotates. The throwing direction of the game ball can be brought closer to the rolling direction of the following game ball received by the third rolling portion 381d. As a result, the game ball can be suppressed from bouncing on the third rolling portion 381d, and the game ball can be smoothly thrown from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R to the third rolling portion 381d.

The rotating body 372R has a groove 372Rc2 recessed in its outer peripheral surface, and the magnet 372Rb is disposed at a position where the game ball is attracted to the inner surface of the groove 372Rc2. ) can support the game ball. As a result, for example, the second rolling portion 381c rolls in a state in which two game balls are connected toward the rotating body 372R, and the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R, and its When the game ball following the preceding game ball is attracted, it is possible to make it difficult to release the attraction between the rotating body 372R and the preceding game ball.

Further, the recess depth of the groove portion 372Rc2 is set to a dimension that allows the game ball to abut on the bottom surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 while the game ball is fitted in the groove portion 372Rc2. Since the third rolling part 381d side is set to have a smaller dimension than the third rolling part 381d side, when the game ball thrown with the rotation of the rotating body 372R wobbles in the rotating direction of the rotating body 372R, the game ball is released from the groove part 372Rc2. It can be made easier to roll (fall off) toward the third rolling portion 381d. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being released from being sucked and returning to the second rolling portion 381c.

Next, through the states shown in FIGS. 77 and 79(b), the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc shown in FIGS. 78 and 79(c) is rotated to a position adjacent to the seventh throwing path KR7. Then, the game ball attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 is caught on the third rolling portion 381d of the seventh ball throwing path KR7. As a result, the ball is released from the magnet 372Rb of the second rotor 372Rc and is thrown along the seventh ball path KR7.

Here, if the attraction between the rotating body 372R and the game ball is released below the axis of the rotating body in the gravity direction, the gravity of the game ball tends to act around the axis of the rotating body 372R, and the rotating body 372R rotates. There is a risk that the speed will be increased.

Therefore, when the attraction between the rotating body 372R and the game ball is released, the kinetic energy of the rotating body 372R increases, and there is a problem that the rotating body 372 bounces when it collides with the third rolling portion 381d. . Alternatively, if the rotating body 372 is rotated and the ball is thrown downward in the direction of gravity from the axis of the rotating body 372R while the rotating body 372 is attracted to the game ball, the game ball cannot be supported by the rotating body 372. Another problem is that the suction between the rotating body 372 and the game ball is released, and the game ball falls to the third rolling portion 381d and bounces.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the base of the third rolling part 381d is arranged above the axis of the rotating body 372 in the direction of gravity. It can be above the axis of 372 in the direction of gravity. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing when the attraction between the rotating body 372 and the game ball is released.

Further, since the third rolling portion 381d is inclined downward in the direction from the second rolling portion 381c toward the third rolling portion 381d, the ball is thrown by being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372. The throwing direction of the ball and the rolling direction of the third rolling portion 381d can be substantially matched. Therefore, since the game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372 has kinetic energy in the rotating direction due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 372, the attraction to the rotating body 372 is released by the third rolling portion 381d. At the time, it tends to move in the direction in which the kinetic energy acts. As described above, since the throwing direction of the game ball sucked to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372 and thrown substantially coincides with the rolling direction of the third rolling portion 381d, the ball is thrown to the third rolling portion 381d. It is possible to make it easier to roll the game ball to be played. As a result, the game ball thrown to the third rolling portion 381d can be easily rolled.

A game ball thrown on the seventh ball-throwing path KR7 rolls to the front side due to the downward inclination of the third rolling portion 381d toward the front side, and is thrown to the eighth ball-throwing path KR8.

Therefore, the game ball thrown through the sixth ball-throwing path KR6 can be thrown to the seventh ball-throwing path KR7 by the rotation of the rotor 372R. Therefore, since a plurality of ball throwing paths can be formed, the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, attraction of game balls to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc will be described in detail. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390. FIG. 80 corresponds to the cross section of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 in FIG. 69(a). Also, FIG. 80 illustrates a state in which the ball is slightly rotated after being attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2. Furthermore, in FIG. 80, the connecting portion between the groove portion 372Rc2 on the side opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating body 372 and the second rotating body 372Rc is indicated by the end A3.

As shown in FIG. 80, in a role that attracts a game ball to the outer peripheral surface of a rotating rotating body and throws it, the game ball attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 is thrown after the sixth ball path KR6. Spheres may stick. When the game ball following the preceding game ball is attracted, the gravitational force of the two game balls acts on the attraction surface between the groove portion 372Rc2 and the preceding game ball. As a result, there is a problem that the adsorption between the preceding game ball and the groove portion 372Rc2 is released when the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, the game ball attracted to the inner periphery of the groove portion 372Rc2 is thrown in contact with the end portion A3. As a result, even if force acts on the ball in the direction of gravity, the end A3 supports the game ball, making it difficult for the ball to be displaced in the direction of gravity, thereby preventing the game ball from falling from the groove 372Rc2. Therefore, even when the game ball following the preceding game ball is attracted, it is possible to suppress the releasing of the attraction between the preceding game ball and the groove portion 372Rc2.

Further, as described above, the sixth ball-throwing path KR6 is formed above the rotating shaft of the rotating body 372R in the gravitational direction. can. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress release of the attraction between the groove portion 372Rc2 and the game ball.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 90, the prize winning port unit 600 will be described. First, referring to FIGS. 81 to 83, the overall configuration of the prize winning port unit 600 will be described. 81(a) is a front view of the prize winning unit 600, and FIG. 81(b) is a rear view of the prize winning unit 600. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning hole unit 600, and FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning hole unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, the prize winning port unit 600 includes a decorative plate 610 having a plurality of prize winning ports 26, 27 and 28, and a decorative plate 610 facing the decorative plate 610. A base plate 630 that forms a path, a path member 640 that forms a ball-throwing path for a game ball between the base plate 630, and a path member 640 that is disposed on the base plate 630 and extends between the decorative plate 610 and the base plate 630. It is mainly formed with a variable winning device 650 that guides the falling game balls to one of the winning openings 26, 27 and 28. - 特許庁

The decorative plate 610 is formed of a left cover member 611 having a left start winning opening 26, a right cover member 612 having a right starting winning opening 27, and a central cover member 613 having a middle starting winning opening 28.

The left cover member 611 and the right cover member 612 are formed symmetrically with the central cover member 613 interposed therebetween, and only the right cover member 612 will be described in detail. In this case, the left starting winning opening 26 corresponds to the right starting winning opening 27 .

The right cover member 612 is formed of a plate-like body curved in a semicircular shape on the lower side in the direction of gravity when viewed from the front, and the right start winning opening 27 is formed protruding near the curved axis.

The center cover member 613 is formed in a semi-circular shape with an upper side curved when viewed from the front, and is arranged in the center between the left cover member 611 and the right cover member 612 . The central cover member 613 is formed between a guide plate 613a projecting from the vicinity of the curved axis, erected walls 613b and 613c projecting in an arc around the curved axis, and the opposed erected walls 613b and 613c. , and cover-side projections 613d projecting from both sides of the guide plate 613a.

The guide plate 613a is a projection for guiding a game ball inserted through the inside of the middle start winning opening 28 to a through hole 632a of the base plate 630, which will be described later, and is arranged above the through hole 632a in the direction of gravity. Further, the guide plate 613a is formed such that its upper surface slopes downward toward the projecting tip. As a result, the game ball that passes through the inside of the middle start winning opening 28 and is thrown to the upper surface of the guide plate 613a can be rolled to the back side of the base plate 630 and thrown to the through hole 632a of the base plate 630. can.

Further, the guide plate 613a is formed with a contact surface 613a1 having a large inclination angle on the upper surface on the base side and a rolling surface 613a2 having a smaller inclination angle than the contact surface 613a1 on the upper surface on the tip side.

The contact surface 613a1 is a surface that stabilizes the throwing of the game ball to the through-hole 632a by making contact with the game ball that wins inside the middle start winning opening 28, and throws the ball inside the middle starting winning opening 28. It contacts the outer surface on the front side from the lower end in the direction of gravity of the game ball to be played. That is, the contact surface 613a1 is set so that the distance dimension from the connecting portion with the rolling surface 613a2 to the base is larger than the radius of the game ball, and the dimension to the upper side in the direction of gravity is set larger than the radius of the game ball. be done. Therefore, the game ball inserted through the inside of the middle start winning opening 28 can be brought into contact with the rolling surface 613a2. As a result, the component of the force in the direction of gravity of the game ball thrown to the middle start winning opening 28 can be caused to act on the through hole 632a side by the reaction due to the collision with the contact surface 613a1. As a result, the game ball thrown into the inside of the middle starting winning opening 28 can be smoothly guided to the through hole 632 a of the base plate 630 .

The erected walls 613b and 613c are walls forming the middle start winning opening 28, and are formed to sandwich the middle starting winning opening 28 therebetween. The erected walls 613b and 613c are formed with one side that is curved and the other side that is suspended from the central portion. The middle start winning opening 28 is formed between the standing walls 613b and 613c facing each other on the other side.

One side of the erected walls 613b and 613c is a rolling surface of a game ball for throwing the game ball flowing down the game board 13 to the out hole 71 without being inserted into the middle starting winning opening 28.例文帳に追加A game ball sent to the upper surface of one side of the erected walls 613b, 613c can flow outward in the left-right direction, so that a space can be formed below the erected walls 613b, 613c.

The cover-side protrusion 613d is a protrusion for slowing down the speed of a game ball rolling on the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650, which will be described later.

The base plate 630 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. It is formed with a central recess 632 and a right recess 633 .

The left recess 631 includes a left through hole 631a formed in the left cover member 611 at a position facing the left starting prize opening 26, and a left through hole 631a located below the left through hole 631a in the direction of gravity. and a second through hole 631b penetrating through the portion.

The left through-hole 631a is a path of a game ball through which a game ball thrown into the inside of the left start winning hole 26 flows down, and is formed to penetrate from the front side to the back side, and the inner shape is the outer shape of the game ball. formed larger than As a result, the game ball sent to the left starting winning port 26 can be recovered through the left through hole 631a.

The second through-hole 631b is an opening through which a game ball flowing down through the vicinity of the left start winning opening 26 is inserted. It is formed at a position facing one end. As a result, the game ball that is not thrown to the left start winning opening 26 and flows down between the left recess 631 and the left cover member 611 can be thrown to the path member 640 through the second through hole 631b.

The right recessed portion 633 includes a right through hole 633a formed in the right cover member 612 at a position facing the right starting prize opening 27, and a right through hole 633a located below the right through hole 633a in the direction of gravity. It is mainly formed with a second through hole 633b penetrating through the portion.

The right through-hole 633a is a path of a game ball through which a game ball thrown into the right start winning hole 27 flows down, and is formed to penetrate from the front side to the back side, and the inner shape is the outer shape of the ball. formed larger than As a result, the game ball thrown to the right start winning opening 27 can be recovered through the right through hole 633a.

The second through-hole 633b is an opening through which a game ball flowing down through the vicinity of the right start winning opening 27 is inserted, and is formed at the lower end of the right concave portion 633, and is located on the right side of the path member 640 described later in front view. It is formed at a position facing the other end. As a result, the game ball that is not thrown to the right start winning opening 27 and flows down between the right recess 633 and the right cover member 612 can be thrown to the path member 640 through the second through hole 633b.

Therefore, the opening of the game ball flowing path formed between the left and right concave portions 631 and 633 and the facing plate 610 is positioned above the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 in the direction of gravity. Since the left start winning prize port 26 and the right start winning prize port 27 are arranged inside the flow-down path of the game ball formed between the concave portions 631, 633 and the decorative plate 610, the second through holes 631b, 633b A part of the game balls flowed into the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 can be made to enter. That is, the game balls flowing down without entering the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 can be reliably made to flow into the path member 640 . As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player who enters the second ball entrance, and improve the interest of the game.

The central recessed portion 632 has a through hole 632a penetrating through the base plate 630 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, two through holes 632c penetrating on both sides of the through hole 632a, and an opening above the through holes 632c. and base-side protrusions 632d located on both sides of the through-hole 632a and protruding toward the central cover member 613 side.

The through hole 632a is an opening through which a game ball rolling on the upper part of the guide plate 613a is inserted. It is formed below the guide plate 613a in the direction of gravity.

The through-holes 632c are formed so as to pass through the through-holes 632a on both sides in the left-right direction, as described above. Further, the insertion hole 632c is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the through hole 632a.

The connecting hole 632b is an opening through which a game ball sent through the path member 640, which will be described later, is discharged to the front side of the base plate 630. It is formed.

The base-side projection 632d is a projection that slows down the speed of the game ball rolling on the upper portion of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 that is inserted through the insertion hole 632c and protrudes toward the central cover member 613. 632c is formed to protrude upward on the through hole 632a side.

The path member 640 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box shape with the base plate 630 side opened. The path member 640 is a member for forming a path that connects the second through holes 631b, 633b and the connecting hole 632b, and is formed on the left side of the front view to the left side of the second through hole 631b and the base plate 630 when viewed from the front. and a second path 642 formed on the right side in front view and connecting the second through hole 633b and the right side connection hole 632b of the base plate 630 in front view. be.

The first path 641 and the second path 642 of the path member 640 are formed to be inclined downward toward the direction toward each other. As a result, the game ball thrown from the second through hole 631b rolls on the first path 641 and can be thrown to the connecting hole 632b. In addition, the game ball thrown from the second through hole 633b can roll on the second path 642 and can be thrown to the connecting hole 632b.

The variable winning device 650 is a device that has a variable plate 652 that can be slidably displaced, and that is attached from the rear side of the base plate 630, and is arranged in a state in which the variable plate 652 is inserted through the insertion hole 632c.

Next, the variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. FIG. 84(a) is a front view of the variable winning device 650, and FIG. 84(b) is a top view of the variable winning device 650. FIG. 85(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 650, and FIG. 85(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 650. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the variable winning device 650 includes a front base 651 connected to a base plate 630, and a variable plate 652 inserted through the front base 651 and arranged in a slidable manner. , a transmission member 653 which is connected to the base end of the variable plate 652 and can be rotated and displaced by the driving force of the driving means, a cover member 654 disposed around the transmission member 653, and a solenoid 655 of the driving means. formed with.

The front base 651 is formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and mainly includes an opening 651b into which the tip side of the variable plate 652 described later is inserted, and a recovery hole 651a connected to a through hole 632a of the base plate 630. formed by

The recovery hole 651a is a hole for recovering the game ball inserted through the through hole 632a of the base plate 630, and is connected to the rear side of the through hole 632a.

The opening 651b is an opening for stabilizing the sliding of the variable plate 652, which will be described later, when the variable plate 652 slides, and is formed slightly larger than the external shape of the variable plate 652 when viewed from the front.

The two variable plates 652 are plate members for rolling the game ball on the upper surface as described above, and the tip thereof is inserted through the insertion hole 632c of the base plate 630 through the opening 651b. That is, the variable plates 652 are inclined in a direction in which they approach each other. As a result, when a game ball lands on the upper surface of the variable plate 652, the ball can be rolled and dropped onto the guide plate 613a.

In addition, the variable plate 652 has a recess 652a recessed in the direction of gravity. A rotation shaft 653a of a transmission member 653, which will be described later, is inserted into the recess 652a, and displacement of the transmission member 653 is transmitted. As a result, the driving force is transmitted to the variable plate 652 and the variable plate 652 is slidably displaced.

The transmission member 653 is formed in a plate-like body, and a rotary shaft 653c formed at one end thereof is connected to a shaft hole 654a formed in the cover member 654. As shown in FIG. In addition, the transmission member 653 has an engaging portion 653b projecting from the central portion of the rotating shaft 653a, and the engaging portion 653b is engaged with the projection 655a of the solenoid 655. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the solenoid 655 is driven, the engaging portion 653b is pushed out and the transmission member 653 is rotationally displaced about the rotating shaft 653c. Thereby, the variable plate 652 can be slidably displaced.

Therefore, in the through hole 632a on the flow-down path of the medium starting winning port 28, a variable plate 652 is arranged to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the upstream of the through hole 632a to enter the through hole 632a due to the displacement operation. A game ball that does not enter the left start prize winning port 26 or the right start prize winning port 27, flows down in the vicinity of the left start prize winning port 26 or the right start prize winning port 27, and is thrown into the path member 640 is inserted into the through hole 632a. You can improve your chances of winning a prize.

In addition, since a pair of variable plates 652 are disposed on both sides of the through hole 632a so as to tilt downward toward the through hole 632a, when the variable plate 652 protrudes, , the game ball flowing down from either the left or right side of the through-hole 632a can be easily entered into the through-hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation for the ball entering the through-hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, as a configuration for facilitating entry of a game ball into the through hole 632a, a pair of feather members whose proximal end side is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft protruding from the game board 13 is arranged in the through hole 632a. It is conceivable that the game ball is guided to the through hole 632a (so-called tulip) by opening the feather member. However, in such a configuration, a space for rotating (opening and closing) the wing members is required in the game area. In particular, a space is required above the through hole 632a in order to form the posture in which the wing members are closed. As a result, the size increases in the vertical direction, and the space for arranging other members (for example, the first ball entrance and the liquid crystal display device) is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a pair of plate-shaped variable plates 652 formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and to be retractable to the back side of the game board 13 are provided on both sides of the through hole 632a. Since it is disposed in a posture inclined downward toward 632a, it is possible to achieve miniaturization in the vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members (for example, the first ball entrance and the liquid crystal display device).

Furthermore, since the connecting hole 632b of the path member 640 is arranged above the variable plate 652 in the direction of gravity, the projecting variable plate 652 can be used to make it easier for the game ball to enter the through hole 632a. can. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation for the ball entering the through-hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, the second through hole 631b and the path member 640 and the second through hole 633b and the path member 640 are formed in pairs, and the connecting holes 632b of the path member 640 of one of the two pairs are formed in a pair. The connecting hole 632b of the other pair of path members 640 is arranged above the other variable plate 652 in the direction of gravity. Therefore, by using the pair of variable plates 652, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the through hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation for the ball entering the through-hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second through-hole 631b and the path member 640 and the second through-hole 633b and the path member 640 are spaced apart on both the left and right sides of the through-hole 632a (for example, the through-hole 632a is located in the game area). It is preferable that two sets are arranged symmetrically in the width direction across the through hole 632a while being positioned in the center in the width direction. A game ball flowing down either one side or the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 can easily enter the through hole 632a and enter the through hole 632a. This is because the player can have a stronger expectation of hitting the ball.

In addition, since the edge of the variable plate 652 on the side of the through hole 632a is positioned between the lower edge in the gravity direction and the upper edge in the gravity direction of the through hole 632a, the game ball is thrown in the width direction of the game area. When (displaced), the game ball is brought into contact with the edge of the protruding variable plate 652 on the side of the through hole 632a, making it easier to enter the through hole 632a. That is, a game ball that is thrown (displaced) from one side in the width direction of the game area passes through the front of the through hole 632a and is thrown (displaced) to the other side in the width direction (the game ball enters the through hole 632a). Escape in the width direction of the game area without hitting the ball) can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, the game ball throwing path of the winning hole unit 600 will be described. 86(a) is a front view of the prize winning unit 600, and FIG. 86(b) is a top view of the prize winning unit 600. FIG. 87(a) and 87(b) are partial front views of the winning opening unit 600 in the range LXXXVII of FIG.

87(a) shows the state before the displacement of the variable winning device 650, and FIG. 87(b) shows the state after the displacement of the variable winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 86 and 87, the decorative plate 610 is illustrated in a transparent state. In FIG. 86(a), the path member 640 is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b), the second through hole 631b and the connecting hole 632b are connected by the first path 641 of the path member 640 disposed on the back side of the base plate 630. . On the other hand, the second path 642 of the path member 640 connects the second through hole 633b and the connecting hole 632b. Therefore, the game ball that is not thrown to the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 but is thrown to each of the second through holes 631b and 633b is thrown inside the path member 640 and discharged from the connecting hole 632b. .

In this case, as shown in FIG. 87(a), before the variable winning device 650 is driven, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is retracted to the rear side of the central concave portion 632 of the base plate 630. Become. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the connecting hole 632b flows downward and is collected by the out port 71 formed in the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 87(b), when the variable winning device 650 is driven (the variable plate is slid and displaced), the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is positioned in front of the central concave portion 632 of the base plate 630. protruded to the side. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the opening 651b is thrown to the upper surface of the variable plate 652. As shown in FIG.

A game machine having a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance is known. In this case, game balls that have not entered the first ball entry hole are not entered into the second ball entry hole, but are only collected from the out hole. Therefore, when the game ball hit aiming at the first ball entrance does not enter the first ball entrance, the player expects the subsequent destination of the game ball (the game ball flowing down). can't have Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot be sufficiently entertained.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the path member 640 forming the passage of the game ball flowing down without being entered into the left start prize winning port 26 and the right start prize winning port 27 and the game area are formed on the front side. Equipped with a game board 13 and a plate-shaped variable plate 652 formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and to be immersed to the back side of the game board 13 . Since the variable plate 652 projecting to the side can be guided to the through hole 632a, even if the game ball does not enter the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27, the game ball will not flow down. It is possible to draw the player's attention and continuously expect the player to enter the ball into the through-hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the variable plate 652 is formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and to be immersed to the back side, the variable board 652 can be retracted to the back side of the game board 13 when not functioning. For that amount, a space can be secured on the front side of the game board 13 (the game area can be expanded). That is, it is possible to expand the area in which the game ball can move in the game area.

The path member 640 may be, for example, one formed as a closed passage through which the game ball can pass, one formed of one or more nails that define the flowing direction of the game ball, or one that allows the game ball to roll. An example is one formed as an inclined surface (an open passage).

Further, even when the variable plate 652 is retracted to the back side of the game board 13, it is naturally possible for the game ball passing through the path member 640 to enter the through hole 632a. In this case, it is preferable that the ball is easier to enter the through hole 632a when the variable plate 652 is protruded than when it is retracted. This is because the state of the variable plate 652 can be focused on and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as described above, when a game ball enters the left start prize winning port 26 and the right start prize winning port 27, the probability that the game ball flows into the movable ball entry accessory device 300 due to the opening and closing of the wings 312 Also, when a game ball wins in the middle start prize opening 28, the probability that the game ball flows into the movable ball entry accessory device 300 by opening and closing the wings 312 is set higher, so the player can For game balls that do not enter the left starting winning port 26 and the right starting winning port 27, it is possible to further expect that they will win the middle starting winning port 28.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest of the player.

That is, the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the through hole 632a is higher than the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the left start prize winning port 26 and the right start prize winning port 27. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the left start prize winning port 26 and the right start prize winning port 27, the player can have a stronger expectation that the game ball will enter the through hole 632a. . As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that, as a form in which a player is provided with a high profit, there is a form in which a large number of prize balls are paid out as a result of entering a ball, and a form in which a ball enters the third ball entrance (between the concave portion 311a and the upper front cover 313). Examples include a mode in which the open time of the wing portion 312 that permits/regulates is increased, a mode in which the number of times the wing portion 312 is opened, and a mode in which the open range of the wing portion 312 is increased.

In addition, since the base plate 60 is made of a transparent flexible material, the game can be played in such a manner that the two routes, that is, the route that flows down the back side of the base plate 60 and the route that flows down the front side of the base plate 60 intersect. can be seen by people. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being spoiled.

That is, the path member 640 includes a second through hole 631b and a second through hole 633b for receiving a game ball that flows down without entering the left start prize winning port 26 and the right start prize winning port 27, and the second through hole 631b and the second through hole 633b. It is provided with a connecting hole 632b that allows the game ball that has flowed in from the second through hole 633b to flow out to the game area, and is made of a transparent flexible material. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball that has been drawn flows down (passes) toward the connecting hole 632b (second ball entrance). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 88, the configuration around the through hole 632a will be described in detail. FIG. 88(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 600, FIG. 88(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 600 along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb of FIG. 88(a), and FIG. 88(c). 81(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 600 along line LXXXVIIIc-LXXXVIIIc of FIG. 81(a).

As shown in FIGS. 88(a) to 88(c), insertion holes 632c are opened at both left and right ends of the through hole 632a, and the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is inserted therein. In this case, the height of the end portion of the variable plate 652 on the side of the through hole 632a is set to be substantially the same as the middle position of the height of the through hole 632a in the gravity direction. Thereby, the height distance between the end portion of the variable plate 652 on the side of the through hole 632a and the guide plate 613a can be secured. As a result, when the game ball rolling on the upper part of the variable plate 652 is thrown to the through hole 632a, the falling distance to the guide plate 613a can be secured, so that the ball is brought into contact with the contact surface 613a1. The impact force at the time of hitting can be ensured, and the ball can be smoothly thrown to the through hole 632a.

A base-side projection 632d of 632a projecting from the central recessed portion 632 of the base plate 630 is formed to have a substantially triangular cross-section whose projection distance is reduced outward from the through-hole 632a. Similarly, the cover-side projection 613d protruding from the central cover member 613 is also formed to have a triangular cross-section whose projection distance is reduced outward from the through-hole 632a. The base-side projection 632d and the cover-side projection 613d are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction, and the base-side projection 632d is formed closer to the through hole 632a than the cover-side projection 613d.

Further, a guide plate 613a projecting from the lower edge of the through hole 632a in the direction of gravity toward the front side of the game board is provided. Not only when 652 is protruding, but also when variable plate 652 is retracted, the ball does not enter left start winning opening 26 and right starting winning opening 27 and flows down (passing path member 640). ) A game ball can be easily entered into the through hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation for the ball entering the through-hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the game ball inserted through the middle start winning opening 28 will be described. 89(a) to 89(c) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 600. FIG. 89(a) to 89(c) correspond to FIG. 88(b). Also, FIGS. 89(a) to 89(c) illustrate respective transition states.

As shown in FIGS. 89( a ) to 89 ( c ), the game ball inserted through the middle start winning opening 28 is dropped onto the upper surface of the guide plate 613 a , and the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 The ball can be stably thrown to the through hole 632a by coming into contact with the end on the through hole 7632a side.

Here, if the guide plate 613a catches the falling game ball, the impact of the collision may cause the ball to sway in the horizontal direction and not enter the through hole 632a.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the height position of the end of the variable plate of the variable winning device 650 on the side of the through hole 632a is set to be substantially the same as the middle position of the through hole 632a in the direction of gravity. When the ball is swayed in the left-right direction due to the impact of collision, the ball can be brought into contact with the side surface of the variable plate and smoothly fed to the through hole 632a.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 90(a) to 90(c), a game ball thrown over the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 will be described. 90(a) to 90(c) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 600. FIG. 90(a) to 90(c) correspond to FIG. 88(c).

As shown in FIGS. 90(a) to 90(c), a game ball that is thrown to the path member 640 and thrown to the upper part of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 passes through the connecting hole 632b of the base plate 630. While being rolled forward by the momentum of the ejection, the inclination of the variable plate 652 causes the plate 652 to roll toward the through hole 632 a , thereby coming into contact with the cover-side projection 613 d of the central cover member 613 . As a result, the ball rolls on the upper portion of the variable plate 652 toward the through hole 632a while being guided to the back side by the projection shape of the cover-side projection 613d.

Next, the game ball that rolls toward the through hole 632a while being thrown to the back side by the cover-side projection 613d is brought into contact with the base-side projection 632d. As a result, the ball is guided to the front side by the protrusion shape of the base-side protrusion 632d, rolls on the upper portion of the variable plate 652 toward the through hole 632a, and flows down to the upper portion of the guide plate 613a.

Here, if the game ball rolling on the upper part of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 does not come into contact with the cover-side projection 613d and the base-side projection 632d, the rolling speed of the ball increases and the guide plate There is a possibility that the throwing of the game ball to the upper part of the 613a becomes unstable, and the throwing of the game ball to the through hole 632a becomes unstable.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is brought into contact with the cover-side projection 613d and the base-side projection 632d, thereby slowing the rolling speed of the ball. It is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball to the through hole 632a.

Further, in this embodiment, the base-side projection 632d is formed closer to the through-hole 632a than the cover-side projection 613d, so that the game ball falling onto the guide plate 613a is reliably hit against the contact surface 613a1 of the guide plate 613a. can be brought into contact. As a result, the throwing of the game ball to the through hole 632a can be stabilized.

Further, on the upper surface of the guide plate 613a, there is a ball-feeding surface located closer to the through hole 632a, and a contact surface connected to the ball-feeding surface and located farther from the through hole 632a than the rolling surface 613a2. 613a1 is formed, and the angle of downward inclination of the contact surface 613a1 toward the through hole 632a is larger than the angle of downward inclination of the ball feeding surface toward the through hole 632a. Using the downward inclination of the surface 613a1, the game ball can be smoothly entered into the through hole 632a. In particular, even when the slide member is retracted, the inclination of the contact surface 613a1, which has a large downward inclination, allows the ball to flow down without being entered into the first ball entrance (passing through the passage member). ), the game ball can be easily entered into the through hole 632a.

Next, the variable unit 2360 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the magnet 372Rb arranged on the rotating body 372R is formed smaller than the concave portion 372Rc1 has been described. It is formed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 91(a) is a front view of the variable unit 2360 in the second embodiment, FIG. 91(b) is a top view of the variable unit 2360, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 along line XCIc-XCIc; 92 is an exploded front perspective view of variable unit 2360. FIG. 93 is an exploded rear perspective view of variable unit 2360. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 91(a) and 91(b), the outer shape of the magnet 2372Rb is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 93, the rotating body 2372R in the second embodiment includes a first rotating body 2372Ra disposed on the main body portion 380 side and a second rotating body 2372Ra connected to the first rotating body 2372Ra. 2372Rc, and magnets 2372Rb arranged inside the second rotating body 2372Rc and the first rotating body 2372Ra.

The first rotating body 2372Ra is a cylindrical rotating body that rotates while being connected to the connecting rod 371, and mainly includes a through hole 372Ra1 that opens to the shaft and a recessed portion 2372Ra2 that is recessed toward the main body. It is formed.

The recessed portion 2372Ra2 is a recessed portion that accommodates the body portion 380 side of the magnet 2372Rb, which will be described later, and is recessed in a shape corresponding to the curved shape of the magnet 2372Rb. Thereby, the magnet 2372Rb can be accommodated inside the first rotating body 2372 .

Here, the magnet 2372Rb arranged inside the rotating body 2372R prevents the game ball rolling on the second rolling part 381c from being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R. At the position, in order to attract the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R, it is necessary to change the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb acting radially outward of the rotating body 2372R. That is, in the portion that slows down the rolling speed of the game ball, the magnetic force acting on the radially outer side of the rotating body 2372R is relatively small, and in the portion that attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R, the rotating body 2372R. It is necessary to make the magnetic force acting radially outward relatively large.

Therefore, two magnets 2372Rb with different magnetic forces are arranged inside the rotating body 2372R in the portion where the rolling speed of the game ball is slowed down and the portion where the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R. Alternatively, it is necessary to dispose the magnet 2372Rb that protrudes radially outward only at the attracting portion. Therefore, there is a problem that the cost of manufacturing the magnet 2372Rb increases.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the magnet 2372Rb is arranged at a position radially outwardly spaced from the axis of the rotating body 2372R by the same distance. Since the groove 2372Rc2 is recessed in the radial direction, the magnetic force acting on the outer side of the attraction position can be made relatively strong because the groove 2372Rc2 is recessed in the radial direction. Thus, without complicating the shape of the magnet 2372Rb, a portion for slowing the rolling speed of the game ball and a portion for attracting the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R can be formed. You can suppress the increase.

The second rotating body 2372Rc is formed in a columnar shape having substantially the same outer shape as the outer path of the first rotating body 2372, and is arranged coaxially with the first rotating body 2372Ra and attached to the first rotating body 372Ra. .

The second rotating body 372Rc is formed with a recess 372Rc1 recessed outward from the main body 380 side, and a groove 2372Rc2 recessed in the radially outer peripheral surface of the recess 372Rc1. be.

The groove portion 2372Rc2 is formed so that the recessed distance in the radial direction becomes smaller toward the first rotating body 372Ra side (see FIG. 91(c)). As a result, when the game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 2372Ra rolls on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R and is received inside the groove 2372Rc2, it falls from the rotating body 2372R into the groove 2372Rc2. can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be stably thrown to the groove portion 2372Rc2. It should be noted that the throwing of the game ball of the rotating body 2372R will be described later.

Next, the magnet 2372Rb will be described with reference to FIG. 94(a) is a front view of the magnet 2372Rb, FIG. 94(b) is a top view of the magnet 2372Rb, and FIG. 94(c) is a side view of the magnet 2372Rb.

As shown in FIGS. 94(a) to 94(c), the magnet 2372Rb is formed in a curved shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the first rotating body 2372Ra when viewed from the side. The magnet 2372Rb is curved toward the left side (left side in FIG. 94(a)) in the direction of rotation of the rotor 2372R when viewed from the front.

The rotor 2372R configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, one side of the magnet 2372Rb is inserted inside the concave portion 2372Ra2 of the first rotor 2372Ra. Next, the magnet 2372Rb projecting from the recess 2372Ra2 of the first rotating body 2372Ra is inserted into the recess 2372Rc1 of the second rotating body 2372Rc, and the first rotating body 2372Ra and the second rotating body 2372Rc are fastened to each other. 2372R is assembled.

Next, referring to FIGS. 95 and 96, the attraction between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball will be described. 95(a) to 95(c) are top views of the variable unit 2360. FIG. FIG. 96(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 taken along the line XCVIa-XCVIa of FIG. 95(a), and FIG. 96(b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 taken along the line XCVIb-XCVIb of FIG. FIG. 96(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 along line XCVIc-XCVIc in FIG. 95(c). 95(a) to 95(c) illustrate transition states of the sphere. Also, in FIGS. 95(a) to 95(c), the magnet 2372Rb is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 95(a) and 96(a), when the magnet 2372Rb on the side of the first rotating body 2372Ra is adjacent to the sixth ball-throwing path KR6, the game ball is thrown to the sixth ball-throwing path KR6. Then, the ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the first rotor 2372Ra by the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb.

As shown in FIGS. 95(b) and 96(b), when the rotating body 2372R is rotated around the axis in a state where the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 2372Ra, the ball is pulled by its own weight. The ball is thrown along the sixth throwing path KR6 while being displaced downward by .

That is, in the portion that slows down the rolling of the game ball, when the magnet 2372Rb is positioned adjacent to the second rolling part 381c due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball moves against the second rolling part 381c. By rolling, the rolling of the game ball can be slowed down. In addition, since the magnet 2372Rb is bent around the axis in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 2372R, the position where the magnet 2372Rb and the second rolling portion 381c are adjacent to each other is shifted to the rotating body 2372R as the rotating body 2372R rotates. 2372R can be displaced to the adsorption position side. Therefore, the game ball whose rolling speed on the second rolling portion 381c is slowed down by the magnet 2372Rb can be made to roll radially outward of the attracting position with the rotational displacement of the rotating body 2372R. As a result, the game ball whose rolling speed on the second rolling portion 381c is slowed down can be attracted to the rotating body 2372R.

Here, it comprises a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with the rotating shaft oriented in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A gaming machine is known in which a game ball is rotated in a state in which a game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface, and the game ball is thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotary member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the game ball rolls on the rolling surface while swinging, the rotating member rotates, and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at the timing when it can face the adsorption position of the rotating member. Even when it moves, there is a problem that the game ball is difficult to be attracted to the attraction position.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the magnet 2372Rb has at least an attraction position where the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R and an upstream position upstream of the rolling surface from the attraction position. Since it is arranged, the game ball can be attracted to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating body 2372R by the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb arranged at the upstream position, and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface while swinging. can be suppressed. As a result, when the rotating body 2372R is rotated and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at the timing when it can face the attracting position of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball can be easily attracted to the attracting position.

The magnet 2372Rb arranged at the attracting position and the magnet 2372Rb arranged at the upstream position may be formed separately (that is, two magnets 2372Rb), or may be formed integrally. (ie, one magnet 2372Rb).

Here, it is necessary to attract the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R at the attracting position, but not to attract the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R at the upstream position. To achieve this by the difference in the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb (that is, the magnet 2372Rb with strong magnetic force is arranged at the attracting position, and the magnet 2372Rb with weak magnetic force is arranged at the upstream position). It is necessary to prepare the magnet 2372Rb, resulting in an increase in product cost.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the rotating body 2372R is provided with the groove 2372Rc2 recessed in the outer peripheral surface thereof and serving as the attraction position. 2372Rc2, the distance from the magnet 2372Rb at the attracting position to the game ball (the distance from the magnet 2372Rb to the bottom surface of the groove 2372Rc2) is determined by the distance from the magnet 2372Rb at the upstream position to the game ball) from the magnet 2372Rb to the rotating body 2372R. distance to the outer peripheral surface). That is, while the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotor 2372R at the suction position, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotor 2372R at the upstream position. Therefore, there is no need to use two types of magnets 2372Rb, and there is no need to complicate the shape of the magnets 2372Rb, so the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Also, when a game ball is attracted to the attraction position, the game ball can be held by the groove portion 2372Rc2. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown with the rotation of the rotating body 2372R, it is possible to suppress the game ball from wobbling in the rotation direction of the rotating body 2372R, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being released from the adsorption. .

Here, when the ball throwing path KR5 for throwing the game ball along the axis of the rotating body 2372R is formed, the rolling speed of the game ball is high, or the game ball wobbles on the rolling surface. There was a problem that it could not be attracted to the rotating body 2372R.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a fifth ball path KR5 for rolling a game ball and throwing it to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R is formed on the radially outer side of the rotating body 2372R. is formed extending in the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R, and the magnet 2372Rb extends upstream of the fifth ball path KR5 from the attraction position between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball. The magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb arranged on the rotating body 2372R slows the rolling of the game ball and suppresses the wobbling of the second rolling portion 381c of the game ball, thereby suppressing the game ball from wobbling. can be attracted to the rotor 2372R.

That is, the magnet 2372Rb arranged on the rotating body 2372R extends upstream of the second rolling portion 381c from the attraction position between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball. A magnetic force of a magnet can be applied. As a result, by pulling the game ball rolling on the first ball-throwing surface to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R by the action of the magnet 2372Rb, the ball-throwing speed can be slowed down, and the second rolling part 381c is wobbled and rolled. It is possible to eliminate the wobble of the playing ball. As a result, the game ball can be attracted to the attraction surface between the rotor 2372R and the game ball.

In addition, the second rolling part 381c has a partition wall 2381g arranged to face the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R as the width in the rolling direction of the game ball goes downstream. be. That is, since the second rolling portion 381c is narrowed toward the downstream side, when the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c swings left and right with respect to the throwing direction, the rolling of the game ball Shaking can be suppressed along with

In particular, in the second embodiment, the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb disposed on the rotating body 2372R acts on the upstream side of the second rolling portion 381c from the attraction position between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball. Since the swing motion of the game ball rolling on the first ball-feeding surface can be suppressed together with the magnetic force, the swing of the game ball can be suppressed with a relatively short rolling distance.

In other words, it comprises a partition wall 2381g that is erected from the second rolling portion 381c while facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R and partitions the rolling area of the game ball, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R and the partition wall 2381g. Since the facing distance between the two is set to a smaller dimension toward the downstream side of the second rolling portion 381c, not only the action of the magnet (attraction by magnetic force) at the upstream position but also the guidance by the partition wall 2381g It is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling while rocking on the second rolling portion 381c. As a result, when the rotating body 2372R is rotated and the game ball rolls on the second rolling part 381c at the timing when it can face the attracting position of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball can be easily attracted to the attracting position. .

Furthermore, since the end of the groove portion 2372Rc2 on the upstream side of the second rolling portion 381c is connected to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R, the magnetic force of the portion that slows the rolling of the game ball moves the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R. When the game ball drawn into rolls inside the groove 2372Rc2 of the rotating body 2372R, it is possible to suppress bouncing. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly attracted to the inside of the groove 2372Rc2.

In addition, since the length dimension along the rotation axis direction of the third rolling part 381d is set to be larger than the length dimension along the rotation axis direction of the magnet arranged on the rotor 2872R, Even if the game ball is attracted to a position other than the attraction position of the body 2872R (that is, attracted to the magnet at the upstream position) and the game ball is thrown with the rotation of the rotating body 2872R, such The game ball can be received by the third rolling portion 381d.

As shown in FIGS. 95(c) and 96(c), the game ball attracted to the outside of the first rotor 2372Ra flows down the fifth ball-throwing path KR5 and enters the groove 2372Rc2 of the second rotor 2372Rc. When attracted, the game ball can be thrown to the seventh throwing path KR7 by rotating the rotating body 2372R while attracting the game ball to the inside of the groove portion 2372Rc2, as in the first embodiment. .

Here, the magnet 2372Rb arranged inside the rotating body 2372R extends in the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R from the attraction position between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball, and rolls on the third rolling portion 381d. In the case where the throwing direction of the game ball is formed along the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball rolling on the third rolling portion 381d is affected by the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb arranged on the rotating body 2372R. there is a risk of receiving

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, on the radially outer side of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball attracted to the rotating body 2372R is released on the side opposite to the second rolling portion 381c with the rotating body 2372R interposed therebetween. A third rolling portion 381d for rolling and throwing a game ball is formed, and the third rolling portion 381d is inclined downward from the second rolling portion 381c toward the third rolling portion 381d. Therefore, the third rolling portion 381d can prevent the game ball released from being attracted to the rotating body 2372R from being attracted to the rotating body 2372R again.

That is, the throwing direction of the game ball in the third rolling portion 381d is formed in the direction away from the rotor 2372R in the radial direction. As a result, the game ball sent to the third rolling portion 381d is again attracted to the outer circumference of the rotating body 2372R, or the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb is applied, and the rolling speed of the third rolling portion 381d is slowed. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the third rolling portion 381d is formed to be larger than the axial dimension of the rotating body 2372R and disposed at a position facing the rotating body 2372R, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R other than the suction position When the game ball is attracted to the third rolling portion 381d and is thrown to the third rolling portion 381d, the attraction between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball is released by the third rolling portion 381d, and the game ball is moved to the third rolling portion 381d. You can throw to 381d.

At least part of the portion of the magnet 2372Rb arranged at the upstream position is arranged forward in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 2372R from the portion arranged at the attracting position. The magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb at the upstream position can be easily applied to the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c. That is, the game ball can be pulled toward the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating body 2372R, and the game ball can be prevented from rolling while rocking on the second rolling portion 381c. As a result, when the rotating body 2372R is rotated and the game ball rolls on the second rolling part 381c at the timing when it can face the attracting position of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball can be easily attracted to the attracting position. .

Further, the bottom surface of the groove portion 2372Rc2 is inclined upward toward the upstream position side and smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R, and at least on the upstream position side, the bottom surface of the groove portion 2372Rc2 is formed so that a game ball can come into contact therewith. Therefore, when the game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating body 2372R by the magnet 2372Rb at the upstream position is fitted into the groove portion 2372Rc2 by the magnet 2372Rb at the attracting position, the game ball is prevented from being fitted into the groove portion 2372Rc2. It can be done smoothly. In other words, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing (bouncing), making it easier to attract the game ball to the attraction position (groove 2372Rc2).

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the first embodiment, the radially inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotor 372R is formed on a plane orthogonal to the radial direction. A description will be given of a case in which the grooves are formed so as to be inclined with respect to a direction perpendicular to the radial direction.

FIG. 97(a) is a side view of the rotating body 3372R in the third embodiment, FIG. 97(b) is a top view of the rotating body 3372, and FIG. FIG. 97(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XCVIIc-XCVIIc, and FIG. 97(b) taken along line XCVIId-XCVIId. 98(a) and 98(b) are sectional views of the variable unit 360. FIG. 98(a) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 69(a), and the cross section of FIG. 98(b) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 69(b).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) to (d), the rotating body 3372R in the third embodiment is connected to the first rotating body 372Ra disposed on the main body 380 side and the first rotating body 372Ra. It mainly includes a second rotating body 3372Rc and a magnet 372Rb disposed inside the second rotating body 3372Rc and exerting a magnetic force on the outside of the second rotating body 3372Rc.

The second rotating body 3372Rc is formed in a columnar shape with an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the first rotating body 372Ra, is arranged coaxially with the first rotating body 372Ra, and is attached to the first rotating body 372Ra. be done.

The second rotating body 372Rc is a ball-throwing member that attracts and throws a game ball on its outer peripheral surface. It is formed mainly with a groove portion 3372Rc2.

The recess 3372Rc1 is recessed in the surface to which the first rotating body 372Ra is attached, and is recessed to a depth substantially equal to the outer diameter of the magnet 372Rb. The recessed portion 3372Rc1 is recessed in a substantially rectangular shape in side view, and one of the two opposed inner surfaces is formed parallel to the recessed distal end surface of the groove portion 3372Rc2, which will be described later.

The groove portion 3372Rc2 is recessed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed in the radial direction of the second rotating body 3372Rc, and has a substantially triangular cross section when viewed in the axial direction of the second rotating body 3372Rc. That is, the groove portion 3372Rc2 is formed by connecting the recessed front end surface of the second rotating body 3372Rc on the rotational direction side to the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 3372Rc.

As described above, the recessed portion 3372Rc1 of the second rotating body 3372Rc is formed to have an inner surface parallel to the recessed distal end surface of the groove portion 3372Rc2. As a result, the magnet 372Rb arranged inside the groove 3372Rc2 is arranged in such a manner that the end of the rotating body 3372R in the rotational direction is partially positioned radially outward (see FIG. 97(c)). .

Next, the rotational displacement of the rotor 3372R will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 98(a) and (b), when the groove portion 3372Rc2 of the rotating body 3372R is positioned adjacent to the sixth ball throwing route KR6, when the game ball is thrown along the sixth ball throwing route KR6, , The game ball is attracted to the groove portion 3372Rc2 by the magnet 372Rb arranged inside the rotating body as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 98(a)).

When the rotating body 3372R is rotationally displaced about the axis of the connecting rod 371 while the game ball is attracted to the rotating body 3372R as shown in FIG. 98(a), the game ball becomes the rotating body as shown in FIG. The ball is thrown while being attracted to the groove 3372Rc2 of the 3372R.

In the third embodiment, as described above, the recessed end surface of the groove portion 3372Rc2 on the side of the rotation direction of the second rotating body 3372Rc is formed by being connected to the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 3372Rc, so that the game ball can be rotated. It can be easily removed in the direction of rotation of the body 3372R.

That is, by not forming a stepped step on the rotational direction side of the groove portion 3372Rc2, the game ball attracted to the groove portion 3372Rc2 can be easily displaced in the rotational direction side. As a result, when the game ball attracted to the groove 3372Rc2 of the rotating body is released from the attraction due to shaking of the game machine main body, the game ball can easily drop to the seventh ball throwing path side of the subsequent ball throwing path. As a result, when the attraction between the rotating body 3372R and the game ball is released, it is possible to suppress the game ball from returning to the sixth ball throwing path, thereby stabilizing the throwing of the game ball from the rotating body 3372R.

Further, in this case, since the rotating bodies 3372Ra and 3372Rc of the rotating body 3372R are formed in a columnar shape, the game ball can be thrown to the seventh ball-throwing path KR7 along the outer peripheral surface thereof. As a result, the attraction between the rotating body 3372R and the game ball is released, and the free fall distance of the game ball can be reduced when dropping the game ball onto the seventh ball-throwing route KR7. can reduce the impact when it falls on the third rolling portion 381d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from jumping up due to collision with the third rolling part 381d, and to stabilize the throwing of the game ball.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the end portion of the magnet 372Rb on the rotational direction side of the rotating body 3372R is disposed in a state partially positioned radially outward, so that the magnet 372Rb acts on the outer side of the rotating body 3372R accordingly. The magnetic force of the magnet can be strengthened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the releasing of the attraction between the rotating body 3372R and the game ball, thereby further stabilizing the throwing of the game ball.

Next, referring to FIGS. 99 to 101, the rotating body 4372R in the fourth embodiment will be explained. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the first embodiment, when the preceding game ball sucked to the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotating body 372R attracts the subsequent game ball thrown later, the preceding game ball is prevented from falling out of the groove portion 372Rc2. In the fourth embodiment, when the preceding game ball attracted to the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotating body 4372R attracts the subsequent game ball thrown later, the preceding game ball and the following game ball are attracted. A case where the game ball falls out of the groove portion 372Rc2 will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 99, the rotating body 4372R in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 99(a) is a side view of the rotating body 4372R in the fourth embodiment, FIG. 99(b) is a top view of the rotating body 4372R, and FIG. FIG. 99(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 4372R along the line XCIXc-XCIXc, and FIG. 99(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 4372R along the line XCIXd-XCIXd in FIG. 99(b).

The rotating body 4372R includes a first rotating body 372Ra disposed on the main body portion 380 side, a second rotating body 4372Rc connected to the first rotating body 372Ra, and disposed inside the second rotating body 4372Rc. and a magnet 372Rb having a magnetic force.

The second rotating body 4372Rc is formed in a columnar shape having substantially the same outer shape as the first rotating body 372Ra, and is arranged coaxially with the first rotating body 372Ra and attached to the first rotating body 372Ra. .

In addition, the second rotating body 4372Rc is a portion that attracts and throws a game ball on its outer peripheral surface, and has a recessed portion 372Rc1 into which a magnet 372Rb, which will be described later, is inserted, and a recessed portion on the outer peripheral surface radially outside of the recessed portion 372Rc1. It mainly includes a groove portion 372Rc2 and a recess portion 4372Rc5 recessed in the outer peripheral surface at a predetermined distance from the groove portion 372Rc2.

The recessed portion 4372Rc5 is formed as a curved surface (spherical surface) whose center is positioned radially outward of the rotating body 4372R, and the radius of the sphere forming the curved surface is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. be.

In the fourth embodiment, the predetermined distance between the groove portion 372Rc2 and the concave portion 4372Rc5 is such that when a game ball following the preceding game is attracted in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R, The following game ball is set to a distance that does not come into contact with the radially outer end surface (outer peripheral surface excluding the recessed portion 4372Rc5) of the rotating body 4372R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102, the case where two game balls stick to the rotor 4372R will be described. 100 to 102 are cross-sectional views of the variable unit 360 and rear base 390. FIG.

100 to 102 correspond to cross sections of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 in FIG. 69(a). 100 to 102 sequentially illustrate the transition states when the rotating body 4372R is rotated.

As shown in FIG. 100, when two game balls are consecutively thrown to the sixth throwing path KR6 (the following game ball is thrown in a row with the preceding game ball), the preceding game ball is: It is attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the groove portion 372Rc2, and is attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2. In this case, since the preceding game ball is magnetized by the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb, when the following game ball is thrown in tandem with the preceding game ball, the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball. be.

Also, as shown in FIG. 100, the trailing game ball adheres to the leading game ball and before it is lifted from the second rolling portion 381c, the trailing game ball is attached to the second rolling portion Since it is supported by 381c, it is not guided inside recessed portion 4372Rc5 and is positioned outside the outer peripheral surface of rotating body 4372R.

As shown in FIG. 101, when the rotating body 4372R is rotated from the position of FIG. 100, the following game ball is lifted from the second rolling portion 381c. In this case, the following game ball displaces the adsorption position with the outer peripheral surface of the preceding game ball by its own weight.

Therefore, when the trailing game ball is lifted from the second rolling part 381c, it is displaced inside the recessed part 4372Rc5, so that the weight of the trailing game ball can be easily applied to the leading game ball. . As a result, as shown in FIG. 102, the attraction between the preceding game ball and the inside of the groove portion 372Rc2 can be easily released.

In addition, as described above, the trailing game ball is displaced inside the concave portion 4372Rc5 when lifted from the second rolling portion 381c. In this case, the load of the following game ball can be applied to the preceding game ball according to the displacement when lifted. As a result, as shown in FIG. 102, the suction between the preceding game ball and the inner side of the groove portion 372Rc2 can be easily released.

When the rotating body 4370 is further rotated from the position shown in FIG. 101 in a state where the attraction between the preceding game ball and the inner side of the groove portion 372Rc2 is released, the preceding game ball and the following game ball are rotated by the second rotation. It is dropped onto the moving part 381c. In addition, the preceding and following game balls dropped from the rotating body 5372R fall on the upper surface of the second rolling portion 381c and roll on the second rolling portion 381c. Therefore, the preceding and following game balls dropped from the rotating body 5372R roll on the second rolling portion 381c, are guided into the recovery hole 373Ra formed in the inner cover 373R, and are recovered.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when two balls are attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R, both of the two balls can be dropped from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R. That is, if a game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R and thrown to the seventh ball path KR7, it is advantageous to the player, but if two balls are attracted and thrown, it is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the game ball rolling on the sixth throwing path KR6 by making a difference in the result depending on whether only one ball is attracted or the second ball is attracted. can be done.

Here, it comprises a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with the rotating shaft oriented in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A gaming machine is known in which a game ball is rotated in a state in which a game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface, so that the game ball is thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotary member (in this case, toward the rotary member). When two game balls roll in a row, the preceding game ball (first game ball) is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the preceding game ball (first game ball) is attracted. When the following game ball (second game ball) is sucked, both the preceding game ball and the following game ball are thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotating member. , there is a problem that it is not possible to provide the player with sufficient interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the fourth embodiment, when the game ball preceding the magnet 372Rb of the rotor 4372R is attracted and the game ball following the preceding game ball is magnetically attached, the magnet 372Rb of the rotor 4372R Since the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball are provided with a releasing means for easily releasing the attraction thereof, it is possible to suppress both the preceding game ball and the following game ball from being thrown in the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R.

That is, when only the preceding game ball rolls toward the rotating body 4372R and is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet 372Rb) of the rotating body 4372R, the preceding game ball is thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating body 4372R. On the other hand, in addition to the preceding game ball, the following game ball also rolls toward the rotating body 4372R, and the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet 372Rb) of the rotating body 4372R and the preceding game ball. When the trailing game ball is attracted to the second roller, it is possible to prevent both the leading game ball and the trailing game ball from being thrown in the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R. When the moving part 381c (sixth ball throwing path KR6) rolls toward the rotating body 4372R, no other game ball (that is, the following game ball) rolls behind the preceding game ball. It is possible to cause the player to worry (be thrilled) about whether or not. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, a V winning member 382 into which a game ball that is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R and thrown in the rotational direction of the rotating body 4372R enters, and a V winning member 382 that is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R. A recovery hole 373Ra into which the missing game ball enters, and at least when the game ball enters the V winning member 382, a profit is given to the player, or when the ball enters the V winning member 382, the player Since the profit given is higher than the profit given to the player by the ball entering the recovery hole 373Ra, the interest in the game can be improved from this point as well.

That is, the player expects to obtain a profit by entering the V winning member 382, or to obtain a higher profit than in the case of entering the recovery hole 373Ra, so that the game ball is placed on the outer circumference of the rotating body 4372R. A greater number of game balls are placed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R in the hope that they will stick to the surface and be thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 4372R, and in the expectation that there will be more chances of receiving benefits. It is hoped that the ball will be attracted and thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotor 4372R. On the other hand, when only the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R, while the preceding game ball can be thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating body 4372R (V winning member 382), the rotating body When the game ball following the preceding game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of 4372R is attracted, not only the following game ball but also the preceding game ball are thrown in the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R. Therefore, the opportunity for the ball to enter the V winning member 382 from both sides is lost. Therefore, when the preceding game ball rolls toward the rotating body 4372R, the player checks whether or not another game ball (that is, the following game ball) rolls behind the preceding game ball. It is possible to easily make people worry (easily make them excited), and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, as a mode in which a player is provided with a high profit, there are a mode in which a large number of prize balls are paid out as a result of entering a ball, and a third ball entrance (recess 311a and upper The opening time of the wing portion 312 that allows and restricts the entry of a ball into the space facing the front cover 313 is lengthened, the opening number of the wing portion 312 is increased, and the opening range of the wing portion 312 is increased. and the like are exemplified.

In addition, since the release means is formed as a concave portion 4372Rc5 which is recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R and receives the following game ball attracted to the preceding game ball, The trailing game ball can be brought closer to the side, and accordingly, the gravitational direction component of the weight of the trailing game ball acting on the leading game ball can be easily increased. Therefore, the attraction between the preceding game ball and the magnet 372Rb can be easily released.

That is, when the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball, the weight of the following game ball is used to release the attraction between the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball, When the game ball following the preceding game ball is not attracted, the attraction between the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball can be prevented from being released. In addition, since such switching can be achieved only by means utilizing the weight of the following game ball, that is, the recessed portion 4372Rc5 recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R, a displacement member for switching can be achieved. It is possible to eliminate the need to provide a drive source and a drive source, thereby reducing the product cost.

Next, referring to FIGS. 103 to 106, the rotating body 5372R in the fifth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the first embodiment, when the preceding game ball sucked to the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotating body 372R attracts the subsequent game ball thrown later, the preceding game ball is prevented from falling out of the groove portion 372Rc2. In the fifth embodiment, when the preceding game ball attracted to the groove portion 5372Rc2 of the rotating body 5372R is attracted to the subsequent game ball thrown later, the preceding game ball and the following game ball are attracted. A case where the game ball falls out of the groove portion 5372Rc2 will be described.

In the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the right rotating ball portion 370R and the left rotating ball portion 370L are provided with driving means and transmission means for transmitting the drive to the right rotating ball portion 370R. Other shapes are formed line-symmetrically about the center of the variable unit 360 in the left-right direction, so detailed description of the rotating body 5372L of the left rotating ball portion 370L will be omitted.

103 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 5372R in the fifth embodiment, FIG. 104(a) is a side view of the rotating body 5372R, and FIG. 104(b) is a top view of the rotating body 5372R. 104(c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 5372R taken along line CIVc-CIVc in FIG. 104(b), and FIG. 104(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 5372R taken along line CIVd-CIVd in FIG. is a cross-sectional view of.

As shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the rotating body 5372R in the fifth embodiment includes a first rotating body 372Ra disposed on the main body 380 side and a second rotating body 372Ra connected to the first rotating body 372Ra. 5372Rc, a magnet 372Rb having magnetic force disposed inside the second rotating body 5372Rc, and a releasing member 5372Rd disposed along the outer edge of the second rotating body 5372Rc.

The second rotating body 5372Rc is formed in a columnar shape with an outer diameter substantially the same as that of the first rotating body 372Ra, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the first rotating body 372Ra. 372Ra.

Further, the second rotating body 5372Rc includes a groove portion 5372Rc2 that is recessed radially inward on the outer peripheral surface, and a recess that is formed radially inward of the groove portion 5372Rc2 and is recessed on the side surface of the rotating body 5372Rc. 372Rc1, and a recessed portion 5372Rc3 formed by notching between the opposed recessed portion 372Rc1 and the recessed portion 5372Rc2 and adjacent to the recessed portion 5372Rc2.

The groove portion 5372Rc2 is formed in a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed in the radial direction of the rotating body 372R, and its outer shape is set larger than the outer shape of the magnet 372Rb. The groove portion 5372Rc2 has a flat surface positioned radially inward of the rotating body 372R, and is partially notched by the concave portion 5372Rc3 as described above.

The concave portion 5372Rc3 is a space for accommodating a release member 5372Rd, which will be described later, inside a notch formed in the rotating body 5372R, and the shape of the recess is formed substantially the same as the outer shape of the release member 5372Rd.

The releasing member 5372Rd has an outer shape that is substantially C-shaped when viewed in the radial direction of the rotating body 5372R. The releasing member 5372Rd is positioned between the releasing portion 5372Rd1 arranged inside the groove portion 5372Rc2, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 placed along the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R, and the releasing portion 5372Rd1 and the pressing portion 5372Rd2 and rotates. A through hole 5372Rd3 is formed through the body 5372R in the axial direction.

The release portion 5372Rd1 is arranged inside a recessed portion 5372Rc3 cut inside the groove portion 5372Rc2, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R is arranged flush with the flat surface of the groove portion 5372Rc2. As a result, the game ball thrown inside the groove 5372Rc2 can be attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb arranged inside the recess 372Rc1.

The pressing portion 5372Rd2 is formed to protrude radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R, and the protruding tip surface thereof is formed in a curved shape that protrudes outward. In addition, the radius of the curved surface of the projecting tip end surface of the pressing portion 5372 is set to a dimension smaller than the radius of the rotating body 5372R. Therefore, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 can be easily protruded radially outward of the rotating body 5372R.

When the release member 5372Rd is not displaced (the pressing portion 5372Rd2 is not displaced inward in the radial direction with respect to the rotating body 5372R), the pressing portion 5372Rd2 rotates at both ends of the rotating body 5327R in the circumferential direction. It is set at a position contiguous with the outer peripheral surface of the body 5372R. That is, it is possible to eliminate a step in the radial direction between the concave portion 5372Rc3 of the rotating body 5372R and the pressing portion 5372Rd2. As a result, when the game ball rolls on the second rolling portion 381c, the game ball rides on the step between the concave portion 5372Rc3 of the rotating body 5372R and the pressing portion 5372Rd2, and the rotating body 5372R rotates to cause the third rolling. It is possible to suppress the ball from being thrown to the portion 381d.

The through hole 5372Rd3 is a through hole into which the shaft rod JB1 is inserted. The shaft JB is a shaft that rotatably holds the release member 5372Rd. is inserted and the other side is clamped by the side surface of the first rotating body 372Ra. As a result, the shaft rod JB1 can be prevented from falling off from the assembled rotor 5372R, and can rotatably support the release member 5372Rd.

Next, referring to FIGS. 105 and 106, the operation of the release member 5372Rd of the rotating body 5372R will be described. 105 and 106 are sectional views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390. FIG.

105 and 106 correspond to cross sections of the variable unit 360 and rear base 390 in FIG. Also, FIG. 106 illustrates a state in which the rotor 5372R is slightly rotated from the position shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 105, when two game balls are successively thrown on the sixth ball path KR6, when the preceding game ball is attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 5372Rc2, the preceding game ball is attracted to the magnet 372Rb. A following game ball is magnetized by magnetic force and attracted to its outer peripheral surface.

When the rotating body 5372R is rotated while the following game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the preceding game ball, the preceding game ball is lifted upward while being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R. be done. At this time, the following game ball displaces the attraction position with the preceding game ball, and is displaced to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating body 5372R.

Here, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 of the release member 5372Rd disposed on the rotating body 5372R is the following game ball when the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball and lifted from the second rolling portion 381c. It is formed in a shape in which the projecting tip abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the.

Then, as shown in FIG. 106, when the rotating body 5372R is rotated from the position of FIG. 105 and the following game ball is separated from the second rolling portion 381c (lifted), the following game ball's own weight As a result, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 of the release member 5372Rd is pressed radially inward of the rotating body 5372R.

Due to this displacement of the pressing portion 5372Rd2, the releasing member 5372Rd is rotationally displaced around the through hole 5372Rd3. Therefore, the release portion 5372Rd1 formed on the side opposite to the pressing portion 5372Rd2 across the through hole 5372Rd3 is displaced radially outward of the rotating body 5372R.

As a result, the preceding game ball attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 5372Rc2 is pushed out from the inside of the groove portion 5372Rc2 along with the displacement of the releasing portion 5372Rd1. Therefore, the preceding game ball is displaced to a position spaced radially outward from the rotating body 5372R, and accordingly is spaced apart from the magnet 372Rb arranged inside the rotating body 5372R. As a result, the magnetic force that attracts the preceding game ball to the inner surface of the groove portion 5372Rc2 is weakened, and the preceding game ball falls off from the outer peripheral surface (groove portion 5372Rc2) of the rotating body 5372R.

In this case, as described above, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 of the releasing member 5372Rd disposed on the rotating body 5372R is when the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball and lifted from the second rolling portion 381c. Since it is formed in a shape in which the projecting tip contacts the outer peripheral surface of the trailing game ball, when the trailing game ball is lifted, the trailing game ball is displaced radially inward with respect to the rotating body 5372R. can maximize the force due to its own weight.

As a result, when the trailing game ball is attracted to the leading game ball and is lifted from the second rolling portion 381c, the release member 5372Rd can be easily displaced, and the leading game ball ) can be easily removed.

In addition, the preceding and following game balls dropped from the rotating body 5372R fall on the upper surface of the second rolling portion 381c and roll on the second rolling portion 381c. Therefore, the preceding and following game balls dropped from the rotating body 5372R roll on the second rolling portion 381c, are guided into the recovery hole 373Ra formed in the inner cover 373R, and are recovered.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when two balls are attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R, they can be dropped from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R. That is, when the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R and thrown to the seventh ball throwing path KR7, it is advantageous to the player, but when two balls are attracted, the situation is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to cause a difference in the result depending on whether only one ball is attracted or two balls are attracted, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the game ball rolling on the sixth ball throwing path KR6.

Here, it comprises a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with the rotating shaft oriented in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A game machine is known in which a game ball is rotated in a state in which the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface, and the game ball is thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotary member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-231890). Gazette). In this case, when two game balls roll continuously toward the rotating member, the preceding game ball (first game ball) is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the preceding game ball When the game ball (second game ball) following (the first game ball) is attracted, both the preceding game ball and the following game ball are thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating member. However, such a gaming machine has a problem that it is not possible to provide the player with a sufficient interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the fifth embodiment, when the game ball preceding the magnet 372Rb of the rotor 5372R is attracted and the game ball following the preceding game ball is magnetically attracted, the magnet 372Rb of the rotor 5372R Since the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball are provided with a release means for easily releasing the attraction thereof, it is possible to suppress both the preceding game ball and the following game ball from being thrown in the rotation direction of the rotating body 5372R.

That is, when only the preceding game ball rolls toward the rotating body 5372R and is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet 372Rb) of the rotating body 5372R, the preceding game ball is thrown in the rotation direction of the rotating body 5372R. On the other hand, in addition to the preceding game ball, the following game ball also rolls toward the rotating body 5372R, and the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet 372Rb) of the rotating body 5372R, and the preceding game ball When the trailing game ball is attracted to the rotator 5372R, both the leading game ball and the trailing game ball can be prevented from being thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 5372R. When rolling toward, the player can be worried (throbbed) whether another game ball (that is, a following game ball) is rolling behind the preceding game ball. . As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, a V winning member 382 into which a game ball that is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R and thrown in the rotational direction of the rotating body 5372R enters, and the V winning member 382 that is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R. A recovery hole 373Ra into which the missing game ball enters, and at least when the game ball enters the V winning member 382, a profit is given to the player, or when the ball enters the V winning member 382, the player Since the profit given is higher than the profit given to the player by the ball entering the recovery hole 373Ra, the interest in the game can be improved from this point as well.

That is, the player expects to obtain a profit from the ball entering the V winning member 382, or to obtain a higher profit than the ball entering the recovery hole 373Ra, so that the game ball can reach the outer circumference of the rotating body 5372R. A greater number of game balls are placed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotor 5372R in the hope that the ball will stick to the surface and be thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotor 5372R, and in the expectation that there will be more chances of receiving benefits. It is hoped that the ball will be attracted and thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotor 5372R. On the other hand, when only the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R, while the preceding game ball can be thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating body 5372R (V winning member 382), the rotating body When the game ball following the preceding game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of 5372R is attracted, not only the following game ball but also the preceding game ball are thrown in the rotation direction of the rotating body 5372R. Therefore, the opportunity for the ball to enter the V winning member 382 from both sides is lost. Therefore, when the preceding game ball rolls toward the rotating body 5372R, the player checks whether another game ball (that is, the following game ball) rolls behind the preceding game ball. It is possible to easily make people worry (easily make them excited), and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Note that the mode in which the profit given to the player is high is the same as in the fourth embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The release means includes a release member 5372Rd displaceably disposed on the rotating body 5372R, and the release member 5372Rd is displaced by coming into contact with the following game ball attracted to the preceding game ball. The displacement enlarges the distance between the preceding game ball and the magnet 372Rb, so when the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball, the weight of the following game ball is used. Then, while releasing the attraction between the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball, if the following game ball is not attracted to the preceding game ball, the attraction between the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball is not released. can be made In addition, since such switching is performed using the weight of the following game ball, it is not necessary to provide a drive source for displacing the releasing member 5372Rd, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. be able to.

That is, according to the fifth embodiment, there is no need to dispose an urging member (for example, a torsion spring or the like) for switching the release member 5372Rd. For example, even when the release portion 5372Rd1 of the release member 5372Rd projects radially outward from the groove portion 5372Rc2, the game ball (preceding game ball) is pressed inside the groove portion 5372Rc2 by an adsorption operation, The release portion 5372Rd1 can be displaced radially inward of the rotating body 5372R. As a result, the protruding tip of the pressing portion 5372Rd2 can be displaced to protrude outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 5372R. Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to provide a driving source for displacing the release member 5372Rd, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108, a winning opening unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, game balls that are thrown into the second through holes 631b and 633b formed on the left and right sides of the base plate 630 are directly inside the path member 640 that is arranged on the back surface of the base plate 630. In the sixth embodiment, the game balls to be thrown into the second through holes 631b and 633b formed on the left and right sides of the base plate 630 are arranged on the back surface of the base plate 630. A case will be described in which the game ball passes through the sensor device SE1 for detecting the passage of the game ball before being thrown inside the path member 640. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 107(a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 107(b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 6600. FIG. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 6600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, a sensor device SE1 is interposed between the base plate 630 and the path member 640 in the prize winning port unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment. Moreover, the sensor device SE1 is arranged at a position on the back side of the second through holes 631b and 633b.

The sensor device SE1 is formed with an opening SE1a penetrating therethrough that is larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and is interposed between the base plate 630 and the path member 640 with the opening SE1a opened in the front-rear direction. The sensor device SE1 can detect the passage of the game ball by allowing the game ball to pass through the inside of the opening SE1a.

It should be noted that the game balls flowing down the inside of the winning hole unit 6600 are only opposite to each other on the left and right sides. A description of the game ball flowing down is omitted.

Next, a description will be given of when a game ball flows down inside the winning hole unit 6600. FIG. When the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 flows down in the vicinity of the left winning hole 26 and flows down between the left concave portion 631 and the left cover member 611, it is guided to the bottom surface of the left concave portion 631 and the second The ball is thrown inside the through hole 631b.

In this case, since the sensor device SE1 is arranged on the back side of the second through-hole 631b as described above, the game ball flowing down between the left concave portion 631 and the left cover member 611 is detected by the sensor device SE1. After being detected, the ball is thrown inside the path member 640 . That is, in the sixth embodiment, a game ball thrown inside the path member 640 can be detected.

Therefore, by controlling the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 to protrude to the front side after a predetermined time has passed after the sensor device SE1 detects the game ball, the game ball passing through the path member 640 can be changed. The ball can be easily thrown to the upper part of the board 652 . As a result, the game ball passing through the path member 640 can be easily thrown to the through hole 632a.

For example, by setting the predetermined time described above to be substantially the same as the time for the game ball to roll on the first path 641 of the path member 640 from one end to the other end, the game ball can It can be easily thrown to the top of 652. As a result, the game ball flowing down without winning the left winning port 26 can be easily given the possibility of winning again through the through hole 632a. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the downstream side of the game ball, and the time for which the player is made to pay attention to the game ball can be lengthened.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the sensor device SE1 for detecting the game ball flowing down the path member 640 and the drive means for driving the variable plate 652 are provided, and when the game ball is detected by the detection member, Since the variable plate 652 is driven by the driving means to project toward the front side of the game board, the game ball can easily enter the through hole 632a. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the left start prize winning port 26 and the right start prize winning port 27, the player is made to pay attention to the downflow of the game ball, and the player continues to expect the ball to enter the through hole 632a. can be held. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The detection of the game ball by the sensor device SE1 and the driving by the driving means (projection of the variable plate 652) may be performed at the same time. Also good. However, in the latter case, it is preferable that the drive (projection operation of the variable plate 652) is completed before the game ball reaches the projecting position of the variable plate 652. This is because the function of the variable plate 652 that guides the game ball to the through-hole 632a (makes it easier to enter) can be exhibited reliably.

Further, for example, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 may be set to protrude to the front side according to the number of game balls passing through the sensor device SE1. In this case, the player can be given the possibility of winning a prize through the through-hole 632a when a predetermined number of game balls that do not enter the left winning port 26 and flow down in the vicinity continue. Therefore, the value of hitting the game ball into the game area of the game board 13 aiming at the left winning hole 26 can be increased. Therefore, since the player can be made to hit the game ball to the game area of the game board 13 aiming at a predetermined place, it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the path along which the game ball flows. As a result, the player can search for a more advantageous launching position of the game ball to the game area of the game board 13, and the player can be easily aroused.

For example, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is set to protrude to the front side when five game balls pass through the sensor device SE1. In this case, it is possible to give the player the possibility that at least one ball will win the through hole 632a when five consecutive game balls do not enter the left winning hole 26 and flow down nearby.

In this case, when three game balls (the number of balls is less than the predetermined number) pass through the sensor device SE1, and the fourth game ball enters the left winning hole 26, The tally of the number of balls that have passed sensor device SE1 may be reset. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from winning continuously in the winning opening 26 and the through hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the continuous opening of the feather portion 312 that opens when the game ball enters the winning opening 26 and the through hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to disperse the opening timings of the wings 312 that are advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111, a winning opening unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is positioned backward, the possibility of the game ball winning the through hole 632a is reduced. In the form, even when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is positioned backward, the through hole 632a is formed to facilitate winning when two game balls are connected. The state in which the variable plate 652 is positioned backward is a state in which the variable plate 652 is retracted to the rear side of the game board 13 .

First, with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110, the winning opening unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a front view of the winning opening unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 7600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, a prize winning port unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment includes a decorative plate 7610 having a plurality of prize winning ports 26, 27 and 28, and a A base plate 630 that forms a flow-down path for game balls in the base plate 630, a path member 640 that forms a ball-throwing path for game balls between the base plate 630, and a decorative plate 7610 and the base plate 630 It is mainly formed with a variable winning device 650 that guides the game ball flowing down between the opposing to the through hole 632a.

The decorative plate 7610 is formed from a left cover member 611 having a left start winning opening 26, a right cover member 612 having a right starting winning opening 27, and a central cover member 7613 having a middle starting winning opening 28.

The center cover member 7613 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged in the center of the left cover member 611 and the right cover member 612 . A through hole 7613e is formed in the central cover member 7613 so as to penetrate from the front side to the back side.

The through hole 7613e is formed in front of each of the two connecting holes 632b formed in the base plate 630 arranged to face the central cover member 7613. As shown in FIG. The connecting hole 632b is formed such that the width dimension of the opening in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 109) in front view is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball can pass through the inside.

The through-hole 7613e is formed so that its center position is shifted outward in the left-right direction with respect to the base plate 630 from the center position in the left-right direction of the connecting hole 632b. It is formed at a position overlapping in the front-rear direction with the central position in the left-right direction of the connecting hole 632b.

Further, the through-hole 7613e is recessed in a convex curved shape (spherical shape) from the back side to the front side (that is, the depth of the recess is increased in the direction away from the through-hole 632a). , the inner diameter of the hole on the front side is set smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the through hole 7613e is formed to have a size that does not allow the game ball to pass through.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, game balls flowing down the winning hole unit 7600 will be described. 111(a) to 111(c) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 7600 taken along line CXI-CXI in FIG. 109. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), two game balls are continuously thrown inside the path member 640, and the preceding game ball is thrown from the inside of the connecting hole 632b toward the central cover member 7613 side. In this case, as described above, the through hole 7613e is formed such that its center position is shifted outward in the left-right direction with respect to the base plate 630 from the center position in the left-right direction of the connecting hole 632b. A part of the inner edge portion is formed at a position that overlaps the center position of the connecting hole 632b in the left-right direction in the front-rear direction, so the preceding game ball is thrown to a position slightly shifted left and right from the center of the through hole 7613e.

As a result, the preceding game ball is guided to the inner edge of the through hole 7613e as shown in FIG. is displaced. Also, at this time, the through hole 7613e is recessed in a convex curved shape from the back side of the central cover member 7613 toward the front side (that is, as a recessed portion that is open on the side of the connecting hole 632b). A game ball can be easily fixed to its inner edge.

Next, when the game ball that follows the preceding game ball is thrown from the inside of the connecting hole 632b toward the central cover member 7613, the preceding game ball passes through the through hole 7613e formed in the central cover member 7613. Guided by the inner edge portion, it is possible to cause the following game ball to collide with the central side spherical surface of the preceding game ball with respect to the base plate 630 by the amount displaced laterally outward with respect to the base plate 630 .

Therefore, the following game ball can collide with the curved surface (spherical surface) of the preceding game ball on the center side in the left-right direction of the base plate 630. can be directed to the center side in the left-right direction (the side of the through hole 632a). As a result, as shown in FIG. 111, the following game ball can be thrown to the left-right center side (through hole 632a side) of the base plate 630 to win the through hole 632a.

In addition, the preceding game ball drops from the inside of the through-hole 7613 e by its own weight, and is recovered from the out port 71 formed in the game board 13 by flowing down.

Thus, in the seventh embodiment, when there are two or more game balls flowing down in the vicinity without winning the left and right starting prize openings 26, 27, they are passed through the inside of the path member 640 continuously. This makes it easier for the following game ball to enter the through hole 632a.

That is, a game machine having a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance is known. In this case, game balls that have not entered the first ball entry hole are not entered into the second ball entry hole, but are only collected from the out hole. Therefore, when the game ball hit aiming at the first ball entrance does not enter the first ball entrance, the player expects the subsequent destination of the game ball (the game ball flowing down). can't have Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot be sufficiently entertained.

On the other hand, according to the seventh embodiment, the path member 640 forms a path for the game balls that do not enter the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27 and flow down, and two game balls pass through the path member 640. In this case, change means (through hole 7613e) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the through hole 632a than when one game ball, which is less than two balls, passes through the path member 640. Since it is provided, even when the game ball does not enter the left and right start winning holes 26, 27, the player is made to pay attention to the downflow of the game ball, and the player continues to expect that the ball will enter the through hole 632a. can let In particular, the number of game balls passing through the path member 640 changes the ease of entering the through hole 632a (there are two or more game balls that do not enter the start winning openings 26 and 27 and flow down in the vicinity thereof. If there is, it is possible to produce an advantageous situation for the player), so the player can also be made to pay attention to the number of game balls that have failed to enter the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The path member 640 may be, for example, one formed as a closed passage through which the game ball can pass, one formed of one or more nails that define the flowing direction of the game ball, or one that allows the game ball to roll. An example is one formed as an inclined surface (an open passage).

In addition, the changing means includes a restricting means for restricting the preceding game ball that passes through the path member 640 or flows out from the path member 640, and the restricting means is such that the game ball following the preceding game ball In the case of continuous (continuous), the following game ball is made to contact (collide) with the preceding game ball whose flow is restricted, and the following game ball is formed so that the flowing direction is directed toward the through hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. That is, when the leading game ball and the trailing game ball flow down, it is easier for the ball to enter the through hole 632a than when only the leading game ball flows down. The ease of entering the through-hole 632a can be changed depending on the number), so the player can be made to pay attention to the number of game balls that have leaked into the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27 as well. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, since the restricting means is formed as a through-hole 7613e recessed in the wall surface facing the exit of the path member 640, the preceding game ball flowing out from the exit of the path member 640 is received in the through-hole 7613e, and the preceding game ball is received. While it is possible to temporarily restrict the flow of the game ball to be played (that is, the preceding game ball can be temporarily held so that the following game ball can collide), the flow of the preceding game ball can be restricted Release can be performed by dropping (flowing down) the preceding game ball from the through-hole 7613e by its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to restrict (hold) and release the restriction of the preceding game ball only by the shape of the restricting means, and it is possible to eliminate the need for an operation mechanism for switching between them (releasing the restriction). It is possible to simplify and reduce the product cost.

In addition, a member that guides the game ball that has flowed out from the outlet of the path member 640 to the through hole 632a (for example, has a rolling surface that is inclined downward toward the through hole 632a, and rolls the game ball on that rolling surface) By doing so, there is no variable plate 652 that makes it easier to enter the game ball into the through hole 632a (the variable plate 652 is formed to be displaceable between a position where it can be guided to the through hole 632a and a position where it cannot be guided. , Displaced to a position that cannot be guided), the following game ball can be entered into the through hole 632a using the through hole 7613e.

Furthermore, the connecting hole 632b has a bottom surface on which the game ball rolls, and side wall surfaces that stand upright on both sides in the width direction of the bottom surface, and the interval between the side wall surfaces facing each other is approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball. Since the dimensions are set, the trajectory of the game ball flowing out from the exit of the path member 640 can be easily made substantially constant, and the game ball can be reliably received by the regulation means (through hole 7613e).

In addition, since the through hole 7613e is deepened in the direction away from the through hole 632a, the game ball received in the through hole 7613e is deepened in the direction of deepening the recess (that is, through the hole). It can be held by being displaced to the side away from the hole 632a). Therefore, when the following game ball abuts (collides) with the preceding game ball held in the through-hole 7613e, the following game ball can be made to easily enter the through-hole 632a.

Furthermore, a variable plate 652 is provided at a position between the exit of the path member 640 and the through hole 7613e and downward in the direction of gravity by protruding so as to be retractable. In this state, the game ball can be guided to the through-hole 632a, so the preceding game ball held in the through-hole 7613e can enter the through-hole 632a using the protruding variable plate 652. can be balled. That is, when the preceding game ball is dropped (dropped) from the through hole 7613e, the preceding game ball can be received by the variable plate 652 and guided to the through hole 632a by the variable plate 652. As a result, the preceding game ball can enter the through hole 632a.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 116, a winning opening unit 8600 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, the variable board 652 of the variable winning device 650 is located at the rear, and the possibility of the game ball winning the through hole 632a is reduced. Even in a state where the variable plate 652 of the winning device 650 is positioned at the rear side, when two game balls are consecutively thrown through the path member 8640, the through hole 632a is easily made to win.

FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 8600 in the eighth embodiment. 113(a) is a front view of the path member 8640, and FIG. 113(b) is a cross-sectional view of the path member 8640 along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113(a).

Note that FIG. 113 omits illustration of the accommodation portion 8643 formed in the path member 8640 . In FIG. 113, the connecting hole 632b and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 630 arranged on the front side of the path member 8640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.

As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, a prize winning port unit 8600 in the eighth embodiment includes a decorative plate 610 having a plurality of prize winning ports 26, 27 and 28, and a A base plate 630 that forms a flow-down path for game balls, a path member 8640 that forms a ball-throwing path for game balls between the base plate 630, and a decorative plate 610 and a base plate 630. A variable prize winning device 650 for guiding the game ball flowing down between the two to either of the prize winning openings 26, 27, 28 is mainly formed.

A base plate 8630 in the eighth embodiment is formed with a second connecting hole 8632e penetrating in the front-rear direction at an intermediate position between the two connecting holes 632b. The size of the opening of the second connecting hole 8632e is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can pass through the inside.

The path member 8640 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box shape with an open base plate 8630 side. The path member 8640 is a member for forming a path that connects the left and right second through holes 631b and 633b formed in the base plate 8630 and the connecting hole 632b or the second connecting hole 8632e, and is formed on the left side in front view. A first path 8641 that connects the second through hole 631b and the connecting hole 632b or the second connecting hole 8632e on the left side in the front view of the base plate 630, and the second through hole 633b and the base plate 630 formed on the right side in the front view. and a second path 8642 that connects the connecting hole 632b or the second connecting hole 8632e on the right side in front view.

In addition, the path member 8640 has a connecting hole 632 b or a second A path switching member 8644 is provided for switching to the connecting hole 8632e.

The path switching member 8644 is housed inside a box-shaped housing portion 8643 continuously formed on the lower surface side of the path member 8640 (see FIG. 112). In addition, the housing portion 8643 is formed in a shape in which the front side (the side of the base plate 8630) is open. Thus, by forming the decorative plate 610 and the base plate 8630 from a transparent material, the switching of the route of the route switching member 8644 can be visually recognized by the player. As a result, the rolling of the game ball can be easily drawn to the player's attention, and the player can be easily aroused.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, detailed description of the path switching member 8644 will be given. Since the respective path switching members 8644 formed on the first path 8641 and the second path 8642 are formed symmetrically, only the left path switching member 8644 will be described, and the right path switching member 8644 will be described. A description of the member 8644 is omitted.

The path switching member 8644 has a variable plate 8644a arranged on the same plane as the bottom surface of the first path 8641 (the surface on which the game ball rolls), one end arranged below the variable plate 8644a, and a central portion It mainly includes a transmission member 8644b that is rotatably pivotally supported by the housing portion 8643, and a regulating member 8644c that is arranged above the other end of the transmission member 8644b and whose central portion is pivotally supported by the housing portion 8643. formed by

The variable plate 8644a is formed of a plate member that is rectangular in top view and has a constant thickness. The top surface of the variable plate 8644a forms part of the bottom surface of the first path 8641 (it is arranged on the same plane as the bottom surface of the path member 8640). That is, like the bottom surface of the path member 8640, the variable plate 8644a is disposed in a downwardly inclined posture from the outside of the path member 8640 in the left-right direction toward the center in the left-right direction. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the first path 8641 can flow downward.

The variable plate 8644a is mainly formed with a through hole 8644a2 penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end and a contact plate 8644a1 projecting in an arc shape from the lower surface at the other end.

A cylindrical rod member (not shown) is inserted through the through hole 8644a2. Therefore, by attaching the rod member to the housing portion 8643, the variable plate 8644a can be rotatably supported by the path member 8640. As shown in FIG. A biasing spring (not shown) is provided between the variable plate 8644a and the housing portion 8643, and the top surface of the variable plate 8644a is flush with the bottom surface of the path member 8640 in a normal state. placed in position.

The transmission member 8644b is formed in a prism shape, and one end thereof is arranged in contact with the contact plate 8644a1 of the variable plate 8644a, and the other end thereof is arranged in contact with the bottom surface of the other end of the regulating member 8644c, which will be described later. be.

Further, the transmission member 8644b is arranged in the accommodating portion 8643 so as to be rotatable about the center position, and can be displaced by displacing the variable plate 8644a.

The regulating member 8644c is formed in the shape of a prism extending to one side, and is formed with a first projection 8644c1 and a second projection 8644c2 that protrude upward from the upper surfaces of the one end side and the other end side, respectively. . In addition, the restricting member 8644c is arranged in the accommodating portion 8643 so as to be rotatable at its intermediate position. Accordingly, the restricting member 8644c can displace the positions of the first projection 8644c1 and the second projection 8644c2 by being displaced.

The first protrusion 8644c1 is disposed so as to be able to pass through a through hole formed through the first path 8641 of the path member 8640 in the gravitational direction. In the normal state (before the variable plate 8644a is displaced (flush with the first path 8641)), the tip of the first protrusion 8644c1 is positioned above the first path 8641 by a biasing spring (not shown). be done.

Furthermore, the protruding position of the first projection 8641c1 is a position overlapping in the front-rear direction with the side surface of the connecting hole 632b on the downstream side of the first path 8641 (the central portion of the path member 860). It is assumed to be the central position. As a result, the game ball rolling on the first path 8641 can be brought into contact with the first projection 8641c1, inserted through the connecting hole 632b, and thrown forward of the base plate 8630.

In addition, the distance dimension between the tip end surface of the first projection 8644c1 and the inner peripheral surface of the path member 8640 facing is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the game ball flowing down the first path 8641 is the first It is prevented to climb over the 1 projection 8644c1.

The second projection 8644 c 2 is disposed so as to be able to pass through the inner peripheral surface of the notch formed in the first path 8641 of the path member 8640 . In addition, the second projection 8644c2 is arranged so that its tip is flush with the first path 8641 in the normal state (the state before the variable plate 8644a is displaced (flat with the first path 8641)). Therefore, in a normal state, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the first path 8641 from being hindered by the second projection 8644c2.

On the other hand, when the regulating member 8644c is displaced and the second projection 8644c2 is arranged above the first path 8641, the tip surface of the second projection 8644c2 is arranged flush with the first path 8641.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the first path 8641 can flow downward without being restricted by the second protrusion 8644c2, passes through the second connecting hole 8632e, and is thrown to the front of the base plate 8630.

In this case, the protruding position of the second protrusion 8644c2 is set on the back side of the connecting hole 632b, and the front-rear direction position is set on the end on the connecting hole 632b side. As a result, the distance between one end of the connecting hole and the second projection 8644c2 facing each other is made smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the game ball rolling on the first path 8641 is inserted through the connecting hole 632b. can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 114, description will be given of how a game ball flows down when one game ball is thrown to the first path 8641. FIG. 114(a) is a front view of the path member 8640, and FIG. 114(b) is a cross-sectional view of the path member 8640. FIG.

Note that FIG. 114 omits illustration of the accommodation portion 8643 formed in the path member 8640 . In FIG. 114, the connecting hole 632b and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 630 arranged on the front side of the path member 8640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. Furthermore, the cross-sectional view of FIG. 114(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 112(b).

As shown in FIG. 114, when one game ball is thrown from the through hole 631b (see FIG. 112) to the path member 8640, the game ball rolls due to the inclination of the first path 8641 and moves toward the connecting hole 632b. be rolled.

The rolling game ball rolls on the upper portion of the variable plate 8644a from the first path 8641, rolls toward the connecting hole 632b, contacts the first protrusion 8644c1 projecting to the back side of the connecting hole 632b, The ball is thrown toward the connecting hole 632b. That is, when one game ball is thrown into the first path 8641, the game ball can be passed through the connecting hole 632b and thrown to the front of the base plate 8630.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116, the case where two game balls are successively flowed down the first path 8641 will be described. 115(a) and 116(a) are front views of the path member 8640, and FIGS. 115(b) and 116(b) are cross-sectional views of the path member 8640. FIG.

115 and 116, the accommodating portion 8643 formed in the path member 8640 is omitted. In FIG. 115, the connecting hole 632b and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 630 arranged on the front side of the path member 8640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. Further, the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 115(b) and 116(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 112(b).

As shown in FIG. 115, when two game balls are continuously thrown from the passage hole 631b (see FIG. 112) to the path member 8640, the game balls roll due to the inclination of the first path 8641 and 632b side.

The rolling game ball rolls from the first path 8641 to the top of the variable plate 8644a. At this time, the gravity of the rolling game ball is made larger than the biasing force of the biasing spring attached to the variable plate 8644a. As a result, when two game balls land on the variable plate 8644a, the variable plate 8644a can be displaced.

When the variable plate 8644a is displaced, the contact plate 8644a1 formed on the variable plate 8644a is displaced downward along with the displacement of the variable plate 8644a. Accordingly, one end of the transmission member 8644b that contacts the tip of the contact plate 8644a1 is displaced downward, and the transmission member 8644b is rotated. By this rotational displacement of the transmission member 8644b, the other side of the transmission member 8644b is displaced upward, and one side of the regulating member 8644c arranged above the other side of the transmission member 8644b is displaced upward. As a result, the first protrusion 8644c1 of the regulating member 8644c is displaced downward and the second protrusion 8644c2 is displaced upward.

When the second protrusion 8644c2 protrudes upward, the game ball rolls on the first path 8641 as described above, and can roll to the back side of the second connecting hole 8632e. Therefore, of the two game balls, the preceding game ball can be thrown to the front side of the base plate 8630 through the second connecting hole 8632e.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116, when the preceding game ball rides on the first path 8641 closer to the connecting hole 632b than the variable plate 8644a from the top of the variable plate 8644a, the urging ball is attached to the variable plate 8644a. The biasing force of the spring becomes larger than the gravity of the game ball, the state in which the second protrusion 8644c2 is positioned upward is released, and the first protrusion 8644c1 is displaced to the state in which it is positioned upward.

In this case, the preceding game ball than the first projection 8644c1, since it is rolling to the position of the second connecting hole 8632e side, as described above to pass through the second connecting hole 8632e forward of the base plate 8630 can be thrown to

On the other hand, the following game ball is positioned above the variable plate 8644a, so it abuts against the first protrusion 8644c1 and is thrown toward the connecting hole 632b. That is, the following game ball is thrown forward of the base plate 8630 through the connecting hole 632b.

In this way, the guide means for guiding the game ball is the variable plate 8644a on which the game ball passing through the path member 8640 rolls, and the variable plate 8644a is interlockably connected to the first position (FIG. 113 ( a)) and a second position (position shown in FIG. 115(a)) and a regulating member 8644c for changing the course of the game ball passing through the path member 8640, The course of the game ball in the state where the member 8644c is displaced to the second position is a course that makes it easier for the ball to enter the through hole 632a than the course of the game ball in the state where the member 8644c is displaced to the first position. When the first number of game balls rolls, the regulating member 8644c is displaced to the second position, and the variable plate 8644a is set to a number less than the first number (two balls in this embodiment). When two game balls (in this embodiment, one ball) roll, the restricting member 8644c is displaced to the first position, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

That is, it is easier for the ball to enter the through hole 632a when the first number of game balls, which is larger than the second number, flows down than when the second number of game balls flow down. (The number of game balls passing through the path member 8640 can change the ease of entering the through-hole 632a.) The player can also be made to pay attention to the number of leaked game balls. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the regulating member 8644c is disposed downstream of the variable plate 8644a, the destination (path) of a predetermined game ball is related to the number and degree of connection of game balls following the predetermined game ball. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. That is, when the following game balls are connected (that is, when three or more game balls are connected in this embodiment), the number of game balls rolling on the variable plate 8644a is the first. While maintaining the number, the regulating member 8644c is maintained at the second position, and each game ball that reaches the regulating member 8644c can be easily entered into the through hole 632a. When the number of game balls that are divided and roll on the variable plate 8644a is equal to or less than the second number, the regulation member 8644c is displaced to the first position, and each game ball that reaches the regulation member 8644c is removed as described above. It is possible to make it more difficult for the ball to enter the through hole 632a than when the regulation member 8644c is displaced to the second position. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of following game balls and the degree of connection thereof. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, a winning opening unit 9600 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 122. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, the variable board 652 of the variable winning device 650 is located at the rear, and the possibility of the game ball winning the through hole 632a is reduced. Even in the state where the variable plate 652 of the winning device 650 is positioned at the rear, when a plurality of hitting game balls are thrown through the path member 9640, it is made easy to win the through hole 632a.

FIG. 117 is a front view of the winning opening unit 9600 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 9600. FIG. In FIG. 117, the illustration of the decorative plate 610 is omitted, and the outline of the path member 9640 arranged on the back side is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, a prize winning port unit 9600 in the ninth embodiment includes a decorative plate 610 having a plurality of prize winning ports 26, 27 and 28, and a A base plate 9630 that forms a flow-down path for game balls in the base plate 9630, a path member 9640 that forms a ball-throwing path for game balls between the base plate 9630, a base plate 9630, and a decorative plate 610 and the base plate 9630 It is mainly formed with a variable winning device 650 that guides the game ball flowing down between the opposing to the through hole 632a.

A base plate 9630 in the ninth embodiment is formed with a second connecting hole 8632e penetrating in the front-rear direction at an intermediate position between the two connecting holes 632b. Also, the second connecting hole 8632e is arranged below the connecting hole 632b.

The path member 9640 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open base plate 8630 side. The path member 8640 is a member for forming a path that connects the second through holes 631b and 633b formed in the base plate 8630 and the connecting hole 632b or the second connecting hole 8632e.

The path member 9640 includes a first path 9641 formed on the left side of the front view and connecting the second through hole 631b and the connecting hole 632b of the base plate 9630 on the left side of the front view, and formed below the first path 9641, A third path 9645 connecting the first path 9641 and the second connecting hole 8632e, and a second path connecting the second through hole 633b formed on the right side in front view and the connecting hole 632b on the right side in front view of the base plate 9630. 9642 and a fourth path 9646 formed below the second path 9642 and connecting the second path 9642 and the second connecting hole 8632e.

In addition, the path member 9640 provides a rolling path of the game ball rolling on the first path 9641 or the second path 9642 in the middle of each path of the first path 9641 or the second path 9642. A path switching member 9644 for switching to the path 9646 is provided.

Next, the path member 9640 will be described with reference to FIG. 119(a) and 119(b) are front views of the path member 9640. FIG. In FIG. 119, the second through holes 631b and 633b, the connecting hole 632b, and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 9630 arranged in front of the path member 9640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 119, the path switching member 9644 arranged on the path member 9640 is composed of a variable plate 9644a formed of a plate-like body. The variable plate 9644a is disposed (pivotally supported) on the path member 9640 in a rotatable state at one end side (terminating side in the rolling direction of the game ball (connection hole 632b side)), and between the path member 9640 An urging spring (not shown) is arranged so that the other end is urged upward.

In addition, the variable plate 9644a is disposed with its upper surface flush with the rolling surface of the first path 9641 or the second path 9642 (see FIG. 119(a)). Furthermore, the variable plate 944a rotates and tilts the other end side downward to the third path 9645 or the fourth path 9646 when a force greater than the biasing force of the biasing spring is applied from the game ball rolling on the upper surface. 119(b)).

Next, referring to FIG. 120, the case where one game ball is thrown to the path member 9640 will be described. 120(a) and 120(b) are front views of the path member 9640. FIG. In FIG. 120, the second through holes 631b and 633b, the connecting hole 632b, and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 9630 arranged in front of the path member 9640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. 120(a) and 120(b), the transition states when the game ball rolls inside the path member 9640 are illustrated in order.

Furthermore, in the following description, since the game balls thrown from the second through holes 631b and 633b only roll in opposite directions, only the game balls rolling on the left side will be described, and the game balls on the right side will be described. Description of the rolling game ball is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 120(a) and 120(b), when the game ball thrown from the second through hole 631b to the inside of the path member 9640 is one ball, the first path 9641 and the variable plate 9644a , and is thrown to the connecting hole 632b. That is, when one game ball is thrown to the path member 9640, the game ball can pass through the connecting hole 632b and be thrown to the front side of the base plate 9630.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122, the case where two game balls are thrown to the path member 9640 will be described. 121(a) and 121(b) are front views of the winning opening unit 9600, and FIGS. 122(a) and 122(b) are front views of the winning opening unit 9600. FIG. 121 and 122, the second through holes 631b and 633b, the connecting hole 632b, and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 9630 arranged in front of the path member 9640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. . 121 to 122, transition states when the game ball rolls inside the path member 9640 are illustrated in order.

As shown in FIGS. 122(a) and 122(b), when two or more game balls are thrown to the inside of the path member 9640 from the second through hole 631b, the two game balls are placed in the second When it rolls from the first path 9641 to the upper surface of the variable plate 9644a, the other end side of the variable plate 9644a rotates downward.

That is, the biasing force for biasing the variable plate 9644a is set to be larger than the load applied to the upper surface of the variable plate 9644a by one game ball and smaller than the load applied to the upper surface by two game balls. set. Thereby, the variable plate 9644a can be displaced only when two game balls roll on the upper surface of the variable plate 9644a.

When the variable plate 9644a is displaced, the other end side of the variable plate 9644a is displaced to the upper surface of the third path 9645 as described above, and the game ball can be thrown to the third path 9645.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), when two game balls are thrown to the third path 9645, the load applied to the upper surface of the variable plate 9644a disappears, so the variable plate 9644a is displaced by the biasing force and the other end side is displaced upward (to the position before the game ball is thrown).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 122(b), the game ball thrown to the third path 9645 can be thrown to the second connecting hole 8632 side. As a result, the two game balls roll on the third path 9645 and are thrown from the second connecting hole 8632 to the front side of the base plate 9630 .

That is, when two game balls are continuously thrown to the path member 9640 , both balls can pass through the second connecting hole 8632 and be thrown to the front side of the base plate 9630 .

Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, when two or more game balls flow down in the vicinity without winning the left start winning hole 26, the possibility of winning both of the two balls can be given. As a result, it is possible to easily give interest to the player.

Next, the path switching member 10670 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 130. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the ninth embodiment described above, the switching between the first route 9641 and the third route 9645 is performed by the load of the game ball. A case in which the switching of the path is performed by the displacement of the path switching member 10670 and the magnetic force will be described.

First, the configuration of the path switching member 10670 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 123(a) is a top view of the path switching member 10670 in the tenth embodiment, FIG. 123(b) is a front view of the path switching member 10670, and FIG. 123(c) is a path switching member 10670. is an exploded perspective front view of the.

As shown in FIG. 123, the path switching member 10670 mainly includes a cylindrical base member 10671 and a plurality of magnets 10672 arranged inside the base member 10671 .

The base member 10671 mainly includes a lower base member 10671b arranged downward in the direction of gravity and having a recessed interior, and an upper base member 10671a arranged above the lower base member 10671b. It is formed.

The lower base member 10671b has a groove portion 10671b1 that is recessed radially inward on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and a recess portion 10671b2 that is axially recessed from the upper surface side inside the groove portion 10671b1, and is formed through the center of the lower base member 10671b. through-holes 10671b3 and 10671b3.

The grooves 10671b1 are formed at a plurality of locations (four locations in this embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the lower base member 10671b. The groove portion 10671b1 is a surface that attracts a game ball to its inner surface by the magnetic force of a magnet 10672, which will be described later, and is recessed with a width smaller than the outer shape of the game ball.

The recessed portion 10671b2 is a hole that accommodates a magnet 10672, which will be described later, and is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the magnet 10672. As shown in FIG. This allows the magnet 10672 to be housed inside.

The through hole 10671b3 is a hole into which a magnet 10672 to be described later and a shaft of a drive motor (not shown) are fitted. The path switching member 10670 can be rotated by the driving force of the drive motor by connecting (internally fitting) the shaft of the drive motor to the through hole 10671b3.

The upper base member 10671a is formed to have substantially the same outer diameter as the lower base member 10671b, and is arranged to cover the upper portion of the lower base member 10671b, so that the magnet 10672 accommodated in the recess 10671b2 can be pulled out. can be prevented.

A through hole 10671a1 is formed through the axis of the upper base member 10671a. Rotation of the path switching member 10670 can be stabilized by fitting the shaft of the drive motor into the through holes 10671a1 and 10671b3.

The magnet 10672 is accommodated in the recess 10671b2 formed inside the groove 10671b1, so that a magnetic force can be applied to the outer peripheral surface of the groove 10671b1. Thereby, the game ball can be attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 (groove portion 10671b1).

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the path on which the path switching member 10670 is arranged will be described. FIG. 124(a) is a top view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, 10645. FIG. FIG. 124(b) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, 10645 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVb in FIG. 124(a). FIG. 124(c) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, 10645 viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124(a). FIG. 124(d) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, 10645 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a).

124(a) to 124(d), each route 10641, 10642, 10645 is schematically illustrated. Also, in FIG. 124(d), the second path 10642 and the third path 10645 are illustrated with chain lines.

As shown in FIGS. 124( a ) to 124 ( d ), the first path 10641 is curved along the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 . In addition, the first path 10641 is formed with a bottom surface located below the center position of the groove portion 10671b1 in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 123(b)) by approximately the radius of the game ball. The bottom surface of the first path 10641 is formed to be inclined toward the path switching member 10670 side, and walls are formed to stand upward in the direction of gravity from both ends in the rolling direction. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the first path 10641 can roll toward the path switching member 10670 side.

Moreover, the wall portion erected on the first path 10641 is not formed at a position along the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 . Thereby, the game ball rolling on the first path 10641 can be attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 10641a1 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 .

The upstream side of the first path 10641 is connected to the rear side of the second through holes 631b and 633b that are formed through the base plate 630 of the prize winning port unit 600 . Therefore, the game ball thrown into the second through-holes 631b and 633b can be guided to the path switching member 10670 by rolling the first path 10641 .

The second path 10642 is arranged such that the starting end side of the second path 10642 is spaced apart from the terminal side of the first path 10641 in the circumferential direction of the path switching member 10670 by a predetermined distance, and along the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 It is formed. The second path 10642 and the first path 10641 are formed at the same position in the axial direction of the path switching member 10670 .

In addition, the second path 10642 may be formed at a position higher than the first path 10641. In this case, as will be described later, the following game ball sticks to the preceding game ball and hangs down to the preceding game ball. When it does, it is possible to make it difficult to apply the load of the following game ball applied to the attracting surface.

The third path 10645 is formed below the second path 10642 in the gravitational direction (lower side in FIG. 124(d)). Further, the starting end side of the third path 10645 is formed to extend in the circumferential direction of the path switching member 10670 from the second path 10642 . That is, the starting end side of the third route 10645 is closer to the terminal end side of the first route 10641 than the starting end side of the second route 10642 .

The downstream side (terminal side) of the second path 10642 is connected to the rear side of the connecting hole 632b, and the downstream side (terminal side) of the third path is connected to the second connecting hole 8632e. That is, the game ball thrown to the third path 10645 can be more likely to win the through-hole 632a than the second path 10642.

Further, the path switching member 10670 is connected to the drive motor as described above, and is rotationally displaced by the drive of the drive motor. The rotation direction of the path switching member 10670 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from above (viewed in the direction of FIG. 124(a)).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126, the case where one game ball is thrown to the first path 10641 will be described. 125(a) is a top view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, 10645, and FIG. 125(b) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, 10645. 126(a) is a top view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, 10645, and FIG. 126(b) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, 10645.

125(b) corresponds to FIG. 124(b), and FIG. 126(b) corresponds to FIG. 124(d).

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, when the game ball is thrown to the first path 10641, the game ball rolls on the first path 10641 and rolls along the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670. be. In this case, as described above, the path switching member 10670 is formed with the groove 10671b1 on its outer peripheral surface, and the magnet 10672 disposed inside allows the game ball to be attracted to its outer peripheral surface. , the game ball rolling on the first path 10641 can be attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 10671b1.

As described above, the path switching member 10670 is rotationally displaced by the drive motor, so by rotating the path switching member 10670 with the game ball attracted to the groove 10671b1, the game ball is sent to the second path 10642. can do.

In addition, the game ball transported to the second path 10642 in a state of being sucked to the groove 10671b1 is dropped from the groove 10671b1 by coming into contact with the standing wall formed on the side surface of the second path 10642.

As described above, when one game ball rolls on the first path 10641 , the game ball can be thrown to the second path 10642 .

In addition, when the game ball rolling on the first path 10641 is not attracted to the groove part 10671b1, the game ball in the gap formed between the end side of the first path 10641 and the start side of the second path 10642 is thrown to a predetermined recovery path.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130, the case where two game balls are continuously thrown (dropped) to the first path 10641 will be described. 127(a), 128(a), 129(a) and 130(a) are top views of the route switching member 10670 and the respective routes 10641, 10642 and 10645; 128(b), 129(b) and 130(b) are side views of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642 and 10645. FIG.

127(b) corresponds to FIG. 124(b), FIG. 128(b) corresponds to FIG. 124(c), FIG. 129(b) corresponds to FIG. 124(c), and FIG. c) and respectively. 127 to 130 sequentially illustrate transition states in which two game balls are thrown.

First, as shown in FIGS. 127(a) and 127(b), when two game balls are successively thrown to the first path 10641, the preceding game ball moves into the groove of the path switching member 10670. It is attracted to the inner surface of 10671b1. As a result, the attracted game ball (preceding game ball) is magnetized, and the subsequent game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the preceding game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 128(a) and 128(b), the path switching member 10670 rotates while the preceding game ball is attracted to the inside of the groove portion 10671b1, and the preceding game ball passes through the first path 10641 and When positioned in the gap of the second path 10642, the following game ball is suspended (suspended) below the preceding game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 130(b), when the path switching member 10670 is further rotated in a state in which the trailing game ball is suspended below the leading game ball, the leading game ball A tip portion 10642a formed on the first path 10641 side of the plate forming the bottom surface of the second path 10642 is inserted between the game ball and the following game ball.

The tip portion 10642a is formed in a tapered flat plate shape, and includes a game ball (preceding game ball) attracted to the lower surface of the path switching member 10670 and a game ball (rear game ball) attracted to the game ball and suspended downward. Since it is arranged in a substantially horizontal posture at a height position where the tip is inserted into the adsorption position between the path switching member 10670 and the game ball that runs, the game ball preceding the lower surface of the path switching member 10670 is adsorbed and its When the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball, the attraction between these game balls is smoothly released, and only the following game ball (the game ball hung below) is released. Can be easily removed.

Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b), the following game ball is dropped from the outer peripheral surface of the preceding game ball. Therefore, the preceding game ball can be thrown to the first path 10641, and the following game ball can be thrown to the second path 10642, respectively. That is, when game balls are continuously thrown to the first path 10641, one ball can be thrown to an advantageous path. As a result, it is possible to give interest to the player.

Thus, the guide means for guiding the game ball includes a rotatably formed path switching member 10670 and a magnet disposed on the path switching member 10670 that attracts the game ball to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 in a hanging state. 10672, the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the route switching member 10670 by the magnet 10672 is positioned on the trajectory accompanying the rotation of the route switching member 10670, so that the game ball comes into contact with the game ball and falls out of the route switching member 10670. The tip portion 10642a is located below the first (preceding) game ball attracted to the outer surface of the route switching member 10670 in the direction of gravity, and the outer surface of the route switching member 10670 A game ball dropped from the path switching member 10670 due to contact with the tip portion 10642a is more likely to enter the through-hole 632a than a game ball that is sucked and thrown. can be improved.

That is, one (or two or more) game balls are further attracted to the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the route switching member 10670 than when only one game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the route switching member 10670. (The number of game balls passing through the passage member can change the ease of ball entry into the through hole 632a.) The player can also be made to pay attention to the number of game balls that have failed to enter 27. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, in the tenth embodiment, even if a plurality of game balls roll toward the path switching member 10670, if the game balls are connected, the game ball preceding the path switching member 10670 While attracting and easily attracting the game ball following the preceding game ball, at least the following game ball can be easily entered into the through hole 632a, while the game balls are separated by a predetermined interval. , the game ball preceding the path switching member 10670 can be attracted, but the game ball following the preceding game ball cannot be attracted, and the following game ball is also the path switching member 10670 (with the preceding game ball is attracted to another magnet 10672). That is, both the leading and trailing balls are made difficult to enter the through hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the number of game balls but also to how they are connected. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the tenth embodiment, the game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the route switching member 10670 in a hanging state, and the game ball is thrown in the hanging state as the route switching member 10670 rotates. It is also possible to form a mode in which the game ball drops out of the path switching member 10670 as an unstable state of swinging due to variations in the rolling speed, rolling direction, attraction position, and the like. That is, even when only one game ball is attracted to the path switching member 10670 (when it does not come into contact with the tip portion 10642a), the game ball falls off and is easily made to enter the through hole 632a. can perform.

Furthermore, when only one game ball is attracted to the path switching member 10670, it is possible to suppress the tip portion 10642a from acting on the game ball, making it easier to maintain the attraction of the game ball. That is, even if the attraction-like body of the game ball to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 is unstable, when the game ball is thrown to the entrance of the second path 10642, it is not obstructed by the third path 10643. 2 paths 10642.

Therefore, when only one game ball is attracted to the path switching member 10670 and hangs down (hanging), and when two or more game balls are attracted to the path switching member 10670 and hang down in a row The difference in the ease with which a ball can enter the through-hole 632a at 1 can be made clearer. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the number of game balls and how they are connected. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the variable winning device 11650 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 137. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the first embodiment, the connection hole 632b and the insertion hole 632c are formed separately, but in the eleventh embodiment, the connection hole 11632b and the insertion hole 11632c are connected.

First, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133, the configuration of the winning opening unit 11600 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 131 is a front view of the winning opening unit 11600 in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 11600. FIG. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 11600. FIG. In FIG. 131, the illustration of the decorative plate 610 is omitted, and the outer shape of the path member 11640 is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, a prize winning port unit 11600 in the eleventh embodiment includes a decorative plate 610 having a plurality of prize winning ports 26, 27 and 28, and a A base plate 11630 that forms a flow-down path for game balls, a path member 11640 that forms a ball-throwing path for game balls between the base plate 11630, and a decorative plate 610 and the base plate 11630. It is mainly formed with a variable winning device 11650 that guides the game ball flowing down between and to the through hole 632a.

The central recessed portion 632 of the base plate 11630 includes a through hole 632a penetrating through the base plate 630 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, two through holes 11632c penetrating on both sides of the through hole 632a, and the through holes 11632c. and a connecting hole 11632b continuously formed above the .

The insertion hole 11632c is an opening into which a variable plate 11652 of a variable prize winning device 11650, which will be described later, is inserted.

The connecting hole 11632b is an opening through which a game ball thrown through the path member 11640, which will be described later, is discharged to the front side of the base plate 11630. and formed through.

The path member 11640 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box shape with the base plate 630 side opened. The path member 11640 is a member for forming a path that connects the second through holes 631b, 633b and the connecting hole 11632b, and is formed on the left side of the front view, and the second through hole 631b and the base plate 630 are on the left side of the front view. and a second path 11642 formed on the right side in front view and connecting the second through hole 633b and the connection hole 11632b on the right side in front view of the base plate 11630. be.

In addition, a recessed portion 11647 cut vertically is formed on the bottom surface of the first path 11641 and the second path 11642 on the center side in the left-right direction. A variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 is arranged inside the recessed portion 11647 . Thereby, the game ball rolling on the first path 11641 and the second path 11642 can be thrown to the top of the variable plate 11652 before passing through the connecting hole 11632b.

In the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650, a plurality of concave portions 11652a extending in the left-right direction are formed in parallel in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the tip side thereof. The concave portion 11652a is formed linearly, and extends in different directions on the side far from the through hole 632a and on the side close to the through hole 632a. The recess 11652a on the far side from the through hole 632a is formed parallel to the left-right direction. On the other hand, the recessed portion 11652a formed closer to the through hole 632a is inclined toward the front side toward the through hole 632a.

Next, referring to FIG. 134, the displacement of variable winning device 11650 will be described. 134(a) and 134(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 11600 taken along line CXXXIV-CXXXIV in FIG. 134(a) shows the variable winning device 11650 before displacement, and FIG. 134(b) shows the variable winning device 11650 after displacement. In addition, although illustration of the decorative plate 610 is omitted in FIG. 131 , the decorative plate 610 is illustrated in FIG. 134 .

As shown in FIGS. 134(a) and 134(b), the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 before being displaced is positioned such that the concave portion 11652a is adjacent to the end of the first path 11641. As shown in FIGS. On the other hand, the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 after being displaced is arranged at a position where the concave portion 11652a protrudes to the front side of the base plate 11630 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b), with the game ball on the top of the variable board 11652, the variable board 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 is extended to the front side. give an explanation.

135(a) and 135(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 11600. FIG. 135(a) corresponds to FIG. 134(a), and FIG. 135(b) corresponds to FIG. 134(b). Further, only the rolling of the game ball on the left side in the horizontal direction will be described below, and the description on the right side will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b), when a game ball is thrown to the upper part of the variable plate 11652 which is retracted to the rear side, the variable plate 11652 is displaced to the front side. Then, as the variable plate 11652 is displaced, the game ball can be displaced forward.

In this case, since the concave portion 11652a is formed on the upper surface of the variable plate 11652, the frictional force between the variable plate 11652 and the game ball can be increased. to prevent it from staying in that position. Therefore, the game ball can be displaced forward as the variable plate 11652 is displaced.

As described above, the game ball can be displaced to the front side (the front side of the base plate 11630) along with the displacement of the variable plate 11652, so that the game ball can enter the through hole 632a more easily than in the first embodiment. can do.

That is, since the variable plate 11652 forms a bottom surface (rolling surface) connected to the connecting hole 632b of the path member 11640, even if the variable plate 11652 is not protruded (that is, is retracted), the game ball can be moved. It can be positioned on the variable plate 11652, and the time for the game ball to be positioned on the variable plate 11652 can be secured accordingly. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the path member 11640 can easily enter the through hole 632a, and the player can have a stronger expectation of entering the through hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The upper surface of the variable plate 11652 forming the bottom surface of the path member 11640 is formed with a recess 11652a that guides the game ball positioned on the upper surface toward the through hole 632a. When the variable plate 11652 is projected from a state in which a game ball is positioned on the upper surface of a certain variable plate 11652, the game ball can be projected while being guided toward the through hole 632a by the action of the concave portion 11652a. , the game ball can be easily entered into the through hole 632a.

As the concave portion 11652a, a convex line or a concave groove (or a combination of these) is provided so as to extend in a direction closer to the through hole 632a toward the tip of the variable plate 11652 in the projecting direction, and to be convexly or concavely provided on the upper surface. are exemplified. The cross-sectional shape of the ridges and grooves is arbitrary, and examples thereof include rectangular cross-sections, polygonal cross-sections, and arcuate cross-sections (or cross-sections of shapes combining these).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136(a) to 136(c), description of the case where the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 is retracted to the rear side while the game ball is on the top of the variable plate 11652 do.

136(a) to 136(c) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 11600. FIG. 136(a) corresponds to FIG. 134(b), FIG. 136(c) corresponds to FIG. 134(a), and FIG. 136(b) corresponds to FIGS. 136(a) and 136(c). An intermediate position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 136(a) to 136(c), when the game ball is rolling inside the variable plate 11652, when the variable plate 11652 is displaced to the rear side, the variable plate 11652 The game ball can be displaced to the through hole 632a side by the inclined surface of the concave portion 11652a formed in the inner portion.

Therefore, as the variable plate 11652 is displaced, the game ball can be displaced toward the through hole 632a, so that the game ball can easily enter the through hole 632a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, when the variable plate 11652 is displaced, the time during which the game ball can be affected by the variable plate 11652 will be described.

FIG. 137(a) is a time chart showing changes over time in the amount of displacement of the variable plate 11652, and FIG. 137(b) is a time chart showing changes over time in the amount of displacement of the variable plate 652 in the first embodiment. .

On the horizontal axis, "t0" is the time at which the variable plate 11652 and the variable plate 652 start sliding in the direction of projection (toward the front) from the retracted state, and "t5" is the retracted state. It shows the time when the slide displacement in the (retreat to the back side) direction is completed and the immersion state is reached. On the vertical axis, "open position" indicates that the variable plate 11652 and the variable plate 652 have been slid to the maximum projecting position.

In this embodiment, as described above, the variable plate 11652 forms part of the rolling surface of the path member 11640. Therefore, when the variable plate 11652 starts sliding displacement in the projecting direction, If a game ball exists (is placed on it), the game ball can be acted upon by the variable plate 11652 (the ball can easily enter the through hole 632a). That is, the action from the variable plate 11652 can be applied to the game ball from time t0 in FIG. 137(a). Note that the time t4 is a time that has elapsed from the time t0 shorter than the time t3.

In addition, as described above, the upper surface of the variable plate 11652 is formed with a plurality of recesses 11652a. If there is a game ball in (if it is on), the game ball can be acted upon by the variable plate 11652 (recessed portion 11652a) (made easy to enter the through hole 632a). That is, until time t3 in FIG. 137(a), the action from the variable plate 11652 can be given to the game ball.

On the other hand, in the variable plate 652 of the first embodiment, when the variable plate 652 is retracted (retracted), the game ball receives action from the variable plate 652 (the game ball is made easier to enter the through hole 632a). ), and after the amount of protrusion of the variable plate 652 reaches a predetermined amount (the amount of protrusion on which the game ball is placed on the upper surface), it is possible to receive an action from the variable plate 652 . That is, the action from the variable plate 652 cannot be received until after time t2 in FIG. 137(b).

If the upper surface of the variable plate 11652 is formed as a closing and sliding surface like the variable plate 652 in the first embodiment, the upper surface of the variable plate 11652 is slidably displaced in the retraction direction. Even if a game ball exists (or is on it), the game ball cannot receive an action from the variable plate 652 (upper surface) (make it easier to enter the through hole 632a). In this case, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable plate 652, thereby making it easier to enter the through hole 632a. That is, the action from the variable plate 652 can be given to the game ball only until the time t4 in FIG.

Thus, according to this embodiment, the time during which the game ball can be affected by the variable plate 11652 can be made longer than in the case of the first embodiment (t4-t2<t3-t0). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the through hole 632a.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the case where the radially inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotating body 372R is formed on a plane orthogonal to the radial direction has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. may be formed so as to be inclined with respect to a direction perpendicular to the radial direction.

In the above-described first and third embodiments, when viewed in the radial direction of the rotors 372R and 3372R, the outer shape of the magnet 372Rb is formed smaller than the grooves 372Rc2 and 3372Rc2 of the second rotors 372Rc and 3372Rc. However, the outer diameter of the magnet 372Rb may be formed larger than the grooves 372Rc2 and 3372Rc2 of the second rotors 372Rc and 3372Rc. In this case, since the range where the game ball is attracted to the groove portion 372Rc2 can be increased, it is possible to create a state in which the game ball is more likely to be attracted by the outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating bodies 372R and 3372R.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the case where the magnets 372Rb and 2372Rb are disposed inside the rotors 372R, 2372R, 3372R and 4372R has been described. may be arranged at positions substantially corresponding to the outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R, and 4372R. That is, the magnets 372Rb and 2372Rb may be arranged in an exposed state.

It is preferable that the outer peripheral surfaces of the magnets 372Rb and 2372Rb are arranged so as to substantially match the recessed end surfaces of the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2 and 3372Rc of the second rotors 372Rc, 2372Rc, 3372Rc and 4372Rc. In this case, due to the rotation of the rotors 372R, 2372R, 3372R, 4372R, the game ball thrown to the sixth ball path KR6 can be directly attracted to the magnets 372Rb, 2372Rb and can be thrown to the seventh ball path KR7. Therefore, since the attracting surfaces of the magnets 372Rb and 2372Rb can be visually recognized by the store clerk or the player, when the magnets are damaged, the store clerk or the player can immediately recognize it, and the pachinko machine 10 can be damaged. We can respond immediately.

In the first to third embodiments described above, the rotors 372R, 2372R, 3372R move the sixth ball path KR6 when the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372c are disposed adjacent to the sixth ball path KR6. Although the case where the falling game ball is attracted has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the stopper portion 396 may be displaced, the game ball flowing down the sixth ball path may be stopped, and the stopped game ball may be attracted by rotating the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, and 3372R. In this case, by displacing the stopper portion 396, it is possible to form a case where the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R and the game ball are attracted to each other. 396 displacements can be shown. As a result, the player can visually recognize a plurality of throwing patterns, so that the player can be entertained.

In the above-described first embodiment, the variable winning device 650 in which the variable plate 652 is slidably displaced in the front-rear direction is disposed in the winning opening unit 600. However, the variable plate 652 is not necessarily limited to this. However, one end may be rotationally displaced around an axis. In this case, since the player can easily see the displacement of the variable plate 652 , the player can easily perform a game such as hitting a game ball into the game area in accordance with the movement of the variable plate 652 . Therefore, it is possible to give interest to the player.

In the first embodiment, the case where the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is arranged below the path member 640 in the direction of gravity has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the variable plate 652 of the variable prize winning device 650 may be formed as part of the lower end surface of the path member 640 .

That is, a part of the first path 641 and the second path 642 of the path member 640 may be formed on the upper surface of the variable plate 652 . In this case, when the variable plate 652 is slid with a game ball on its upper surface, the game ball can be displaced forward in accordance with the sliding displacement. Therefore, since the game ball can be brought closer to the through hole 632a in accordance with the slide displacement, the probability of the game ball winning (ball entering) the through hole 632a can be increased. In order to prevent the game ball on the upper surface from slipping when the variable plate 652 is slid, it is preferable that the upper end surface of the variable plate 652 is uneven to increase the frictional resistance.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the variable plate 9644a is inclined downward in the direction away from the second connecting hole 8632 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the variable plate 96644a may be inclined downward toward the second connecting hole 8632 .

In this case, the game balls sent to the third path 9645 and the fourth path 9646 can be smoothly sent to the second connecting hole 8632 . That is, the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the variable plate 9644a can be the direction toward the second connecting hole 8632e.

Further, the tilting direction of the variable plate 9644a may be inclined downward toward the back side of the winning opening unit 9600, or may be inclined downward toward the front side of the winning opening unit 9600.

In the fifth embodiment, when displacing the releasing member 5372Rd disposed on the rotating body 5372R, by displacing a part of the releasing member 5372Rd radially outward of the rotating body 5372R, the preceding game ball rotates. Although the case of releasing the adsorption with the body 5372R has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this.

Description will be made with reference to FIG. FIG. 138(a) is a side view of the rotating body 13572R, FIG. 138(b) is a top view of the rotating body 13572R, and FIG. FIG. 138(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 13572R taken along line CXXXVIIId-CXXXVIIId of FIG. 138(b).

As shown in FIG. 138, the release member 13572Rd is arranged on the rotating body 13572R in a rotatable state about one end thereof, and the magnet 372Rb is arranged on the release member 13572Rd.

The release member 13572Rd is formed by extending from the inner peripheral portion of a groove portion 372Rc2 recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 13572R, and a part of the releasing member 13572Rd protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 13572R. A pressing portion 5372Rd2 is provided.

The magnet 372b is positioned radially inward of the groove 372Rc2 and is attached to a portion of the release member 13572Rd extending from the inner peripheral portion of the groove 372Rc2.

Therefore, when the pressing portion 5372Rd2 is pressed by a following game ball, the magnet 372Rd can be displaced radially inward of the rotor 13572R. As a result, since the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb acting on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 13572R is weakened, the preceding game ball attracted to the rotating body 13572 can be dropped.

In the above-described first embodiment, the recessed depth of the groove portion 372Rc2 describes the case where the game ball is brought into contact with the bottom surface of the groove portion 372Rc2, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the recess depth of the groove portion 372Rc2 may be set to a dimension such that the game ball does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 when the game ball is fitted in the groove portion 372Rc2. In this case, the inner edge of the groove portion 372Rc2 (the ridge between the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 and the outer peripheral surface of the rotor 372R) can be brought into contact with the game ball. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown with the rotation of the rotating body 372R, it is possible to suppress the game ball from wobbling in the rotating direction of the rotating body 372R, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being released from the adsorption. .

In particular, when the game ball is thrown with the rotation of the rotating body 372R, the vertical component of gravity acting on the game ball (groove portion 372Rc2) before and after passing the uppermost position in the direction of gravity is reduced. Since the direction is reversed, the game ball tends to wobble in the rotation direction of the rotating body 372R due to the reaction to the reverse. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the inner edge of the groove portion 372Rc2 (the ridge line between the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R) can be brought into contact with the game ball, that is, the rotating direction of the rotating body 372R. Since the game ball can be sandwiched between the inner edges of the groove portion 372Rc2 from both sides, it is possible to suppress the game ball from wobbling in the rotating direction of the rotating body 372R, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the release of the game ball from being sucked.

In the first embodiment, the case where the plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged on the rear side of each of the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b has been explained, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one LED 355a may be arranged at a position straddling the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b. In this case, since the number of LEDs 355a can be reduced, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

In the tenth embodiment described above, the case where two game balls are adsorbed (drooping) to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, three game balls may be adsorbed (hanging) on the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 .

In this case, by arranging the vertical position of the tip part 10642a of the second path 10642 below the first path 10641 by the diameter of the game ball, the preceding two game balls are placed on the second path 10642. After throwing, the following game ball can be thrown to the third path. In addition, by making the vertical position of the tip part 10642a of the second path 10642 substantially the same as that of the first path 10641, the leading game ball is thrown to the second path 10642, and the following two balls are thrown. A game ball can be thrown to the third path 10643 . That is, when a plurality of game balls are sucked (drooping) to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670, the number of balls to be thrown to the second path 10642 can be arbitrarily set, and the degree of freedom in design can be enhanced.

In the tenth embodiment described above, when two game balls are adsorbed (drooping) to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670, the tip part 10642a is inserted between the game balls to divide them. It is not limited. For example, the abutting member may be brought into contact with the outer surface of the trailing game ball that hangs down from the leading game ball to drop the trailing game ball together with the leading game ball.

In addition, as a shape for dropping the following game ball together with the preceding game ball, the lower end side of the groove portion 10671b1 formed in the path switching member 10670 is connected to the lower surface side of the lower base member 10671b (path switching member 10670). It is preferable that the step between the lower surface of the groove portion 10671b1 and the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 is eliminated. By connecting the lower end side of the groove portion 10671b1 formed in the route switching member 10670 to the lower surface side of the lower base member 10671b (route switching member 10670), it follows the preceding game ball attracted to the outer surface of the route switching member 10670. When the game ball sticks (hangs down), the preceding game ball does not come into contact with the lower end surface of the groove portion 10671b1, so the preceding game ball can be easily displaced downward. Therefore, the preceding game ball and the following game ball can be dropped from the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 .

Further, the groove portion 10671b1 may be formed on the same peripheral surface as the outer peripheral surface of the lower base member 10671b (path switching member 10670). In this case, when the game ball following the preceding game ball attracted to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 is sucked (drooping), the preceding game ball does not contact the lower end surface of the groove portion 10671b1, so the preceding The game ball to be played can be easily displaced downward. Therefore, the preceding game ball and the following game ball can be dropped from the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 .

Further, the inner surface of the groove portion 10671b1 (the surface on which the preceding game ball is attracted) may be inclined radially inward toward the lower side in the direction of gravity. The inner surface of the groove portion 10671b1 (the surface on which the preceding game ball is attracted) is inclined downward in the direction of gravity inward in the radial direction, so that the game ball that follows the preceding game ball attracted to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670. When is attracted (drooping), the preceding game ball can be easily displaced downward. Therefore, the preceding game ball and the following game ball can be dropped from the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 .

In the tenth embodiment, the case where two game balls are attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, when three game balls are attracted, the load may be set so that the attraction between the preceding game balls and the path switching member 10670 is released. Alternatively, the preceding first game ball may be thrown to the second path 10642, the second game ball to the third path 10643, and the third game ball to the recovery port. .

In the first to third embodiments, the second rolling portion 381c extending along the outer surface of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R is formed above the axes of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second rolling portion 381c may be formed below the shafts of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, and 3372R. In this case, when the preceding game ball sticks to the outer surface of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R and the following game ball sticks to the preceding game ball, the preceding game ball and the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R It is possible to easily release the adsorption with the outer surface of the.

In the first to third embodiments, the case where the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372Rc2 formed in the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R are recessed has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372Rc2 may be formed on the same peripheral surface as the outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R.

In this case, when the preceding game ball sticks to the outer surface of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R and the following game ball sticks to the preceding game ball, the preceding game ball and the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R It is possible to easily release the adsorption with the outer surface of the.

Also, the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372Rc2 may be formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R. In this case, when the preceding game ball sticks to the outer surface of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R, and the following game ball sticks to the preceding game ball, the preceding game ball is removed from the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372Rc2. It can be easily moved. The attraction between the preceding game ball and the outer surfaces of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R can be easily released.

In the seventh embodiment, the through-hole 7613e is formed through the center cover member 7613 from the rear surface to the front surface. Anything is fine. Also, instead of the recess, a portion projecting from the back side of the central cover member 7613 may hold the game ball.

In this case, when the following game ball collides with the preceding game ball, the following game ball repels toward the through hole 632a side, so that the central cover member 7613 and the base plate 630 face each other. It is preferable to set the interval between them to be substantially the same as the diameter of the two game balls.

In the seventh embodiment, the width of the connecting hole 632b is set substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the width of the connecting hole 632b may be set to a dimension sufficiently larger than the game ball diameter (for example, a diameter dimension for two game balls).

In this case, the inner edge of the through hole 7613e on the side away from the through hole 632a is displaced in the left-right direction of the base plate 630 between the side surface of the connecting hole 632b on the side away from the through hole 632a and the radius of the game ball. It is preferably formed at a position According to this, when the preceding game ball thrown to the inner edge of the through hole 7613e collides with the following game ball, the following game ball can be easily repelled to the through hole 632a side.

In the above seventh embodiment, the case where the width between the connecting holes 632b facing each other in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball (for example, 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball). In this case, since the game ball can be easily discharged from the connecting hole 632b, it is possible to prevent the game ball from clogging the connecting hole 632b.

In this case, the inner edge of the through hole 7613e on the side close to the through hole 632a is displaced in the left-right direction of the base plate 630 between the side surface of the connecting hole 632b on the side close to the through hole 632a and the radius of the game ball. It is preferably formed at a position According to this, when the preceding game ball thrown to the inner edge of the through hole 7613e collides with the following game ball, the following game ball can be easily repelled to the through hole 632a side.

In the above seventh embodiment, the case where the through hole 7613e is formed in a substantially circular shape has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the through hole 7613e may be formed in the shape of an elongated hole that is elongated in the left-right direction of the base plate 630, and the width dimension in the short direction may be formed to increase outward in the left-right direction. In this case, the game ball sent from the connecting hole 632b can be easily displaced in the left-right direction by the shape of the inner edge of the through hole 7613e. Therefore, since the through holes 7613e can be arranged with a degree of freedom, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the number of game balls that ride on the top of the variable plates 8644ba and 9644a is set to two, but the number is not necessarily limited to this. The operation of the variable plates 8644ba and 9644a may be switched between when two game balls ride on the upper part and when three game balls ride on the upper part by lengthening the length. That is, since the operation of the variable plates 8644ba and 9644a can be set arbitrarily, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the above-described second embodiment, the magnet 2372Rb is helically bent in the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet formed in a straight line may be used.

In this case, it is preferable to arrange the magnet 2372Rb so as to be inclined in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 2372R toward the upstream side of the second rolling portion 381c. As a result, the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c can be easily attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the movable ball entry accessory device 300 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a displaceable member disposed at a position visible to a player and switching the flow-down path of a game ball according to the displaced position, one or a plurality of light emitting means formed so as to emit light is provided. A substrate member mounted with a light emitting surface facing the front side; The distance between the second transmissive member and the substrate member is equal to the distance between the first transmissive member and the substrate member. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being set to a distance different from the distance.

Here, there is known a game machine provided with a displaceable member that is displaceably disposed at a position visible to the player and that switches the flow path of the game ball according to the displaced position (Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 8-131612). . In this case, by arranging a displacement member on the front side of a transparent member formed of a light-transmitting material and irradiating light from the rear side of the transparent member, the player can visually recognize the displacement member together with the light transmitted through the transparent member. A technique is also known in which the displacement member is focused on. However, in the conventional technology described above, since the displacement member is formed of a non-transmissive material that does not transmit light, the region (area) of the light visible to the player is reduced by the size of the displacement member. Performance effects are hindered.

In response to this, the applicant of the present application has proposed that by forming the displacement member from a light-transmitting material, not only the transmission member but also the light transmitted through the displacement member can be visually recognized by the player, and the light region ( area) has been developed (unknown at the time of filing). However, when the displacement member is made of a light-transmitting material, it has been found to be difficult for the player to specify the position of the displacement member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, one or a plurality of light-emitting means formed to emit light are mounted on the substrate member with the light-emitting surface facing the front side, and are arranged on the front side of the substrate member. a first transmissive member and a second transmissive member made of a light transmissive material, the displacement member being made of a light transmissive material and disposed in front of the second transmissive member; Since the distance between the substrate member is set to a distance different from the distance between the first transmission member and the substrate member, the position of the displacement member is maintained while ensuring the region (area) of the light visible to the player. can be easily specified by the player. That is, since the distances from the light emitting means are different between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, it is possible to make the light diffusion mode different when the light is transmitted through the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Therefore, the mode of light transmitted through the first transmissive member and visually recognized by the player can be made different from the mode of light transmitted through the second transmissive member and visually recognized by the player. As a result, the player can easily identify the position of the displacement member arranged on the front side of the second transparent member.

When a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the substrate member, the light emitting means are provided in both the first region facing the first transmissive member and the second region facing the second transmissive member among the regions of the substrate member. is not required to be mounted, and it is sufficient if it is mounted in at least one of the first and second regions. Also, the light emitting means may be mounted at a position overlapping both the first area and the second area.

A gaming machine A2 in the gaming machine A1, characterized in that unevenness is formed on at least one of the front surface and the back surface of the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member are formed with unevenness on at least one of the front surface and the back surface. Light transmitted through the transmission member and the second transmission member can be easily diffused by the unevenness. In this case, since the distance from the light emitting means differs between the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member, the mode of diffusion of the light transmitted through the first transmitting member and the mode of diffusion of the light transmitting through the second transmitting member differ. can be different. Therefore, the difference between the mode of light transmitted through the first transmissive member and visually recognized by the player and the mode of light transmitted through the second transmissive member and visually recognized by the player can be increased. As a result, the player can easily identify the position of the displacement member arranged on the front side of the second transparent member.

A game machine A3 characterized in that, in the game machine A2, the unevenness formed on the first transmissive member and the unevenness formed on the second transmissive member are substantially the same.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, since the unevenness formed on the first transmissive member and the unevenness formed on the second transmissive member are substantially the same, light is emitted from the light emitting means. In the non-lighted state, the first transparent member and the second transparent member (the second transparent member visible through the displacement member) can be visually recognized by the player as having the same appearance. That is, the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member, which have different appearances (patterns of light) after the light emission from the light emitting means, can have the same appearance before the light emission from the light emitting means. The appearance (mode of light) of the two transmissive members can be made different (different), and can be enhanced.

Even if the first and second transmissive members have the same unevenness, the first and second transmissive members are located at different distances from the light emitting means. can be made different in the mode of diffusion of light when passing through each. That is, the mode of light transmitted through the first transmissive member and visually recognized by the player can be made different from the mode of light transmitted through the second transmissive member and visually recognized by the player.

A game machine A4 in any one of the game machines A1 to A3, further comprising a connecting member for connecting the first transparent member and the second transparent member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A3, since it includes a connection member that connects the first transmission member and the second transmission member, the first transmission member or the second transmission member Light transmitted through one of them (the one with the smaller distance from the light emitting means) passes through the other of the first transmissive member or the second transmissive member (the one with the larger distance from the light emitting means) and the light emitting means. can be suppressed by the connecting member. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the first transparent member and the second transparent member to make the mode of the light (especially, brightness) different from the second transparent member and visible to the player. As a result, the player can easily identify the position of the displacement member arranged on the front side of the second transparent member.

The game machine A4 is characterized in that unevenness is formed on at least one of the front surface and the back surface of the first transparent member and the second transparent member, and unevenness is not formed on the front surface or the back surface of the connecting member. A game machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, unevenness is formed on at least one of the front surface and the back surface of the first transparent member and the second transparent member, and unevenness is formed on the front surface or the back surface of the connecting member. is not formed, the player can visually recognize the first transparent member and the second transparent member (the second transparent member visible through the displacement member) and the connecting member as different appearances. As a result, the boundary between the first transparent member and the second transparent member can be clarified by using the connecting member. Makes it easier to identify.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the distance between one of the first transmission member or the second transmission member and the light emitting means is the same as the other of the first transmission member or the second transmission member. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that the distance between said light emitting means is larger than said one side and said one side is located above said other side in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the distance between one of the first transmission member or the second transmission member and the light emitting means is the same as that of the first transmission member or the second transmission member. Since the distance between the other of the two transmissive members and the light emitting means is larger than the distance between them and one is positioned above the other in the gravitational direction, damage to the light emitting means can be suppressed.

That is, on the side where the distance to the light emitting means is small (narrow), compared to the side where the distance to the light emitting means is large (wide), the space becomes narrower, and the heat generated from the light emitting means heats the space. temperature rises, and the risk of damage to the light emitting means increases. On the other hand, according to the game machine A6, the air whose temperature is raised in the space on the side where the distance from the light emitting means is small (narrow) is transferred to the space (that is, the light emitting means) located above in the direction of gravity. It can be lifted to the space on the side where the distance between the As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the light emitting means on the side where the distance is small (narrow).

In the gaming machine A6, the distance between the first transmitting member and the light emitting means is made larger than the distance between the second transmitting member and the light emitting means, and the displacement member and the second transmitting member are separated from each other. A game machine A7 characterized in that a first flow-down path of a game ball is defined as a space between the two facing each other.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, the distance between the first transmitting member and the light emitting means is made larger than the distance between the second transmitting member and the light emitting means, and the displacement member and Since the space facing the second permeable member is the first flow-down path of the game ball, it is possible to reduce the size of the unit composed of the displacement member, the first permeable member and the second permeable member. That is, the space between the displacement member and the second transmission member, which are formed in order to change the form of the light visually recognized by the player, is used as the first flow path of the game ball, thereby effectively utilizing the dead space. There is no need to secure a separate space for the flow-down route. Therefore, the size of the unit can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the displacement member is formed as a plate-like body rotatably supported on the base end side, and formed with a thick plate portion having a thicker plate thickness on the tip end side. A gaming machine A8 characterized by:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the displacement member is formed as a plate-like body rotatably supported on the base end side, and has a plate thickness on the tip end side. Since the enlarged thickness portion is formed, out of the light that passes through the displacement member and is visually recognized by the player, the light that is transmitted through the thickness portion and visually recognized by the player is divided into other parts other than the thick portion. It can be made different from the light that passes through the part and is visually recognized by the player. Further, as the displacement member is rotated about the base end side, the position of the light that is visually recognized through the tip side (plate thickness portion) can be displaced. In other words, the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member can be easily recognized by the player by utilizing the fact that the position of the visible light transmitted through the distal end side (thickness portion) of the displacement member is displaced.

A game machine A9, wherein at least one of the front surface and the rear surface of the thick plate portion is curved in an arcuate cross-section in the game machine A8.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A8, at least one of the front surface and the back surface of the thick plate portion is curved in an arcuate cross-section. , refracts and diverges or converges the light incident on the plate thickness. As a result, of the light transmitted through the displacement member and visually recognized by the player, the light transmitted through the plate thickness portion and visually recognized by the player and the light transmitted through the other portions other than the plate thickness portion are transmitted to the player. The difference from visually recognized light can be made clearer. As a result, the player can easily recognize the displacement (rotation) motion of the displacement member.

A game machine A10 characterized in that in the game machine A8 or A9, the displacement member is formed so as to be arranged at a position substantially flush with the first transmission member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of the game machine A8 or A9, the displacement member can be disposed at a position substantially flush with the first transmission member, so that the displacement member and the first transmission member can be separated. The area (area) of the light emitted from the light emitting means and visually recognized by the player can be visually recognized as a larger area.

The game machine A10 includes a rolling member that is inclined downward toward the front of the displacement member and on which a game ball rolls, and the height position at the downstream end of the rolling member is substantially in plane with the first transmission member. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that the height position of the plate thickness portion of the displacement member arranged at the same position is lowered by the radius of the game ball.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects of the game machine A10, the rolling member is provided with a rolling member that is inclined downward toward the front of the displacement member and on which the game ball rolls, and the height position at the downstream end of the rolling member However, since it is lowered by the radius of the game ball from the height position of the plate thickness portion of the displacement member arranged at a position that is substantially flush with the first transmission member, the rolling portion rolls from the downstream end A game ball thrown toward the front of the displacement member can collide with the plate thickness portion of the displacement member whose strength is relatively high by increasing the plate thickness. As a result, damage to the displacement member can be suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Variable Unit 360 as an Example>
A substantially cylindrical rotating member rotatably formed with a rotating shaft directed in a horizontal direction; In a gaming machine in which the rotating member is rotated in a state where the game ball is attracted to the surface to throw the attracted game ball in the rotating direction of the rotating member, the rotating member is parallel to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. A gaming machine B1, characterized in that it comprises a rolling surface on which a game ball rolls, the rolling surface being positioned above the rotating shaft of the rotating member in the direction of gravity.

Here, it comprises a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with the rotating shaft oriented in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A game machine is known in which a game ball is rotated in a state in which the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface, and the game ball is thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotary member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-231890). Gazette). When two game balls roll continuously toward the rotating member, the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the game ball following the preceding game ball is attracted. Sometimes. In this case, when the rotating member is rotated, there is a problem that the weight of two balls is applied, and the suction between the rotating member and the preceding game ball is released.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, the rolling surface is provided side by side on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and on which the game ball rolls, and the rolling surface is above the rotating shaft of the rotating member in the direction of gravity. , for example, two game balls are rolled on the rolling surface in a row toward the rotating member, and the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the preceding game ball When the game ball following the ball is attracted, the preceding game ball can be easily placed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to release the attraction between the rotating member and the preceding game ball.

In the game machine B1, a receiving surface arranged in parallel with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the side opposite to the rolling surface with the rotating member interposed therebetween and receiving a game ball that is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and thrown. , wherein the receiving surface is located above the rotating shaft of the rotating member in the direction of gravity.

Here, the game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and thrown is received by the receiving surface arranged in parallel with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the side opposite to the rolling surface with the rotating member interposed therebetween. Another problem is that the game ball tends to bounce on the receiving surface, making it difficult to smoothly throw the game ball from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member to the receiving surface.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the receiving surface is positioned above the rotating shaft of the rotating member in the direction of gravity, so that the game ball is suppressed from bouncing on the receiving surface. , the game ball can be smoothly thrown from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member to the receiving surface. That is, according to the game machine B2, the game ball is received by the receiving surface before the downward displacement component in the direction of gravity increases with the rotation of the rotating member (that is, at the stage when the horizontal component is relatively large). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing on the receiving surface. Also, before the game ball is received by the receiving surface, the attraction of the game ball is released, and the game ball can be prevented from falling from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member to the receiving surface. Also from this point, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing on the receiving surface.

In the game machine B2, the receiving surface is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the rotating member.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the receiving surface is inclined downward in the direction away from the rotating member. The throwing direction of the game ball thrown with rotation can be brought close to the rolling direction of the game ball after being received by the receiving surface. As a result, it is possible to suppress the bouncing of the game ball on the receiving surface and smoothly throw the game ball from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member to the receiving surface.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the rotating member has a recess formed in its outer peripheral surface, and the magnet is arranged at a position for attracting the game ball to the inner surface of the recess. Characterized game machine B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the rotating member has a recess formed in the outer peripheral surface thereof, and the magnet is positioned to attract the game ball to the inner surface of the recess. Since it is arranged in the recess, the game ball can be supported by the inner surface of the recess (the step between the outer peripheral surface). As a result, for example, two game balls are rolled on the rolling surface in a row toward the rotating member, and the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the preceding game ball To make it difficult to release the attraction between a rotating member and a preceding game ball when the following game ball is attracted.

In the game machine B4, the recess depth of the recess is set to a dimension such that the game ball does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the recess when the game ball is fitted in the recess. .

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the recess depth of the recess is set to a dimension such that the game ball does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the recess when the game ball is fitted in the recess. Therefore, the inner edge of the recess (the ridgeline between the inner surface of the recess and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member) can be brought into contact with the game ball. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown with the rotation of the rotating member, it is possible to prevent the game ball from wobbling in the rotating direction of the rotating member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being released from adsorption.

In particular, when the game ball is thrown with the rotation of the rotating member, the direction of the vertical component of gravity acting on the game ball changes before and after the game ball (concave portion) passes the uppermost position in the direction of gravity. Because of the reversal, the game ball tends to wobble in the direction of rotation of the rotating member due to the reaction to the reversal. On the other hand, according to the game machine B5, the inner edge of the recess (the ridgeline between the inner surface of the recess and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member) can be brought into contact with the game ball, that is, the game can be played from both sides in the rotating direction of the rotating member. Since the ball can be sandwiched between the inner edges of the concave portion, it is possible to suppress the game ball from wobbling in the rotation direction of the rotating member, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the release of the game ball from being sucked.

In the game machine B4, a receiving surface arranged in parallel with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the side opposite to the rolling surface across the rotating member and receiving a game ball that is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and thrown. The recess depth of the recess is set to a dimension that allows the game ball to come into contact with the bottom surface of the recess while the game ball is fitted in the recess. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the size of the receiving surface side is set to be small.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the recess depth of the recess is set to a dimension that allows the game ball to come into contact with the bottom surface of the recess while the game ball is fitted in the recess. In addition, since the size of the receiving surface side is set smaller than that of the rolling surface side, when the game ball thrown with the rotation of the rotating member wobbles in the rotating direction of the rotating member, the game ball is placed in the concave portion. It can be easily rolled (dropped) from the side to the receiving surface side. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being released from the attraction and returning to the rolling surface.

A gaming machine B7 in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, wherein the rolling surface is formed as an inclined surface for rolling the game ball in a direction substantially parallel to the direction of the rotating shaft of the rotating member. .

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B6, the rolling surface is formed as an inclined surface for rolling the game ball in a direction substantially parallel to the direction of the rotation axis of the rotating member. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball that rolls on the rolling surface and the throwing direction of the game ball that is thrown with the rotation of the rotating member can be substantially perpendicular to each other. As a result, it is possible to change the movement of the game ball and secure the number of game balls that can be visually recognized at once, thereby improving the interest of the player.

The game machine B7 is provided with blocking means for blocking rolling of the game ball on the rolling surface, and the magnet of the rotating member is arranged at a position capable of attracting the game ball whose rolling is blocked by the blocking means. A game machine B8, characterized in that:

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machine B7, it is equipped with blocking means for blocking the rolling of the game ball on the rolling surface, and the magnet of the rotating member is a game ball whose rolling is blocked by the blocking means. Since the game ball rolling on the rolling surface is directly attracted to the rotating member, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface is blocked by the blocking means and then rotates. A form in which a game ball is attracted to a member (that is, a form in which a game ball that would have passed through the rotating member without being attracted to the rotating member if it had not been blocked by the blocking means can be attracted to the rotating member by being blocked by the blocking means); can be formed, and as a result, the player's interest can be improved.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Variable Unit 2360 as an Example>
A substantially cylindrical rotating member rotatably formed with a rotating shaft directed in a horizontal direction; In a gaming machine in which the rotating member is rotated in a state where the game ball is attracted to the surface to throw the attracted game ball in the rotating direction of the rotating member, the rotating member is parallel to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. and a rolling surface for rolling a game ball in a direction substantially parallel to the direction of the rotation axis of the rotating member; , and an upstream position upstream of the rolling surface of the attraction position.

Here, it comprises a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with the rotating shaft oriented in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A game machine is known in which a game ball is rotated in a state in which the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface, and the game ball is thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotary member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-231890). Gazette). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the game ball rolls on the rolling surface while swinging, the rotating member rotates, and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at the timing when it can face the adsorption position of the rotating member. Even when it moves, there is a problem that the game ball is difficult to be attracted to the attraction position.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the magnets are arranged at least at an attracting position where the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and an upstream position upstream of the rolling surface from the attracting position. Therefore, the game ball can be attracted to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member by the magnetic force of the magnet arranged at the upstream position, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from swinging and rolling on the rolling surface. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at the timing when it can face the attracting position of the rotating member, the game ball can be easily attracted to the attracting position.

The magnet arranged at the attracting position and the magnet arranged at the upstream position may be formed separately (that is, two magnets), or may be integrally formed. (ie, one magnet).

In the game machine C1, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the rotating member is provided with a concave portion which is recessed in the outer peripheral surface thereof and which serves as the suction position.

Here, it is necessary that the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member at the suction position, while the game ball is not attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member at the upstream position. To achieve this by using the difference in magnetic force between the magnets (that is, placing a magnet with strong magnetic force at the attraction position and a magnet with weak magnetic force at the upstream position, respectively), two types of magnets with different magnetic forces are prepared. and increase product costs.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the rotating member has a concave portion which is recessed in the outer peripheral surface thereof and serves as an attraction position, so that one magnet is embedded in the rotating member. By using the recess, the distance from the magnet to the game ball at the attracting position (the distance from the magnet to the bottom surface of the recess) is the distance from the magnet to the game ball at the upstream position) from the magnet to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. distance). That is, while the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member at the suction position, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member at the upstream position. Therefore, there is no need to use two types of magnets, and there is no need to complicate the shape of the magnets, so the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Also, when a game ball is attracted to the attraction position, the game ball can be held by the concave portion. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown with the rotation of the rotating member, it is possible to prevent the game ball from wobbling in the rotating direction of the rotating member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being released from adsorption.

In this case, the recess depth of the recess is preferably set to a dimension such that the game ball does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the recess when the game ball is fitted in the recess. This is because the inner edge of the recess (the ridgeline between the inner surface of the recess and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member) is brought into contact with the game ball, so that rattling of the game ball can be easily suppressed. However, the recess depth of the recess may be such that the game ball is brought into contact with the bottom surface of the recess while the game ball is fitted in the recess.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, at least a portion of the portion arranged at the upstream position of the magnet is arranged forward in the direction of rotation of the rotating member relative to the portion arranged at the attraction position. A gaming machine C3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, at least a part of the portion arranged at the upstream position of the magnet is arranged in the direction of rotation of the rotating member more than the portion arranged at the attracting position. Since it is arranged on the front side, the magnetic force of the magnet at the upstream position can be easily applied to the game ball rolling on the rolling surface toward the attracting position. That is, the game ball can be attracted to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member, and the game ball can be prevented from rolling while rocking on the rolling surface. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at the timing when it can face the attracting position of the rotating member, the game ball can be easily attracted to the attracting position.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the bottom surface of the recess is inclined upward toward the upstream position side and smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and at least on the upstream position side, a game ball is placed on the bottom surface of the recess. A game machine C4 characterized in that it is formed so as to be abuttable.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, the bottom surface of the recess is inclined upward toward the upstream position side and smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, at least on the upstream position side, Since the bottom surface of the recess is formed so that the game ball can come into contact, when the game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member by the magnet at the upstream position is fitted into the recess by the magnet at the attraction position, such game ball The ball can be smoothly fitted into the recess. In other words, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing (bouncing), making it easier to attract the game ball to the attraction position (recess).

In any one of game machines C1 to C4, a partition wall is provided upright from the rolling surface while facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member to partition the rolling area of the game ball, wherein the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and the The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the distance between the partition wall and the partition wall is set to be smaller toward the downstream side of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C4, the game machine C5 is provided with a partition wall that is erected from the rolling surface while facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and partitions the rolling area of the game ball. , the facing distance between the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member and the partition wall is set to be smaller toward the downstream side of the rolling surface, so that not only the action of the magnet (attraction by magnetic force) at the upstream position but also the partition wall Guiding by the wall can also prevent the game ball from rolling on the rolling surface while swinging. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at the timing when it can face the attracting position of the rotating member, the game ball can be easily attracted to the attracting position.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C5, a game in which a ball is thrown by being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and arranged side by side on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the side opposite to the rolling surface with the rotating member interposed therebetween. A game machine C6 comprising a receiving surface for receiving a ball, the receiving surface being inclined downward in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the rollers are arranged side by side on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the side opposite to the rolling surface across the rotating member and on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. A receiving surface for receiving a game ball sucked and thrown is provided, and the receiving surface is inclined downward in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member (attraction position) is formed. When the game ball attracted and thrown is received by the receiving surface, the game ball is rolled by the downward inclination of the receiving surface, and the game ball can be quickly separated from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling on the receiving surface from stagnation due to the attraction of the game ball to the magnet at the upstream position or the action of the magnetic force.

In the game machine C6, the receiving surface has a length dimension along the direction of the rotation axis set to be larger than a length dimension along the direction of the rotation axis of the magnet arranged on the rotating member. A gaming machine C7 characterized by:

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machine C6, the length dimension along the rotation axis direction of the receiving surface is larger than the length dimension along the rotation axis direction of the magnet arranged on the rotating member. is set to a large size, the game ball is attracted to a position other than the attracting position of the rotating member (i.e., attracted to the magnet at the upstream position) as the rotating member rotates. Even if a game ball is thrown, the game ball can be received by the receiving surface.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Winning Port Unit 600 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance arranged downstream of the first ball entrance in a game area, the first ball entrance is provided. A passage member forming a passage for game balls flowing down without being balled, a game board on which the game area is formed on the front side, and a plate formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the game board and to be immersed to the back side. A game ball passing through the passage member can be guided to the second ball entrance by the slide member protruding to the front side of the game board. Game machine D1.

Here, a game machine having a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance is known (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-013496). In this case, game balls that have not entered the first ball entry hole are not entered into the second ball entry hole, but are only collected from the out hole. Therefore, when the game ball hit aiming at the first ball entrance does not enter the first ball entrance, the player expects the subsequent destination of the game ball (the game ball flowing down). can't have Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot be sufficiently entertained.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, a passage member forming a passage for game balls that do not enter the first ball entrance and flow down, a game board having a game area formed on the front side, and A plate-shaped slide member formed so as to be protruding to the front side of the board and to be retractable to the back side, and the game ball passing through the passage member is moved by the slide member protruding to the front side of the game board to the second slide member. so that even if the game ball does not enter the first ball entrance, it is possible to draw attention to the flow of the game ball and enter the second ball entrance. Players can continue to have expectations for As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the slide member is formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the game board and to be retractable to the back side, when the slide member is not functioning, it can be retracted to the back side of the game board. A space can be secured on the front side of the board (expansion of the game area). That is, it is possible to expand the area in which the game ball can move in the game area.

The passage member may be, for example, a passage formed as a closed passage through which the game ball can pass, a passage formed by one or more nails that define the flowing direction of the game ball, or a passage member through which the game ball can roll. Examples include those formed as inclined surfaces (open passages).

Further, even when the slide member is retracted to the back side of the game board, it is of course possible that the game ball that has passed through the passage member can enter the second ball inlet. In this case, it is preferable that the ball is easier to enter the second ball entrance when the slide member is protruded than when it is retracted. This is because it is possible to draw attention to the state of the slide member and improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine D1, the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the second ball entrance is higher than the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the first ball entrance. A gaming machine D2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the player receives more benefits from the ball entering the second ball entrance than the profit given to the player by the ball entering the first ball entrance. Since the profit given is considered to be a higher profit, even if the game ball does not enter the first ball entrance, there is an expectation that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance. The player can hold it more strongly. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Examples of a form in which a player receives a high profit include a form in which a large number of prize balls are paid out as a result of entering a ball, and a form in which the ball is openable and closable. Examples include a mode in which the opening time of the movable wing is lengthened, a mode in which the number of times the movable wing is opened, a mode in which the opening range of the movable wing is increased, and the like.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the passage member includes a first opening for receiving game balls flowing down without entering the first ball entrance, and a game ball flowing in from the first opening to the game area. A gaming machine D3, characterized in that it comprises a second opening for flowing out, and is made of a light transmissive material.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1 or D2, the passage member includes the first opening for receiving the game ball flowing down without being entered into the first ball entrance, and the opening from the first opening. It is provided with a second opening through which the game ball that has flowed in flows out to the game area, and is formed from a light-transmitting material, so that the game ball that has flowed in from the first opening flows into the second opening (second ball entrance). It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the aspect of flowing down (passing) toward the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In game machines D1 to D3, a pair of the slide members are disposed on both sides of the second ball entrance in a posture inclined downward toward the second ball entrance. game machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, a pair of slide members are disposed on both sides of the second ball entrance in a downwardly inclined posture toward the second ball entrance, so that the slide members protrude. When such a state is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball flowing down from either the left or right side of the second ball entrance to enter the second ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation of entering the second ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, as a configuration for facilitating entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance, a pair of feather members whose base end side is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft protruding from the game board is provided as the second ball entrance. It is conceivable that the game ball is guided to the second ball entrance (so-called tulip) by disposing it in the mouth and opening the wing member. However, in such a configuration, a space for rotating (opening and closing) the wing members is required in the game area. In particular, space is required above the second entrance for the wing members to form a closed position. As a result, the size increases in the vertical direction, and the space for arranging other members (for example, the first ball entrance and the liquid crystal display device) is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, a pair of plate-shaped slide members formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the game board and to be retractable to the back side of the game board. However, since it is arranged in a posture inclined downward toward the second ball entrance on both sides of the second ball entrance, it is possible to achieve miniaturization in the vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members (for example, the first ball entrance and the liquid crystal display device).

A gaming machine D5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D4, the second opening of the passage member is arranged above the slide member in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4, the second opening of the passage member is disposed above the slide member in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting slide member can be used to move the game ball. It is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation of entering the second ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine D5, two sets of the first ball entrance and the passage member are provided, and the second opening of the passage member of one of the two sets is one of the pair of slide members. A game machine D6 is arranged above one slide member in the direction of gravity, and the second opening of the other set of passage members is arranged above the other slide member in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, two sets of the first ball entrance and the passage member are provided, and the second opening of the passage member of one of the two sets is One of the pair of slide members is arranged above one slide member in the gravitational direction, and the second opening of the other set of passage members is arranged above the other slide member in the gravitational direction. By utilizing each of the sliding members, it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation of entering the second ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The two sets of the first ball entrance and the passage member are spaced apart on both the left and right sides of the second ball entrance (for example, the second ball entrance is the width of the game area). It is preferable that two sets are arranged symmetrically in the width direction with the second ball entrance on both sides of the second entrance. A game ball flowing down on either one side or the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the second start port can be easily entered into the second ball entrance port, and can enter the second ball entrance port. This is because the player can have a stronger expectation of hitting the ball.

In the gaming machine D6, the edge of the slide member on the side of the second ball entrance is located between the lower edge in the direction of gravity and the upper edge in the direction of gravity of the second ball entrance. A gaming machine D7 characterized by:

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of the game machine D6, the edge of the slide member on the side of the second ball entrance is the lower edge in the gravity direction and the upper edge in the gravity direction of the second ball entrance. When the game ball is thrown (displaced) in the width direction of the game area, the game ball is placed between the edge of the second ball entrance side of the slide member in the projected state. , making it easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance. That is, a game ball that is thrown (displaced) from one side in the width direction of the game area passes through the second ball entrance and is thrown (displaced) to the other side in the width direction (the game ball enters the second entrance). It is possible to suppress the fact that the ball escapes in the width direction of the game area without entering the ball mouth.

In any one of the game machines D4 to D7, a bottom portion projecting from the lower edge of the second ball entrance in the direction of gravity toward the front side of the game board is provided, and the bottom portion is adapted to the second ball entrance. A gaming machine D8 characterized in that it is formed downwardly inclined toward the mouth.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D4 to D7, the bottom part projects from the lower edge of the second ball entrance in the direction of gravity to the front side of the game board. Since the portion is formed to slope downward toward the second ball entrance, the first entrance is formed not only when the slide member is protruded but also when the slide member is retracted. A game ball flowing down (passed through a passage member) without being entered into a ball opening can be easily entered into a second ball entry opening. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation of entering the second ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D8, the upper surface of the bottom portion has a ball-feeding surface located on the side closer to the second ball-entering port, and the second ball-entering surface connected to the ball-feeding surface and located closer to the ball-entering portion than the ball-feeding portion. an abutment surface located farther from the mouth is formed, and the angle of the downward inclination of the abutment surface in the direction toward the second ball entrance is the same as that of the throwing surface toward the second ball entrance. A game machine D9 characterized by being made larger than the angle of the downward inclination in the facing direction.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D8, the upper surface of the bottom portion has a ball-throwing surface positioned closer to the second ball entrance and a ball-throwing portion connected to the ball-throwing surface. A contact surface positioned farther from the second ball entrance than the second ball entrance is formed, and the angle of the downward inclination of the contact surface in the direction toward the second ball entrance is equal to the second entrance of the throwing surface. Since it is made larger than the angle of the downward inclination in the direction toward the ball opening, the game ball can be smoothly entered into the second ball entrance using the downward inclination of the contact surface. In particular, even when the slide member is retracted, the inclination of the abutment surface with a large downward inclination is used to allow the ball to flow down without entering the first ball entrance (passing through the passage member). ) It is possible to easily enter the game ball into the second ball entrance.

In the game machine D3, the first opening of the passage member is positioned above the first ball entrance in the direction of gravity, and the first ball entrance is arranged inside the passage member. Characterized game machine D10.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the first opening of the passage member is positioned above the first ball entrance in the direction of gravity, and the first ball entrance is located inside the passage member. is arranged, a part of the game ball that has flowed into the first opening of the passage member can enter the first ball entrance. That is, the game ball flowing down without entering the first ball entrance can be reliably made to flow into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player who enters the second ball entrance, and improve the interest of the game.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D10 includes detecting means for detecting a game ball flowing down the passage member and driving means for driving the slide member, and when the game ball is detected by the detecting means, the A game machine D11 characterized in that a slide member projects toward the front side of the game board by being driven by the drive means.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D10, it is provided with a detection means for detecting game balls flowing down the passage member and a drive means for driving the slide member, and the game balls are detected by the detection means. When the sliding member is driven by the drive means, the slide member projects toward the front side of the game board, so that the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball inlet. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the first ball entrance, the player is made to pay attention to the flow of the game ball, and the player continues to expect that the ball will enter the second ball entrance. can let As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The detection of the game ball by the detecting means and the driving by the driving means (protrusion of the slide member) may be performed at the same time, or the driving may be started after a predetermined time has passed after the detection. . However, in the latter case, it is preferable that the drive (projection operation of the slide member) is completed before the game ball reaches the projecting position of the slide member. This is because the function of the slide member that guides the game ball to the second ball entrance (makes it easier to enter) can be reliably exhibited.

A game machine D12 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the slide member forms a bottom surface connected to the second opening of the passage member.

According to the game machine D12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the slide member forms the bottom surface (rolling surface) connected to the second opening of the passage member, so the slide member does not protrude. The game ball can be positioned on the slide member even in the (that is, immersed) state, and the time for the game ball to be positioned on the slide member can be secured accordingly. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the passage member can be easily entered into the second ball entrance, and the player can have a stronger expectation of entering the second ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine D12 is characterized in that a guide portion for guiding a game ball positioned on the upper surface toward the second ball entrance is formed on the upper surface forming the bottom surface of the passage member of the slide member. A game machine D13.

According to the game machine D13, in addition to the effects of the game machine D12, the upper surface forming the bottom surface of the passage member of the slide member is provided with a guide for guiding the game ball positioned on the upper surface toward the second ball entrance. Since the portion is formed, when the slide member is protruded from the state in which the game ball is positioned on the upper surface of the slide member that has passed through the passage member and is in the immersed state, the game ball is moved to the second position by the action of the guide portion. Since it can be protruded while being guided toward the second ball entrance, the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance.

The guide portion may be a protruding line or a recessed groove (or any of these) that extends in a direction closer to the second ball entrance as it goes toward the tip of the slide member in the projecting direction and that is protruding or recessed on the upper surface. combination) are exemplified. The cross-sectional shape of the ridges and grooves is arbitrary, and examples thereof include rectangular cross-sections, polygonal cross-sections, and arcuate cross-sections (or cross-sections of shapes combining these).

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Winning Port Unit 600 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance arranged downstream of the first ball entrance in a game area, the first ball entrance is provided. A passage member forming a passage for game balls flowing down without being balled, and a second number smaller than the first number when a first number of game balls pass through the passage member. The gaming machine E1 is characterized by comprising change means for making it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance than when the game ball passes through the passage member.

Here, a game machine having a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance is known (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-013496). In this case, game balls that have not entered the first ball entry hole are not entered into the second ball entry hole, but are only collected from the out hole. Therefore, when the game ball hit aiming at the first ball entrance does not enter the first ball entrance, the player expects the subsequent destination of the game ball (the game ball flowing down). can't have Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot be sufficiently entertained.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, when the first number of game balls pass through the passage member that forms the passage for the game balls that do not enter the first ball entrance and flow down, has change means for making it easier for game balls to enter the second ball entrance than when a second number of game balls, which is smaller than the first number, passes through the passage member. To make a player pay attention to the downflow of the game ball even when the game ball does not enter the first ball entrance, and to continuously make the player expect the ball to enter the second ball entrance. be able to. In particular, since the ease of entering the second ball entrance is changed by the number of game balls passing through the passage member, the number of game balls that have leaked into the first ball entrance can also draw the player's attention. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The passage member may be, for example, a passage formed as a closed passage through which the game ball can pass, a passage formed by one or more nails that define the flowing direction of the game ball, or a passage member through which the game ball can roll. Examples include those formed as inclined surfaces (open passages).

The first number is an integer of 1 or more, and the second number is an integer of 2 or more and is a number greater than the first number. For example, if the first number is 1, the second number is 2 or greater, and if the first number is 2, the second number is 3 or greater. be.

In the gaming machine E1, the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the second ball entrance is higher than the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the first ball entrance. A gaming machine E2 characterized by:

In the gaming machine E1, the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the first ball entrance is higher than the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the second ball entrance. A gaming machine E3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the player receives more benefits from the ball entering the second ball entrance than the profit given to the player by the ball entering the first ball entrance. Since the profit given is considered to be a higher profit, even if the game ball does not enter the first ball entrance, there is an expectation that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance. The player can hold it more strongly. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the second ball entrance is more than that of the game played by the ball entering the first ball entrance. Since the profit given to the player is considered to be a higher profit, normally, a game ball is hit aiming at the first ball entrance, but a game ball that leaks into the first ball entrance can be saved by making it possible to enter the second ball entrance. In particular, when the number of game balls passing through the passage member is greater than the predetermined number (when the first number is greater than the second number), the balls are made easier to enter the second ball entrance. Contradictory expectations for entering the first ball entrance and for failing to enter the first ball entrance (i.e., making it easier to enter the second ball entrance) Players can have expectations. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Examples of a form in which a player receives a high profit include a form in which a large number of prize balls are paid out as a result of entering a ball, and a form in which the ball is openable and closable. Examples include a mode in which the opening time of the movable wing is lengthened, a mode in which the number of times the movable wing is opened, a mode in which the opening range of the movable wing is increased, and the like.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the changing means includes a restricting means for restricting the flow of the first game ball passing through the passage member or flowing out from the passage member, and the restricting means When a second game ball follows one game ball, the second game ball is brought into contact with the first game ball whose flow is restricted, and the second game ball flows down. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that it is formed so as to direct the direction toward the second ball entrance.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the change means includes a regulation means for regulating the flow of the first game ball passing through the passage member or flowing out from the passage member. , the restricting means, when the second game ball follows the first game ball, makes the second game ball contact (collide) with the first game ball whose flow is restricted, Since the flow direction of the second game ball is directed toward the second ball entrance, the amusement of the game can be improved. That is, the case where the first game ball and the second game ball flow down can be easier to enter the second ball entrance (pass through the passage member) than the case where only the first game ball flows down. Since the ease of entering the second ball entrance can be changed depending on the number of game balls to be played), the player is also made to pay attention to the number of game balls that have leaked into the first ball entrance. be able to. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine E4, the game machine E5 is characterized in that the regulating means is formed as a recess formed in a wall surface facing the exit of the passage member.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E4, the restricting means is formed as a recess formed in the wall surface facing the exit of the passage member. The game ball is received in the recess, and the flow of the first game ball can be temporarily restricted (i.e., the first game ball is temporarily held so that the following second game ball can collide). On the other hand, the restriction on the flow of the first game ball can be released by causing the first game ball to drop (flow down) from the recess due to its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to restrict (hold) and release the restriction on the flow of the first game ball only by the shape of the restricting means, and it is possible to eliminate the need for an operation mechanism for switching between them (releasing the restriction). can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, according to the gaming machine E4, a member (for example, provided with a rolling surface inclined downward toward the second ball entrance) guides the game ball flowing out from the outlet of the passage member to the second ball entrance. , There is no member that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance by rolling the game ball on the rolling surface (the guiding member can be guided to the second ball entrance) The recess is used to insert the second game ball into the second ball entrance even in the state of being displaceable between the normal position and the non-guiding position and displaced to the non-guiding position. You can enter the ball.

In the gaming machine E5, the outlet of the passage member has a bottom surface on which game balls roll, and side wall surfaces that stand on both sides of the bottom surface in the width direction, and the facing distance between the side surfaces is the game A game machine E6 characterized in that the size is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the ball.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machine E5, the outlet of the passage member has a bottom surface on which game balls roll and side wall surfaces erected on both sides in the width direction of the bottom surface. Since the space between the side wall surfaces facing each other is set to a size substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, the trajectory of the game ball flowing out from the outlet of the passage member can be easily made substantially constant, and the game ball is controlled by the restricting means (recess). can be assured of acceptance.

In the game machine E5 or E6, the game machine E7 is characterized in that the depth of the recess increases in the direction away from the second ball entrance.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5 or E6, the depth of the recess is increased in the direction away from the second ball entrance, so that the game received in the recess is increased. The ball can be held in a positionally shifted direction in which the depth of the recess is increased (that is, the side away from the second ball entrance). Therefore, when the second game ball abuts (collides) with the first game ball held in the recess, the second game ball is directed to the second ball entrance to make it easier to enter. can.

In any one of the game machines E5 to E7, a slide member is provided in a position between the exit of the passage member and the recess and downward in the direction of gravity by being formed so as to be retractable and protruding, The game machine E8 is characterized in that the slide member is formed so as to be able to guide the game ball to the second ball entrance in the projected state.

According to the game machine E8, in any one of the game machines E5 to E7, it is arranged in a position between the outlet of the passage member and the recessed portion and downward in the direction of gravity by being formed so as to be retractable and projecting. A slide member is provided, and since the slide member is formed so as to be able to guide the game ball to the second ball entrance in the projected state, the first game ball held in the recess can be guided by the projected slide member. can be used to enter the ball into the second ball entrance. That is, when the first game ball is dropped (dropped) from the recess, the first game ball can be received by the slide member and guided to the second ball entrance by the slide member. As a result, the first game ball can enter the second ball entrance.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the changing means includes rolling means for rolling game balls passing through the passage member, and is connected to the rolling means so as to be interlockable with the first position. and a second position for changing the course of the game ball passing through the passage member, wherein the course changing means is displaced to the second position. The path of the ball is set so that it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance than the path of the game ball in the state of being displaced to the first position; When the ball rolls, the course changing means is displaced to the second position, and when a second number of game balls smaller than the first number rolls on the rolling means. is a gaming machine E9 characterized in that said course changing means is displaced to a first position;

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the changing means is the rolling means for rolling the game balls passing through the passage member, and the rolling means is interlocked with the rolling means. a course changing means that is operably connected and formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position for changing the course of a game ball passing through the passage member, wherein the course changing means is displaced to the second position; The course of the game ball in the state of being displaced to the first position is set to be a course that makes it easier to enter the second ball entrance than the course of the game ball in the state of being displaced to the first position, and the rolling means is set to the first position. When a number of game balls roll, the course changing means is displaced to the second position, and when a second number of game balls, which is less than the first number, rolls on the rolling means, Since the course changing means is displaced to the first position, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

That is, the first number of game balls, which is larger than the second number, enters the second ball entrance than the second number of game balls. (The ease of entering the second ball entrance can be changed depending on the number of game balls passing through the passage member). The number can also draw the player's attention. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A gaming machine E10 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E9, the course changing means is arranged downstream of the rolling means.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E9, since the course changing means is arranged downstream of the rolling means, the destination (course) of the predetermined game ball can be changed to the predetermined game ball. It can be associated with the number of game balls following the ball and the degree of connection, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved. That is, when the trailing game balls are in a row, the course changing means is maintained at the second position while the number of game balls rolling on the rolling means is maintained at the first number. As a result, each game ball that has reached the course changing means can be easily entered into the second ball entrance, while the series of following game balls is broken, and the number of game balls rolling on the rolling means is reduced. When it becomes the second number or less, the course change means is displaced to the first position, and each game ball that reaches the course change means is described above (when the course change means is displaced to the second position ) makes it more difficult to enter the second ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of following game balls and the degree of connection thereof. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the changing means includes a rotatable rotating member, and a magnet disposed on the outer surface of the rotating member for attracting game balls to the outer surface of the rotating member in a hanging state. and contacting means for causing the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member by the magnet to be positioned on the trajectory accompanying the rotation of the rotating member so as to come into contact with the game ball and drop the game ball from the rotating member. wherein the abutting means is positioned below the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member in the direction of gravity, and is positioned above the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member and thrown. The gaming machine E11 is characterized in that the game ball dropped from the rotating member due to the contact of the contact means is more likely to enter the second ball inlet.

According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the change means includes a rotating member formed to be rotatable and a rotating member arranged on the outer surface side of the rotating member to rotate the game ball. A magnet attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member in a hanging state, and the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member by the magnet is positioned on the trajectory accompanying the rotation of the rotating member, so that it contacts the game ball and is ejected from the rotating member. The contact means is positioned below the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member in the direction of gravity, and is positioned below the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member and thrown. Since the game ball dropped from the rotating member by the contact of the contact means is more likely to enter the second ball entrance, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. That is, the case where the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member is attracted to one or more game balls is more effective than the case where only one game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member. Since it is possible to make it easier to enter the second ball entrance (the ease of entering the second ball entrance can be changed depending on the number of game balls passing through the passage member), the first ball entrance The player can also be made to pay attention to the number of game balls that have leaked into the first ball. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, according to the gaming machine E11, even when a plurality of game balls roll toward the rotating member, when the game balls are connected, the preceding game ball is attracted to the rotating member. The following game ball can be easily attracted to the preceding game ball, and at least the following game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance, while the game balls are separated from each other by a predetermined interval. , the game ball preceding the rotating member can be attracted, but the game ball following the preceding game ball cannot be attracted, and the following game ball is also attracted to the rotating member. That is, it is made difficult for both the leading and trailing balls to enter the second ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the number of game balls but also to how they are connected. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the game machine E11, the game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member in a hanging state, and the game ball is thrown in the hanging state as the rotating member rotates, so the rolling speed and It is also possible to form a mode in which the game ball drops from the rotating member as an unstable state in which it swings loosely due to variations in the rolling direction, the suction position, and the like. That is, even when only one game ball is attracted to the rotating member (when it is not in contact with the abutting means), the game ball falls off and is easily made to enter the second ball entrance. You can perform a performance called

In the gaming machine E11, the abutment means is formed in a tapered flat plate shape, and includes a first game ball that is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member, and a second game ball that is attracted to the first game ball. A gaming machine E12 characterized in that it is arranged in a substantially horizontal attitude at a height position where the tip is inserted into a suction position between the two.

According to the game machine E12, in addition to the effects of the game machine E11, the abutment means is formed in a tapered flat plate shape, and the first game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member and the first game ball Since it is arranged in a substantially horizontal posture at a height position where the tip is inserted into the adsorption position between the second game ball to be adsorbed, the first game ball is adsorbed to the outer surface of the rotating member. When the second game ball is attracted to the first game ball, the attraction of the first game ball and the second game ball is smoothly released, and only the second game ball is dropped. When only the first game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member, the action of the abutment means on the first game ball is suppressed to attract the first game ball. can be easily maintained. Therefore, when only one game ball is attracted to the rotating member and hangs down, and when two or more game balls are attracted to the rotating member and hang down in a row, the entrance to the second ball entrance The difference in ease of hitting the ball can be made clearer. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the number of game balls and how they are connected. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Variable Unit 360 as an Example>
A substantially cylindrical rotating member rotatably formed with a rotating shaft directed in a horizontal direction; In a game machine in which the rotating member is rotated while the game ball is attracted to a surface to throw the attracted game ball in the rotating direction of the rotating member, the magnet of the rotating member is provided with a first magnet. release means for facilitating release of the adsorption between the magnet of the rotating member and the first game ball when the second game ball is magnetically attached to the first game ball while the second game ball is attracted A gaming machine F1 characterized by comprising:

Here, it comprises a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with the rotating shaft oriented in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A game machine is known in which a game ball is rotated in a state in which the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface, and the game ball is thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotary member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-231890). Gazette). In this case, when two game balls roll continuously toward the rotating member, the preceding game ball (first game ball) is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the preceding game ball When the game ball (second game ball) following (the first game ball) is attracted, both the preceding game ball and the following game ball are thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating member. However, such a gaming machine has a problem that it is not possible to provide the player with a sufficient interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, when the first game ball is attracted to the magnet of the rotating member and the second game ball is magnetically attached to the first game ball, the magnet of the rotating member and Since the releasing means is provided to easily release the attraction to the first game ball, it is possible to suppress both the first game ball and the second game ball from being thrown in the rotation direction of the rotating member.

That is, when only the first game ball rolls toward the rotating member and is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet) of the rotating member, the first game ball can be thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating member. , In addition to the first game ball, the second game ball also rolls toward the rotating member, the first game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet) of the rotating member, and the first game ball is attracted to the first game ball. When the second game ball is attracted, both the first game ball and the second game ball can be prevented from being thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating member, so the first game ball is directed toward the rotating member. When the first game ball rolls, the player can be worried (throbbed) about whether another game ball (that is, the second game ball) is rolling behind the first game ball. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine F1, a first ball entrance into which a game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member enters, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member is not attracted. and a second ball entrance into which a game ball enters, and when the game ball enters at least the first ball entrance, a profit is given to the player, or the game ball enters the first ball entrance. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the profit given to the player by entering the ball is higher than the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the second ball entrance.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the first ball entrance into which the game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating member enters; and a second ball entrance into which the game ball that is not attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the is entered, and when the game ball enters at least the first ball entrance, a profit is given to the player, or the second ball entrance is provided. Since the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the first ball entrance is made higher than the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the second ball entrance, the interest in the game is improved. can be achieved.

That is, the player expects to obtain a profit by entering the ball into the first ball entrance, or to obtain a higher profit than in the case of entering the ball into the second ball entrance, so that the game ball is In the hope that the ball will stick to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and be thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotating member, and in the expectation that there will be more chances of receiving benefits, more game balls are placed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. We want the ball to stick to the surface and be thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotating member. On the other hand, when only the first game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, while the first game ball can be thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating member (first ball entrance), When the second game ball is attracted to the first game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, not only the second game ball but also the first game ball moves in the direction of rotation of the rotating member. The ball is not thrown, and both players lose the opportunity to enter the first ball entrance. Therefore, when the first game ball rolls toward the rotating member, the game is checked whether another game ball (that is, the second game ball) is rolling behind the first game ball. It is possible to easily make people worry (easily make them excited), and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Examples of a form in which a player receives a high profit include a form in which a large number of prize balls are paid out as a result of entering a ball, and a form in which the ball is openable and closable. Examples include a mode in which the opening time of the movable wing is lengthened, a mode in which the number of times the movable wing is opened, a mode in which the opening range of the movable wing is increased, and the like.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the releasing means includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on the rotating member, and the displacement member is adapted to move the second game ball attracted to the first game ball. A game machine F3 characterized in that it is displaced by being brought into contact with the magnet, and the displacement enlarges the distance between the first game ball and the magnet.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the releasing means includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on the rotating member, and the displacement member is attracted to the first game ball. The second game ball is displaced by contact with the second game ball, and the displacement expands the distance between the first game ball and the magnet, so the second game ball is attracted to the first game ball. If so, the weight of the second game ball is used to release the attraction between the magnet and the first game ball, while the second game ball is attracted to the first game ball. If not, it is possible to prevent the attraction between the magnet and the first game ball from being released. In addition, since such switching is performed using the weight of the second game ball, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide a drive source for displacing the displacement member, thereby reducing the product cost accordingly. can be done.

The form in which the distance between the first game ball and the magnet is increased by displacement of the displacement member includes a form in which only the first game ball is displaced, a form in which only the magnet is displaced, and a first game. Any configuration in which both the sphere and the magnet are displaced is acceptable.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the release means is formed as a recess that is recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and receives the second game ball attracted to the first game ball. Game machine F4 to play.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, the releasing means is provided as a recess in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member for receiving the second game ball attracted to the first game ball. Since it is formed, the second game ball can be brought closer to the lower side of the first game ball in the gravity direction, and the gravity of the weight of the second game ball acting on the first game ball is increased accordingly. It is possible to easily increase the directional component. Therefore, it is possible to easily release the attraction between the first game ball and the magnet.

That is, when the second game ball is attracted to the first game ball, the weight of the second game ball is used to release the attraction between the magnet and the first game ball. When the second game ball is not attracted to the first game ball, the attraction between the magnet and the first game ball can be prevented from being released. In addition, as a means for using the weight of the second game ball, such switching can be achieved by only the concave portion formed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, so that it is not necessary to provide a displacement member or a driving source. , the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

A gaming machine K1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, D1 to D13, E1 to 12 and F1 to F4. Above all, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, it is provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displaying the identification information in a fixed manner, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A game machine K2, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, D1 to D13, E1 to 12 and F1 to F4. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, D1 to D13, E1 to 12 and F1 to F4, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. A game machine K3. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board 26 Left start winning port (first entrance)
27 Right start winning entrance (first ball entrance)
331a receiving portion (rolling member)
352 variable plate (displacement member)
352d1 Bulging part (thickness part)
353d First irregular reflection part (first transmission member)
353f standing portion (connecting member)
354b second irregular reflection part (second transmission member)
355 light-emitting member (base member)
355a LED (light emitting means)
369 Stopper (blocking means)
370L, 2370L, 3370L, 4370L, 5370L Rotating body (rotating member)
370R, 2370R, 3370R, 4370R, 5370R Rotating body (rotating member)
372Rb, 2372Rb Magnets 372Lc2, 2372Lc, 3372Lc, 5372Lc Grooves (recesses)
372Rc2, 2372Rc, 3372Rc, 5372Rc groove (recess)
4372Rc5 recess (recess)
5372Rd, 5372Ld release member (displacement member)
373Ra, 373La recovery port (second ball entrance)
381c Second rolling part (rolling surface)
381d third rolling part (receiving part)
2381g Partition wall 382 V winning member (first entrance)
613a Guide plate (bottom part)
613a1 Contact surface 613a2 Rolling surface (ball feeding surface)
7613e through hole (recess)
631b second through hole (first opening)
632a through hole (second entrance)
632b connecting hole (second opening)
633b second through hole (first opening)
640, 8640, 9640, 11640 path member (path member)
10642a tip (contact member)
8644a variable plate (rolled means)
8644c Regulating member (route changing means)
652 variable plate (slide member)
11652a recess (guide)
655 solenoid (driving means)
SE1 sensor device (detection member)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a substantially columnar rotary member formed to be rotatable with its rotary shaft oriented in the horizontal direction, and a game ball being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member disposed on the rotary member. A game machine is known in which a game ball is rotated in a state in which a game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface thereof, and a game ball is thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotary member (Patent Document 1). ).

JP 2012-231890 A

However, the game machine described above has a problem that the attraction between the rotating member and the game ball is released.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which attraction between a rotating member and a game ball is difficult to be released.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a substantially cylindrical rotating member formed rotatably in a posture with a rotating shaft directed in a horizontal direction, and a rotating member disposed on the rotating member. and a magnet for attracting a game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, by rotating the rotating member in a state where the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface, the attracted game ball is moved in the rotating direction of the rotating member. It is provided with a rolling surface on which the game ball rolls while being arranged side by side on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the rolling surface is above the rotating shaft of the rotating member in the direction of gravity. To position.

According to the game machine of claim 1, it is possible to make it difficult to release the attraction between the rotating member and the game ball.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. It is a front view of a movable ball entry accessory device. It is a rear view of a movable ball entry accessory device. It is a perspective view of the front of the movable ball entry accessory device. It is a back perspective view of a movable ball entry accessory device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the movable ball entry accessory device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the movable ball entry accessory device. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame; FIG. (a) to (c) are partially enlarged rear views of the center frame. (a) to (c) are partially enlarged front views of the center frame. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the center frame in a first state, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the center frame in a third state. (a) is a front view of an intermediate member, (b) is a rear view of the intermediate member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member taken along line XIXc-XIXc of FIG. 19(a). (a) is an exploded front perspective view of an intermediate member, and FIG. 20(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the intermediate member. (a) is a front view of the center frame and the intermediate member, (b) is a side view of the center frame and the intermediate member, and (c) is the center frame along line XXIc-XXIc in FIG. 21(a). and a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of an intermediate member. (a) to (c) are front views of a center frame and an intermediate member. (a) to (c) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of a center frame and an intermediate member. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of a center frame and an intermediate member. (a) is a front view of the rear member, (b) is a rear view of the rear member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rear member taken along line XXVc-XXVc of FIG. 25(a). Fig. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear member; Fig. 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear member; 26(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the rear member taken along line XXVIII--XXVIII of FIG. 25; (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the rear member. (a) is a front view of the intermediate member and the rear member, and (b) is a side view of the intermediate member and the rear member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member taken along the line XXXIa-XXXIa of FIG. 30(a), and (b) is a cross-section of the intermediate member and the rear member taken along the line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 30(b); It is a diagram. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member and the rear member; (a) is a front view of the rear base, and (b) is a side view of the rear base. Fig. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear base; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear base; 53(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the rear base taken along the LV-LV line in FIG. 52. FIG. (a) is a front view of a variable unit, and (b) is a top view of the variable unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the main body of the variable unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body of the variable unit; FIG. It is a top view of a distribution part. It is a top view of a distribution part. It is a top view of a distribution part. It is a top view of a variable unit. It is a top view of a variable unit. It is a top view of a variable unit. (a) to (c) are top views of the variable unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a turning ball portion of the variable unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a turning ball portion of the variable unit; (a) is a side view of the rotating body, (b) is a top view of the rotating body, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line LXVIIIc-LXVIIIc in FIG. 68(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line LXVIIId-LXVIIId of FIG. 68(b). 56(a) to 56(c) are schematic cross-sectional views of the displacement unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 56(a). (a) to (c) are partial top views of the displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the variable unit and the rear base, and (b) is a top view of the variable unit and the rear base. (a) to (c) are top views of the variable unit and the rear base. 72(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the variable unit and the rear base taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII of FIG. 72(a). 71(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the variable unit and the rear base taken along line LXXIV-LXXIV of FIG. 71(b); FIG. (a) is a sectional view of the variable unit and the rear base before the stopper portion is displaced, and (b) is a sectional view of the variable unit and the rear base after the stopper portion is displaced. FIG. 4 is a top view of the variable unit and the rear base; FIG. 4 is a top view of the variable unit and the rear base; FIG. 4 is a top view of the variable unit and the rear base; (a) to (c) are sectional views of the variable unit and the rear base. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and rear base; (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a back view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the prize winning opening unit. (a) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (b) is a top view of the variable winning device. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device. (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a top view of the winning opening unit. 87(a) and (b) are partial front views of the winning opening unit in range LXXXVII of FIG. 86. FIG. (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb of FIG. 88(a), and FIG. ) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along line LXXXVIIIc-LXXXVIIIc. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the prize winning unit. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the prize winning unit. (a) is a front view of the variable unit in the second embodiment, (b) is a top view of the variable unit, and (c) is the variable unit taken along line XCIc-XCIc in FIG. 91(b). It is a cross-sectional view. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable unit; FIG. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable unit. (a) is a front view of the magnet, (b) is a top view of the magnet, and (c) is a side view of the magnet. (a) to (c) are top views of the variable unit. 95(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 along line XCVIa-XCVIa in FIG. 95(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit along line XCVIb-XCVIb in FIG. 95(b). , (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit taken along line XCVIc--XCVIc in FIG. 95(c). (a) is a side view of the rotating body in the third embodiment, (b) is a top view of the rotating body, and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XCVIIc-XCVIIc in FIG. 97(b). 97(d) is a sectional view taken along line XCVIId--XCVIId in FIG. 97(b). (a) and (b) are sectional views of a variable unit. (a) is a side view of the rotating body in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a top view of the rotating body, and (c) is the rotating body taken along line XCIXc-XCIXc in FIG. 99(b). 99(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line XCIXd--XCIXd in FIG. 99(b); FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and rear base; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and rear base; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and rear base; It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating body in a 5th embodiment. (a) is a side view of the rotating body, (b) is a top view of the rotating body, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line CIVc-CIVc in FIG. 104(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line CIVd-CIVd of FIG. 104(b). FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and rear base; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit and rear base; (a) is a front view of a winning opening unit in a sixth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the prize winning opening unit. FIG. 21 is a front view of a prize winning unit in the seventh embodiment; It is an exploded perspective front view of the prize winning opening unit. 109(a) to (c) are sectional views of the winning opening unit taken along line CXI-CXI in FIG. 109. FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective front view of a winning opening unit in an eighth embodiment; 113(a) is a front view of the path member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the path member taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113(a). (a) is a front view of a path member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the path member. (a) is a front view of a path member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the path member. (a) is a front view of a path member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the path member. It is a front view of the prize-winning unit in the ninth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the prize winning opening unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a path member. (a) and (b) are front views of a path member. (a) and (b) are front views of the prize winning unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the prize winning unit. (a) is a top view of the path switching member in the tenth embodiment, (b) is a front view of the path switching member, and (c) is an exploded perspective front view of the path switching member. (a) is a top view of the route switching member and each route, (b) is a side view of the route switching member and each route as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVb in FIG. 124 (a), and (c) is a 124(a) is a side view of the path switching member and each path as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc of FIG. 124(a); FIG. (a) is a top view of the route switching member and each route, and (b) is a side view of the route switching member and each route. (a) is a top view of the route switching member and each route, and (b) is a side view of the route switching member and each route. (a) is a top view of the route switching member and each route, and (b) is a side view of the route switching member and each route. (a) is a top view of the route switching member and each route, and (b) is a side view of the route switching member and each route. (a) is a top view of the route switching member and each route, and (b) is a side view of the route switching member and each route. (a) is a top view of the route switching member and each route, and (b) is a side view of the route switching member and each route. It is a front view of the prize winning unit in the eleventh embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the prize winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the prize winning opening unit. 131(a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit taken along line CXXXIV-CXXXIV in FIG. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) and (c) are cross-sectional views of the prize winning unit. (a) is a time chart showing the time change of the displacement amount of the variable plate, and (b) is a time chart showing the time change of the displacement amount of the variable plate in the first embodiment. (a) is a side view of the rotating body, (b) is a top view of the rotating body, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line CXXXVIIIc-CXXXVIIIc in FIG. 138(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body taken along line CXXXVIIId-CXXXVIIId of FIG. 138(b).

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 90, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 26, 27, 28, 63, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and guides the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A firing rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right in front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the game ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device (not shown) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. .

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When a ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, game balls are operated in accordance with the operation. will be lent out. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the drive of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the game balls during the period of pressing operation, and the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) based on changes in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the front lower portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when the game balls stored in the lower tray 50 are ejected downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. Game balls naturally fall from the bottom opening and are discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the game balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and two rails. A general winning opening 63, a relatively large movable ball-entering accessory device 300, a left-start winning opening 26 disposed at the lower left position of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, and a medium-start winning opening disposed at the center position. A mouth 28 is provided with a right starting winning mouth 27 disposed at the lower right position, and its peripheral edge is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof.

The general winning opening 63, the left starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, the middle starting winning opening 28, and the movable ball entry accessory device 300 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are used to play games. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the board 13 .

The game ball thrown into the game area randomly enters the normal winning hole 63, the left starting winning hole 26, the middle starting winning hole 28 or the right starting winning hole 27 in the process of flowing down. Or, the ball enters the movable ball entry accessory device 300 when activated (when opened).

A game ball entering each winning hole is recovered to the back side of the game board 13 through a through hole formed in the game board 13. - 特許庁

On the other hand, the game ball that has flowed into the movable ball entry accessory device 300 is discharged after being subjected to a sorting operation through processes such as flowing down, rolling, rising, etc., and collected to the back side of the game board 13. be. Note that the sorting operation in the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 will be described later with reference to another drawing.

When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the left start winning opening 26, the middle starting winning opening 28, or the right starting winning opening 27, the movable ball entry accessory device 300 receives a predetermined is stopped in the form of a small win), allowing the inflow of game balls. That is, the movable ball entry accessory device 300 has a wing portion 312 (so-called wing member) provided at an upper position of the game area, and the wing portion 312 uses, for example, a solenoid 317 (see FIG. 14). Due to the action of the link mechanism, it reciprocates along the board surface by a predetermined angle.

The wings 312 are in a substantially upright state, and the inflow of game balls into the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 is always disabled. When the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 operates, the wing portion 312 is displaced so as to fall down in the left-right direction in the game area centering on the base end portion thereof, thereby allowing the game ball to flow into the movable ball-entering accessory device 300. enable Since the wing portion 312 is located at the upper position within the game area, particularly near the position where the game ball is first hit, the game ball hit into the game area when the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 is activated is positioned at the upper position. Guided by the nail, it easily reaches the wing portion 312, and is guided by the wing portion 312 as it is and flows into the movable ball entry accessory device 300. - 特許庁

The movable ball-entering accessory device 300 operates even when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a game ball passes through any specific area provided inside the movable ball-entering accessory device 300), and the movable It enables the ball to be entered into the ball entry accessory device 300. - 特許庁The specific area in the movable ball entry accessory device 300 will be further described later.

A variable plate 352 (see FIG. 12), which will be described later, is arranged in the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 . The variable plate 352 performs a sorting operation to guide the game ball to the normal route or to the special route. If the game ball is guided to the normal route, the probability of winning a big hit after that is low, but if the game ball is guided to the special route, the big win is after that compared with the case where the game ball is guided to the normal route. more likely to become

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). This is the area where the game ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the game ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. prevented. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. The momentum is attenuated and bounces back to the central part side.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the left and right start prize openings 26 and 27 or the middle start prize opening 28. . Specifically, when the ball enters the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the middle starting winning opening 28, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use the LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving mode or the normal mode by the lighting state, indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing by the lighting state, or display the stop symbols. The lighting state indicates whether or not the symbol corresponds to the small win, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the big win and an error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (a lottery to determine whether or not a game ball flowing down the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 passes through a specific area) is performed when the first sensor 311b wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. A 16R jackpot, a 7R jackpot, and a 3R jackpot are prepared as the jackpot types determined here. In the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, symbols corresponding to the type of the jackpot are displayed in the case of a jackpot.

Here, the “16R jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, the “7R jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds, and the “3R jackpot” is The maximum number of rounds is 3 rounds.

One round is a unit that divides the number of prize balls for a jackpot. In this embodiment, during one round, the wing portion 312 is tilted, the first sensor 311b (see FIG. 14) is opened, and 30 seconds have passed, or 10 game balls have passed the first sensor 311b. becomes. Since there are 10 prize balls when one game ball passes through the first sensor 311b, about 100 prize balls can be obtained in each round.

In this embodiment, the first round ends when the game ball passes through the V winning member 382 (see FIG. 10), so there is no prize ball in the first round. That is, a maximum of about 200 prize balls can be obtained with a 3R jackpot, a maximum of about 600 prize balls can be obtained with a 7R jackpot, and a maximum of about 1500 prize balls can be obtained with a 16R jackpot.

The time-saving state (during time-saving) refers to a game state in which only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased while the big winning probability remains as it is, and the game ball is likely to enter the medium start winning opening 28.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is not in the time-saving state (the state in which the winning probability of the second symbol is not increased).

During time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the variable board 652 of the variable winning device 650 attached to the medium start winning opening 28 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during the normal time. is set. When the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is in an open state (open state), compared with the case where the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is in a closed state (closed state), middle start A game ball is easily entered into the winning hole 28.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the time saving, it becomes a state in which the game ball is likely to enter the medium start winning opening 28, and the feather portion 312 can be easily opened.

In addition, during the time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 associated with the middle start winning opening 28, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the variable plate 652 of the variable prize winning device 650 is opened. In addition, during the time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the variable winning device 650 is variable according to the time when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 attached to the medium start winning port 28 is opened and one time. At least one of the number of times the plate 652 is opened may be changed. In addition, during the time saving, the time during which the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 attached to the middle start winning port 28 is opened and the number of times the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is opened per time are not changed. , only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal state.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In addition, a movable ball entry accessory device 300 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, the winning (starting winning) to the left and right starting winning openings 26, 27 and the middle starting winning opening 28 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, A wing portion 312 that opens and closes, and a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays a second symbol triggered by passage of a game ball through the through gate 67 are provided. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer circumference of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 .

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. If the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the variable plate of the variable winning device 650 attached to the middle start winning port 28 652 is configured to be activated (open) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the time saving than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbols is performed in a short period of time during the time saving, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during the normal period. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given more chances to open the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 of the middle start winning opening 28 . Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which the game ball is likely to enter the middle start winning opening 28.例文帳に追加

In addition, during time saving, by other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and opening times of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 for one time, etc. is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be set constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be kept constant regardless of the game state, or the variable winning for one winning. The opening time and number of openings of the variable plate 652 of the device 650 may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are assembled to the game board on the left and right sides of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, and are configured so that part of the game balls launched to the game board can pass through. When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps corresponding to the maximum number of holdings are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 .

The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. You may make it perform using a part of the ball role device 300. FIG. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the movable ball entry accessory device 300 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of game balls through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, and may be above the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Left and right start winning openings 26 and 27 in which balls can win are provided at the left and right lower sides of the movable ball entry accessory device 300 . When the game ball enters the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27, the left starting winning opening switch 210a and the right starting winning opening switch 210b provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on, and the left starting winning opening switch 210a and the right starting winning opening switch 210a are turned on. A lottery is made by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) due to the turning on of the winning opening switch 210b, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A, and the wings 312 are displayed a predetermined number of times ( It is opened once in this embodiment) and closed after a predetermined period of time (after 0.5 seconds in this embodiment).

On the other hand, on the center side of the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 in a front view, a middle starting winning opening 28 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the game ball enters the middle starting winning opening 28, the middle starting winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the starting winning opening switch). A lottery is made by the device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first pattern display device 37B, and the wings 312 are opened and closed a predetermined number of times (twice in this embodiment). Repeat (0.5 sec release period, 2 sec interval between first and second).

Each starting prize-winning opening 26, 27, 28 draws a lottery so as to give a small prize at 1/1. Therefore, in this embodiment, there is no jackpot lottery due to game balls passing through the start winning openings 26 , 27 , 28 . After the lottery, and after a randomly selected opening period (1 to 5 seconds), the wings 312 repeat opening and closing a predetermined number of times.

In addition, the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 and the middle starting winning opening 28 are also one of the winning openings from which five game balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls enter the left and right starting prize openings 26 and 27 is the same as the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls enter the middle start prize opening 28. However, the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the left and right start prize-winning ports 26, 27 and the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the middle start prize-winning port 28 are different numbers, e.g. , the number of prize balls put out when the game balls enter the left and right start prize-winning ports 26, 27 is set to 3, and the number of prize balls put out when the game balls enter the middle start prize-winning port 28 is set to 5. may

A variable prize winning device 650 is attached to the middle starting prize winning port 28 . The variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the medium start winning opening 28. state. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "O" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the variable board 652 of the variable winning device 650 is displayed. is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the middle start winning port 28.例文帳に追加

As described above, during time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so the symbol "○" in the variable display of the second symbol is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is opened becomes longer than during the normal time during the time saving. Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which the game balls are more likely to enter the middle start winning opening 28 than in the normal time.

The probability of winning a 16R jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a game ball enters the middle start prize opening 28 than when a game ball enters the left and right start prize openings 26, 27. It is set high (it is made easy to collectively enter a plurality of game balls into the movable ball entry accessory device 300). On the other hand, the left and right starting prize-winning ports 26 and 27 do not have an electric accessory like the middle-starting prize-winning port 28, and the ball can always win a prize.

A first sensor 311b is arranged on the upper part of the movable ball entry accessory device 300 . In the pachinko machine 10, after winning the left and right start winning openings 26, 27 or the middle starting winning opening 28, the game ball entering the movable ball entry accessory device 300 passes through the V winning member 382. When the jackpot hits, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on so that the jackpot stop pattern is displayed after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is movably entered. It is displayed on a part of the ball role device 300 to show the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot, jackpot game) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the wings 312 normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The wing portion 312 is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after being closed, the wing portion 312 is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the wings 312 can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (for 16 rounds excluding the first round). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the wing portion 312 is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the wing portion 312 is opened for a predetermined time, and the wing portion is opened. A game state is formed as a special game state in which a large opening provided separately from the wings 312 is opened for a predetermined period of time and a predetermined number of times, triggered by a ball entering the first sensor 311b during the opening of the 312. You can do it. In addition, the number of the first sensor 311b is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper side of the movable ball entry accessory device 300. For example, it may be below the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . A game ball that flows down the game area and has not won a prize in any of the winning holes 26, 27, 28, 63 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 71. - 特許庁In addition, all the game balls hit into the game area, including the game balls entered into the movable ball entry accessory device 300, are recovered to the back side of the game board 13.例文帳に追加The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

An example of the game of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. The purpose of the game of this embodiment is to pass the game ball through the V winning member 382, shift the game state to the special game state, and obtain the prize ball. Therefore, the player adjusts the strength of the game ball so that the game ball slides down the upper surface of the center frame 86 and shoots it. As a result, when the game ball hits a large number of nails and enters each of the start winning openings 26, 27, 28, the feather portion 312 is opened. At this time, if the game ball can enter the movable ball entry device 300 with good timing, the game ball passes through the V prize winning member 382 according to the flow of the subsequent game ball, so that the player can play the game. By visually recognizing the flow of the ball, it is possible to enjoy whether a big hit is obtained or not while watching the movement of the actual game ball.

That is, the first condition for obtaining a big hit is to open the wing portion 312, and the second condition is to allow the game ball to enter the movable ball entry accessory device 300 when the movable piece 190b is opened.

Therefore, a hitting method that does not allow the game ball to reach the center frame 86 (so-called “choro hitting”) or a hitting method that allows the game ball to reach the return rubber 69 (so-called “right hitting”) is used to obtain a big hit in this embodiment. is disadvantageous.

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted in which two game balls are easily entered into the movable ball entry accessory device 300 at the same time to obtain a big win. Therefore, the player shoots the game ball toward the upper end of the center frame 86 (the triangular pointed apex), causing the game ball to spread to the left and right. The aim is to hit two balls in total, one at a time, so that the game can be played so as to easily obtain a big win.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out game balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). I have. The tank 130 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of game balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the lottery of the display results in the second symbol display device.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 4) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 4) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the wing portion 312 of the first sensor 311b. Various solenoid motors 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid 209a for opening and closing rotationally driving to the left and right as a shaft, an electric accessory solenoid 209b for driving the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650, or a motor are connected, The MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input/output port 205 .

Various direct switches 210 which are different from the various switches 208 and are directly involved in the benefits given to the players are directly connected to the MPU 201 without going through the input/output port 205 .

The various solenoid motors 209 include at least a solenoid 317 for opening and closing rotationally driving left and right about the lower side of the wing portion 312 of the first sensor 311b, and a solenoid for opening and closing the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650. 655, and a drive motor 376R that rotationally drives the rotating bodies 372R and 372L.

Incidentally, the various direct switches 210 include a left-start winning slot switch, a right-start winning slot switch, and a middle-start winning slot switch (not shown).

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the game ball corresponds to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to shoot the game ball. is. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the 7-segment display performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, and uses 12 volts to drive various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the various solenoid motors 209, motors, and the like. voltage, 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are applied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like. supply.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the game board 13 includes a movable ball entry accessory device 300 disposed inside an opening 60a in the center of a base plate 60 made of transparent flexible resin, Mainly includes a winning opening unit 600 located on the lower side of the movable ball entry accessory device 300 in the direction of gravity and arranged on the base plate 60, and an irradiation unit 900 arranged on the back side of the base plate 60. .

The movable ball-entering accessory device 300 is inserted from the front side into an opening 60a penetrating through the central portion of the base plate 60 in a front view. The movable ball-entering accessory device 300 has an outer edge larger than the opening 60 a , and the edge is disposed in contact with the front surface of the base plate 60 . As a result, the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 can be positioned and arranged in the front-rear direction with respect to the base plate 60 . A detailed description of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 will be given later.

The winning opening unit 600 is a unit including the start winning openings 26 , 27 , 28 described above, is positioned below the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 in the direction of gravity, and is arranged on the base plate 60 . A detailed description of the prize winning unit 600 will be given later.

The irradiation unit 900 is formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, and its outer shape is formed smaller than the outer shape of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. This makes it impossible for the player to directly view the irradiation unit 900 through the base plate 60 .

Further, a base (not shown) having an LED is arranged inside the irradiation unit 900, and the light emitted from the LED is irradiated to the front side (player side). As described above, since the base plate 60 is made of transparent flexible resin, the light emitted from the LEDs of the irradiation unit 900 can be emitted to the player through the base plate 60 .

Next, detailed configurations of the movable ball entry accessory device 300 and the winning opening unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 90. FIG. First, the movable ball entry accessory device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 80. FIG.

First, referring to FIGS. 8 to 13, the overall configuration of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 will be described. 8 is a front view of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, and FIG. 9 is a rear view of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300. FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the movable ball-entering accessory device 300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 8 to 13, the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 is superimposed on a center frame 310 formed in a substantially rectangular frame state when viewed from the front, and on the upper side of the center frame 310 on the back side in the direction of gravity. a rear member 350 arranged on the rear side of the intermediate member 330; a variable unit 360 arranged on the rear side of the center frame 310; and a control board 410 arranged on the rear side of the rear base 390 .

In the movable ball-entering accessory device 300, the player can visually recognize the intermediate member 330, the rear member 350, and the variable unit 360 arranged on the back side through the inside of the center frame 310 in the frame state (see FIG. 8). .

Next, a detailed configuration of the center frame 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of center frame 310, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of center frame 310. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the center frame 310 includes a frame 311 that is shaped like a frame when viewed from the front, and vanes 312 that are rotatably supported on the front side of the frame 311 in the direction of gravity. , an upper front cover 313 arranged to cover the front side of the frame 311 and interposing the wing portion 312 between itself and the frame 311; and a solenoid 317 generating a driving force for rotating the wing portion 312. , a shaft portion 315 for transmitting the driving force of the solenoid 317 to the wing portion 312 , a back cover 316 accommodating the solenoid 317 , and the solenoid 317 being covered on the back side of the back cover 316 so that the solenoid 317 can escape from the back cover 316 . and a ventilation cover 318 that suppresses the

The frame body 311 is formed in a frame state when viewed from the front, and is provided at a recess 311a recessed toward the back side on the front surface on the upper side in the direction of gravity, and on the edge portion on the lower side in the direction of gravity of the recess 311a. A pair of first sensors 311b, an upper inclined portion 311c formed between the pair of first sensors 311b, a downward inclined portion 311d formed on the inner peripheral surface on the lower side in the gravity direction, and the downward inclined portion 311d. , and a recovery hole 311e opened to a size through which a game ball can pass, and a through hole 311f formed through the concave portion 311a from the front side to the back side.

The concave portion 311a is a concave portion for forming a gap through which a game ball can pass between the concave portion 311a and an upper front cover 313, which will be described later, and the concave dimension is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the concave portion 311a is formed in a crescent shape that curves downward in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 8) toward both ends in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 8) when viewed from the front. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the edge of the recess 311a can flow down along the curved shape while being rolled to the outside of the frame 311. As shown in FIG.

The upwardly inclined portion 311c is positioned at the center of the frame 311 in the left-right direction, and is formed on the other side edge of the recess 311a (the surface connecting the front of the recess 311a and the front of the frame 311). The upper inclined portion 311c is formed so as to incline downward in the direction of gravity from the central portion of the frame 311 toward both ends in the left-right direction. As a result, when a game ball is thrown between the recessed portion 311a (frame body 311) and the upper front cover 313, the thrown game ball rolls on the upper surface of the upper inclined portion 311c due to gravity, and moves upward. It drops from the ends (both left and right ends) of the inclined portion 311c.

The first sensor 311b is formed with a first detection hole 311b1 having an opening large enough for a game ball to pass through. The first sensor 311b can detect the passage of the game ball by passing the game ball inside the first detection hole 311b1.

The first sensor 311b is arranged in such a manner that the first detection hole 311b1 opens in the direction of gravity outside both left and right ends of the upper inclined portion 311c, and is positioned below the lower inclined end of the upper inclined portion 311c. are arranged. Therefore, as described above, when the game ball rolling on the upper inclined portion 311c rolls to the end of the upper inclined portion 311c and falls from the upper inclined portion 311c, the inside of the first detection hole 311b1 of the first sensor 311b pass through. As a result, the game ball thrown between the concave portion 311a and the upper front cover 313 can be detected by the first sensor 311b.

The through hole 311f is a hole through which a rotating shaft 315a of the shaft portion 315, which will be described later, is inserted. formed larger than

The descending inclined portion 311d is a surface for receiving and throwing a game ball to the recovery hole 311e when a game ball thrown from the upper portion of the variable unit 360, which will be described later, falls from the front of the variable unit 360, and is a center frame. It is formed on the inner peripheral surface on the other side of 310 . The descending inclined portion 311d is formed so as to incline downward in the gravitational direction as it extends outward from the substantially central position in the left-right direction. Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the descending slope portion 311d can roll along the slope to the end position of the descending slope portion 311d.

The recovery hole 311e is a hole through which the game ball thrown to the descending slope portion 311d is next thrown as described above, and is formed in an opening larger than the outer diameter of the ball, and is located in the horizontal direction of the descending slope portion 311d. Formed at both ends. Therefore, as described above, the game ball rolling on the upper portion of the descending slope portion 311d rolls to the end of the descending slope portion 311d and falls from the descending slope portion 311d, and is thrown into the recovery hole 311e.

The wing portion 312 is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and its thickness is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. Further, the feather portion 312 is formed with a shaft support hole 312a which is recessed circularly toward the front side on the other side (lower side in the direction of gravity) of the rear side.

The shaft support hole 312a is a hole into which a rotating shaft 315a of the shaft portion 315, which will be described later, is fitted, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially equal to or smaller than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 315a. Accordingly, when the rotary shaft 315a of the shaft portion 315 is rotated, the feather portion 312 can be rotationally displaced about the shaft support hole 312a. A detailed description of the operation of the wings 312 will be given later.

The upper front cover 313 is a plate for forming a flow-down path of the game ball on the front side of the frame 311, and is arranged with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball from the front of the recess 311a of the frame 311. be. As a result, a gap is formed between the concave portion 311a and the upper front cover 313 facing each other so that the game ball can flow down. Further, the upper front cover 313 is formed of a transparent plate-like body so that the game ball flowing down between the concave portion 311a and the upper front cover 313 can be visually recognized by the player.

The upper front cover 313 is formed in a semicircular shape with one side (upper side in the direction of gravity) curved, and has a bulging portion 313a that protrudes toward the back side of one side end.

The protrusions 313a are protrusions for preventing game balls flowing down from above the upper front cover 313 in the gravitational direction from entering between the opposing recesses 311a and the upper front cover 313. The protrusions 313a are arranged in pairs. It is formed on the upper part between the opposing wings 312 . Further, when the wing portion 312 is positioned in the first state (a state in which the wing portion 312 is not rotationally displaced and the tip portion A1 is positioned above the pivot hole 312a in the gravitational direction), the wing portion 312 and the bulging portion 313a is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 cannot enter between the recess 311a and the upper front cover 313 (FIG. 17). (a)).

The solenoid 317 is driving means for applying a driving force to the wing portion 312, and is formed mainly of a shaft portion 317a that displaces the piston and a transmission portion 317b that is formed below the shaft portion 317a in the direction of gravity. be.

The shaft portion 317 a is formed in a columnar shape, and one side of the shaft portion 317 a is inserted through the solenoid 317 . The shaft portion 317 a is arranged so that its axial direction is parallel to the direction of gravity, and when the solenoid 317 is supplied with power, it is displaced upward in the direction of gravity and drawn into the solenoid 317 . That is, the shaft portion 317a can perform piston movement in the direction of gravity.

The transmission portion 317b is formed to protrude from the other side of the shaft portion 317a in a D shape having an opening 317b1 inside. An opening 317b1 of the transmission portion 317b is formed so as to open from the front side to the back side, and a variable shaft 315b, which will be described later, is inserted therein. Therefore, when the shaft portion 317a makes a piston motion in the gravitational direction, the variable shaft 315b inserted into the transmission portion 317b is displaced in the gravitational direction.

The shaft portion 315 is a shaft that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 317 to the blade portion 312. The shaft portion 315 is provided at one end on the front side and connected to the blade portion 312, and is provided at one end on the back side. It mainly includes a variable shaft 315b that engages with the solenoid 317 and a connecting portion 315c that connects the rotating shaft 315a and the variable shaft 315b.

As described above, the rotating shaft 315a is a shaft that transmits the driving force that rotates the wing portion 312, and one end on the front side is inserted from the back side of the through hole 311f of the frame 311 and protrudes to the front side. At the same time, the axial support hole 312 a of the feather portion 312 is fitted onto the end portion of the frame 311 protruding from the front side.

The variable shaft 315b has the end on the back side inserted into the transmission portion 317b of the solenoid 317 as described above, and is displaced when the solenoid 317 is driven.

The connecting portion 315c is a connecting portion that connects the rotating shaft 315a and the variable shaft 315b, and the rear end of the rotating shaft 315a and the front end of the variable shaft 315b are connected. The rotating shaft 315a and the variable shaft 315b are connected so that their axes are parallel to each other. That is, the rotating shaft 315a and the variable shaft 315b are connected by the connecting portion 315c at an eccentric position. As a result, when the variable shaft 315b is displaced in the gravitational direction, the displacement is transmitted to the rotating shaft 315a through the connecting portion 315c, and the rotating shaft 315a is rotationally displaced. As a result, the wings 312 can be rotationally displaced.

The rear cover 316 is a plate for arranging the solenoid 317 inside, and is arranged in such a manner as to cover the upper side of the rear surface of the frame 311 in the direction of gravity, and the solenoid 317 is arranged on the rear side. A recessed portion 316a is provided, and an opening 316b is formed below the recessed portion 316a in the gravitational direction.

The recessed portion 316 a is a recess for arranging the solenoid 317 inside, and is recessed at a position facing the solenoid 317 . The recessed depth of the recessed portion 316a is set to be substantially the same as the thickness dimension of the solenoid 317 in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the rear cover 316 and the rear side of the solenoid 317 are arranged at positions substantially aligned with each other. be. Therefore, the ventilation cover 318 formed of a plate-like body is provided on the back side of the back cover 316 so that the solenoid 317 cannot be removed from the back cover 316 .

The opening 316b is an opening for engaging the variable shaft 315b of the shaft portion 315 with the transmission portion 317b of the solenoid 317, and is formed to be larger than the displacement region of the variable shaft 315b. Thereby, the driving force of the solenoid 317 arranged on the back side of the back cover 316 can be transmitted to the shaft portion 315 .

Next, referring to FIGS. 16 and 17, the displacement operation of the wing portion 312 will be described. 16A to 16C are partially enlarged rear views of the center frame 310, and FIGS. 17A to 17C are partially enlarged front views of the center frame 310. FIG.

16(a) and 17(a) show the first state before the wing portion 312 is displaced, and FIGS. 16(c) and 17(c) show the third state after the wing portion 312 is displaced. However, FIGS. 16(b) and 17(b) show the second state at an intermediate position during the displacement from the first state to the third state. Also, in FIG. 17, the end portion of the feather portion 312 on the side opposite to the shaft support hole 312a will be described as the tip portion A1.

Further, FIGS. 16(a) to 16(c) show the ventilation cover 318, and FIGS. 17(a) to 17(c) show the upper front cover 313 in a transparent state. 16 and 17, the rotating shaft 315a is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 17(a), in the first state, the shaft portion 317a of the solenoid 317 is arranged to protrude downward in the direction of gravity. As a result, the variable shaft 315b inserted through the opening 317b1 of the transmission portion 317b is positioned below the rotating shaft 315a in the direction of gravity. In this case, the tip portion A1 of the wing portion 312 to which the rotating shaft 315a is fitted is located above the shaft support hole 312a (rotating shaft 315a) in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 17A) and opposite to the pair of wing portions 312 located inside the

From the state shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 17(a), when power is applied to the solenoid 317 and the shaft portion 317a is displaced upward in the gravitational direction, the second position shown in FIGS. state.

As shown in FIGS. 16B and 17B, in the second state, the variable shaft 315b of the shaft portion 315 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity and accommodated inside the solenoid 317. , is displaced upward in the direction of gravity while rotating about the axis of the rotating shaft 315a. When the variable shaft 315b is rotationally displaced, the rotational displacement is transmitted to the rotary shaft 315a through the connecting portion 315c, thereby rotating the rotary shaft 315a. As a result, the feather portion 312 is rotationally displaced around the shaft support hole 312a.

In the second state, the tip portion A1 of the wing portion 312 is positioned outside between the pair of wing portions 312 facing each other, and the gap between the tip portion A1 and the bulging portion 313a of the upper front cover 313 is outside the game ball. made larger than the diameter. That is, in the second state, a game ball flowing down from above in the direction of gravity can enter between the recess 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover.

The second state is an intermediate position in the displacement from the first state to the third state. In other words, the displacement of the wing portion 312 is performed as a series of operations between the position of the first state described above and the position of the third state described later.

From the state shown in FIGS. 16(b) and 17(b), when power continues to be applied to the solenoid 317 and the shaft portion 317a is further displaced upward in the gravitational direction, FIGS. A third state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 16B and 17B, in the third state, the shaft portion 317a is displaced further upward in the gravitational direction than in the second state described above and accommodated inside the solenoid 317 . As a result, the variable shaft 315b of the shaft portion 315 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity while further rotating around the axis of the rotating shaft 315a. When the variable shaft 315b is rotationally displaced, the rotational displacement of the variable shaft 315b is transmitted to the rotary shaft 315a via the connecting portion 315c, similarly to the displacement from the first state to the second state described above, and the rotary shaft 315a is rotated. further rotated. Therefore, the vane portion 312 is further rotationally displaced about the shaft support hole 312a than in the second state.

In the third state, the tip A1 of the vane portion 312 is positioned outside the space between the pair of vane portions 312 facing each other, and the imaginary line S1 connecting the tip A1 and the shaft support hole 312a (rotating shaft 315a) is It is in a state of being inclined outward in the horizontal direction by approximately 45 degrees with respect to the direction of gravity. As a result, the area where the wing portion 312 can catch the game ball flowing down above the game board 13 is enlarged, so that the game ball can easily flow into the space between the recess 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover 313. can.

Next, referring to FIG. 18, game balls flowing down the game board 13 in the first state and the third state will be described. 18(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the center frame 310 in the first state, and FIG. 18(b) is a partially enlarged front view of the center frame 310 in the third state.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), in the first state, the gap between the tip A1 of the wing portion 312 and the bulging portion 313a of the upper front cover 313 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. A game ball cannot flow into between the concave portion 311a and the upper front cover 313 facing each other.

Therefore, the game ball flowing down from above the center frame 310 does not flow into the space between the recess 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover 313, and the center frame 310 (movable ball entry accessory device 300) moves in the horizontal direction. flow down both sides.

On the other hand, in the third state, as described above, the imaginary line S1 connecting the tip portion A1 of the vane portion 312 and the shaft support hole 312a is inclined approximately 45 degrees with respect to the direction of gravity. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18(b), the game ball can flow into the space between the concave portion 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover 313 facing each other.

Therefore, the game ball that flows down from above the center frame 310 and collides with the upper portion of the wing portion 312 is rolled by the wing portion 312 between the concave portion 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover 313 and thrown. be.

Next, a detailed configuration of the intermediate member 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. 19(a) is a front view of the intermediate member 330, FIG. 19(b) is a rear view of the intermediate member 330, and FIG. 19(c) is a line XIXc-XIXc of FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of an intermediate member 330; FIG. 20(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the intermediate member 330, and FIG. 20(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the intermediate member 330. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the intermediate member 330 includes a body portion 331 formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the body portion 331 disposed on both laterally outer sides of the body portion 331 to irradiate the inside of the body portion 331. A decorative base 332 is mainly provided.

The main body part 331 picks up the game ball thrown between the recessed part 311a of the frame body 311 of the center frame 310 and the upper front cover 313 under the gravity direction of the first sensor 311b and throws the ball to the back side. A receiving portion 331a which is a plate and protrudes from a substantially central position on the front side and whose tip is disposed below the first detection hole 311b1 (first sensor 311b) in the direction of gravity, and a portion below the receiving portion 331a in the direction of gravity. and a guide portion 331b that guides a game ball thrown from the receiving portion 331a to a plurality of flow paths.

Also, the body portion 331 is made of a transparent flexible material. As a result, the light emitted from the decoration base 332 arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction of the body portion 331 can be emitted to the inside of the body portion 331 .

The receiving portion 331a is formed to have a substantially U-shaped cross-section with an open upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the vertical direction in FIG. 19A) when viewed from the front. The projecting front end of the receiving portion 331a is inserted into the opening of the frame 311 of the center frame 310 and positioned below the first detection hole 311b1 (first sensor 311b) of the frame 311 in the direction of gravity. are arranged. Thereby, as described above, the game ball passing through the first detection hole 311b1 of the frame 311 (center frame 310) can be dropped to the inner surface (U-shaped inner portion) of the receiving portion 331a.

Further, the receiving portion 331a is formed such that the bottom surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity is inclined downward from the front side toward the back side (see FIG. 19C). As a result, the game ball dropped onto the receiving portion 331 a can be rolled along the downward slope and thrown to the back side of the main body portion 331 .

The guide portion 331b is formed so as to protrude from the back side of the main body portion 331 on the lower side of the receiving portion 331a in the direction of gravity (lower side in the vertical direction in FIG. 19B). The guide part 331b is formed by protruding two large and small U-shapes, which are open at the lower side in the gravity direction, at a predetermined interval larger than the diameter of the game ball.

The small U-shaped inner guide portion 331b1 of the guide portion 331b has an upper surface that slopes downward from the substantially central position in the left-right direction toward the outside. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the inner guide part 331b1 can roll in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the inner guide part 331b1.

The large U-shaped outer guide portion 331b2 of the guide portion 331b is formed with an interval larger than the diameter of the game ball from the inner guide portion 331b1, as described above. Thereby, the game ball can be guided between the inner guide portion 331b1 and the outer guide portion 331b2 facing each other. A game ball guided between the inner guide portion 331b1 and the outer guide portion 331b2 facing each other flows down between the facing portions and is thrown to the first rolling portion 381a of the main body portion 380, which will be described later.

A standing wall 331c protruding from the back side of the body portion 331 extends in the direction of gravity outside the outer guide portion 331b2 in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 19(b)). The standing wall 331c is formed with an interval larger than the diameter of the outer guide portion 331b2 and the game ball. As a result, the game ball that is thrown to the upper surface of the outer guide portion 331b2 and falls from the upper surface of the outer guide portion 331b2 can be thrown between the opposing outer guide portion 331b2 and the standing wall 331c and flow down.

Next, throwing a game ball from the center frame 310 to the intermediate member 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 23. FIG. 21(a) is a front view of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330, FIG. 21(b) is a side view of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330 along line XXIc-XXIc of a). 22(a) to 22(c) are front views of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330. FIG. 23(a) to 23(c) are partially enlarged sectional views of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330. FIG.

21 to 23 illustrate a state in which the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330 are combined. 22 and 23 show the center frame 310 in the third state (the state in which the wings 312 are rotated about the shaft support holes 312a), and FIGS. A cross-section corresponding to the cross-section of FIG. 21(c) is shown. Further, in Figures 22 and 23, the ball pitched transition state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) to 21(c), when the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330 are assembled, the protruding tip of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is attached to the upper front cover 313 of the center frame 310. The positions in the front and the direction of gravity are substantially the same. That is, the receiving portion 331a protrudes to a position facing the first sensor 311b in the direction of gravity. Therefore, as described above, the game ball flowing down through the inside of the first sensor 311b can be dropped onto the receiving portion 331a.

As shown in FIGS. 22(a) and 23(a), in the wing portion 312 in the third state, a game ball flowing down from the upper side of the center frame in the direction of gravity comes into contact with the wing portion 312, The ball is thrown between 312 opposing sides. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 22(b) and 23(b), the ball is thrown between the recess 311a of the frame 311 and the upper front cover 313 facing each other.

As shown in FIGS. 22(b) and 23(b), the game ball thrown between the upper front cover 313 and the concave portion 311a of the frame 311 facing each other is arranged at the lower edge of the concave portion 311a in the direction of gravity. The ball passes through the inside guide portion 331b1 of the first sensor 311b provided and is thrown to the inside of the receiving portion 331a shown in FIGS. 22(c) and 23(c).

As shown in FIGS. 22(c) and 23(c), the curved portion of the receiving portion 331a (curved portion having a U shape when viewed from the front) is located below the inner guide portion 331b1 of the first sensor 311b in the gravitational direction. be located. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball falling on the receiving portion 331a from rebounding and rebounding. As a result, it is possible to suppress the slowing down of the rolling speed of the game ball rolling inside the receiving portion 331a.

Next, referring to FIG. 24, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a will be described. 24(a) to 24(c) are sectional views of the center frame 310 and the intermediate member 330. FIG. 24(a) to 24(c) illustrate transition states of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a. 24(a) to 24(c) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 21(c).

As shown in FIGS. 24(a) to 24(c), the game ball thrown to the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a rolls on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a due to the downward inclination toward the base side (back side). and rolls toward the base of the receiving portion 331a. At this time, as described above, the curved portion of the receiving portion 331a is positioned below the inner guide portion 331b1 of the first sensor 311b in the direction of gravity, so that the game ball flowing down from the inner guide portion 331b1 is received by the receiving portion 331a. It can collide with curved parts. As a result, the game ball flowing down in the direction of gravity can be displaced in the left-right direction. Therefore, the rolling motion of the game ball flowing down on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a can be caused not only to roll toward the base portion of the receiving portion 331a but also to roll in the left-right direction. It is possible to improve the interest of the player by showing it.

In addition, since the curved portion has higher rigidity than the flat surface, by making the curved portion the position where the game ball flows down to the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a, when the game ball falls to the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a, the receiving portion 331a can be suppressed from being damaged by the impact.

The rear member 350 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 25-27. 25(a) is a front view of the rear member 350, FIG. 25(b) is a rear view of the rear member 350, and FIG. 25(c) is a view taken along line XXVc-XXVc of FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of rear member 350. FIG. 26 is an exploded front perspective view of rear member 350, and FIG. 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of rear member 350. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the rear member 350 includes a rear main body portion 351 formed of a substantially trapezoidal plate-like body when viewed from the front, and an opening 351b opening in the front-rear direction at the central portion of the rear main body portion 351. A variable plate 352 arranged to be displaceable inside, and a winning prize in which the variable plate 352 is attached to the back body portion 351 in a manner sandwiching the variable plate 352, and a game ball is thrown into the inside of the variable plate 352 as the variable plate 352 is displaced. A member 353, a decorative member 354 attached to the prize winning member 353 and forming a ball throwing path of the game ball inside the prize winning member 353, and a light beam to the player side through the decorative member 354 and attached to the decorative member 354. a light-emitting member 355 that emits light, a solenoid 356 that applies a driving force to the variable plate 352, and a cover member 357 that is attached between the decorative member 354 via the solenoid 356 and holds the solenoid 356 so that it cannot fall off. is formed mainly with

The rear body portion 351 includes a standing portion 351a that protrudes in a U-shaped cross section toward the front side, an opening 351b that is formed inside the standing portion 351a and opens from the front to the back, and the lateral direction of the opening 351b. Bearing portions 352f that are positioned on both outer sides and hold a shaft portion 352a of a variable plate 352, which will be described later, and a game ball that opens from the front to the back of the opening 351b in the direction of gravity and is thrown from the opening 351b to the back side. and a first recess 351d and a second recess 351e recessed from the front toward the back at the lower end of the back main body 351 in the direction of gravity. .

The back body portion 351 is a member that causes a game ball rolling (thrown through the intermediate member 330) to roll on the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 (body portion 331) downward in the direction of gravity. It is attached to the intermediate member 330 with a space larger than the diameter of the game ball from the back side. As a result, the game ball can flow down between the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351 facing each other.

Further, the rear main body portion 351 is formed so that the external shape in a front view is substantially the same as or smaller than the external shape of the intermediate member 330 . As a result, the members are prevented from protruding outside the center frame 310 of the assembled movable ball-entering accessory device 300 in front view, and the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 is attached to the opening 60a of the base plate 60. The movable ball-entering accessory device 300 can be placed by simply inserting it from the front when wearing, and the movable ball-entering accessory device 300 can be easily attached to the base plate 60. - 特許庁

The erected portion 351a is formed in a U shape that opens downward when viewed from the front. The erected portion 351a includes a first erected portion 351a1 having a small width dimension between the opposed portions and a second erected portion 351a2 having a larger distance dimension between the opposed portions than the first erected portion 351a1.

The first upright portion 351a1 is set so that the distance dimension between the left and right sides facing each other is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the left and right sides facing the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330, and the left and right ends of the first standing portion 351a1 are set to the receiving portions 331a. It is disposed at a position opposed to the left and right ends in the front-rear direction. Also, the height position in the direction of gravity of the upper end of the first standing portion 351a1 is set to be substantially the same as the upper end of the receiving portion 331a. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 and is thrown can flow down between the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351, and the inside of the standing portion 351a. can flow down to

The second upright portion 351a2 is formed in connection with the lower end portion of the first upright portion 352a1 in the gravity direction. The dimension of the distance between the opposing second standing portions 351a2 is set to be substantially the same as the dimension of the longitudinal direction of the opening 351b. It is possible to suppress the game ball from flowing down in the direction outside. As a result, when the variable plate 352 is displaced, the game ball flowing down between the rear body portion 351 and the intermediate member 330 facing each other can be reliably thrown to the opening 351b.

The opening 351b is an opening for allowing a game ball flowing down between the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351 to be thrown to the back side of the back body portion 351. The width dimension in the hand direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, as described above, the opening 351b is formed between the left and right opposing second standing portions 351a2.

The connecting hole 351c is a hole through which a game ball passed through the inside of the opening 351b and sent to the back side of the back body portion is sent to the front side via a winning member 353 described later. It is positioned and formed with a rectangular opening that is larger than the diameter of the sphere. Two connecting holes 351c are arranged side by side in the left-right direction.

The first recessed portion 351d is a path along which a game ball sent from the connecting hole 351c to the front side of the back body portion 351 is guided by the upper surface of the inner guide portion of the intermediate member 330 described above and flows down. is positioned at the lower end in the direction of gravity of the , and recessed toward the rear side.

In addition, the first recessed portion 351d is positioned between the inner guide portion 331b1 and the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330 in a front view when the back body portion 351 (rear member 350) is arranged in the intermediate member 330. formed by Therefore, the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down between the inner guide portion 331b1 and the outer guide portion 331b2 facing each other can be displaced to the rear side. As a result, when the game ball thrown between the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351 facing each other flows down to the later-described variable unit 360, the flow-down speed in the direction of gravity can be slowed down. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown to the variable unit 360, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the variable unit 360 and bouncing, and the ball from the rear member 350 to the variable unit 360 can be stabilized.

The second recessed portion 351e is a path along which the game ball flowing down between the opposing intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 is guided by the upper surface of the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330 and flows down, and the left and right direction of the first recessed portion 351d It is located outside and recessed toward the rear side.

In addition, the second recessed portion 351e is positioned between the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330 and the erected wall 331c in a front view when the back body portion 351 (rear member 350) is arranged on the intermediate member 330. formed by Therefore, it is possible to displace the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down between the opposing outer guide portion 331b2 and the erected wall 331c to the rear side. As a result, when the game ball thrown between the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351 facing each other flows down to the later-described variable unit 360, the flow-down speed in the direction of gravity can be slowed down. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown to the variable unit 360, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the variable unit 360 and bouncing, and the ball from the rear member 359 to the variable unit 360 can be stabilized.

As described above, the variable plate 352 is a guide member for throwing the game ball flowing down between the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351 (rear member 350) into the opening 351b of the back body portion 351. It is disposed inside the opening 351b of the back body portion 351 in a rotatable state.

The variable plate 352 is formed from a transparent flexible material. The variable plate 352 includes a plate portion 352d which is disposed inside the opening 351b of the back main body portion 351 and which is formed into a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front. and a first shaft portion 352a which is rotatably supported and which protrudes radially outwardly from the shaft portion 352a and engages with the rear body portion 351 when the variable plate 352 is displaced to regulate the amount of displacement of the variable plate 352. It mainly includes a protrusion 352b and a second protrusion 352c that protrudes in a radial direction different from that of the first protrusion 352b and transmits a driving force of a solenoid 356 of a driving means, which will be described later.

The plate portion 352d is a plate-like body that guides the game ball that is rotationally displaced and flows down between the intermediate member 330 and the back main body portion 351 to the opening 351b. formed in

The plate portion 352d has a front portion 352d2 facing the intermediate member 330 before being displaced, and a bulging portion 352d1 bulging toward the intermediate member 330 from the end opposite to the rotation shaft (shaft portion 352a). Prepare. A detailed description of the bulging portion 352d1 and the front portion 352d2 will be given later.

The shaft portion 352a is a shaft portion on which the plate portion 352d is rotatably supported, and protrudes from one end of the plate portion 352d on the lower side in the direction of gravity. The shaft portion 352a is arranged inside the bearing portion 351f of the back body portion 351, and the winning member 353 described later is arranged from the back side, so that the shaft portion 352a is rotatable between the back body portion 351 and the winning member 353. retained. Thereby, the variable plate 352 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the back body portion 351 .

The first protrusions 352b are protrusions that, when the variable plate 352 is rotationally displaced, come into contact with the rear main body portion 351 to limit the amount of displacement of the variable plate 352 during rotation. formed to protrude. In addition, the projecting directions of the first projections 352b of the shaft portions 352a at both ends are set to be substantially the same when viewed in the axial direction of the shaft portions 352a.

Furthermore, one first projection 352b (in this embodiment, the first projection 352b on the right side in front view) is engaged with a transmission portion 356a of a solenoid 356, which will be described later. Thereby, the driving force of the solenoid 356 can be transmitted to the variable plate 352 . Therefore, the driving force of the solenoid 356 can rotate the variable plate 352 about the axis of the shaft portion 352a.

A second projection 352c is formed on the shaft portion 352a of one of the first projections 352b so as to project radially from the shaft portion 352a. When viewed in the axial direction of the shaft portion 352a, the first projection 352b and the second projection 352c are formed with a predetermined gap around the shaft, and the tip of the transmission portion 356a of the solenoid 356 is inserted into the gap. . As a result, the driving force is applied from the solenoid 356 and the transmission portion 356a is displaced, so that the variable plate 352 can be rotated around the axis of the shaft portion 252a. A detailed description of the operation of the variable plate 352 will be given later.

The prize-winning member 353 is a member that forms a path along which game balls thrown into the opening 351b of the back main body 351 by displacing the variable plate 352 flow down, and is connected to the opening 351b of the back main body 351. A hole 353a, a second detection hole 353b opening downward at the inner edge of the connecting hole 353a, a front side opening 353c having one end connected to the second detection hole 353b and the other end opening to the front side, and a rear side. A first irregular reflection portion 353d formed on the side, a through hole 353e through which the transmission portion 356a of the solenoid 356 is inserted, and an erected wall 353f erected from the edge of the first irregular reflection portion 353d. be done.

The connecting hole 353a is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the opening 351b of the back body portion 351 in a front view, and is formed at a position facing the opening 351b. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the opening 351b can be thrown into the connecting hole 353a.

The second detection hole 353b is a hole formed by a sensor that detects passage of the ball, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the ball. The second detection hole 353b is formed in the lower inner edge portion of the connecting hole 353a in the direction of gravity, and is formed so as to open in the direction of gravity. As a result, the game ball thrown into the connecting hole 353a can be passed through the second detection hole 353b and thrown, and the sensor detects the number of balls when passing through the second detection hole 353b. The number of balls passing through the opening 351b can be measured.

The front opening 353c is a hole for throwing a game ball sent to the second detection hole 353b into the connecting hole 351c of the back body portion 351, and one end of the opening is connected to the second detection hole 353b. The other end is connected to the connecting hole 351c of the back body portion 351 from the back side. Therefore, the game ball sent to the inside of the opening 351b of the back body portion 351 can pass through the inside of the front side opening 353c via the second detection hole 353b and be discharged from the connecting hole 351c of the back body portion 351.

The first irregular reflection portion 353d is an irregular reflection surface that diffusely reflects light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 described later and emits it forward. be. Light emitted from the LEDs 355a of the light emitting member 355 is made incident on a plurality of uneven surfaces, so that the direction of travel of the light emitted from the front side of the first irregular reflection portion 353d toward the player side is dispersed, and the first irregular reflection portion 353d can be illuminated efficiently.

The through-hole 353e is an opening through which the transmission portion 356a of the solenoid 356 is inserted from the back side to the front side, and is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape larger than the outer shape of the transmission portion 356a when viewed from the front. Penetrations are formed at opposing positions.

The standing wall 353f is a wall that prevents the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 from escaping to the outside. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 355a toward the first irregular reflection portion 353d can be prevented from escaping outward from the standing wall 353f.

The decorative member 354 is formed in a plate-like body that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and has substantially the same outer shape as the winning member 353 when viewed from the front. The decorative member 354 includes a second irregular reflection portion 354b formed on a surface facing a light emitting member 355, which will be described later, an opening 354a formed through a position facing a first irregular reflection portion 353d of the winning member 353, and a solenoid 356. It is mainly formed with a through hole 354c penetratingly formed at a position facing the transmission portion 356a.

The opening 354a is an opening for directly irradiating the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 to the first irregular reflection portion 353d of the prize winning member 353. The opening 354a has substantially the same rectangular outer shape as the first irregular reflection portion 353d when viewed from the front. It is opened and formed at a position facing the first irregular reflection portion 353d.

The second diffused reflection part 354b is a diffused reflection surface that diffusely reflects the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 arranged on the back side and emits it forward. Unevenness is formed. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 is caused to enter the plurality of irregularities, so that the direction of travel of the light emitted from the front side of the second irregular reflection portion 354b is dispersed, and the second irregular reflection portion 354b is efficiently displaced. It can illuminate well.

The through-hole 354c is an opening through which the transmission portion 356a of the solenoid 356 is inserted from the back side to the front side. Penetrations are formed at opposing positions.

The light emitting member 355 has an LED 355 a that emits light on the front side (the side facing the decorative member 354 ) and is attached to the back side of the decorative member 354 . As a result, light can be emitted to the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b.

The solenoid 356 has a transmission portion 356 a that transmits driving force to the variable plate 352 . As described above, the solenoid 356 is driving means for applying a rotational driving force to the variable plate 352. When electric power is applied, the transmission portion 356a is displaced in the direction of gravity.

The transmission part 356 a is inserted through the through hole 353 e of the winning member 353 and the through hole 354 c of the decorative member 354 and arranged between the first protrusion 352 b and the second protrusion 352 c of the variable plate 352 . Therefore, when the transmission portion 356a is displaced, the variable plate 352 is rotated around the axis of the shaft portion 352a.

Next, the displacement mode of the variable plate 352 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. FIGS. 28(a)-28(c) are cross-sectional views of rear member 350 taken along line XXVIII--XXVIII of FIG. 29(a) to 29(c) are cross-sectional views of the rear member 350. FIG. 28(a) and 29(a) show the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state, and FIGS. 28(b) and 29(b) show the variable plate 352 in the second rotation state. c) and FIG. 29(c) respectively illustrate the variable plate 352 in the third rotational state. 29(a) to 29(c) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 25(c).

As shown in FIG. 28(a), in the first rotation state in which the transmission portion 356a of the solenoid 356 is positioned downward in the direction of gravity, the transmission portion 356a contacts one side of the second projection 352c of the variable plate 352 and The other side of the two projections 352c and the back side of the back body portion 351 are brought into contact with each other. That is, the second projection 352c is sandwiched between the transmission portion 356a and the rear body portion 351. As shown in FIG. As a result, the variable plate 352 can be prevented from being wobbly and rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 352a.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the variable plate 352 in the first rotating state has the bulging portion 352d1 positioned above the shaft portion 352a in the gravitational direction, and the front portion 352d2 is the opening of the back body portion 351. As shown in FIG. 351b is covered (closed). In this case, the shortest distance dimension L1 between the upper end face of the opening 351b in the gravity direction and the variable plate 352 is set smaller than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the game ball thrown between the intermediate member 330 and the back main body portion 351 is not thrown into the opening 351b, and flows down in front of the variable plate 352. As shown in FIG.

In addition, in the first rotation state, the front portion 352d2 is tilted forward as it separates from the shaft portion 352a, and the tip portion of the bulging portion 352d1 is positioned on the front plane of the back body portion 351. .

28(a) and 29(a), electric power is applied to the solenoid 356, the transmission portion 356a is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, and the transmission portion 356a is displaced by half of the total displacement. In the second rotation state shown in 28(b) and 29(b), the transmission portion 356a contacts the first projection 352b of the variable plate 352 to rotate the first projection 352b around the axis of the shaft portion 352a. As a result, the variable plate 352 is rotated around the axis of the shaft portion 352a.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), in the variable plate 352 in the second rotation state, the bulge portion 352d1 is positioned on the front side with respect to the shaft portion 352a, and the front portion 352d2 is inclined upward toward the front side. is made smaller than in the first rotation state. In this case, the shortest distance dimension L2 between the upper end surface of the opening 351b in the gravity direction and the variable plate 352 is set smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

28(b) and 29(b), power continues to be applied to the solenoid 356, the transmission portion 356a is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, and the transmission portion 356a is displaced to the end. In the third rotation state shown in 28(c) and 29(c), the transmission portion 356a contacts the first projection 352b of the variable plate 352 to further rotate the first projection 352b around the axis of the shaft portion 352a. As a result, the variable plate 352 is further rotated around the axis of the shaft portion 352a than in the second rotation state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28(c), in the third rotation state, the transmitting portion 356a and one end of the first projection 352b are in contact with each other, and the intermediate member 330 and the other end of the first projection 352b are in contact with each other. be. That is, the first projection 352b is sandwiched between the rear body portion 351 and the transmission portion 356a. As a result, the variable plate 352 can be prevented from being wobbly and rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 352a.

As shown in FIG. 29(c), in the variable plate 352 in the third rotation state, the bulging portion 352d1 is located on the front side with respect to the shaft portion 352a. In this case, the shortest distance dimension L3 between the upper end face of the opening 351b in the gravity direction and the variable plate 352 is set larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the game ball thrown between the intermediate member 330 and the back main body portion 351 is thrown into the opening 351b.

In addition, in the third rotation state, the opposite surface of the front surface portion 352d2 is inclined upward with increasing distance from the shaft portion 352a. Therefore, a game ball thrown upward from the plate portion 352 d can be thrown inside the opening 351 b of the back body portion 351 .

Therefore, the distance between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the light emitting means is made larger than the distance between the second irregular reflection portion 354b and the light emitting means, and the space between the variable plate 352 and the second irregular reflection portion 354b faces the game surface. Since it is the first flow-down path of the sphere, it is possible to reduce the size of the unit composed of the variable plate 352, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b. That is, the space between the variable plate 352 and the second irregular reflection portion 354b, which are formed in order to change the aspect of the light visually recognized by the player, is used as the first flow-down path of the game ball, thereby making the dead space effective. There is no need to secure a separate space for the flow-down route. Therefore, the size of the unit can be reduced accordingly.

30 and 31, a detailed description of intermediate member 330 and rear member 350 will now be provided. 30(a) is a front view of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350, and FIG. 30(b) is a side view of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350. FIG. 31(a) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 taken along line XXXIa-XXXIa of FIG. 30(a), and FIG. 31(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view of member 330 and rear member 350;

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the distance dimension L4 between the LED 355a and the second irregular reflection portion 354b is set smaller than the distance dimension L5 between the LED 355a and the first irregular reflection portion 353d (L4 <L5). Also, the variable plate 352 is arranged in the light transmission direction of the second irregular reflection portion 354b.

Here, a game machine is known which includes a displacement member (variable plate 352) displaceably disposed at a position visible to the player and switching the flow path of the game ball according to the displaced position. In this case, by arranging the displacement member on the front side of the transmissive member made of a transparent flexible material and irradiating the light from the back side of the transmissive member, the player moves the displacement member along with the light transmitted through the transmissive member. There is also known a technique of visually recognizing the displacement member and focusing attention on the displacement member. However, in the conventional technology described above, since the displacement member is formed of a non-transmissive material that does not transmit light, the region (area) of the light visible to the player is reduced by the size of the displacement member. Performance effects are hindered.

In response to this, by forming the displacement member (variable plate 352) from a transparent flexible material, not only the transmission member but also the light transmitted through the displacement member can be visually recognized by the player. A technique for securing a region (area) was developed (unknown at the time of filing). However, it has been found that when the displacement member is formed of a transparent flexible material, it is difficult for the player to identify the position of the displacement member.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a substrate member (light emitting member 355) on which one or a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 355a) capable of emitting light is mounted with the light emitting surface facing the front side; A first transparent member (first irregular reflection portion 353d) and a second transparent member (second irregular reflection portion 354b) are provided on the front side of the substrate member and formed of a light-transmitting material, and the displacement member is transparent and flexible. and is disposed on the front side of the second transmission member, and the distance between the second transmission member and the substrate member is different from the distance between the first transmission member and the substrate member. Since it is set, it is possible to allow the player to easily identify the position of the displacement member while ensuring the region (area) of the light to be visually recognized by the player.

That is, since the distance from the light emitting means (LED 355a) differs between the first transmitting member (first diffuse reflection portion 353d) and the second transmitting member (second irregular reflecting portion 354b), the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member are separated from each other. It is possible to vary the mode of light diffusion during transmission. Therefore, the mode of light transmitted through the first transmissive member and visually recognized by the player can be made different from the mode of light transmitted through the second transmissive member and visually recognized by the player. As a result, the player can easily identify the position of the displacement member (variable plate 352) disposed on the front side of the second transmission member.

Also, here, the light emitting member 355, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b formed of a transparent flexible material on the light irradiation side of the light emitting member 355 (LED 355a), and flowing down the game area In a gaming machine provided with a variable plate 352 that guides a game ball to either the first ball throwing route KR1 or the second ball throwing route KR2, the second light emitting member is used to make it easier for the player to recognize the variable plate 352. , and change the color of the light emitted from the second light emitting member or change the angle of irradiation so that the position of the variable plate 352 can be easily recognized by the player. Therefore, there is a problem that the number of parts increases due to the provision of the second light emitting member, and the manufacturing process becomes complicated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the distance L4 between the light emitting member 355 (LED 355a) and the second irregular reflection portion 354b is different from the distance L5 between the LED 355a and the first irregular reflection portion 353d. , and the variable plate 352 is arranged in front of the second irregular reflection portion 354b. As a result, the form (amount) of the light emitted from the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b can be made different, so that the visibility of the variable plate 352 from the player can be improved.

That is, the farther the first irregular reflection portion 353d is arranged from the light emitting member 355, the more the light from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 diffuses outward, and the less the amount of transmitted light is. Since the second irregular reflection portion 354b is arranged at different distances from the light emitting means, the brightness of the light transmitted through the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b is determined by the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b. It can be made different by the second irregular reflection portion 354b. Therefore, the player can recognize the variable plate 352 arranged on the light transmission side by the brightness of the light.

Therefore, the player can be made to recognize the variable plate 352 and the surroundings of the variable plate 352 by the light emitted from the one light emitting member 355 without providing a new second light emitting member. As a result, there is no need to provide a new second light-emitting member, the number of parts can be suppressed from increasing, and the manufacturing process can be simplified.

Furthermore, since unevenness is formed on the rear side of the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b, the light emitted from the LED 355a and transmitted through the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b is It can be easily diffused. In this case, since the distance from the LED 355a differs between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b, the diffusion of the light transmitted through the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the diffusion of the light transmitted through the second irregular reflection portion 354b can be different from the aspect of Therefore, the difference between the form of light transmitted through the first irregular reflection portion 353d and visually recognized by the player and the form of light transmitted through the second irregular reflection portion 354b and visually recognized by the player can be made larger. As a result, the player can easily specify the position of the variable plate 352 arranged on the front side of the second irregular reflection portion 354b.

Further, since the unevenness formed on the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the unevenness formed on the second irregular reflection portion 354b are substantially the same, in a state where the LED 355a does not emit light, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 353d It is possible for the player to visually recognize the second irregular reflection portion 354b (the second irregular reflection portion 354b that is visually recognized through the variable plate 352) as having the same appearance. That is, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b, which have different appearances (light modes) after the LED 355a emits light, can have the same appearance before the LED 355a emits light. The appearance (mode of light) of the second diffused reflection portion 354b can be enhanced.

Even if the unevenness is the same between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b, the distance from the LED 355a differs between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b. The mode of diffusion of light when passing through each of the second irregular reflection portions 354b can be made different. That is, the mode of light transmitted through the first irregular reflection portion 353d and visually recognized by the player can be made different from the mode of light transmitted through the second irregular reflection portion 354b and visually recognized by the player.

Furthermore, since the variable plate 352 can be arranged at a position that is substantially flush with the first diffused reflection portion 353d, the variable plate 352 and the first diffused reflection portion 353d are visually recognized integrally, and light is emitted from the LED 355a. The region (area) of the light to be visually recognized can be visually recognized as a larger region.

An upright wall 353f standing on the side of the decorative member 354 is formed at the edge of the first diffused reflection portion 353d of the winning member 353, and the tip surface of the upright wall 353f on the lower end side of the decorative member 354 It is disposed in contact with one end of the second irregular reflection portion 354b. As a result, the light from the LED 355a of the light emitting member 355 that passes through the second irregular reflection portion 354b is suppressed from entering the first irregular reflection portion 353d, and the brightness of the light from the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b is adjusted. can be made larger.

That is, of the light transmitted through the second irregular reflection portion 354b arranged near the light emitting member 355, the light directed toward the first irregular reflection portion 353d arranged far from the light emitting member 355 enters the standing wall 353f. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the light to enter the first irregular reflection portion 353d, and the brightness of the light of the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b can be increased. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the variable plate 352 and the surroundings of the variable plate 352 by the light emitted from one light emitting means.

In other words, since the standing wall 353f connecting the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b is provided, one of the first irregular reflection portion 353d or the second irregular reflection portion 354b (the distance between the LED 355a and the LED 355a is The standing wall 353ff prevents the light transmitted through the first irregular reflection portion 353d or the second irregular reflection portion 354b (the one with the larger distance from the LED 355a) from entering between the LED 355a and the LED 355a. can be suppressed. As a result, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b can be easily made different in the mode (in particular, brightness) of the light transmitted through them and visually recognized by the player. As a result, the player can easily specify the position of the displacement member arranged on the front side of the second irregular reflection portion 354b.

In addition, since unevenness is not formed on the rear surface of the standing wall 353f, the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b (the second irregular reflection portion 354b visible through the variable plate 352) and the vertical reflection portion 354b are not formed. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the external appearance of the installation wall 353f as a different appearance. As a result, the vertical wall 353f can be used to clearly define the boundary between the first transmitting member and the second irregular reflection portion 354b. The position can be easily specified by the player.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the distance between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the LED 355a is made larger than the distance between the second irregular reflection portion 354b and the LED 355a, and the first irregular reflection portion 353d is arranged on the upper side in the gravitational direction. damage can be suppressed.

That is, on the side where the distance to the LED 355a is small (narrow), the temperature in the space increases due to the heat generated from the LED 355a, and the risk of damaging the LED 355a increases. On the other hand, the air whose temperature is raised in the space on the side where the distance between the LED 355a is small (narrow) is replaced with the space located above in the direction of gravity (that is, the distance between the LED 355a is large (wide) ) side space) to escape. As a result, damage to the LED 355a on the side where the distance is small (narrow) can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a space is formed through the opening 354a of the decorative member 354 between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the light emitting member 355 (LED 355a) facing each other. As a result, the heat associated with the irradiation of light from the LEDs 355a of the light-emitting member 355 can be released to the space between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the LEDs 355a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent heat from accumulating in the light emitting member 355 . As a result, damage to the light emitting member 355 can be suppressed.

That is, the first irregular reflection portion 353d has a larger distance between the light emitting member 355 than the second irregular reflection portion 354b. can be done easily. As a result, the air between the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the light emitting member 355 can be moved to release the heat of the light emitting member 355 to the outside. In addition, since the first irregular reflection portion 353d, which has a large distance between the light emitting member 355 and the opposed light emitting member 355, is arranged on the upper side in the direction of gravity, the air warmed by the light emitting member 355 can be efficiently heated. It is possible to efficiently cool the light emitting member 355 by discharging it to the outside. As a result, damage to the light emitting member 355 can be suppressed.

Since the variable plate 352 has the bulging portion 352d1, the light passing through the variable plate 352 is shaded, and the shift of the shadow of the light makes it possible for the player to recognize that the variable plate 352 has been displaced.

That is, since the bulging portion 352d1 is formed to bulge in a semicircular shape toward the light transmission side, it is possible to partially change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the variable plate 352. FIG. As a result, of the light transmitted through the variable plate 352 and emitted toward the player, the amount of light emitted from the bulging portion 352d1 can be reduced, and the light transmitted through the variable plate can be shaded. . In addition, since the bulging portion 352d1 is formed at the far end of the variable plate 352 from the shaft portion 352a, it is possible to change the shadow of the light emitted to the player side as the variable plate 352 is displaced. . As a result, the player can recognize the displacement of the variable plate 352 by visually recognizing the displacement of the shadow of the light emitted from the variable plate 352 .

In other words, the variable plate 352 is formed as a plate-like body rotatably supported on the base end side and formed with a bulging portion 352d1 having an increased plate thickness on the distal end side. Of the light that is transmitted and visually recognized by the player, the light that is transmitted through the swelling portion 352d1 and is visually recognized by the player is the light that is transmitted through portions other than the swelling portion 352d1 and is visually recognized by the player. can be different from In addition, as the variable plate 352 rotates around the base end side, the position of light that is visually recognized through the tip end side (the bulging portion 352d1) can be displaced. In other words, the displacement (rotation) of the variable plate 352 can be easily recognized by the player by utilizing the fact that the position of the light that is visually recognized through the front end side (bulging portion 352d1) of the variable plate 352 is displaced. can.

Further, since the bulging portion 352d1 is formed to have a curved arc shape in cross section, the bulging portion 352d1 functions as a lens (that is, the light incident on the bulging portion 352d1 is refracted to diverge or diverge). It can be converged (in this embodiment, by converging the light incident on the bulging portion 352d1, the light can be visually recognized as linear light with increased light intensity (brightness)). As a result, of the light that passes through the variable plate 352 and is visually recognized by the player, the light that is transmitted through the bulging portion 352d1 and is visually recognized by the player, and the light that is transmitted through the bulging portion 352d1 and other portions other than the bulging portion 352d1 are transmitted. The difference from the light visually recognized by the player can be made clearer. As a result, the player can easily recognize the displacement (rotation) motion of the variable plate 352 .

The base portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is set at a height position in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 31(a)) that is approximately the same as the approximately center position in the direction of gravity of the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state. be done.

The first ball-throwing path KR1 is connected to the third ball-throwing path KR3 inside the second concave portion 351e of the back main body portion 351 arranged laterally outside of the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330. As shown in FIG. The second ball-throwing path KR2 is connected to a fourth ball-throwing path KR4 formed between the inner guide portion 331b1 and the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330 facing each other.

Next, game balls thrown from the first ball-throwing route KR1 to the fourth ball-throwing route KR4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 43. FIG. 32-34 are cross-sectional views of intermediate member 330 and rear member 350. FIG.

32 to 34 and 38 to 40 correspond to the cross section of FIG. 31(a), and FIGS. 35 to 37 and 41 to 43 correspond to the cross section of FIG. 31(b). 32 to 34 and 35 to 37 show the transition states of the game ball thrown through the first ball throwing route KR1 and the third ball throwing route KR3, and FIGS. 38 to 40 and 41 to 43. , transition states of a game ball thrown through the second ball throwing route KR2 and the fourth ball throwing route KR4 are illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 35, when the variable plate 352 of the rear member 350 is in the first rotation state, the game ball thrown by rolling on the upper portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is the first thrown ball. The ball is thrown on the route KR1. That is, the game ball that rolls on the upper portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 and is thrown flows down into the gap between the intermediate member 330 and the back body portion 351 facing each other.

From the state shown in FIGS. 32 and 35, the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 flows down to the upper surface of the outer guide portion 331b2 of the intermediate member 330, and as shown in FIGS. , and is thrown to the third throwing path KR3. As described above, the outer guide portion 331b2 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the central portion in the left-right direction toward the outer side, so that a game ball flowing down the left side of the first ball throwing path KR1 in a front view is the left side. A game ball that is thrown to the third ball path KR3 and flows down the right side of the first ball path KR1 is thrown to the third ball path KR3 on the right side.

From the state shown in FIGS. 33 and 36, the game ball thrown to the third ball-throwing route KR3 flows down the third ball-throwing route KR3 as shown in FIGS. is thrown to the variable unit 360.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 41, when the variable plate 352 of the rear member 350 is in the third rotation state, the game ball thrown by rolling on the upper portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is the second thrown ball. The ball is thrown on route KR2. That is, the game ball thrown by rolling on the upper portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 rolls on the upper portion of the variable plate 352 of the rear member 350 and is thrown to the second ball path KR2.

From the state shown in FIGS. 38 and 41, the game ball flowing down the third throwing path KR3 passes through the inside of the second detection hole 353b of the winning member 353, and as shown in FIGS. 353c and is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4.

In this case, as described above, the base portion of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 has a height position in the gravitational direction (vertical direction in FIG. 31(a)) that is approximately the center position in the gravitational direction of the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state. Since they are set at substantially the same height position, the first ball throwing path KR1 that flows down between the intermediate member 330 and the back main body 351 and the second ball throwing path KR2 that causes the ball to be thrown inside the opening 351b of the back main body 351. The distance dimension in the gravitational direction of the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 when changing the path in the displaced state of the variable plate 352 can be reduced.

That is, when the game ball rolling on the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is distributed to the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2 by the variable plate 352 disposed on the back side, the variable plate 331a is variable in the third state. By lowering the end of the plate 352 farther from the shaft portion 352a than the base portion of the receiving portion 331a, the disposing position of the variable plate 352 can be increased in the direction of gravity. As a result, the distance dimension in the direction of gravity between the intermediate member 330 and the rear member 350 can be reduced.

From the state shown in FIGS. 39 and 42, the game ball thrown to the fourth ball-throwing route KR4 moves along the upper surface of the inner guide portion 331b1 of the intermediate member 330 of the fourth ball-throwing route KR4 as shown in FIGS. The ball rolls and is thrown to a rotating ball section 370 which will be described later. In addition, as described above, the inner guide portion 331b1 is formed so as to slope downward from the central portion in the left-right direction toward the outside. The ball that passes through the second detection hole 353b and is discharged from the left front opening 353c is thrown to the left fourth ball path KR4, and the ball that flows down the right side of the second ball path KR2 (the ball that flows down the right side of the second ball path KR2) 353b and discharged from the right front opening 353c) is thrown to the right fourth throw path KR4.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 51, the game ball rolled on the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 and thrown to the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2 will be described. 44 and 45 are cross-sectional views of intermediate member 330 and rear member 350. FIG. 44 and 45 correspond to the cross section of FIG. 31(a).

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the game ball that is thrown by rolling on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 rolls to the rear side and comes into contact with the variable plate 352 to reach the first ball-throwing path KR1. is thrown to

In this case, as described above, the variable plate 352 in the first rotation state is arranged such that the front portion 352d2 is tilted forward as the front portion 352d2 is separated from the shaft portion 352a. The game ball to be thrown can be easily made to collide with the front part 352d2 and flow downward.

In addition, since the portion of the bulging portion 352d1 connected to the front portion 351d2 is positioned above the base end of the receiving portion 331a by the radius of the game ball, when the ball rolls vigorously on the receiving portion 331a, can cause the ball to collide with the bulging portion 352d1 and flow downward. At this time, damage to the plate portion 352d can be suppressed by causing a game ball with a relatively strong momentum to collide with the bulging portion 352d1 that bulges from the plate portion 352d. In other words, when the rolling speed of the ball is relatively high, damage to the plate portion 352d can be prevented by causing the ball to collide with the bulging portion 352d1, which has high rigidity.

Next, referring to FIGS. 46 to 51, when the variable plate 352 is displaced from the first rotation state to the third rotation state, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 and is thrown. will be explained. 46-51 are cross-sectional views of intermediate member 330 and rear member 350. FIG. 46 to 48 and 49 to 51 correspond to the cross section of FIG. 31(a). 46 to 48 and 49 to 51 illustrate the rolling state of the game ball when the variable plate 352 is displaced from the first rotation state to the third rotation state.

Here, as described above, if the end portion of the variable plate 352 far from the shaft portion 352a is made lower than the base portion of the receiving portion 331a in the third state, the base portion of the receiving portion 331a and the variable plate 352 that is being displaced will be displaced. There was a possibility that a game ball could be caught between them and cause a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 49, the base of the receiving portion 331a of the intermediate member 330 is in the first rotation state at the height position in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 31(a)). Since the height position is set at substantially the same height position as the substantially center position of the variable plate 352 in the direction of gravity of the variable plate 352, the game ball and the bulging portion when the game ball is sandwiched between the variable plate 352 in the middle of displacement and the receiving portion 331a. The contact position with 352d1 can be either the front side or the back side of the game ball divided by the imaginary line S2 connecting the base end of the receiving part 331a and the center of the game ball, and the ball is on the receiving part. Sandwiching between the base of 331a and variable plate 352 can be suppressed.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 46 to 48, when the front side of the game ball divided by the imaginary line S2 and the bulging portion 352d1 abut, the connection side of the bulging portion 352d1 with the front portion 352d2 is the game ball. collide with the ball. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 48, the ball can be thrown to the first ball path KR1 using the curved surface of the bulging portion 352d1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, when the back side of the game ball divided by the imaginary line S2 abuts against the bulging portion 352d1, the side of the bulging portion 352d1 away from the shaft portion 352a It abuts against a curved surface. Thereby, the game ball about to fall from the receiving portion 331a can be pushed back to the front side by utilizing the displacement of the variable plate 352.例文帳に追加As a result, the variable plate 352 is displaced to the third rotation state, and the ball can be guided to the second ball throwing path KR2.

A detailed description of the rear base 390 will now be provided with reference to Figures 52-54. 52(a) is a front view of the rear base 390, and FIG. 52(b) is a side view of the rear base 390. FIG. 53 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear base 390. FIG. 54 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear base 390. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the rear base 390 includes a plate-shaped rear plate 391 arranged on the rear side, and a rear plate 391 arranged at one end of the rear plate 391 on the lower side in the gravitational direction. a holding member 392 for holding a solenoid 397 of the drive means, two annular members 394 fastened to both ends of the holding member 392, and stoppers arranged outside between the opposing two annular members 394. A portion 396 is mainly provided.

The back plate 391 is formed of a plate-like body that is substantially trapezoidal when viewed from the front. The rear plate 391 is a plate that covers the rear side of the rear member 350 described above, and is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the front view of the rear member 350 .

The solenoid 397 is driving means for applying a driving force to a stopper portion 396 to be described later, and includes a transmission portion 397 a for transmitting the driving force to the stopper portion 396 . Also, the solenoids 397 are arranged on the rear side of the two stopper portions 396 respectively.

The transmission portion 397a is a protrusion that is displaced in the direction of gravity when power is supplied to the solenoid 397, and is inserted between a first engagement portion 396a and a second engagement portion 396b of the stopper portion 396, which will be described later. .

The holding member 392 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes recesses 392a recessed on the front side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and openings 392b formed through the recesses 392a from the front to the back. It is formed.

The recess 392 a is a recess into which the solenoid 397 is inserted, and is recessed in the outer shape of the solenoid 397 . Therefore, by attaching the holding member 392 to the back plate 391 after inserting the solenoid 397 into the recess 392a, the solenoid 397 can be held so as not to fall off.

The opening 392b is an opening through which the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 is inserted forward, and is formed in a vertically long rectangular opening larger than the transmission portion 397a. Therefore, when the solenoid 397 is arranged inside the concave portion 392a, the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 protrudes to the front side.

The annular member 394 is a ball-throwing portion to which a game ball is thrown from the third ball-throwing path KR3, is formed in a substantially annular shape in a side view, and has a shaft support hole 394a penetrating through the axis. The shaft support hole 394a is a hole for rotatably holding a shaft B1, which will be described later, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft B1.

The shaft B1 is formed in a columnar shape, one end is inserted into the shaft support hole 394a of the annular member 394 as described above, and the other end is externally fitted into the shaft hole 396c of the stopper portion 396 described later. Therefore, the shaft B1 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the shaft support hole 394a as the stopper portion 396 is rotationally displaced.

The stopper portion 396 is a ball throwing path blocking means that disables ball throwing on a ball throwing path KR6 of the variable unit 460, which will be described later, by being rotationally displaced. placed outside.

The stopper portion 396 includes a substantially circular shaft hole 396c that penetrates the annular member 394 in the axial direction, and a first engaging portion 396a and a second engaging portion that protrude radially outward from the axis of the shaft hole 396c. A portion 396b is mainly provided.

The first engaging portion 396a is a protrusion that engages with the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 described above to transmit the driving force of the solenoid 397, and is positioned above the transmission portion 397a in the direction of gravity. .

The second engaging portion 396b, like the first engaging portion 396a, is a protrusion that engages with the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 to transmit the driving force of the solenoid 397, and is downward in the gravity direction of the transmission member 397b. placed on the side.

The first engaging portion 396a and the second engaging portion 396b are formed with a predetermined gap around the axis of the shaft hole 396c. It is set larger than the vertical dimension of the portion 397a. Accordingly, the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 can be inserted between the first engaging portion 396a and the second engaging portion 396b to transmit the driving force to the stopper portion 396. As shown in FIG.

Next, transition of the stopper portion 396 will be described with reference to FIG. 55(a) to 55(c) are cross-sectional views of the rear base 390 taken along line LV-LV in FIG. 55(a) to 55(c) illustrate transition states of the stopper portion 396. As shown in FIG. Also, in FIG. 55, the end far from the shaft hole 396c of the stopper portion 396 will be described with reference to end A2.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), in the first blocking state in which the transmitting portion 397a of the solenoid 397 is positioned downward, the transmitting portion 397a contacts the second engaging portion 396b of the stopper portion 396, and the stopper portion 396 is closed. is displaced upward (in FIG. 55(a), the end A2 rotates clockwise about the axis of the shaft hole 396c). As a result, the end A2 is positioned above the shaft hole 396c in the direction of gravity.

55(a), the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 is displaced upward, and the transmission portion 397a shown in FIG. The portion 397a comes into contact with the first engaging portion 396a of the stopper portion 396, and the end portion A2 of the stopper portion 396 is displaced downward (in FIG. A driving force is applied in the direction of left rotation. As a result, the height of the end A2 in the gravity direction is closer to that of the shaft hole 396c than in the first blocked state.

From the state shown in FIG. 55(b), the transmission portion 397a of the solenoid 397 is displaced further upward, and in the third blocking state in which the transmission portion 397a shown in FIG. 55(c) is displaced to the terminal end, the transmission portion 397a Contacting the first engaging portion 396a of the stopper portion 396, the end portion A2 of the stopper portion 396 is displaced downward (in FIG. 55(b), the end portion A2 rotates counterclockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 396c). A driving force is applied in the direction. In this case, the end A2 is displaced to a height position substantially equal to the height of the axis of the shaft hole 396c in the direction of gravity.

On the other hand, when shifting from the third blocking state to the first blocking state, the transmitting portion 397a of the solenoid 397 pushes down the second engaging portion 396b, thereby pushing up the tip portion A1 around the axis of the shaft hole 396c. be done.

Next, the body portion 380 of the variable unit 360 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. FIG. 56(a) is a front view of the variable unit 360, and FIG. 56(b) is a top view of the variable unit 360. FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the main body portion 380 of the variable unit 360. FIG. FIG. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the body portion 380 of the variable unit 360. FIG.

The variable unit 360 includes a main body 380 having a path for throwing the game ball thrown from the third ball-throwing path KR3 and the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 to the front side, and a rotating rotating body that attracts the game ball to move the game ball. It is mainly formed with a rolling ball portion 370 for throwing.

The body portion 380 is arranged on one side of the back surface of the center frame 310 on the lower side in the direction of gravity, and is visible to the player through the center opening of the center frame 310 (see FIG. 8). The body portion 380 includes an upper surface base 381 on which a rolling surface for game balls is formed, a first lower surface base 383 arranged to face the upper surface base 381, an upper surface base 381 and a first lower surface base 383. A V winning member 382 whose one end is pivotally supported and displaceably arranged between, a first driving motor M1 for applying a driving force to the V winning member 382, and a driving force of the first driving motor M1. A first transmission means 384 that transmits to the V winning member 382, a distribution section 389 that is rotatably disposed on the main body section 380, a second drive motor M2 that applies a driving force to the distribution section 389, and the A second transmission means 387 for transmitting the driving force of the second drive motor M2 to the distribution portion 389 is mainly provided.

As described above, the upper base 381 is a plate member having a rolling surface on which game balls thrown from the third ball-throwing path KR3 and the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 are thrown. It is formed. The upper surface base 381 includes two first rolling portions 381a that are recessed from the back side to the front side, a standing portion 381b that surrounds the back side of the first rolling portions 381a, and A second rolling portion 381c branched from the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rolling portion 381a and recessed, and a second rolling portion 381c formed at a position sandwiching the rotating bodies 372R and 372L on the front side of the second rolling portion 381c. a third rolling portion 381d, a fourth rolling portion 381e formed adjacent to the third rolling portion 381d and connected to the first rolling portion 381a, and a base side of the second rolling portion 381c. It is mainly formed with a shaft support hole 381f that opens in the direction of dynamic force at a position sandwiching the first rolling portion 381a.

The first rolling portion 381a is a ball-throwing path through which a game ball thrown on the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 is thrown, and the first rolling part 381a extends from the back side end to which the game ball is thrown from the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 toward the front side. sloped downwards. As a result, a fifth ball-throwing route KR5 is formed in which a game ball that is thrown through the fourth ball-throwing route KR4 is thrown to the front side.

Further, as described above, the fourth throwing path KR4 is split into two in the left-right direction, and the first rolling portions 381a are formed below the two fourth throwing paths KR4 in the gravitational direction. As a result, each fourth ball throwing route KR4 is connected to each fifth ball throwing route KR5.

The two first rolling portions 381a extend toward the front side, and merge before being connected to the fourth rolling portion 381e to form one rolling surface.

The upright portion 381b is a wall that guides the game ball thrown from the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 to the first rolling portion 381a. is disposed in contact with the guide portion 330b. As a result, the game ball flowing down the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 can be reliably thrown to the fifth ball-throwing path KR5 of the first rolling portion 381a.

The second rolling portion 381c is a surface extending outward from the upper base 381 from a substantially central position of the first rolling portion 381a extending from the back side to the front side. , and is inclined downward toward the outer side of the upper base 381 . Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the upper portion of the first rolling portion 381a and is thrown to the front side can collide with the distributing portion 389, which will be described later, and can be thrown to the second rolling portion 381c.

In addition, since the second rolling portion 381c is formed to be inclined downward toward the outside in the left-right direction as described above, the game ball thrown to the second rolling portion 381c is The ball is thrown by rolling in the direction of separation. That is, the second rolling portion 381c forms a sixth throwing path KR6 along which the ball is thrown.

The second rolling portion 381c is formed to have a recessed shape at the center position in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction, so that the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c is less likely to swing. As a result, the game ball thrown through the sixth ball path KR6 can be stabilized.

The third rolling portion 381d is a surface for receiving game balls thrown by rotating bodies 372R and 372L, which will be described later. It is formed with a downward slope toward Therefore, game balls thrown from the rotating bodies 372R and 372L to the upper surface of the third rolling portion 381d roll on the upper surface of the third rolling portion 381d and are thrown to the fourth rolling portion 381e. That is, the third rolling portion 381d forms a seventh ball throwing path KR7 for throwing the game ball to the fourth rolling portion 381e.

The fourth rolling portion 381e is an inclined surface for dropping the game ball rolled on the third rolling portion 381d and the first rolling portion 381a to the front side. It is formed at a position lower than the first rolling portion 381a in the gravity direction, and is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side. Thereby, the game ball thrown from the third rolling portion 381d and the first rolling portion 381a is smoothly rolled on the upper surface of the fourth rolling portion 381e, and rolled to the front side of the fourth rolling portion 381e. can be moved. That is, the fourth rolling portion 381e forms an eighth ball throwing path KR8 through which game balls thrown from the first rolling portion 381a and the third rolling portion 381d flow down to the front side of the main body portion 380.

The shaft support hole 381f is formed to penetrate in the direction of gravity at an intermediate position between the two second rolling portions 381c formed on both sides of the main body portion 380 .

The V winning member 382 is a ball receiving portion that throws part of the game ball thrown forward from the fourth rolling portion 381e of the upper base 381 into the inside of the V winning member 382. It is formed in a box-like body with the base 381 side open. The V-winning member 382 mainly includes a shaft portion 382c that protrudes downward in the direction of gravity, and a curved portion 382b that protrudes in a semicircular shape around the shaft portion 382c.

The shaft portion 382c is a shaft portion that is connected to a part of the transmission means for transmitting the driving force from the first drive motor M1, and extends downward in the direction of gravity from the bottom surface of the V winning member 382 that is formed in a substantially box shape. formed to protrude. Therefore, the V winning member 382 can be rotationally displaced about the shaft portion 382c by applying the driving force from the first driving motor M1.

The curved portion 382b is a projecting portion that prevents a gap from being formed on the front side of the main body portion 380 when the V winning member 382 rotates about the shaft portion 382c. is formed to protrude in a circle around the axis of the shaft portion 382c.

The first lower surface base 383 is provided to cover the lower surface of the upper surface base 381, and has a concave portion 383a that is recessed downward in the direction of gravity at a part of the front side.

The recess 383a is a recess that forms an opening for allowing the V winning member 382 to protrude from between the upper surface base 381 and the first lower surface base 383, and is a recess that is larger than the height dimension of the V winning member 382 in the direction of gravity. set to depth. As a result, when the V winning member 382 is arranged between the upper surface base 381 and the first lower surface base 383, a part of the V winning member 382 can protrude through the recess 383a.

The first transmission means 384 is composed of a first gear 384a connected to the first drive motor M1 and a second gear 384b connected to the shaft support hole 381f of the V winning member 382. As shown in FIG. In addition, the first transmission means 384 is covered and held by a cover plate 385 arranged to face the first lower surface base 383 .

The first gear 384a is formed in a circular shape and has gear teeth 384a1 engraved on its outer peripheral surface. The second gear 384b is formed in a substantially fan shape when viewed from above. The second gear 384b has gear teeth 384b1 that engage with the first gear 384a on its outer peripheral surface, and a through hole 384b2 penetrating in the gravitational direction is formed on the axial side of the gear teeth 384b1.

The through hole 384b2 is a hole that fits over the shaft portion 382c of the V winning member 382, and is formed with an inner diameter that is substantially the same as or smaller than the diameter of the shaft portion 382c. Therefore, when the first drive motor M1 is rotated, the driving force is transmitted from the first gear 384a to the second gear 384b, and the shaft portion 382c fitted on the shaft portion 382c of the second gear 384b is rotated. The winning member 382 is rotated.

The distributing portion 389 mainly includes a shaft portion 389a that can be inserted into the shaft support hole 381f of the upper base 381, and a path switching portion 390b that protrudes radially outward from the base portion of the shaft portion 389a in a fan shape. be. Also, the distributing portion 389 is arranged between the two second rolling portions 381c.

A portion of the path switching portion 390b, which expands in a fan shape as the distributing portion 389 is displaced, is positioned on the fifth ball throwing path KR5. Thereby, the game ball to be thrown on the fifth ball-throwing path KR5 can be thrown to the second rolling portion 381c. A detailed description of the distribution unit 389 will be given later.

The tip of the shaft portion 389 a is inserted through the shaft support hole 381 f of the upper base 381 and is connected to a part of the second transmission means 387 . Accordingly, when the driving force is applied to the second driving motor M2, the shaft portion 389a is rotated via the transmission means 387. As shown in FIG.

The second transmission means 387 is composed of a first gear 387a connected to the second drive motor M2 and a second gear 387b connected to the shaft portion 389a of the distribution portion 389. As shown in FIG. In addition, the second transmission means 387 is covered and held by a second lower surface base 388 arranged to face the upper surface base 381 .

The first gear 387a is formed in a circular shape and has gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof. The second gear 387b is formed in a substantially fan shape when viewed from above. The second gear 387b has gear teeth 387b1 that engage with the first gear 387a on its outer peripheral surface, and a through hole 387b2 that penetrates in the direction of gravity.

The through-hole 387b2 is a hole that fits over the shaft portion 389a of the distribution portion 389, and is formed to have an inner diameter that is substantially the same as or smaller than the diameter of the shaft portion 389a. Therefore, when the second drive motor M2 rotates, the driving force is transmitted from the first gear 387a to the second gear 387b, and the shaft portion 389a fitted on the shaft portion 389a of the second gear 387b rotates and vibrates. Section 389 is rotated.

Next, operation of the sorting section 389 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. FIG. 59 to 61 are top views of the distribution section 389. FIG. 59 to 61, the second transmission means 387 is illustrated with broken lines. 59 shows a state in which the distributing portion 389 is rotated counterclockwise about the shaft portion 389a with FIG. 60 as the initial position, and FIG. , respectively, are illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the gear teeth 387b1 of the second gear 387b mesh with the gear teeth of the first gear 387a at a substantially central position, the path switching portion 389b of the distribution portion 389 is centered on the center line in the horizontal direction. is symmetrical to the left and right.

Next, from the initial position, the rotational driving force is transmitted to the second transmission means 387, and as shown in FIG. The switching portion 389b is positioned on the right side when viewed from the front.

In this case, the distance between the left end of the path switching portion 389b and the left end of the fifth left throwing path KR5 is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the game ball thrown along the left fifth throwing path KR5 cannot pass through the fifth throwing path KR5 and is thrown along the sixth throwing path KR6. On the other hand, the distance dimension between the right end of the distribution portion 389 and the right end of the fifth right throwing path KR5 is made larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the game ball that is thrown through the fifth throwing route KR5 on the right side is not thrown through the sixth throwing route KR6, but is thrown through the fifth throwing route KR5 and then onto the eighth throwing route KR8.

In the state shown in FIG. 61 (the state rotated in the opposite direction to that shown in FIG. 59), the path switching portion 389b is located on the left side when viewed from the front.

In this case, the distance dimension between the right end of the path switching portion 389b and the right end of the right fifth ball throwing path KR5 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball thrown through the fifth ball throwing path KR5 on the right side cannot pass through the fifth ball throwing path KR5 and is thrown to the sixth ball throwing path KR6. On the other hand, the distance dimension between the left end of the distribution portion 389 and the left end of the fifth left throwing path KR5 is made larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the game ball that is thrown through the fifth throwing route KR5 on the left side is not thrown through the sixth throwing route KR6, but through the fifth throwing route KR5 and is thrown through the eighth throwing route KR8.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, a description will be given of a game ball flowing down the second fifth throwing path KR5 when the distributing portion 389 is rotated leftward in top view about the shaft portion 389a. .

62 to 64 are top views of variable unit 360. FIG. 62 to 64 show the transition state of the game ball flowing down.

As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, when the distribution portion 389 is rotated to the left about the shaft portion 389a in top view, when a game ball is thrown to the second ball-throwing route KR5, one of the fifth ball-throwing routes A game ball passing through (fifth ball throwing route KR5 on the right side in FIGS. 62 to 64) is thrown to eighth ball throwing route KR8 without interfering with route switching section 389b.

On the other hand, the game ball passing through the other fifth ball route KR5 (fifth ball route KR5 on the left side in FIGS. 62 to 64) interferes with the route switching unit 389b and is thrown to the sixth ball route KR6. .

That is, in the present embodiment, by rotationally displacing the distribution part 389, the path along which the ball flows can be switched, and the player can be shown the plurality of paths of the game ball flowing down, thereby arousing the interest of the player. can improve.

Next, referring to FIG. 65, driving of the V winning member 382 will be described. 65(a) to 65(c) are top views of the variable unit 360. FIG. 65(a) to 65(c), the first transmission means 384 is illustrated by broken lines. FIG. 65(a) shows a state in which the V winning member 382 is rotated to the right around the shaft portion 382c with FIG. 65(b) as the initial position, and FIG. 65(c) shows a state in which FIG. As an initial position, a state in which the V winning member 382 is rotated to the left around the shaft portion 382c is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c), when the driving force of the first drive motor M1 is transmitted by the first transmission means 384, the tip of the V winning member 382 moves through the shaft portion 382c. It is rotated on an axis and displaced left and right.

As a result, game balls falling from the eighth ball-throwing route KR8 to the front side (from FIG. 65(a) to the bottom of FIG. 65(c)) can be irregularly positioned inside the V winning member 382. Therefore, the player can have a sense of anticipation until the end as to whether or not the player will enter the inside of the V winning member 382, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, the rotation ball section 370 of the variable unit 360 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG. 66 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating ball portion 370 of the variable unit 360, and FIG. 67 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating ball portion 370 of the variable unit 360. FIG.

The rotary ball portion 370 is divided and disposed on both sides in the left-right direction of the main body portion 380. A rod-like connecting rod 371 for inserting and connecting the rotary ball portion 370 divided on both sides into the main body portion 380, A left rotating ball portion 370L disposed on one axial end side of the connecting rod 371 (left side in the left-right direction with respect to the main body portion) and the other axial end side of the connecting rod 371 (right in the left-right direction with respect to the main body portion 380) It is mainly formed with a right rotating ball portion 370R disposed in the .

The right rotating ball portion 370R and the left rotating ball portion 370L are arranged only with the driving means and the transmission means for transmitting the drive to the right rotating ball portion 370R. A detailed description of the left rotating ball portion 370L is omitted because it is formed line-symmetrically about the axis. Also, in the configuration of the left rotating ball portion 370L, the symbol R assigned to the configuration of the right rotating ball portion 370R is changed to L in the drawing.

The right rotating ball portion 370R includes a rotating body 372R that is connected to the other axial end side of the connecting rod 371 and is rotatable around the axis of the connecting rod 371, and a driving motor 376R that is a driving means that applies a driving force to the rotating body 372R. a transmission means 377R for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 376R to the rotating body; an inner cover 373R for mounting the drive motor 376R; It is mainly formed with an outer cover 374R that holds 377R so that it cannot fall off.

The rotating body 372R includes a first rotating body 372Ra disposed on the main body portion 380 side, a second rotating body 372Rc connected to the first rotating body 372Ra, and a second rotating body 372Rc disposed inside the second rotating body 372Rc. and a magnet 372Rb having a magnetic force that

The first rotating body 372Ra is a columnar rotating body that rotates while being connected to the connecting rod 371, and has a through hole 372Ra1 opening in the shaft. The through-hole 372Ra1 is an opening into which the other end of the connecting rod 371 is fitted, and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the connecting rod 371 or smaller than the outer shape of the connecting rod 371 . Therefore, the first rotating body 372Ra is connected by fitting the connecting rod 371 on the outside.

The second rotating body 372Rc is formed in a columnar shape having substantially the same outer shape as the first rotating body 372Ra, and is arranged coaxially with the first rotating body 372Ra and attached to the first rotating body 372Ra. .

In addition, the second rotating body 372Rc is a portion that attracts and throws a game ball on its outer peripheral surface, and has a concave portion 372Rc1 into which a magnet 372Rb, which will be described later, is inserted, and a concave portion on the outer peripheral surface radially outside of the concave portion 372Rc1. and a groove portion 372Rc2 provided.

The recessed part 372Rc1 is recessed in the surface of the second rotating body 372Rc attached to the first rotating body 372Ra, and has an inner shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the magnet 372Rb. Therefore, after the magnet 372Rb is inserted into the concave portion 372Rc1 of the second rotating body 372Rc, the second rotating body 372Rc is attached to the first rotating body 372Ra, so that the magnet 372Rb is arranged inside the rotating body 372R. is assembled with

The magnet 372Rb is disc-shaped and is inserted into the recess 372Rc1 of the second rotor 372Rc with its flat surface facing radially outward.

The transmission means 377R is a gear train that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 376R to the rotating body 372R, and is composed of transmission gears 377Ra to 377Rc. The front transmission gear 377Ra is connected to the drive motor 376R, and the rear transmission gear 377Rc is connected to the second rotating body Rc2. Therefore, when the drive motor 376R rotates, its driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 377Ra to the transmission gear 377Rc to rotate the rotating body 372R.

Here, as described above, since the rotating body 372R is connected to the connecting rod 371, the rotating body 372L of the left rotating ball portion 370L is also connected to one end of the connecting rod 371. Thereby, the rotating body 372R and the rotating body 372L can be rotated synchronously.

The inner cover 373R has an opening for collecting game balls rolling on the main body 380, and is a plate on which the transmission means 377R of the right rotating ball portion 370R is arranged. A hole 373Ra, a guide wall 373Rb protruding from the edge of the recovery hole 373Ra to the outside in the axial direction of the first rotating body 372Ra, and a first opening 373Rc opened on the axis between the second rotating body 372Rc and the transmission gear 377Rc. and a second opening 373Rd opened on the shaft of the drive motor 376R.

The recovery hole 373Ra is an opening through which a game ball passing through the fifth ball-throwing route KR5 is inserted, is formed at the end of the fifth ball-throwing route KR5, and has an internal shape larger than the diameter of the ball.

The guide wall 373Rb is a wall that causes the game ball inserted inside the recovery hole 373Ra to flow downward in the direction of gravity. Formed in the shape of a letter. Therefore, when the outer cover 374R is covered with the inner cover 373R from the axially outer side of the connecting rod 371, a sixth ball throwing route KR6 for throwing a game ball can be formed between the opposing guide walls 373Rb.

The first opening 373Rc is an opening that enables connection between the second rotating body 372Rc and the transmission gear 377Rc, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the second rotating body 372Rc. Thereby, the transmission gear 377Rc arranged outside the inner cover 373R and the second rotating body 372Rc can be connected.

The second opening 373Rd is an opening that enables connection between the drive motor 376R and the transmission gear 377Ra, and is formed in a circular shape that is larger than the rotation shaft of the drive motor 376R. Thereby, the transmission gear 377Ra arranged outside the inner cover 373R and the drive motor 376R can be connected.

The outer cover 374R is a plate member arranged laterally outward of the inner cover 373R, and has substantially the same outer shape as the inner cover 373R when viewed from the side. Further, by covering the outer cover 374R from the outside of the inner cover 373R, the sixth ball throwing path KR6 described above is formed, and each transmission gear of the transmission means 377R is formed between the outer cover 374R and the inner cover 373R. 377Ra to 377Rc can be rotatably held.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the rotating body 372R will be described in detail. 68(a) is a side view of the rotating body 372R, FIG. 68(b) is a top view of the rotating body 372R, and FIG. 68(c) is a line LXVIIIc-LXVIIIc in FIG. 68(b). FIG. 68(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 372R taken along line LXVIIId-LXVIIId of FIG. 68(b). In addition, in FIGS. 68(a) and 68(b), the outline of the magnet 372Rb is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 68, the groove portion 372Rc2 formed in the second rotating body 372Rc of the rotating body 372R is recessed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed in the radial direction of the rotating body 372R, and its outer shape is set larger than the outer shape of the magnet 372Rb. be done. Further, the groove portion 372Rc2 has a flat surface located radially inward of the rotating body 372R.

Next, rotation of the rotor 372R will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. FIGS. 69(a) to (c) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the displacement unit 560 along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 56(a). 70(a) to (c) are partial top views of the displacement unit 560. FIG.

FIG. 69(a) shows the state where the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc is adjacent to the sixth throwing path KR6, and FIG. 69(b) shows the state where the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc is positioned at the upper end. 69(c), the state where the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc is adjacent to the ball throwing path KR7 is illustrated. 70(a) is shown in FIG. 69(a), FIG. 70(b) is shown in FIG. 69(b), and FIG. 70(c) is shown in FIG. 69(c).

As shown in FIGS. 69(a) and 70(a), the second rolling portion 381c of the sixth ball path KR6 is arranged above the rotating shaft of the rotor 372R in the direction of gravity. Therefore, when the sixth ball path KR6 and the groove portion 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc are adjacent to each other, the radially inner flat surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 is inclined upward toward the front side.

From the state shown in FIGS. 69(a) and 70(a), when the driving force is applied from the drive motor 376R, the rotating body 372R is rotated counterclockwise around the axis when viewed in the right direction (viewed in the direction of FIG. 69). . Accordingly, the states shown in FIGS. 69(c) and 70(c) are formed through the states shown in FIGS. 69(b) and 70(b).

As shown in FIGS. 69(c) and 70(c), the third rolling part 381d of the seventh throwing path KR6 is disposed above the rotating shaft of the rotating body 372R in the direction of gravity, and the second rolling part 381d It is formed above the moving portion 381c. Therefore, when the seventh ball path KR7 and the groove portion 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc are adjacent to each other, the radially inner flat surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 is inclined upward toward the back side.

Next, a state in which the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 are combined will be described with reference to FIG. 71(a) is a front view of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390, and FIG. 71(b) is a top view of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b), the variable unit 360 is arranged on one side of the rear base 390 on the lower side in the gravitational direction. Also, the two annular members 394 of the rear base 390 are disposed laterally outside the first rolling portion 381a.

Also, the annular member 394 is disposed below the above-described third ball throwing path KR3. More specifically, the third ball throwing path KR3 is connected to the side surface of the annular member 394 formed in a substantially circular shape on the side of the second rolling portion 392c. Therefore, a game ball thrown inside the third ball-throwing path KR3 is guided by the upper surface of the annular member 394 and can be thrown to the second rolling portion 381c on the front side. As described above, the fourth throwing path KR4 is connected to the fifth throwing path formed by the first rolling portion 382a. That is, the third throwing route KR3 is connected to the sixth throwing route KR6, and the fourth throwing route KR4 is connected to the fifth throwing route KR5.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, game balls passing through the sixth throwing path will be described. FIGS. 72(a) to 72(c) are top views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390, and FIGS. 73(a) to 73(c) are taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 74(a) to 74(c) are cross-sectional views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 71(b). 72(a) to 72(c), FIGS. 73(a) to 73(c), and FIGS. 74(a) to 74(c) respectively show transition states of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 72(a), 73(a) and 74(a), the game ball thrown from the third ball-throwing path KR3 is guided to the upper surface of the annular member 394 as described above. , is guided to the upper portion of the second rolling portion 381c.

As shown in FIGS. 72(b), 73(b) and 74(b), the game ball rolling on the upper part of the second rolling part 392c is inclined downwards (FIG. 74) of the second rolling part 381c. (b)) and is thrown along the sixth throwing path KR6.

As shown in FIGS. 72(c), 73(c) and 74(c), the game ball thrown to the end of the sixth ball path KR6 is thrown to the recovery hole 373Ra formed in the inner cover 373R, It is recovered by flowing down a passage formed between the inner cover 373R and the outer cover 374R. That is, the recovery hole 373Ra of the inner cover 373R opens at the end of the sixth throwing path KR6, and the lower end surface of the recovery hole 373Ra is formed at substantially the same height as or slightly lower than the second rolling portion 381c. be done. Therefore, the game ball thrown through the sixth ball-throwing path KR6 can be smoothly thrown into the recovery hole 373Ra.

In addition, since the second rolling portion 381c is formed as an inclined surface that rolls the game ball in a direction substantially parallel to the direction of the rotation axis of the rotating body 372R, the game ball that rolls on the second rolling portion 381c and the throwing direction of the game ball that is thrown with the rotation of the rotating body 372R can be substantially perpendicular to each other. As a result, it is possible to change the movement of the game ball and secure the number of game balls that can be visually recognized at once, thereby improving the interest of the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 75, the case where the stopper portion 396 of the rear base 390 is displaced will be described. 75(a) is a sectional view of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 before the stopper portion 396 is displaced, and FIG. 75(b) is a sectional view of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 after the stopper portion 396 is displaced. 4 is a cross-sectional view of base 390. FIG. 75(a) and 75(b) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 73(a).

As shown in FIG. 75(a), in the state before the stopper portion 396 is displaced, the end portion A2 is arranged above the axis of the shaft hole 396c in the gravitational direction as described above. Therefore, the sixth ball-throwing path KR6 and the recovery hole 373Ra of the inner cover 373R are brought into communication with each other, and game balls passing through the sixth ball-throwing path KR6 can be passed through the inside of the recovery hole 373Ra and recovered.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 75(b), when the stopper portion 396 is displaced, the end portion A2 has substantially the same height in the gravity direction as the axis of the shaft hole 396c, as described above. be. Therefore, the stopper portion 396 is interposed between the sixth ball-throwing path KR6 and the recovery hole 373Ra, and the sixth ball-throwing path KR6 and the recovery hole 373Ra are blocked. As a result, the game ball thrown through the sixth ball-throwing path KR6 comes into contact with the stopper portion 396 and stops.

Therefore, a stopper portion 396 is provided to block the rolling of the game ball in the second rolling portion 381c, and the magnet of the rotating body 372R is arranged at a position where it can attract the game ball whose rolling is blocked by the stopper portion 396. Therefore, there is a form in which the game ball rolling on the second rolling part 381c is directly attracted to the rotating body 372R, and a game ball rolling on the second rolling part 381c is blocked by the stopper part 396 and then rotates. Form to be attracted to the body 372R (that is, if there is no blocking by the stopper portion 396, the game ball that would have passed without being attracted to the rotating body 372R is blocked by the stopper portion 396, so that it can be attracted to the rotating body 372R. ) can be formed, and as a result, the amusement of the player can be improved.

Next, the game ball thrown by the rotor 372R will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79. FIG. 76 to 78 are top views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390, and FIGS. 79(a) to 79(c) are sectional views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390. FIG.

79(a) corresponds to the section of FIG. 69(a), FIG. 79(b) corresponds to the section of FIG. 69(b), and FIG. 79(c) corresponds to the section of FIG. 69(c). . 76-78 and 79(a)-79(c) also illustrate the transition states of the sphere.

As shown in FIGS. 76 and 79(a), when the groove portion 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc is adjacent to the sixth ball throwing route KR6, the game ball thrown through the sixth ball route KR6 is the second It is attracted to a magnet 372Rb arranged inside the rotor 372Rc. That is, the game ball is attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc.

When the rotating body 372R is rotated from the state shown in FIGS. 76 and 79(a), the rotating body 372R is rotated while the ball is attracted to the magnet 372Rb of the second rotating body 372Rc.

Here, substantially cylindrical rotating members (rotating bodies 372R, 372L) formed to be rotatable with their rotating shafts oriented in the horizontal direction, and game balls disposed on the rotating members and placed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating members. A game machine is known which includes an attracting magnet (372Rb) and throws a game ball in the direction of rotation of the rotating member by rotating the rotating member while the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. there is When two game balls roll continuously toward the rotating member, the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the game ball following the preceding game ball is attracted. Sometimes. In this case, when the rotating member is rotated, there is a problem that the weight of two balls is applied, and the suction between the rotating member and the preceding game ball is released.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the second rolling portion 381c is arranged side by side on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R and the game ball rolls, and the second rolling portion 381c is the rotating member. Since it is located above the rotating shaft in the direction of gravity, for example, two game balls are rolled in a row toward the rotating body 372R on the second rolling portion 381c, and the preceding game ball rolls on the rotating body 372R. When the game ball following the preceding game ball is attracted while being attracted to the outer peripheral surface, the preceding game ball can be easily placed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to release the attraction between the rotating body 372R and the preceding game ball.

Here, the game ball attracted to and thrown by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R is placed in parallel with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R on the side opposite to the second rolling portion 381c across the rotating body 372R. When received by the moving part 381d, the game ball easily bounces on the third rolling part 381d at this time, and it is difficult to smoothly throw the game ball from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R to the third rolling part 381d. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the third rolling portion 381d is positioned above the rotating shaft of the rotating body 372R in the direction of gravity, the game ball is prevented from bouncing on the third rolling portion 381d and rotates. A game ball can be smoothly thrown from the outer peripheral surface of the body 372R to the third rolling portion 381d. That is, it is possible to cause the third rolling portion 381d to receive the game ball before the downward displacement component in the direction of gravity increases with the rotation of the rotating body 372R (that is, at the stage when the horizontal component is relatively large). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the bouncing of the game ball on the third rolling portion 381d. In addition, before the game ball is received by the third rolling part 381d, the attraction of the game ball is released, and the game ball can be prevented from falling from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R to the third rolling part 381d. . Also from this point, it is possible to suppress the bouncing of the game ball on the third rolling portion 381d.

In addition, since the third rolling portion 381d is inclined downward in a direction away from the rotating body 372R, it is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R and thrown as the rotating body 372R rotates. The throwing direction of the game ball can be brought closer to the rolling direction of the following game ball received by the third rolling portion 381d. As a result, the game ball can be suppressed from bouncing on the third rolling portion 381d, and the game ball can be smoothly thrown from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R to the third rolling portion 381d.

The rotating body 372R has a groove 372Rc2 recessed in its outer peripheral surface, and the magnet 372Rb is disposed at a position where the game ball is attracted to the inner surface of the groove 372Rc2. ) can support the game ball. As a result, for example, the second rolling portion 381c rolls in a state in which two game balls are connected toward the rotating body 372R, and the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R, and its When the game ball following the preceding game ball is attracted, it is possible to make it difficult to release the attraction between the rotating body 372R and the preceding game ball.

Further, the recess depth of the groove portion 372Rc2 is set to a dimension that allows the game ball to abut on the bottom surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 while the game ball is fitted in the groove portion 372Rc2. Since the third rolling part 381d side is set to have a smaller dimension than the third rolling part 381d side, when the game ball thrown with the rotation of the rotating body 372R wobbles in the rotating direction of the rotating body 372R, the game ball is released from the groove part 372Rc2. It can be made easier to roll (fall off) toward the third rolling portion 381d. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being released from being sucked and returning to the second rolling portion 381c.

Next, through the states shown in FIGS. 77 and 79(b), the groove 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc shown in FIGS. 78 and 79(c) is rotated to a position adjacent to the seventh throwing path KR7. Then, the game ball attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 is caught on the third rolling portion 381d of the seventh ball throwing path KR7. As a result, the ball is released from the magnet 372Rb of the second rotor 372Rc and is thrown along the seventh ball path KR7.

Here, if the attraction between the rotating body 372R and the game ball is released below the axis of the rotating body in the gravity direction, the gravity of the game ball tends to act around the axis of the rotating body 372R, and the rotating body 372R rotates. There is a risk that the speed will be increased.

Therefore, when the attraction between the rotating body 372R and the game ball is released, the kinetic energy of the rotating body 372R increases, and there is a problem that the rotating body 372 bounces when it collides with the third rolling portion 381d. . Alternatively, if the rotating body 372 is rotated and the ball is thrown downward in the direction of gravity from the axis of the rotating body 372R while the rotating body 372 is attracted to the game ball, the game ball cannot be supported by the rotating body 372. Another problem is that the suction between the rotating body 372 and the game ball is released, and the game ball falls to the third rolling portion 381d and bounces.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the base of the third rolling part 381d is arranged above the axis of the rotating body 372 in the direction of gravity. It can be above the axis of 372 in the direction of gravity. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing when the attraction between the rotating body 372 and the game ball is released.

Further, since the third rolling portion 381d is inclined downward in the direction from the second rolling portion 381c toward the third rolling portion 381d, the ball is thrown by being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372. The throwing direction of the ball and the rolling direction of the third rolling portion 381d can be substantially matched. Therefore, since the game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372 has kinetic energy in the rotating direction due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 372, the attraction to the rotating body 372 is released by the third rolling portion 381d. At the time, it tends to move in the direction in which the kinetic energy acts. As described above, since the throwing direction of the game ball sucked to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372 and thrown substantially coincides with the rolling direction of the third rolling portion 381d, the ball is thrown to the third rolling portion 381d. It is possible to make it easier to roll the game ball to be played. As a result, the game ball thrown to the third rolling portion 381d can be easily rolled.

The game ball thrown on the seventh ball-throwing path KR7 rolls to the front side due to the downward inclination of the third rolling portion 381d to the front side, and is thrown to the eighth ball-throwing path KR8.

Therefore, the game ball thrown through the sixth ball-throwing path KR6 can be thrown to the seventh ball-throwing path KR7 by the rotation of the rotor 372R. Therefore, since a plurality of ball throwing paths can be formed, the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, attraction of game balls to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 of the second rotating body 372Rc will be described in detail. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390. FIG. 80 corresponds to the cross section of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 in FIG. 69(a). Also, FIG. 80 illustrates a state in which the ball is slightly rotated after being attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2. Furthermore, in FIG. 80, the connecting portion between the groove portion 372Rc2 on the side opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating body 372 and the second rotating body 372Rc is indicated by the end A3.

As shown in FIG. 80, in a role that attracts a game ball to the outer peripheral surface of a rotating rotating body and throws it, the game ball attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 is thrown after the sixth ball path KR6. Spheres may stick. When the game ball following the preceding game ball is attracted, the gravitational force of the two game balls acts on the attraction surface between the groove portion 372Rc2 and the preceding game ball. As a result, there is a problem that the adsorption between the preceding game ball and the groove portion 372Rc2 is released when the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, the game ball attracted to the inner periphery of the groove portion 372Rc2 is thrown in contact with the end portion A3. As a result, even if force acts on the ball in the direction of gravity, the end A3 supports the game ball, making it difficult for the ball to be displaced in the direction of gravity, thereby preventing the game ball from falling from the groove 372Rc2. Therefore, even when the game ball following the preceding game ball is attracted, it is possible to suppress the releasing of the attraction between the preceding game ball and the groove portion 372Rc2.

Further, as described above, the sixth ball-throwing path KR6 is formed above the rotating shaft of the rotating body 372R in the gravitational direction. can. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress release of the attraction between the groove portion 372Rc2 and the game ball.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 90, the prize winning port unit 600 will be described. First, referring to FIGS. 81 to 83, the overall configuration of the prize winning port unit 600 will be described. 81(a) is a front view of the prize winning unit 600, and FIG. 81(b) is a rear view of the prize winning unit 600. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning hole unit 600, and FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning hole unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, the prize winning port unit 600 includes a decorative plate 610 having a plurality of prize winning ports 26, 27 and 28, and a decorative plate 610 facing the decorative plate 610. A base plate 630 that forms a path, a path member 640 that forms a ball-throwing path for a game ball between the base plate 630, and a path member 640 that is disposed on the base plate 630 and extends between the decorative plate 610 and the base plate 630. It is mainly formed with a variable winning device 650 that guides the falling game balls to one of the winning openings 26, 27 and 28. - 特許庁

The decorative plate 610 is formed of a left cover member 611 having a left start winning opening 26, a right cover member 612 having a right starting winning opening 27, and a central cover member 613 having a middle starting winning opening 28.

The left cover member 611 and the right cover member 612 are formed symmetrically with the central cover member 613 interposed therebetween, and only the right cover member 612 will be described in detail. In this case, the left starting winning opening 26 corresponds to the right starting winning opening 27 .

The right cover member 612 is formed of a plate-like body curved in a semicircular shape on the lower side in the direction of gravity when viewed from the front, and the right start winning opening 27 is formed protruding near the curved axis.

The center cover member 613 is formed in a semi-circular shape with an upper side curved when viewed from the front, and is arranged in the center between the left cover member 611 and the right cover member 612 . The central cover member 613 is formed between a guide plate 613a projecting from the vicinity of the curved axis, erected walls 613b and 613c projecting in an arc around the curved axis, and the opposed erected walls 613b and 613c. , and cover-side projections 613d projecting from both sides of the guide plate 613a.

The guide plate 613a is a projection for guiding a game ball inserted through the inside of the middle start winning opening 28 to a through hole 632a of the base plate 630, which will be described later, and is arranged above the through hole 632a in the direction of gravity. Further, the guide plate 613a is formed such that its upper surface slopes downward toward the projecting tip. As a result, the game ball that passes through the inside of the middle start winning opening 28 and is thrown to the upper surface of the guide plate 613a can be rolled to the back side of the base plate 630 and thrown to the through hole 632a of the base plate 630. can.

Further, the guide plate 613a is formed with a contact surface 613a1 having a large inclination angle on the upper surface on the base side and a rolling surface 613a2 having a smaller inclination angle than the contact surface 613a1 on the upper surface on the tip side.

The contact surface 613a1 is a surface that stabilizes the throwing of the game ball to the through-hole 632a by making contact with the game ball that wins inside the middle start winning opening 28, and throws the ball inside the middle starting winning opening 28. It contacts the outer surface on the front side from the lower end in the direction of gravity of the game ball to be played. That is, the contact surface 613a1 is set so that the distance dimension from the connecting portion with the rolling surface 613a2 to the base is larger than the radius of the game ball, and the dimension to the upper side in the direction of gravity is set larger than the radius of the game ball. be done. Therefore, the game ball inserted through the inside of the middle start winning opening 28 can be brought into contact with the rolling surface 613a2. As a result, the component of the force in the direction of gravity of the game ball thrown to the middle start winning opening 28 can be caused to act on the through hole 632a side by the reaction due to the collision with the contact surface 613a1. As a result, the game ball thrown into the inside of the middle starting winning opening 28 can be smoothly guided to the through hole 632 a of the base plate 630 .

The erected walls 613b and 613c are walls forming the middle start winning opening 28, and are formed to sandwich the middle starting winning opening 28 therebetween. The erected walls 613b and 613c are formed with one side that is curved and the other side that is suspended from the central portion. The middle start winning opening 28 is formed between the standing walls 613b and 613c facing each other on the other side.

One side of the erected walls 613b and 613c is a rolling surface of a game ball for throwing the game ball flowing down the game board 13 to the out hole 71 without being inserted into the middle starting winning opening 28.例文帳に追加A game ball sent to the upper surface of one side of the erected walls 613b, 613c can flow outward in the left-right direction, so that a space can be formed below the erected walls 613b, 613c.

The cover-side protrusion 613d is a protrusion for slowing down the speed of a game ball rolling on the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650, which will be described later.

The base plate 630 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. It is formed with a central recess 632 and a right recess 633 .

The left recess 631 includes a left through hole 631a formed in the left cover member 611 at a position facing the left starting prize opening 26, and a left through hole 631a located below the left through hole 631a in the direction of gravity. and a second through hole 631b penetrating through the portion.

The left through-hole 631a is a path of a game ball through which a game ball thrown into the inside of the left start winning hole 26 flows down, and is formed to penetrate from the front side to the back side, and the inner shape is the outer shape of the game ball. formed larger than As a result, the game ball sent to the left starting winning port 26 can be recovered through the left through hole 631a.

The second through-hole 631b is an opening through which a game ball that flows down passing near the left start winning opening 26 is inserted, and is formed at the lower end of the left recessed portion 631, and is located on the left side of the path member 640 described later when viewed from the front. It is formed at a position facing one end. As a result, the game ball that is not thrown to the left start winning opening 26 and flows down between the left recess 631 and the left cover member 611 can be thrown to the path member 640 through the second through hole 631b.

The right recessed portion 633 includes a right through hole 633a formed in the right cover member 612 at a position facing the right starting prize opening 27, and a right through hole 633a located below the right through hole 633a in the direction of gravity. It is mainly formed with a second through hole 633b penetrating through the portion.

The right through-hole 633a is a path of a game ball through which a game ball thrown into the right start winning hole 27 flows down, and is formed to penetrate from the front side to the back side, and the inner shape is the outer shape of the ball. formed larger than As a result, the game ball thrown to the right start winning opening 27 can be recovered through the right through hole 633a.

The second through-hole 633b is an opening through which a game ball flowing down through the vicinity of the right start winning opening 27 is inserted, and is formed at the lower end of the right concave portion 633, and is located on the right side of the path member 640 described later in front view. It is formed at a position facing the other end. As a result, the game ball that is not thrown to the right start winning opening 27 and flows down between the right recess 633 and the right cover member 612 can be thrown to the path member 640 through the second through hole 633b.

Therefore, the opening of the game ball flowing path formed between the left and right concave portions 631 and 633 and the facing plate 610 is positioned above the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 in the direction of gravity. Since the left start winning prize port 26 and the right start winning prize port 27 are arranged inside the flow-down path of the game ball formed between the concave portions 631, 633 and the decorative plate 610, the second through holes 631b, 633b A part of the game balls flowed into the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 can be made to enter. That is, the game balls flowing down without entering the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 can be reliably made to flow into the path member 640 . As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player who enters the second ball entrance, and improve the interest of the game.

The central recessed portion 632 has a through hole 632a penetrating through the base plate 630 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, two through holes 632c penetrating on both sides of the through hole 632a, and an opening above the through holes 632c. and base-side protrusions 632d located on both sides of the through-hole 632a and protruding toward the central cover member 613 side.

The through hole 632a is an opening through which a game ball rolling on the upper part of the guide plate 613a is inserted. It is formed below the guide plate 613a in the direction of gravity.

The insertion holes 632c are formed through the through holes 632c on both left and right sides of the through hole 632a as described above. Further, the insertion hole 632c is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the through hole 632a.

The connecting hole 632b is an opening through which a game ball sent through the path member 640, which will be described later, is discharged to the front side of the base plate 630. It is formed.

The base-side projection 632d is a projection that slows down the speed of the game ball rolling on the upper portion of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 that is inserted through the insertion hole 632c and protrudes toward the central cover member 613. 632c is formed to protrude upward on the through hole 632a side.

The path member 640 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box shape with the base plate 630 side opened. The path member 640 is a member for forming a path that connects the second through holes 631b, 633b and the connecting hole 632b, and is formed on the left side of the front view to the left side of the second through hole 631b and the base plate 630 when viewed from the front. and a second path 642 formed on the right side in front view and connecting the second through hole 633b and the right side connection hole 632b of the base plate 630 in front view. be.

The first path 641 and the second path 642 of the path member 640 are formed to be inclined downward toward the direction toward each other. As a result, the game ball thrown from the second through hole 631b rolls on the first path 641 and can be thrown to the connecting hole 632b. In addition, the game ball thrown from the second through hole 633b can roll on the second path 642 and can be thrown to the connecting hole 632b.

The variable winning device 650 is a device that has a variable plate 652 that can be slidably displaced, and that is attached from the rear side of the base plate 630, and is arranged in a state in which the variable plate 652 is inserted through the insertion hole 632c.

Next, the variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. FIG. 84(a) is a front view of the variable winning device 650, and FIG. 84(b) is a top view of the variable winning device 650. FIG. 85(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 650, and FIG. 85(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 650. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the variable winning device 650 includes a front base 651 connected to a base plate 630, and a variable plate 652 inserted through the front base 651 and arranged in a slidable manner. , a transmission member 653 which is connected to the base end of the variable plate 652 and can be rotated and displaced by the driving force of the driving means, a cover member 654 disposed around the transmission member 653, and a solenoid 655 of the driving means. formed with.

The front base 651 is formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and mainly includes an opening 651b into which the tip side of the variable plate 652 described later is inserted, and a recovery hole 651a connected to a through hole 632a of the base plate 630. formed by

The recovery hole 651a is a hole for recovering the game ball inserted through the through hole 632a of the base plate 630, and is connected to the rear side of the through hole 632a.

The opening 651b is an opening for stabilizing the sliding of the variable plate 652, which will be described later, when the variable plate 652 slides, and is formed slightly larger than the external shape of the variable plate 652 when viewed from the front.

The two variable plates 652 are plate members for rolling the game ball on the upper surface as described above, and the tip thereof is inserted through the insertion hole 632c of the base plate 630 through the opening 651b. That is, the variable plates 652 are inclined in a direction in which they approach each other. As a result, when a game ball lands on the upper surface of the variable plate 652, the ball can be rolled and dropped onto the guide plate 613a.

In addition, the variable plate 652 has a recess 652a recessed in the direction of gravity. A rotation shaft 653a of a transmission member 653, which will be described later, is inserted into the recess 652a, and displacement of the transmission member 653 is transmitted. As a result, the driving force is transmitted to the variable plate 652 and the variable plate 652 is slidably displaced.

The transmission member 653 is formed in a plate-like body, and a rotary shaft 653c formed at one end thereof is connected to a shaft hole 654a formed in the cover member 654. As shown in FIG. In addition, the transmission member 653 has an engaging portion 653b projecting from the central portion of the rotating shaft 653a, and the engaging portion 653b is engaged with the projection 655a of the solenoid 655. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the solenoid 655 is driven, the engaging portion 653b is pushed out and the transmission member 653 is rotationally displaced about the rotating shaft 653c. Thereby, the variable plate 652 can be slidably displaced.

Therefore, in the through hole 632a on the flow-down path of the medium starting winning port 28, a variable plate 652 is arranged to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the upstream of the through hole 632a to enter the through hole 632a due to the displacement operation. A game ball that does not enter the left start prize winning port 26 or the right start prize winning port 27, flows down in the vicinity of the left start prize winning port 26 or the right start prize winning port 27, and is thrown into the path member 640 is inserted into the through hole 632a. You can improve your chances of winning a prize.

In addition, since a pair of variable plates 652 are disposed on both sides of the through hole 632a so as to tilt downward toward the through hole 632a, when the variable plate 652 protrudes, , the game ball flowing down from either the left or right side of the through-hole 632a can be easily entered into the through-hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation for the ball entering the through-hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, as a configuration for facilitating entry of a game ball into the through hole 632a, a pair of feather members whose proximal end side is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft protruding from the game board 13 is arranged in the through hole 632a. It is conceivable that the game ball is guided to the through hole 632a (so-called tulip) by opening the feather member. However, in such a configuration, a space for rotating (opening and closing) the wing members is required in the game area. In particular, a space is required above the through hole 632a in order to form the posture in which the wing members are closed. As a result, the size increases in the vertical direction, and the space for arranging other members (for example, the first ball entrance and the liquid crystal display device) is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a pair of plate-shaped variable plates 652 formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and to be retractable to the back side of the game board 13 are provided on both sides of the through hole 632a. Since it is disposed in a posture inclined downward toward 632a, it is possible to achieve miniaturization in the vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members (for example, the first ball entrance and the liquid crystal display device).

Furthermore, since the connecting hole 632b of the path member 640 is arranged above the variable plate 652 in the direction of gravity, the projecting variable plate 652 can be used to make it easier for the game ball to enter the through hole 632a. can. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation for the ball entering the through-hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, the second through hole 631b and the path member 640 and the second through hole 633b and the path member 640 are formed in pairs, and the connecting holes 632b of the path member 640 of one of the two pairs are formed in a pair. The connecting hole 632b of the other pair of path members 640 is arranged above the other variable plate 652 in the direction of gravity. Therefore, by using the pair of variable plates 652, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the through hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation for the ball entering the through-hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second through-hole 631b and the path member 640 and the second through-hole 633b and the path member 640 are spaced apart on both the left and right sides of the through-hole 632a (for example, the through-hole 632a is located in the game area). It is preferable that two sets are arranged symmetrically in the width direction across the through hole 632a while being positioned in the center in the width direction. A game ball flowing down either one side or the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 can easily enter the through hole 632a and enter the through hole 632a. This is because the player can have a stronger expectation of hitting the ball.

In addition, since the edge of the variable plate 652 on the side of the through hole 632a is positioned between the lower edge in the gravity direction and the upper edge in the gravity direction of the through hole 632a, the game ball is thrown in the width direction of the game area. When (displaced), the game ball is brought into contact with the edge of the protruding variable plate 652 on the side of the through hole 632a, making it easier to enter the through hole 632a. That is, a game ball that is thrown (displaced) from one side in the width direction of the game area passes through the front of the through hole 632a and is thrown (displaced) to the other side in the width direction (the game ball enters the through hole 632a). Escape in the width direction of the game area without hitting the ball) can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, the game ball throwing path of the winning hole unit 600 will be described. 86(a) is a front view of the prize winning unit 600, and FIG. 86(b) is a top view of the prize winning unit 600. FIG. 87(a) and 87(b) are partial front views of the winning opening unit 600 in the range LXXXVII of FIG.

87(a) shows the state before the displacement of the variable winning device 650, and FIG. 87(b) shows the state after the displacement of the variable winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 86 and 87, the decorative plate 610 is illustrated in a transparent state. In FIG. 86(a), the path member 640 is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b), the second through hole 631b and the connecting hole 632b are connected by the first path 641 of the path member 640 disposed on the back side of the base plate 630. . On the other hand, the second path 642 of the path member 640 connects the second through hole 633b and the connecting hole 632b. Therefore, the game ball that is not thrown to the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 but is thrown to each of the second through holes 631b and 633b is thrown inside the path member 640 and discharged from the connecting hole 632b. .

In this case, as shown in FIG. 87(a), before the variable winning device 650 is driven, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is retracted to the rear side of the central concave portion 632 of the base plate 630. Become. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the connecting hole 632b flows downward and is collected by the out port 71 formed in the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 87(b), when the variable winning device 650 is driven (the variable plate is slid and displaced), the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is positioned in front of the central concave portion 632 of the base plate 630. protruded to the side. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the opening 651b is thrown to the upper surface of the variable plate 652. As shown in FIG.

A game machine having a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance is known. In this case, game balls that have not entered the first ball entry hole are not entered into the second ball entry hole, but are only collected from the out hole. Therefore, when the game ball hit aiming at the first ball entrance does not enter the first ball entrance, the player expects the subsequent destination of the game ball (the game ball flowing down). can't have Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot be sufficiently entertained.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the path member 640 forming the passage of the game ball flowing down without being entered into the left start prize winning port 26 and the right start prize winning port 27 and the game area are formed on the front side. Equipped with a game board 13 and a plate-shaped variable plate 652 formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and to be immersed to the back side of the game board 13 . Since the variable plate 652 projecting to the side can be guided to the through hole 632a, even if the game ball does not enter the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27, the game ball will not flow down. It is possible to draw the player's attention and continuously expect the player to enter the ball into the through-hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the variable plate 652 is formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and to be immersed to the back side, the variable board 652 can be retracted to the back side of the game board 13 when not functioning. For that amount, a space can be secured on the front side of the game board 13 (the game area can be expanded). That is, it is possible to expand the area in which the game ball can move in the game area.

The path member 640 may be, for example, one formed as a closed passage through which the game ball can pass, one formed of one or more nails that define the flowing direction of the game ball, or one that allows the game ball to roll. An example is one formed as an inclined surface (an open passage).

Further, even when the variable plate 652 is retracted to the back side of the game board 13, it is naturally possible for the game ball passing through the path member 640 to enter the through hole 632a. In this case, it is preferable that the ball is easier to enter the through hole 632a when the variable plate 652 is protruded than when it is retracted. This is because the state of the variable plate 652 can be focused on and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as described above, when a game ball enters the left start prize winning port 26 and the right start prize winning port 27, the probability that the game ball flows into the movable ball entry accessory device 300 due to the opening and closing of the wings 312 Also, when a game ball wins in the middle start prize opening 28, the probability that the game ball flows into the movable ball entry accessory device 300 by opening and closing the wings 312 is set higher, so the player can For game balls that do not enter the left starting winning port 26 and the right starting winning port 27, it is possible to further expect that they will win the middle starting winning port 28.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest of the player.

That is, the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the through hole 632a is higher than the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the left start prize winning port 26 and the right start prize winning port 27. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the left start prize winning port 26 and the right start prize winning port 27, the player can have a stronger expectation that the game ball will enter the through hole 632a. . As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that, as a form in which a player is provided with a high profit, there is a form in which a large number of prize balls are paid out as a result of entering a ball, and a form in which a ball enters the third ball entrance (between the concave portion 311a and the upper front cover 313). Examples include a mode in which the open time of the wing portion 312 that permits/regulates is increased, a mode in which the number of times the wing portion 312 is opened, and a mode in which the open range of the wing portion 312 is increased.

In addition, since the base plate 60 is made of a transparent flexible material, the game can be played in such a manner that the two routes, that is, the route that flows down the back side of the base plate 60 and the route that flows down the front side of the base plate 60 intersect. can be seen by people. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being spoiled.

That is, the path member 640 includes a second through hole 631b and a second through hole 633b for receiving a game ball that flows down without entering the left start prize winning port 26 and the right start prize winning port 27, and the second through hole 631b and the second through hole 633b. It is provided with a connecting hole 632b that allows the game ball that has flowed in from the second through hole 633b to flow out to the game area, and is made of a transparent flexible material. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball that has been drawn flows down (passes) toward the connecting hole 632b (second ball entrance). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 88, the configuration around the through hole 632a will be described in detail. FIG. 88(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 600, FIG. 88(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 600 along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb of FIG. 88(a), and FIG. 88(c). 81(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 600 along line LXXXVIIIc-LXXXVIIIc of FIG. 81(a).

As shown in FIGS. 88(a) to 88(c), insertion holes 632c are opened at both left and right ends of the through hole 632a, and the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is inserted therein. In this case, the height of the end portion of the variable plate 652 on the side of the through hole 632a is set to be substantially the same as the middle position of the height of the through hole 632a in the gravity direction. Thereby, the height distance between the end portion of the variable plate 652 on the side of the through hole 632a and the guide plate 613a can be secured. As a result, when the game ball rolling on the upper part of the variable plate 652 is thrown to the through hole 632a, the falling distance to the guide plate 613a can be secured, so that the ball is brought into contact with the contact surface 613a1. The impact force at the time of hitting can be ensured, and the ball can be smoothly thrown to the through hole 632a.

A base-side projection 632d of 632a projecting from the central recessed portion 632 of the base plate 630 is formed to have a substantially triangular cross-section whose projection distance is reduced outward from the through-hole 632a. Similarly, the cover-side projection 613d protruding from the central cover member 613 is also formed to have a triangular cross-section whose projection distance is reduced outward from the through-hole 632a. The base-side projection 632d and the cover-side projection 613d are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction, and the base-side projection 632d is formed closer to the through hole 632a than the cover-side projection 613d.

Further, a guide plate 613a projecting from the lower edge of the through hole 632a in the direction of gravity toward the front side of the game board is provided. Not only when 652 is protruding, but also when variable plate 652 is retracted, the ball does not enter left start winning opening 26 and right starting winning opening 27 and flows down (passing path member 640). ) A game ball can be easily entered into the through hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation for the ball entering the through-hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the game ball inserted through the middle start winning opening 28 will be described. 89(a) to 89(c) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 600. FIG. 89(a) to 89(c) correspond to FIG. 88(b). Also, FIGS. 89(a) to 89(c) illustrate respective transition states.

As shown in FIGS. 89( a ) to 89 ( c ), the game ball inserted through the middle start winning opening 28 is dropped onto the upper surface of the guide plate 613 a , and the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 The ball can be stably thrown to the through hole 632a by coming into contact with the end on the through hole 7632a side.

Here, if the guide plate 613a catches the falling game ball, the impact of the collision may cause the ball to sway in the horizontal direction and not enter the through hole 632a.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the height position of the end of the variable plate of the variable winning device 650 on the side of the through hole 632a is set to be substantially the same as the middle position of the through hole 632a in the direction of gravity. When the ball is swayed in the left-right direction due to the impact of collision, the ball can be brought into contact with the side surface of the variable plate and smoothly fed to the through hole 632a.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 90(a) to 90(c), a game ball thrown over the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 will be described. 90(a) to 90(c) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 600. FIG. 90(a) to 90(c) correspond to FIG. 88(c).

As shown in FIGS. 90(a) to 90(c), a game ball that is thrown to the path member 640 and thrown to the upper part of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 passes through the connecting hole 632b of the base plate 630. While being rolled forward by the momentum of the ejection, the inclination of the variable plate 652 causes the plate 652 to roll toward the through hole 632 a , thereby coming into contact with the cover-side projection 613 d of the central cover member 613 . As a result, the ball rolls on the upper portion of the variable plate 652 toward the through hole 632a while being guided to the back side by the projection shape of the cover-side projection 613d.

Next, the game ball that rolls toward the through hole 632a while being thrown to the back side by the cover-side projection 613d is brought into contact with the base-side projection 632d. As a result, the ball is guided to the front side by the protrusion shape of the base-side protrusion 632d, rolls on the upper portion of the variable plate 652 toward the through hole 632a, and flows down to the upper portion of the guide plate 613a.

Here, if the game ball rolling on the upper part of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 does not come into contact with the cover-side projection 613d and the base-side projection 632d, the rolling speed of the ball increases and the guide plate There is a possibility that the throwing of the game ball to the upper part of the 613a becomes unstable, and the throwing of the game ball to the through hole 632a becomes unstable.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is brought into contact with the cover-side projection 613d and the base-side projection 632d, thereby slowing the rolling speed of the ball. It is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball to the through hole 632a.

Further, in this embodiment, the base-side projection 632d is formed closer to the through-hole 632a than the cover-side projection 613d, so that the game ball falling onto the guide plate 613a is reliably hit against the contact surface 613a1 of the guide plate 613a. can be brought into contact. As a result, the throwing of the game ball to the through hole 632a can be stabilized.

Further, on the upper surface of the guide plate 613a, there is a ball-feeding surface located closer to the through hole 632a, and a contact surface connected to the ball-feeding surface and located farther from the through hole 632a than the rolling surface 613a2. 613a1 is formed, and the angle of downward inclination of the contact surface 613a1 toward the through hole 632a is larger than the angle of downward inclination of the ball feeding surface toward the through hole 632a. Using the downward inclination of the surface 613a1, the game ball can be smoothly entered into the through hole 632a. In particular, even when the slide member is retracted, the inclination of the contact surface 613a1, which has a large downward inclination, allows the ball to flow down without being entered into the first ball entrance (passing through the passage member). ), the game ball can be easily entered into the through hole 632a.

Next, the variable unit 2360 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the magnet 372Rb arranged on the rotating body 372R is formed smaller than the concave portion 372Rc1 has been described. It is formed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 91(a) is a front view of the variable unit 2360 in the second embodiment, FIG. 91(b) is a top view of the variable unit 2360, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 along line XCIc-XCIc; 92 is an exploded front perspective view of variable unit 2360. FIG. 93 is an exploded rear perspective view of variable unit 2360. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 91(a) and 91(b), the outer shape of the magnet 2372Rb is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 93, the rotating body 2372R in the second embodiment includes a first rotating body 2372Ra disposed on the main body portion 380 side and a second rotating body 2372Ra connected to the first rotating body 2372Ra. 2372Rc, and magnets 2372Rb arranged inside the second rotating body 2372Rc and the first rotating body 2372Ra.

The first rotating body 2372Ra is a cylindrical rotating body that rotates while being connected to the connecting rod 371, and mainly includes a through hole 372Ra1 that opens to the shaft and a recessed portion 2372Ra2 that is recessed toward the main body. It is formed.

The recessed portion 2372Ra2 is a recessed portion that accommodates the body portion 380 side of the magnet 2372Rb, which will be described later, and is recessed in a shape corresponding to the curved shape of the magnet 2372Rb. Thereby, the magnet 2372Rb can be accommodated inside the first rotating body 2372 .

Here, the magnet 2372Rb arranged inside the rotating body 2372R prevents the game ball rolling on the second rolling part 381c from being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R. At the position, in order to attract the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R, it is necessary to change the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb acting radially outward of the rotating body 2372R. That is, in the portion that slows down the rolling speed of the game ball, the magnetic force acting on the radially outer side of the rotating body 2372R is relatively small, and in the portion that attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R, the rotating body 2372R. It is necessary to make the magnetic force acting radially outward relatively large.

Therefore, two magnets 2372Rb with different magnetic forces are arranged inside the rotating body 2372R in the portion where the rolling speed of the game ball is slowed down and the portion where the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R. Alternatively, it is necessary to dispose the magnet 2372Rb that protrudes radially outward only at the attracting portion. Therefore, there is a problem that the cost of manufacturing the magnet 2372Rb increases.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the magnet 2372Rb is arranged at a position radially outwardly spaced from the axis of the rotating body 2372R by the same distance. Since the groove 2372Rc2 is recessed in the radial direction, the magnetic force acting on the outer side of the attraction position can be made relatively strong because the groove 2372Rc2 is recessed in the radial direction. Thus, without complicating the shape of the magnet 2372Rb, a portion for slowing the rolling speed of the game ball and a portion for attracting the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R can be formed. You can suppress the increase.

The second rotating body 2372Rc is formed in a columnar shape having substantially the same outer shape as the outer path of the first rotating body 2372, and is arranged coaxially with the first rotating body 2372Ra and attached to the first rotating body 372Ra. .

The second rotating body 372Rc is formed with a recess 372Rc1 recessed outward from the main body 380 side, and a groove 2372Rc2 recessed in the radially outer peripheral surface of the recess 372Rc1. be.

The groove portion 2372Rc2 is formed so that the recessed distance in the radial direction becomes smaller toward the first rotating body 372Ra side (see FIG. 91(c)). As a result, when the game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 2372Ra rolls on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R and is received inside the groove 2372Rc2, it falls from the rotating body 2372R into the groove 2372Rc2. can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be stably thrown to the groove portion 2372Rc2. It should be noted that the throwing of the game ball of the rotating body 2372R will be described later.

Next, the magnet 2372Rb will be described with reference to FIG. 94(a) is a front view of the magnet 2372Rb, FIG. 94(b) is a top view of the magnet 2372Rb, and FIG. 94(c) is a side view of the magnet 2372Rb.

As shown in FIGS. 94(a) to 94(c), the magnet 2372Rb is formed in a curved shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the first rotating body 2372Ra when viewed from the side. The magnet 2372Rb is curved toward the left side (left side in FIG. 94(a)) in the direction of rotation of the rotor 2372R when viewed from the front.

The rotor 2372R configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, one side of the magnet 2372Rb is inserted inside the concave portion 2372Ra2 of the first rotor 2372Ra. Next, the magnet 2372Rb projecting from the recess 2372Ra2 of the first rotating body 2372Ra is inserted into the recess 2372Rc1 of the second rotating body 2372Rc, and the first rotating body 2372Ra and the second rotating body 2372Rc are fastened to each other. 2372R is assembled.

Next, referring to FIGS. 95 and 96, the attraction between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball will be described. 95(a) to 95(c) are top views of the variable unit 2360. FIG. FIG. 96(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 taken along the line XCVIa-XCVIa of FIG. 95(a), and FIG. 96(b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 taken along the line XCVIb-XCVIb of FIG. FIG. 96(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable unit 2360 along line XCVIc-XCVIc in FIG. 95(c). 95(a) to 95(c) illustrate transition states of the sphere. Also, in FIGS. 95(a) to 95(c), the magnet 2372Rb is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 95(a) and 96(a), when the magnet 2372Rb on the side of the first rotating body 2372Ra is adjacent to the sixth ball-throwing path KR6, the game ball is thrown to the sixth ball-throwing path KR6. Then, the ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the first rotor 2372Ra by the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb.

As shown in FIGS. 95(b) and 96(b), when the rotating body 2372R is rotated around the axis in a state where the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 2372Ra, the ball is pulled by its own weight. The ball is thrown along the sixth throwing path KR6 while being displaced downward by .

That is, in the portion that slows down the rolling of the game ball, when the magnet 2372Rb is positioned adjacent to the second rolling part 381c due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball moves against the second rolling part 381c. By rolling, the rolling of the game ball can be slowed down. In addition, since the magnet 2372Rb is bent around the axis in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 2372R, the position where the magnet 2372Rb and the second rolling portion 381c are adjacent to each other is shifted to the rotating body 2372R as the rotating body 2372R rotates. 2372R can be displaced to the adsorption position side. Therefore, the game ball whose rolling speed on the second rolling portion 381c is slowed down by the magnet 2372Rb can be made to roll radially outward of the attracting position with the rotational displacement of the rotating body 2372R. As a result, the game ball whose rolling speed on the second rolling portion 381c is slowed down can be attracted to the rotating body 2372R.

Here, it comprises a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with the rotating shaft oriented in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A gaming machine is known in which a game ball is rotated in a state in which a game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface, and the game ball is thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotary member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the game ball rolls on the rolling surface while swinging, the rotating member rotates, and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at the timing when it can face the adsorption position of the rotating member. Even when it moves, there is a problem that the game ball is difficult to be attracted to the attraction position.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the magnet 2372Rb has at least an attraction position where the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R and an upstream position upstream of the rolling surface from the attraction position. Since it is arranged, the game ball can be attracted to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating body 2372R by the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb arranged at the upstream position, and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface while swinging. can be suppressed. As a result, when the rotating body 2372R is rotated and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at the timing when it can face the attracting position of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball can be easily attracted to the attracting position.

The magnet 2372Rb arranged at the attracting position and the magnet 2372Rb arranged at the upstream position may be formed separately (that is, two magnets 2372Rb), or may be formed integrally. (ie, one magnet 2372Rb).

Here, it is necessary to attract the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R at the attracting position, but not to attract the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R at the upstream position. To achieve this by the difference in the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb (that is, the magnet 2372Rb with strong magnetic force is arranged at the attracting position, and the magnet 2372Rb with weak magnetic force is arranged at the upstream position). It is necessary to prepare the magnet 2372Rb, resulting in an increase in product cost.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the rotating body 2372R is provided with the groove 2372Rc2 recessed in the outer peripheral surface thereof and serving as the attraction position. 2372Rc2, the distance from the magnet 2372Rb at the attracting position to the game ball (the distance from the magnet 2372Rb to the bottom surface of the groove 2372Rc2) is determined by the distance from the magnet 2372Rb at the upstream position to the game ball) from the magnet 2372Rb to the rotating body 2372R. distance to the outer peripheral surface). That is, while the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotor 2372R at the suction position, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotor 2372R at the upstream position. Therefore, there is no need to use two types of magnets 2372Rb, and there is no need to complicate the shape of the magnets 2372Rb, so the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Also, when a game ball is attracted to the attraction position, the game ball can be held by the groove portion 2372Rc2. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown with the rotation of the rotating body 2372R, it is possible to suppress the game ball from wobbling in the rotation direction of the rotating body 2372R, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being released from the adsorption. .

Here, when the ball throwing path KR5 for throwing the game ball along the axis of the rotating body 2372R is formed, the rolling speed of the game ball is high, or the game ball wobbles on the rolling surface. There was a problem that it could not be attracted to the rotating body 2372R.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a fifth ball path KR5 for rolling a game ball and throwing it to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R is formed on the radially outer side of the rotating body 2372R. is formed extending in the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R, and the magnet 2372Rb extends upstream of the fifth ball path KR5 from the attraction position between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball. The magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb arranged on the rotating body 2372R slows the rolling of the game ball and suppresses the wobbling of the second rolling portion 381c of the game ball, thereby suppressing the game ball from wobbling. can be attracted to the rotor 2372R.

That is, the magnet 2372Rb arranged on the rotating body 2372R extends upstream of the second rolling portion 381c from the attraction position between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball. A magnetic force of a magnet can be applied. As a result, by pulling the game ball rolling on the first ball-throwing surface to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R by the action of the magnet 2372Rb, the ball-throwing speed can be slowed down, and the second rolling part 381c is wobbled and rolled. It is possible to eliminate the wobble of the playing ball. As a result, the game ball can be attracted to the attraction surface between the rotor 2372R and the game ball.

In addition, the second rolling part 381c has a partition wall 2381g arranged to face the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R as the width in the rolling direction of the game ball goes downstream. be. That is, since the second rolling portion 381c is narrowed toward the downstream side, when the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c swings left and right with respect to the throwing direction, the rolling of the game ball Shaking can be suppressed along with

In particular, in the second embodiment, the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb disposed on the rotating body 2372R acts on the upstream side of the second rolling portion 381c from the attraction position between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball. Since the swing motion of the game ball rolling on the first ball-feeding surface can be suppressed together with the magnetic force, the swing of the game ball can be suppressed with a relatively short rolling distance.

In other words, it comprises a partition wall 2381g that is erected from the second rolling portion 381c while facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R and partitions the rolling area of the game ball, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R and the partition wall 2381g. Since the facing distance between the two is set to a smaller dimension toward the downstream side of the second rolling portion 381c, not only the action of the magnet (attraction by magnetic force) at the upstream position but also the guidance by the partition wall 2381g It is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling while rocking on the second rolling portion 381c. As a result, when the rotating body 2372R is rotated and the game ball rolls on the second rolling part 381c at the timing when it can face the attracting position of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball can be easily attracted to the attracting position. .

Furthermore, since the end of the groove portion 2372Rc2 on the upstream side of the second rolling portion 381c is connected to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R, the magnetic force of the portion that slows the rolling of the game ball moves the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R. When the game ball drawn into rolls inside the groove 2372Rc2 of the rotating body 2372R, it is possible to suppress bouncing. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly attracted to the inside of the groove 2372Rc2.

In addition, since the length dimension along the rotation axis direction of the third rolling part 381d is set to be larger than the length dimension along the rotation axis direction of the magnet arranged on the rotor 2872R, Even if the game ball is attracted to a position other than the attraction position of the body 2872R (that is, attracted to the magnet at the upstream position) and the game ball is thrown with the rotation of the rotating body 2872R, such The game ball can be received by the third rolling part 381d.

As shown in FIGS. 95(c) and 96(c), the game ball attracted to the outside of the first rotor 2372Ra flows down the fifth ball-throwing path KR5 and enters the groove 2372Rc2 of the second rotor 2372Rc. When attracted, the game ball can be thrown to the seventh throwing path KR7 by rotating the rotating body 2372R while attracting the game ball to the inside of the groove portion 2372Rc2, as in the first embodiment. .

Here, the magnet 2372Rb arranged inside the rotating body 2372R extends in the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R from the attraction position between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball, and rolls on the third rolling portion 381d. In the case where the throwing direction of the game ball is formed along the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball rolling on the third rolling portion 381d is affected by the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb arranged on the rotating body 2372R. there is a risk of receiving

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, on the radially outer side of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball attracted to the rotating body 2372R is released on the side opposite to the second rolling portion 381c with the rotating body 2372R interposed therebetween. A third rolling portion 381d for rolling and throwing a game ball is formed, and the third rolling portion 381d is inclined downward from the second rolling portion 381c toward the third rolling portion 381d. Therefore, the third rolling portion 381d can prevent the game ball released from being attracted to the rotating body 2372R from being attracted to the rotating body 2372R again.

That is, the throwing direction of the game ball in the third rolling portion 381d is formed in the direction away from the rotor 2372R in the radial direction. As a result, the game ball sent to the third rolling portion 381d is again attracted to the outer circumference of the rotating body 2372R, or the magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb is applied, and the rolling speed of the third rolling portion 381d is slowed. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the third rolling portion 381d is formed to be larger than the axial dimension of the rotating body 2372R and disposed at a position facing the rotating body 2372R, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R other than the suction position When the game ball is attracted to the third rolling portion 381d and is thrown to the third rolling portion 381d, the attraction between the rotating body 2372R and the game ball is released by the third rolling portion 381d, and the game ball is moved to the third rolling portion 381d. You can throw to 381d.

At least part of the portion of the magnet 2372Rb arranged at the upstream position is arranged forward in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 2372R from the portion arranged at the attracting position. The magnetic force of the magnet 2372Rb at the upstream position can be easily applied to the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c. That is, the game ball can be pulled toward the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating body 2372R, and the game ball can be prevented from rolling while rocking on the second rolling portion 381c. As a result, when the rotating body 2372R is rotated and the game ball rolls on the second rolling part 381c at the timing when it can face the attracting position of the rotating body 2372R, the game ball can be easily attracted to the attracting position. .

Further, the bottom surface of the groove portion 2372Rc2 is inclined upward toward the upstream position side and smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R, and at least on the upstream position side, the bottom surface of the groove portion 2372Rc2 is formed so that a game ball can come into contact therewith. Therefore, when the game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating body 2372R by the magnet 2372Rb at the upstream position is fitted into the groove portion 2372Rc2 by the magnet 2372Rb at the attracting position, the game ball is prevented from being fitted into the groove portion 2372Rc2. It can be done smoothly. In other words, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing (bouncing), making it easier to attract the game ball to the attraction position (groove 2372Rc2).

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the first embodiment, the radially inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotor 372R is formed on a plane orthogonal to the radial direction. A description will be given of a case in which the grooves are formed so as to be inclined with respect to a direction perpendicular to the radial direction.

FIG. 97(a) is a side view of the rotating body 3372R in the third embodiment, FIG. 97(b) is a top view of the rotating body 3372, and FIG. FIG. 97(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XCVIIc-XCVIIc, and FIG. 97(b) taken along line XCVIId-XCVIId. 98(a) and 98(b) are sectional views of the variable unit 360. FIG. 98(a) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 69(a), and the cross section of FIG. 98(b) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 69(b).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) to (d), the rotating body 3372R in the third embodiment is connected to the first rotating body 372Ra disposed on the main body 380 side and the first rotating body 372Ra. It mainly includes a second rotating body 3372Rc and a magnet 372Rb disposed inside the second rotating body 3372Rc and exerting a magnetic force on the outside of the second rotating body 3372Rc.

The second rotating body 3372Rc is formed in a columnar shape with an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the first rotating body 372Ra, is arranged coaxially with the first rotating body 372Ra, and is attached to the first rotating body 372Ra. be done.

The second rotating body 372Rc is a ball-throwing member that attracts and throws a game ball on its outer peripheral surface. It is formed mainly with a groove portion 3372Rc2.

The recess 3372Rc1 is recessed in the surface to which the first rotating body 372Ra is attached, and is recessed to a depth substantially equal to the outer diameter of the magnet 372Rb. The recessed portion 3372Rc1 is recessed in a substantially rectangular shape in side view, and one of the two opposed inner surfaces is formed parallel to the recessed distal end surface of the groove portion 3372Rc2, which will be described later.

The groove portion 3372Rc2 is recessed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed in the radial direction of the second rotating body 3372Rc, and has a substantially triangular cross section when viewed in the axial direction of the second rotating body 3372Rc. That is, the groove portion 3372Rc2 is formed by connecting the recessed front end surface of the second rotating body 3372Rc on the rotational direction side to the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 3372Rc.

As described above, the recessed portion 3372Rc1 of the second rotating body 3372Rc is formed to have an inner surface parallel to the recessed distal end surface of the groove portion 3372Rc2. As a result, the magnet 372Rb arranged inside the groove 3372Rc2 is arranged in such a manner that the end of the rotating body 3372R in the rotational direction is partially positioned radially outward (see FIG. 97(c)). .

Next, the rotational displacement of the rotor 3372R will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 98(a) and (b), when the groove portion 3372Rc2 of the rotating body 3372R is positioned adjacent to the sixth ball throwing route KR6, when the game ball is thrown along the sixth ball throwing route KR6, , The game ball is attracted to the groove portion 3372Rc2 by the magnet 372Rb arranged inside the rotating body as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 98(a)).

When the rotating body 3372R is rotationally displaced about the axis of the connecting rod 371 while the game ball is attracted to the rotating body 3372R as shown in FIG. 98(a), the game ball becomes the rotating body as shown in FIG. The ball is thrown while being attracted to the groove 3372Rc2 of the 3372R.

In the third embodiment, as described above, the recessed end surface of the groove portion 3372Rc2 on the side of the rotation direction of the second rotating body 3372Rc is formed by being connected to the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 3372Rc, so that the game ball can be rotated. It can be easily removed in the direction of rotation of the body 3372R.

That is, by not forming a stepped step on the rotational direction side of the groove portion 3372Rc2, the game ball attracted to the groove portion 3372Rc2 can be easily displaced in the rotational direction side. As a result, when the game ball attracted to the groove 3372Rc2 of the rotating body is released from the attraction due to shaking of the game machine main body, the game ball can easily drop to the seventh ball throwing path side of the subsequent ball throwing path. As a result, when the attraction between the rotating body 3372R and the game ball is released, it is possible to suppress the game ball from returning to the sixth ball throwing path, thereby stabilizing the throwing of the game ball from the rotating body 3372R.

Further, in this case, since the rotating bodies 3372Ra and 3372Rc of the rotating body 3372R are formed in a columnar shape, the game ball can be thrown to the seventh ball-throwing path KR7 along the outer peripheral surface thereof. As a result, the attraction between the rotating body 3372R and the game ball is released, and the free fall distance of the game ball can be reduced when dropping the game ball onto the seventh ball-throwing route KR7. can reduce the impact when it falls on the third rolling portion 381d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from jumping up due to collision with the third rolling part 381d, and to stabilize the throwing of the game ball.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the end portion of the magnet 372Rb on the rotational direction side of the rotating body 3372R is disposed in a state partially positioned radially outward, so that the magnet 372Rb acts on the outer side of the rotating body 3372R accordingly. The magnetic force of the magnet can be strengthened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the releasing of the attraction between the rotating body 3372R and the game ball, thereby further stabilizing the throwing of the game ball.

Next, referring to FIGS. 99 to 101, the rotating body 4372R in the fourth embodiment will be explained. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the first embodiment, when the preceding game ball sucked to the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotating body 372R attracts the subsequent game ball thrown later, the preceding game ball is prevented from falling out of the groove portion 372Rc2. In the fourth embodiment, when the preceding game ball attracted to the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotating body 4372R attracts the subsequent game ball thrown later, the preceding game ball and the following game ball are attracted. A case where the game ball falls out of the groove portion 372Rc2 will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 99, the rotating body 4372R in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 99(a) is a side view of the rotating body 4372R in the fourth embodiment, FIG. 99(b) is a top view of the rotating body 4372R, and FIG. FIG. 99(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 4372R along the line XCIXc-XCIXc, and FIG. 99(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 4372R along the line XCIXd-XCIXd in FIG. 99(b).

The rotating body 4372R includes a first rotating body 372Ra disposed on the main body portion 380 side, a second rotating body 4372Rc connected to the first rotating body 372Ra, and disposed inside the second rotating body 4372Rc. and a magnet 372Rb having a magnetic force.

The second rotating body 4372Rc is formed in a columnar shape having substantially the same outer shape as the first rotating body 372Ra, and is arranged coaxially with the first rotating body 372Ra and attached to the first rotating body 372Ra. .

In addition, the second rotating body 4372Rc is a portion that attracts and throws a game ball on its outer peripheral surface, and has a recessed portion 372Rc1 into which a magnet 372Rb, which will be described later, is inserted, and a recessed portion on the outer peripheral surface radially outside of the recessed portion 372Rc1. It mainly includes a groove portion 372Rc2 and a recess portion 4372Rc5 recessed in the outer peripheral surface at a predetermined distance from the groove portion 372Rc2.

The recessed portion 4372Rc5 is formed as a curved surface (spherical surface) whose center is positioned radially outward of the rotating body 4372R, and the radius of the sphere forming the curved surface is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. be.

In the fourth embodiment, the predetermined distance between the groove portion 372Rc2 and the concave portion 4372Rc5 is such that when a game ball following the preceding game is attracted in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R, The following game ball is set to a distance that does not come into contact with the radially outer end surface (outer peripheral surface excluding the recessed portion 4372Rc5) of the rotating body 4372R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102, the case where two game balls stick to the rotor 4372R will be described. 100 to 102 are cross-sectional views of the variable unit 360 and rear base 390. FIG.

100 to 102 correspond to cross sections of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390 in FIG. 69(a). 100 to 102 sequentially illustrate the transition states when the rotating body 4372R is rotated.

As shown in FIG. 100, when two game balls are consecutively thrown to the sixth throwing path KR6 (the following game ball is thrown in a row with the preceding game ball), the preceding game ball is: It is attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the groove portion 372Rc2, and is attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2. In this case, since the preceding game ball is magnetized by the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb, when the following game ball is thrown in tandem with the preceding game ball, the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball. be.

Also, as shown in FIG. 100, the trailing game ball adheres to the leading game ball and before it is lifted from the second rolling portion 381c, the trailing game ball is attached to the second rolling portion Since it is supported by 381c, it is not guided inside recessed portion 4372Rc5 and is positioned outside the outer peripheral surface of rotating body 4372R.

As shown in FIG. 101, when the rotating body 4372R is rotated from the position of FIG. 100, the following game ball is lifted from the second rolling portion 381c. In this case, the following game ball displaces the adsorption position with the outer peripheral surface of the preceding game ball by its own weight.

Therefore, when the trailing game ball is lifted from the second rolling part 381c, it is displaced inside the recessed part 4372Rc5, so that the weight of the trailing game ball can be easily applied to the leading game ball. . As a result, as shown in FIG. 102, the attraction between the preceding game ball and the inside of the groove portion 372Rc2 can be easily released.

In addition, as described above, the trailing game ball is displaced inside the concave portion 4372Rc5 when lifted from the second rolling portion 381c. In this case, the load of the following game ball can be applied to the preceding game ball according to the displacement when lifted. As a result, as shown in FIG. 102, the suction between the preceding game ball and the inner side of the groove portion 372Rc2 can be easily released.

When the rotating body 4370 is further rotated from the position shown in FIG. 101 in a state where the attraction between the preceding game ball and the inner side of the groove portion 372Rc2 is released, the preceding game ball and the following game ball are rotated by the second rotation. It is dropped onto the moving part 381c. In addition, the preceding and following game balls dropped from the rotating body 5372R fall on the upper surface of the second rolling portion 381c and roll on the second rolling portion 381c. Therefore, the preceding and following game balls dropped from the rotating body 5372R roll on the second rolling portion 381c, are guided into the recovery hole 373Ra formed in the inner cover 373R, and are recovered.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when two balls are attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R, both of the two balls can be dropped from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R. That is, if a game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R and thrown to the seventh ball path KR7, it is advantageous to the player, but if two balls are attracted and thrown, it is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the game ball rolling on the sixth throwing path KR6 by making a difference in the result depending on whether only one ball is attracted or the second ball is attracted. can be done.

Here, it comprises a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with the rotating shaft oriented in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A gaming machine is known in which a game ball is rotated in a state in which a game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface, so that the game ball is thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotary member (in this case, toward the rotary member). When two game balls roll in a row, the preceding game ball (first game ball) is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the preceding game ball (first game ball) is attracted. When the following game ball (second game ball) is sucked, both the preceding game ball and the following game ball are thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotating member. , there is a problem that it is not possible to provide the player with sufficient interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the fourth embodiment, when the game ball preceding the magnet 372Rb of the rotor 4372R is attracted and the game ball following the preceding game ball is magnetically attached, the magnet 372Rb of the rotor 4372R Since the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball are provided with a releasing means for easily releasing the attraction thereof, it is possible to suppress both the preceding game ball and the following game ball from being thrown in the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R.

That is, when only the preceding game ball rolls toward the rotating body 4372R and is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet 372Rb) of the rotating body 4372R, the preceding game ball is thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating body 4372R. On the other hand, in addition to the preceding game ball, the following game ball also rolls toward the rotating body 4372R, and the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet 372Rb) of the rotating body 4372R and the preceding game ball. When the trailing game ball is attracted to the second roller, it is possible to prevent both the leading game ball and the trailing game ball from being thrown in the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R. When the moving part 381c (sixth ball throwing path KR6) rolls toward the rotating body 4372R, no other game ball (that is, the following game ball) rolls behind the preceding game ball. It is possible to cause the player to worry (be thrilled) about whether or not. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, a V winning member 382 into which a game ball that is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R and thrown in the rotational direction of the rotating body 4372R enters, and a V winning member 382 that is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R. A recovery hole 373Ra into which the missing game ball enters, and at least when the game ball enters the V winning member 382, a profit is given to the player, or when the ball enters the V winning member 382, the player Since the profit given is higher than the profit given to the player by the ball entering the recovery hole 373Ra, the interest in the game can be improved from this point as well.

That is, the player expects to obtain a profit by entering the V winning member 382, or to obtain a higher profit than in the case of entering the recovery hole 373Ra, so that the game ball is placed on the outer circumference of the rotating body 4372R. A greater number of game balls are placed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R in the hope that they will stick to the surface and be thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 4372R, and in the expectation that there will be more chances of receiving benefits. It is hoped that the ball will be attracted and thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotor 4372R. On the other hand, when only the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R, while the preceding game ball can be thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating body 4372R (V winning member 382), the rotating body When the game ball following the preceding game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of 4372R is attracted, not only the following game ball but also the preceding game ball are thrown in the rotation direction of the rotating body 4372R. Therefore, the opportunity for the ball to enter the V winning member 382 from both sides is lost. Therefore, when the preceding game ball rolls toward the rotating body 4372R, the player checks whether or not another game ball (that is, the following game ball) rolls behind the preceding game ball. It is possible to easily make people worry (easily make them excited), and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, as a mode in which a player is provided with a high profit, there are a mode in which a large number of prize balls are paid out as a result of entering a ball, and a third ball entrance (recess 311a and upper The opening time of the wing portion 312 that allows and restricts the entry of a ball into the space facing the front cover 313 is lengthened, the opening number of the wing portion 312 is increased, and the opening range of the wing portion 312 is increased. and the like are exemplified.

In addition, since the release means is formed as a concave portion 4372Rc5 which is recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R and receives the following game ball attracted to the preceding game ball, The trailing game ball can be brought closer to the side, and accordingly, the gravitational direction component of the weight of the trailing game ball acting on the leading game ball can be easily increased. Therefore, the attraction between the preceding game ball and the magnet 372Rb can be easily released.

That is, when the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball, the weight of the following game ball is used to release the attraction between the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball, When the game ball following the preceding game ball is not attracted, the attraction between the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball can be prevented from being released. In addition, since such switching can be achieved only by means utilizing the weight of the following game ball, that is, the recessed portion 4372Rc5 recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 4372R, a displacement member for switching can be achieved. It is possible to eliminate the need to provide a drive source and a drive source, thereby reducing the product cost.

Next, referring to FIGS. 103 to 106, the rotating body 5372R in the fifth embodiment will be explained. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the first embodiment, when the preceding game ball sucked to the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotating body 372R attracts the subsequent game ball thrown later, the preceding game ball is prevented from falling out of the groove portion 372Rc2. In the fifth embodiment, when the preceding game ball attracted to the groove portion 5372Rc2 of the rotating body 5372R is attracted to the subsequent game ball thrown later, the preceding game ball and the following game ball are attracted. A case where the game ball falls out of the groove portion 5372Rc2 will be described.

In the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the right rotating ball portion 370R and the left rotating ball portion 370L are provided with driving means and transmission means for transmitting the drive to the right rotating ball portion 370R. Other shapes are formed line-symmetrically about the center of the variable unit 360 in the left-right direction, so detailed description of the rotating body 5372L of the left rotating ball portion 370L will be omitted.

103 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 5372R in the fifth embodiment, FIG. 104(a) is a side view of the rotating body 5372R, and FIG. 104(b) is a top view of the rotating body 5372R. 104(c) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 5372R taken along line CIVc-CIVc in FIG. 104(b), and FIG. 104(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 5372R taken along line CIVd-CIVd in FIG. is a cross-sectional view of.

As shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the rotating body 5372R in the fifth embodiment includes a first rotating body 372Ra disposed on the main body 380 side and a second rotating body 372Ra connected to the first rotating body 372Ra. 5372Rc, a magnet 372Rb having magnetic force disposed inside the second rotating body 5372Rc, and a releasing member 5372Rd disposed along the outer edge of the second rotating body 5372Rc.

The second rotating body 5372Rc is formed in a columnar shape with an outer diameter substantially the same as that of the first rotating body 372Ra, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the first rotating body 372Ra. 372Ra.

Further, the second rotating body 5372Rc includes a groove portion 5372Rc2 that is recessed radially inward on the outer peripheral surface, and a recess that is formed radially inward of the groove portion 5372Rc2 and is recessed on the side surface of the rotating body 5372Rc. 372Rc1, and a recessed portion 5372Rc3 formed by notching between the opposed recessed portion 372Rc1 and the recessed portion 5372Rc2 and adjacent to the recessed portion 5372Rc2.

The groove portion 5372Rc2 is formed in a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed in the radial direction of the rotating body 372R, and its outer shape is set larger than the outer shape of the magnet 372Rb. The groove portion 5372Rc2 has a flat surface positioned radially inward of the rotating body 372R, and is partially notched by the concave portion 5372Rc3 as described above.

The concave portion 5372Rc3 is a space for accommodating a release member 5372Rd, which will be described later, inside a notch formed in the rotating body 5372R, and the shape of the recess is formed substantially the same as the outer shape of the release member 5372Rd.

The releasing member 5372Rd has an outer shape that is substantially C-shaped when viewed in the radial direction of the rotating body 5372R. The releasing member 5372Rd is positioned between the releasing portion 5372Rd1 arranged inside the groove portion 5372Rc2, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 placed along the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R, and the releasing portion 5372Rd1 and the pressing portion 5372Rd2 and rotates. A through hole 5372Rd3 is formed through the body 5372R in the axial direction.

The release portion 5372Rd1 is arranged inside a recessed portion 5372Rc3 cut inside the groove portion 5372Rc2, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R is arranged flush with the flat surface of the groove portion 5372Rc2. As a result, the game ball thrown inside the groove 5372Rc2 can be attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb arranged inside the recess 372Rc1.

The pressing portion 5372Rd2 is formed to protrude radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R, and the protruding tip surface thereof is formed in a curved shape that protrudes outward. In addition, the radius of the curved surface of the projecting tip end surface of the pressing portion 5372 is set to a dimension smaller than the radius of the rotating body 5372R. Therefore, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 can be easily protruded radially outward of the rotating body 5372R.

When the release member 5372Rd is not displaced (the pressing portion 5372Rd2 is not displaced inward in the radial direction with respect to the rotating body 5372R), the pressing portion 5372Rd2 rotates at both ends of the rotating body 5327R in the circumferential direction. It is set at a position contiguous with the outer peripheral surface of the body 5372R. That is, it is possible to eliminate a step in the radial direction between the concave portion 5372Rc3 of the rotating body 5372R and the pressing portion 5372Rd2. As a result, when the game ball rolls on the second rolling portion 381c, the game ball rides on the step between the concave portion 5372Rc3 of the rotating body 5372R and the pressing portion 5372Rd2, and the rotating body 5372R rotates to cause the third rolling. It is possible to suppress the ball from being thrown to the portion 381d.

The through hole 5372Rd3 is a through hole into which the shaft rod JB1 is inserted. The shaft JB is a shaft that rotatably holds the release member 5372Rd. is inserted and the other side is clamped by the side surface of the first rotating body 372Ra. As a result, the shaft rod JB1 can be prevented from falling off from the assembled rotor 5372R, and can rotatably support the release member 5372Rd.

Next, referring to FIGS. 105 and 106, the operation of the release member 5372Rd of the rotating body 5372R will be described. 105 and 106 are sectional views of the variable unit 360 and the rear base 390. FIG.

105 and 106 correspond to cross sections of the variable unit 360 and rear base 390 in FIG. Also, FIG. 106 illustrates a state in which the rotor 5372R is slightly rotated from the position shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 105, when two game balls are successively thrown on the sixth ball path KR6, when the preceding game ball is attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 5372Rc2, the preceding game ball is attracted to the magnet 372Rb. A following game ball is magnetized by magnetic force and attracted to its outer peripheral surface.

When the rotating body 5372R is rotated while the following game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the preceding game ball, the preceding game ball is lifted upward while being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R. be done. At this time, the following game ball displaces the attraction position with the preceding game ball, and is displaced to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating body 5372R.

Here, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 of the release member 5372Rd disposed on the rotating body 5372R is the following game ball when the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball and lifted from the second rolling portion 381c. It is formed in a shape in which the projecting tip abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the.

Then, as shown in FIG. 106, when the rotating body 5372R is rotated from the position of FIG. 105 and the following game ball is separated from the second rolling portion 381c (lifted), the following game ball's own weight As a result, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 of the release member 5372Rd is pressed radially inward of the rotating body 5372R.

Due to this displacement of the pressing portion 5372Rd2, the releasing member 5372Rd is rotationally displaced around the through hole 5372Rd3. Therefore, the release portion 5372Rd1 formed on the side opposite to the pressing portion 5372Rd2 across the through hole 5372Rd3 is displaced radially outward of the rotating body 5372R.

As a result, the preceding game ball attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 5372Rc2 is pushed out from the inside of the groove portion 5372Rc2 along with the displacement of the releasing portion 5372Rd1. Therefore, the preceding game ball is displaced to a position spaced radially outward from the rotating body 5372R, and accordingly is spaced apart from the magnet 372Rb arranged inside the rotating body 5372R. As a result, the magnetic force that attracts the preceding game ball to the inner surface of the groove portion 5372Rc2 is weakened, and the preceding game ball falls off from the outer peripheral surface (groove portion 5372Rc2) of the rotating body 5372R.

In this case, as described above, the pressing portion 5372Rd2 of the releasing member 5372Rd disposed on the rotating body 5372R is when the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball and lifted from the second rolling portion 381c. Since it is formed in a shape in which the projecting tip contacts the outer peripheral surface of the trailing game ball, when the trailing game ball is lifted, the trailing game ball is displaced radially inward with respect to the rotating body 5372R. can maximize the force due to its own weight.

As a result, when the trailing game ball is attracted to the leading game ball and is lifted from the second rolling portion 381c, the release member 5372Rd can be easily displaced, and the leading game ball ) can be easily removed.

In addition, the preceding and following game balls dropped from the rotating body 5372R fall on the upper surface of the second rolling portion 381c and roll on the second rolling portion 381c. Therefore, the preceding and following game balls dropped from the rotating body 5372R roll on the second rolling portion 381c, are guided into the recovery hole 373Ra formed in the inner cover 373R, and are recovered.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when two balls are attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R, they can be dropped from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R. That is, when the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R and thrown to the seventh ball throwing path KR7, it is advantageous to the player, but when two balls are attracted, the situation is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to cause a difference in the result depending on whether only one ball is attracted or two balls are attracted, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the game ball rolling on the sixth ball throwing path KR6.

Here, it comprises a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with the rotating shaft oriented in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A game machine is known in which a game ball is rotated in a state in which the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface, and the game ball is thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotary member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-231890). Gazette). In this case, when two game balls roll continuously toward the rotating member, the preceding game ball (first game ball) is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the preceding game ball When the game ball (second game ball) following (the first game ball) is attracted, both the preceding game ball and the following game ball are thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating member. However, such a gaming machine has a problem that it is not possible to provide the player with a sufficient interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the fifth embodiment, when the game ball preceding the magnet 372Rb of the rotor 5372R is attracted and the game ball following the preceding game ball is magnetically attracted, the magnet 372Rb of the rotor 5372R Since the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball are provided with a release means for easily releasing the attraction thereof, it is possible to suppress both the preceding game ball and the following game ball from being thrown in the rotation direction of the rotating body 5372R.

That is, when only the preceding game ball rolls toward the rotating body 5372R and is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet 372Rb) of the rotating body 5372R, the preceding game ball is thrown in the rotation direction of the rotating body 5372R. On the other hand, in addition to the preceding game ball, the following game ball also rolls toward the rotating body 5372R, and the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet 372Rb) of the rotating body 5372R, and the preceding game ball When the trailing game ball is attracted to the rotator 5372R, both the leading game ball and the trailing game ball can be prevented from being thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 5372R. When rolling toward, the player can be worried (throbbed) whether another game ball (that is, a following game ball) is rolling behind the preceding game ball. . As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, a V winning member 382 into which a game ball that is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R and thrown in the rotational direction of the rotating body 5372R enters, and the V winning member 382 that is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R. A recovery hole 373Ra into which the missing game ball enters, and at least when the game ball enters the V winning member 382, a profit is given to the player, or when the ball enters the V winning member 382, the player Since the profit given is higher than the profit given to the player by the ball entering the recovery hole 373Ra, the interest in the game can be improved from this point as well.

That is, the player expects to obtain a profit from the ball entering the V winning member 382, or to obtain a higher profit than the ball entering the recovery hole 373Ra, so that the game ball can reach the outer circumference of the rotating body 5372R. A greater number of game balls are placed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotor 5372R in the hope that the ball will stick to the surface and be thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotor 5372R, and in the expectation that there will be more chances of receiving benefits. It is hoped that the ball will be attracted and thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotor 5372R. On the other hand, when only the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 5372R, while the preceding game ball can be thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating body 5372R (V winning member 382), the rotating body When the game ball following the preceding game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of 5372R is attracted, not only the following game ball but also the preceding game ball are thrown in the rotation direction of the rotating body 5372R. Therefore, the opportunity for the ball to enter the V winning member 382 from both sides is lost. Therefore, when the preceding game ball rolls toward the rotating body 5372R, the player checks whether another game ball (that is, the following game ball) rolls behind the preceding game ball. It is possible to easily make people worry (easily make them excited), and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Note that the mode in which the profit given to the player is high is the same as in the fourth embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The release means includes a release member 5372Rd displaceably disposed on the rotating body 5372R, and the release member 5372Rd is displaced by coming into contact with the following game ball attracted to the preceding game ball. The displacement enlarges the distance between the preceding game ball and the magnet 372Rb, so when the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball, the weight of the following game ball is used. Then, while releasing the attraction between the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball, if the following game ball is not attracted to the preceding game ball, the attraction between the magnet 372Rb and the preceding game ball is not released. can be made In addition, since such switching is performed using the weight of the following game ball, it is not necessary to provide a drive source for displacing the releasing member 5372Rd, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. be able to.

That is, according to the fifth embodiment, there is no need to dispose an urging member (for example, a torsion spring or the like) for switching the release member 5372Rd. For example, even when the release portion 5372Rd1 of the release member 5372Rd projects radially outward from the groove portion 5372Rc2, the game ball (preceding game ball) is pressed inside the groove portion 5372Rc2 by an adsorption operation, The release portion 5372Rd1 can be displaced radially inward of the rotating body 5372R. As a result, the protruding tip of the pressing portion 5372Rd2 can be displaced to protrude outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 5372R. Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to provide a driving source for displacing the release member 5372Rd, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108, a winning opening unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, game balls that are thrown into the second through holes 631b and 633b formed on the left and right sides of the base plate 630 are directly inside the path member 640 that is arranged on the back surface of the base plate 630. In the sixth embodiment, the game balls to be thrown into the second through holes 631b and 633b formed on the left and right sides of the base plate 630 are arranged on the back surface of the base plate 630. A case will be described in which the game ball passes through the sensor device SE1 for detecting the passage of the game ball before being thrown inside the path member 640. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 107(a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 107(b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 6600. FIG. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 6600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, a sensor device SE1 is interposed between the base plate 630 and the path member 640 in the prize winning port unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment. Moreover, the sensor device SE1 is arranged at a position on the back side of the second through holes 631b and 633b.

The sensor device SE1 is formed with an opening SE1a penetrating therethrough that is larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and is interposed between the base plate 630 and the path member 640 with the opening SE1a opened in the front-rear direction. The sensor device SE1 can detect the passage of the game ball by allowing the game ball to pass through the inside of the opening SE1a.

It should be noted that the game balls flowing down the inside of the winning hole unit 6600 are only opposite to each other on the left and right sides. A description of the game ball flowing down is omitted.

Next, a description will be given of when a game ball flows down inside the winning hole unit 6600. FIG. When the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 flows down in the vicinity of the left winning hole 26 and flows down between the left concave portion 631 and the left cover member 611, it is guided to the bottom surface of the left concave portion 631 and the second The ball is thrown inside the through hole 631b.

In this case, since the sensor device SE1 is arranged on the back side of the second through-hole 631b as described above, the game ball flowing down between the left concave portion 631 and the left cover member 611 is detected by the sensor device SE1. After being detected, the ball is thrown inside the path member 640 . That is, in the sixth embodiment, a game ball thrown inside the path member 640 can be detected.

Therefore, by controlling the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 to protrude to the front side after a predetermined time has passed after the sensor device SE1 detects the game ball, the game ball passing through the path member 640 can be changed. The ball can be easily thrown to the upper part of the board 652 . As a result, the game ball passing through the path member 640 can be easily thrown to the through hole 632a.

For example, by setting the predetermined time described above to be substantially the same as the time for the game ball to roll on the first path 641 of the path member 640 from one end to the other end, the game ball can It can be easily thrown to the top of 652. As a result, the game ball flowing down without winning the left winning port 26 can be easily given the possibility of winning again through the through hole 632a. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the downstream side of the game ball, and the time for which the player is made to pay attention to the game ball can be lengthened.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the sensor device SE1 for detecting the game ball flowing down the path member 640 and the drive means for driving the variable plate 652 are provided, and when the game ball is detected by the detection member, Since the variable plate 652 is driven by the driving means to project toward the front side of the game board, the game ball can easily enter the through hole 632a. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the left start prize winning port 26 and the right start prize winning port 27, the player is made to pay attention to the downflow of the game ball, and the player continues to expect the ball to enter the through hole 632a. can be held. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The detection of the game ball by the sensor device SE1 and the driving by the driving means (projection of the variable plate 652) may be performed at the same time. Also good. However, in the latter case, it is preferable that the drive (projection operation of the variable plate 652) is completed before the game ball reaches the projecting position of the variable plate 652. This is because the function of the variable plate 652 that guides the game ball to the through-hole 632a (makes it easier to enter) can be exhibited reliably.

Further, for example, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 may be set to protrude to the front side according to the number of game balls passing through the sensor device SE1. In this case, the player can be given the possibility of winning a prize through the through-hole 632a when a predetermined number of game balls that do not enter the left winning port 26 and flow down in the vicinity continue. Therefore, the value of hitting the game ball into the game area of the game board 13 aiming at the left winning hole 26 can be increased. Therefore, since the player can be made to hit the game ball to the game area of the game board 13 aiming at a predetermined place, it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the path along which the game ball flows. As a result, the player can search for a more advantageous launching position of the game ball to the game area of the game board 13, and the player can be easily aroused.

For example, the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is set to protrude to the front side when five game balls pass through the sensor device SE1. In this case, it is possible to give the player the possibility that at least one ball will win the through hole 632a when five consecutive game balls do not enter the left winning hole 26 and flow down nearby.

In this case, when three game balls (the number of balls is less than the predetermined number) pass through the sensor device SE1, and the fourth game ball enters the left winning hole 26, The tally of the number of balls that have passed sensor device SE1 may be reset. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from winning continuously in the winning opening 26 and the through hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the continuous opening of the feather portion 312 that opens when the game ball enters the winning opening 26 and the through hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to disperse the opening timings of the wings 312 that are advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111, a winning opening unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is positioned backward, the possibility of the game ball winning the through hole 632a is reduced. In the form, even when the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is positioned backward, the through hole 632a is formed to facilitate winning when two game balls are connected. The state in which the variable plate 652 is positioned backward is a state in which the variable plate 652 is retracted to the rear side of the game board 13 .

First, with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110, the winning opening unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a front view of the winning opening unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 7600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, a prize winning port unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment includes a decorative plate 7610 having a plurality of prize winning ports 26, 27 and 28, and a A base plate 630 that forms a flow-down path for game balls in the base plate 630, a path member 640 that forms a ball-throwing path for game balls between the base plate 630, and a decorative plate 7610 and the base plate 630 It is mainly formed with a variable winning device 650 that guides the game ball flowing down between the opposing to the through hole 632a.

The decorative plate 7610 is formed from a left cover member 611 having a left start winning opening 26, a right cover member 612 having a right starting winning opening 27, and a central cover member 7613 having a middle starting winning opening 28.

The center cover member 7613 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged in the center of the left cover member 611 and the right cover member 612 . A through hole 7613e is formed in the central cover member 7613 so as to penetrate from the front side to the back side.

The through hole 7613e is formed in front of each of the two connecting holes 632b formed in the base plate 630 arranged to face the central cover member 7613. As shown in FIG. The connecting hole 632b is formed such that the width dimension of the opening in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 109) in front view is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball can pass through the inside.

The through-hole 7613e is formed so that its center position is shifted outward in the left-right direction with respect to the base plate 630 from the center position in the left-right direction of the connecting hole 632b. It is formed at a position overlapping in the front-rear direction with the central position in the left-right direction of the connecting hole 632b.

Further, the through-hole 7613e is recessed in a convex curved shape (spherical shape) from the back side to the front side (that is, the depth of the recess is increased in the direction away from the through-hole 632a). , the inner diameter of the hole on the front side is set smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the through hole 7613e is formed to have a size that does not allow the game ball to pass through.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, game balls flowing down the winning hole unit 7600 will be described. 111(a) to 111(c) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 7600 taken along line CXI-CXI in FIG. 109. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), two game balls are continuously thrown inside the path member 640, and the preceding game ball is thrown from the inside of the connecting hole 632b toward the central cover member 7613 side. In this case, as described above, the through hole 7613e is formed such that its center position is shifted outward in the left-right direction with respect to the base plate 630 from the center position in the left-right direction of the connecting hole 632b. A part of the inner edge portion is formed at a position that overlaps the center position of the connecting hole 632b in the left-right direction in the front-rear direction, so the preceding game ball is thrown to a position slightly shifted left and right from the center of the through hole 7613e.

As a result, the preceding game ball is guided to the inner edge of the through hole 7613e as shown in FIG. is displaced. Also, at this time, the through hole 7613e is recessed in a convex curved shape from the back side of the central cover member 7613 toward the front side (that is, as a recessed portion that is open on the side of the connecting hole 632b). A game ball can be easily fixed to its inner edge.

Next, when the game ball that follows the preceding game ball is thrown from the inside of the connecting hole 632b toward the central cover member 7613, the preceding game ball passes through the through hole 7613e formed in the central cover member 7613. Guided by the inner edge portion, it is possible to cause the following game ball to collide with the central side spherical surface of the preceding game ball with respect to the base plate 630 by the amount displaced laterally outward with respect to the base plate 630 .

Therefore, the following game ball can collide with the curved surface (spherical surface) of the preceding game ball on the center side in the left-right direction of the base plate 630. can be directed to the center side in the left-right direction (the side of the through hole 632a). As a result, as shown in FIG. 111, the following game ball can be thrown to the left-right center side (through hole 632a side) of the base plate 630 to win the through hole 632a.

In addition, the preceding game ball drops from the inside of the through-hole 7613 e by its own weight, and is recovered from the out port 71 formed in the game board 13 by flowing down.

Thus, in the seventh embodiment, when there are two or more game balls flowing down in the vicinity without winning the left and right starting prize openings 26, 27, they are passed through the inside of the path member 640 continuously. This makes it easier for the following game ball to enter the through hole 632a.

That is, a game machine having a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance is known. In this case, game balls that have not entered the first ball entry hole are not entered into the second ball entry hole, but are only collected from the out hole. Therefore, when the game ball hit aiming at the first ball entrance does not enter the first ball entrance, the player expects the subsequent destination of the game ball (the game ball flowing down). can't have Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot be sufficiently entertained.

On the other hand, according to the seventh embodiment, the path member 640 forms a path for the game balls that do not enter the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27 and flow down, and two game balls pass through the path member 640. In this case, change means (through hole 7613e) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the through hole 632a than when one game ball, which is less than two balls, passes through the path member 640. Since it is provided, even when the game ball does not enter the left and right start winning holes 26, 27, the player is made to pay attention to the downflow of the game ball, and the player continues to expect that the ball will enter the through hole 632a. can let In particular, the number of game balls passing through the path member 640 changes the ease of entering the through hole 632a (there are two or more game balls that do not enter the start winning openings 26 and 27 and flow down in the vicinity thereof. If there is, it is possible to produce an advantageous situation for the player), so the player can also be made to pay attention to the number of game balls that have failed to enter the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The path member 640 may be, for example, one formed as a closed passage through which the game ball can pass, one formed of one or more nails that define the flowing direction of the game ball, or one that allows the game ball to roll. An example is one formed as an inclined surface (an open passage).

In addition, the changing means includes a restricting means for restricting the preceding game ball that passes through the path member 640 or flows out from the path member 640, and the restricting means is such that the game ball following the preceding game ball In the case of continuous (continuous), the following game ball is made to contact (collide) with the preceding game ball whose flow is restricted, and the following game ball is formed so that the flowing direction is directed toward the through hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. That is, when the leading game ball and the trailing game ball flow down, it is easier for the ball to enter the through hole 632a than when only the leading game ball flows down. The ease of entering the through-hole 632a can be changed depending on the number), so the player can be made to pay attention to the number of game balls that have leaked into the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27 as well. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, since the restricting means is formed as a through-hole 7613e recessed in the wall surface facing the exit of the path member 640, the preceding game ball flowing out from the exit of the path member 640 is received in the through-hole 7613e, and the preceding game ball is received. While it is possible to temporarily restrict the flow of the game ball to be played (that is, the preceding game ball can be temporarily held so that the following game ball can collide), the flow of the preceding game ball can be restricted Release can be performed by dropping (flowing down) the preceding game ball from the through-hole 7613e by its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to restrict (hold) and release the restriction of the preceding game ball only by the shape of the restricting means, and it is possible to eliminate the need for an operation mechanism for switching between them (releasing the restriction). It is possible to simplify and reduce the product cost.

In addition, a member that guides the game ball that has flowed out from the outlet of the path member 640 to the through hole 632a (for example, has a rolling surface that is inclined downward toward the through hole 632a, and rolls the game ball on that rolling surface) By doing so, there is no variable plate 652 that makes it easier to enter the game ball into the through hole 632a (the variable plate 652 is formed to be displaceable between a position where it can be guided to the through hole 632a and a position where it cannot be guided. , Displaced to a position that cannot be guided), the following game ball can be entered into the through hole 632a using the through hole 7613e.

Furthermore, the connecting hole 632b has a bottom surface on which the game ball rolls, and side wall surfaces that stand upright on both sides in the width direction of the bottom surface, and the interval between the side wall surfaces facing each other is approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball. Since the dimensions are set, the trajectory of the game ball flowing out from the exit of the path member 640 can be easily made substantially constant, and the game ball can be reliably received by the regulation means (through hole 7613e).

In addition, since the through hole 7613e is deepened in the direction away from the through hole 632a, the game ball received in the through hole 7613e is deepened in the direction of deepening the recess (that is, through the hole). It can be held by being displaced to the side away from the hole 632a). Therefore, when the following game ball abuts (collides) with the preceding game ball held in the through-hole 7613e, the following game ball can be made to easily enter the through-hole 632a.

Furthermore, a variable plate 652 is provided at a position between the exit of the path member 640 and the through hole 7613e and downward in the direction of gravity by protruding so as to be retractable. In this state, the game ball can be guided to the through-hole 632a, so the preceding game ball held in the through-hole 7613e can enter the through-hole 632a using the protruding variable plate 652. can be balled. That is, when the preceding game ball is dropped (dropped) from the through hole 7613e, the preceding game ball can be received by the variable plate 652 and guided to the through hole 632a by the variable plate 652. As a result, the preceding game ball can enter the through hole 632a.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 116, a winning opening unit 8600 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, the variable board 652 of the variable winning device 650 is located at the rear, and the possibility of the game ball winning the through hole 632a is reduced. Even in a state where the variable plate 652 of the winning device 650 is positioned at the rear side, when two game balls are consecutively thrown through the path member 8640, the through hole 632a is easily made to win.

FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 8600 in the eighth embodiment. 113(a) is a front view of the path member 8640, and FIG. 113(b) is a cross-sectional view of the path member 8640 along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113(a).

Note that FIG. 113 omits illustration of the accommodation portion 8643 formed in the path member 8640 . In FIG. 113, the connecting hole 632b and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 630 arranged on the front side of the path member 8640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.

As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, a prize winning port unit 8600 in the eighth embodiment includes a decorative plate 610 having a plurality of prize winning ports 26, 27 and 28, and a A base plate 630 that forms a flow-down path for game balls, a path member 8640 that forms a ball-throwing path for game balls between the base plate 630, and a decorative plate 610 and a base plate 630. A variable prize winning device 650 for guiding the game ball flowing down between the two to either of the prize winning openings 26, 27, 28 is mainly formed.

A base plate 8630 in the eighth embodiment is formed with a second connecting hole 8632e penetrating in the front-rear direction at an intermediate position between the two connecting holes 632b. The size of the opening of the second connecting hole 8632e is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can pass through the inside.

The path member 8640 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box shape with an open base plate 8630 side. The path member 8640 is a member for forming a path that connects the left and right second through holes 631b and 633b formed in the base plate 8630 and the connecting hole 632b or the second connecting hole 8632e, and is formed on the left side in front view. A first path 8641 that connects the second through hole 631b and the connecting hole 632b or the second connecting hole 8632e on the left side in the front view of the base plate 630, and the second through hole 633b and the base plate 630 formed on the right side in the front view. and a second path 8642 that connects the connecting hole 632b or the second connecting hole 8632e on the right side in front view.

In addition, the path member 8640 has a connecting hole 632 b or a second A path switching member 8644 is provided for switching to the connecting hole 8632e.

The path switching member 8644 is housed inside a box-shaped housing portion 8643 continuously formed on the lower surface side of the path member 8640 (see FIG. 112). In addition, the housing portion 8643 is formed in a shape in which the front side (the side of the base plate 8630) is open. Thus, by forming the decorative plate 610 and the base plate 8630 from a transparent material, the switching of the route of the route switching member 8644 can be visually recognized by the player. As a result, the rolling of the game ball can be easily drawn to the player's attention, and the player can be easily aroused.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, detailed description of the path switching member 8644 will be given. Since the respective path switching members 8644 formed on the first path 8641 and the second path 8642 are formed symmetrically, only the left path switching member 8644 will be described, and the right path switching member 8644 will be described. A description of the member 8644 is omitted.

The path switching member 8644 has a variable plate 8644a arranged on the same plane as the bottom surface of the first path 8641 (the surface on which the game ball rolls), one end arranged below the variable plate 8644a, and a central portion It mainly includes a transmission member 8644b that is rotatably pivotally supported by the housing portion 8643, and a regulating member 8644c that is arranged above the other end of the transmission member 8644b and whose central portion is pivotally supported by the housing portion 8643. formed by

The variable plate 8644a is formed of a plate member that is rectangular in top view and has a constant thickness. The top surface of the variable plate 8644a forms part of the bottom surface of the first path 8641 (it is arranged on the same plane as the bottom surface of the path member 8640). That is, like the bottom surface of the path member 8640, the variable plate 8644a is arranged in a posture inclined downward from the lateral direction outer side of the path member 8640 toward the lateral direction central side. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the first path 8641 can flow downward.

The variable plate 8644a is mainly formed with a through hole 8644a2 penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end and a contact plate 8644a1 projecting in an arc shape from the lower surface at the other end.

A cylindrical rod member (not shown) is inserted through the through hole 8644a2. Therefore, by attaching the rod member to the housing portion 8643, the variable plate 8644a can be rotatably supported by the path member 8640. As shown in FIG. A biasing spring (not shown) is provided between the variable plate 8644a and the housing portion 8643, and the top surface of the variable plate 8644a is flush with the bottom surface of the path member 8640 in a normal state. placed in position.

The transmission member 8644b is formed in a prism shape, and one end thereof is arranged in contact with the contact plate 8644a1 of the variable plate 8644a, and the other end thereof is arranged in contact with the bottom surface of the other end of the regulating member 8644c, which will be described later. be.

Further, the transmission member 8644b is arranged in the accommodating portion 8643 so as to be rotatable about the center position, and can be displaced by displacing the variable plate 8644a.

The regulating member 8644c is formed in the shape of a prism extending to one side, and is formed with a first protrusion 8644c1 and a second protrusion 8644c2 that protrude upward from the upper surfaces of the one end side and the other end side, respectively. . In addition, the restricting member 8644c is arranged in the accommodating portion 8643 so as to be rotatable at its intermediate position. Accordingly, the restricting member 8644c can displace the positions of the first projection 8644c1 and the second projection 8644c2 by being displaced.

The first protrusion 8644c1 is disposed so as to be able to pass through a through hole formed through the first path 8641 of the path member 8640 in the gravitational direction. In the normal state (before the variable plate 8644a is displaced (flush with the first path 8641)), the tip of the first protrusion 8644c1 is positioned above the first path 8641 by a biasing spring (not shown). be done.

Furthermore, the protruding position of the first projection 8641c1 is a position overlapping in the front-rear direction with the side surface of the connecting hole 632b on the downstream side of the first path 8641 (the central portion of the path member 860). It is assumed to be the central position. As a result, the game ball rolling on the first path 8641 can be brought into contact with the first projection 8641c1, inserted through the connecting hole 632b, and thrown forward of the base plate 8630.

In addition, the distance dimension between the tip end surface of the first projection 8644c1 and the inner peripheral surface of the path member 8640 facing is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the game ball flowing down the first path 8641 is the first It is prevented to climb over the 1 projection 8644c1.

The second projection 8644 c 2 is disposed so as to be able to pass through the inner peripheral surface of the notch formed in the first path 8641 of the path member 8640 . In addition, the second projection 8644c2 is arranged so that its tip is flush with the first path 8641 in the normal state (the state before the variable plate 8644a is displaced (flat with the first path 8641)). Therefore, in a normal state, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the first path 8641 from being hindered by the second projection 8644c2.

On the other hand, when the regulating member 8644c is displaced and the second projection 8644c2 is arranged above the first path 8641, the tip surface of the second projection 8644c2 is arranged flush with the first path 8641.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the first path 8641 can flow downward without being restricted by the second protrusion 8644c2, passes through the second connecting hole 8632e, and is thrown to the front of the base plate 8630.

In this case, the protruding position of the second protrusion 8644c2 is set on the back side of the connecting hole 632b, and the front-rear direction position is set on the end on the connecting hole 632b side. As a result, the distance between one end of the connecting hole and the second projection 8644c2 facing each other is made smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the game ball rolling on the first path 8641 is inserted through the connecting hole 632b. can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 114, description will be given of how a game ball flows down when one game ball is thrown to the first path 8641. FIG. 114(a) is a front view of the path member 8640, and FIG. 114(b) is a cross-sectional view of the path member 8640. FIG.

Note that FIG. 114 omits illustration of the accommodation portion 8643 formed in the path member 8640 . In FIG. 114, the connecting hole 632b and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 630 arranged on the front side of the path member 8640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. Furthermore, the cross-sectional view of FIG. 114(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 112(b).

As shown in FIG. 114, when one game ball is thrown from the through hole 631b (see FIG. 112) to the path member 8640, the game ball rolls due to the inclination of the first path 8641 and moves toward the connecting hole 632b. be rolled.

The rolling game ball rolls on the upper portion of the variable plate 8644a from the first path 8641, rolls toward the connecting hole 632b, contacts the first protrusion 8644c1 projecting to the back side of the connecting hole 632b, The ball is thrown toward the connecting hole 632b. That is, when one game ball is thrown into the first path 8641, the game ball can be passed through the connecting hole 632b and thrown to the front of the base plate 8630.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116, the case where two game balls are successively flowed down the first path 8641 will be described. 115(a) and 116(a) are front views of the path member 8640, and FIGS. 115(b) and 116(b) are cross-sectional views of the path member 8640. FIG.

115 and 116, the accommodating portion 8643 formed in the path member 8640 is omitted. In FIG. 115, the connecting hole 632b and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 630 arranged on the front side of the path member 8640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. Further, the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 115(b) and 116(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 112(b).

As shown in FIG. 115, when two game balls are continuously thrown from the passage hole 631b (see FIG. 112) to the path member 8640, the game balls roll due to the inclination of the first path 8641 and 632b side.

The rolling game ball rolls from the first path 8641 to the top of the variable plate 8644a. At this time, the gravity of the rolling game ball is made larger than the biasing force of the biasing spring attached to the variable plate 8644a. As a result, when two game balls land on the variable plate 8644a, the variable plate 8644a can be displaced.

When the variable plate 8644a is displaced, the contact plate 8644a1 formed on the variable plate 8644a is displaced downward along with the displacement of the variable plate 8644a. Accordingly, one end of the transmission member 8644b that contacts the tip of the contact plate 8644a1 is displaced downward, and the transmission member 8644b is rotated. By this rotational displacement of the transmission member 8644b, the other side of the transmission member 8644b is displaced upward, and one side of the regulating member 8644c arranged above the other side of the transmission member 8644b is displaced upward. As a result, the first protrusion 8644c1 of the regulating member 8644c is displaced downward and the second protrusion 8644c2 is displaced upward.

When the second protrusion 8644c2 protrudes upward, the game ball rolls on the first path 8641 as described above, and can roll to the back side of the second connecting hole 8632e. Therefore, of the two game balls, the preceding game ball can be thrown to the front side of the base plate 8630 through the second connecting hole 8632e.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116, when the preceding game ball rides on the first path 8641 closer to the connecting hole 632b than the variable plate 8644a from the top of the variable plate 8644a, the urging ball is attached to the variable plate 8644a. The biasing force of the spring becomes larger than the gravity of the game ball, the state in which the second protrusion 8644c2 is positioned upward is released, and the first protrusion 8644c1 is displaced to the state in which it is positioned upward.

In this case, the preceding game ball than the first projection 8644c1, since it is rolling to the position of the second connecting hole 8632e side, as described above to pass through the second connecting hole 8632e forward of the base plate 8630 can be thrown to

On the other hand, the following game ball is positioned above the variable plate 8644a, so it abuts against the first protrusion 8644c1 and is thrown toward the connecting hole 632b. That is, the following game ball is thrown forward of the base plate 8630 through the connecting hole 632b.

In this way, the guide means for guiding the game ball is the variable plate 8644a on which the game ball passing through the path member 8640 rolls, and the variable plate 8644a is interlockably connected to the first position (FIG. 113 ( a)) and a second position (position shown in FIG. 115(a)) and a regulating member 8644c for changing the course of the game ball passing through the path member 8640, The course of the game ball in the state where the member 8644c is displaced to the second position is a course that makes it easier for the ball to enter the through hole 632a than the course of the game ball in the state where the member 8644c is displaced to the first position. When the first number of game balls rolls, the regulating member 8644c is displaced to the second position, and the variable plate 8644a is set to a number less than the first number (two balls in this embodiment). When two game balls (in this embodiment, one ball) roll, the restricting member 8644c is displaced to the first position, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

That is, it is easier for the ball to enter the through hole 632a when the first number of game balls, which is larger than the second number, flows down than when the second number of game balls flow down. (The number of game balls passing through the path member 8640 can change the ease of entering the through-hole 632a.) The player can also be made to pay attention to the number of leaked game balls. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the regulating member 8644c is disposed downstream of the variable plate 8644a, the destination (path) of a predetermined game ball is related to the number and degree of connection of game balls following the predetermined game ball. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. That is, when the following game balls are connected (that is, when three or more game balls are connected in this embodiment), the number of game balls rolling on the variable plate 8644a is the first. While maintaining the number, the regulating member 8644c is maintained at the second position, and each game ball that reaches the regulating member 8644c can be easily entered into the through hole 632a. When the number of game balls that are divided and roll on the variable plate 8644a is equal to or less than the second number, the regulation member 8644c is displaced to the first position, and each game ball that reaches the regulation member 8644c is removed as described above. It is possible to make it more difficult for the ball to enter the through hole 632a than when the regulation member 8644c is displaced to the second position. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of following game balls and the degree of connection thereof. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, a winning opening unit 9600 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 122. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the above-described first embodiment, the variable board 652 of the variable winning device 650 is located at the rear, and the possibility of the game ball winning the through hole 632a is reduced. Even in the state where the variable plate 652 of the winning device 650 is positioned at the rear, when a plurality of hitting game balls are thrown through the path member 9640, it is made easy to win the through hole 632a.

FIG. 117 is a front view of the winning opening unit 9600 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 9600. FIG. In FIG. 117, the illustration of the decorative plate 610 is omitted, and the outline of the path member 9640 arranged on the back side is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, a prize winning port unit 9600 in the ninth embodiment includes a decorative plate 610 having a plurality of prize winning ports 26, 27 and 28, and a A base plate 9630 that forms a flow-down path for game balls in the base plate 9630, a path member 9640 that forms a ball-throwing path for game balls between the base plate 9630, a base plate 9630, and a decorative plate 610 and the base plate 9630 It is mainly formed with a variable winning device 650 that guides the game ball flowing down between the opposing to the through hole 632a.

A base plate 9630 in the ninth embodiment is formed with a second connecting hole 8632e penetrating in the front-rear direction at an intermediate position between the two connecting holes 632b. Also, the second connecting hole 8632e is arranged below the connecting hole 632b.

The path member 9640 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open base plate 8630 side. The path member 8640 is a member for forming a path that connects the second through holes 631b and 633b formed in the base plate 8630 and the connecting hole 632b or the second connecting hole 8632e.

The path member 9640 includes a first path 9641 formed on the left side of the front view and connecting the second through hole 631b and the connecting hole 632b of the base plate 9630 on the left side of the front view, and formed below the first path 9641, A third path 9645 connecting the first path 9641 and the second connecting hole 8632e, and a second path connecting the second through hole 633b formed on the right side in front view and the connecting hole 632b on the right side in front view of the base plate 9630. 9642 and a fourth path 9646 formed below the second path 9642 and connecting the second path 9642 and the second connecting hole 8632e.

In addition, the path member 9640 provides a rolling path of the game ball rolling on the first path 9641 or the second path 9642 in the middle of each path of the first path 9641 or the second path 9642. A path switching member 9644 for switching to the path 9646 is provided.

Next, the path member 9640 will be described with reference to FIG. 119(a) and 119(b) are front views of the path member 9640. FIG. In FIG. 119, the second through holes 631b and 633b, the connecting hole 632b, and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 9630 arranged in front of the path member 9640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 119, the path switching member 9644 arranged on the path member 9640 is composed of a variable plate 9644a formed of a plate-like body. The variable plate 9644a is disposed (pivotally supported) on the path member 9640 in a rotatable state at one end side (terminating side in the rolling direction of the game ball (connection hole 632b side)), and between the path member 9640 An urging spring (not shown) is arranged so that the other end is urged upward.

In addition, the variable plate 9644a is disposed with its upper surface flush with the rolling surface of the first path 9641 or the second path 9642 (see FIG. 119(a)). Furthermore, the variable plate 944a rotates and tilts the other end side downward to the third path 9645 or the fourth path 9646 when a force greater than the biasing force of the biasing spring is applied from the game ball rolling on the upper surface. 119(b)).

Next, referring to FIG. 120, the case where one game ball is thrown to the path member 9640 will be described. 120(a) and 120(b) are front views of the path member 9640. FIG. In FIG. 120, the second through holes 631b and 633b, the connecting hole 632b, and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 9630 arranged in front of the path member 9640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. 120(a) and 120(b), the transition states when the game ball rolls inside the path member 9640 are illustrated in order.

Furthermore, in the following description, since the game balls thrown from the second through holes 631b and 633b only roll in opposite directions, only the game balls rolling on the left side will be described, and the game balls on the right side will be described. Description of the rolling game ball is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 120(a) and 120(b), when the game ball thrown from the second through hole 631b to the inside of the path member 9640 is one ball, the first path 9641 and the variable plate 9644a , and is thrown to the connecting hole 632b. That is, when one game ball is thrown to the path member 9640, the game ball can pass through the connecting hole 632b and be thrown to the front side of the base plate 9630.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122, the case where two game balls are thrown to the path member 9640 will be described. 121(a) and 121(b) are front views of the winning opening unit 9600, and FIGS. 122(a) and 122(b) are front views of the winning opening unit 9600. FIG. 121 and 122, the second through holes 631b and 633b, the connecting hole 632b, and the second connecting hole 8632e of the base plate 9630 arranged in front of the path member 9640 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. . 121 to 122, transition states when the game ball rolls inside the path member 9640 are illustrated in order.

As shown in FIGS. 122(a) and 122(b), when two or more game balls are thrown to the inside of the path member 9640 from the second through hole 631b, the two game balls are placed in the second When it rolls from the first path 9641 to the upper surface of the variable plate 9644a, the other end side of the variable plate 9644a rotates downward.

That is, the biasing force for biasing the variable plate 9644a is set to be larger than the load applied to the upper surface of the variable plate 9644a by one game ball and smaller than the load applied to the upper surface by two game balls. set. Thereby, the variable plate 9644a can be displaced only when two game balls roll on the upper surface of the variable plate 9644a.

When the variable plate 9644a is displaced, the other end side of the variable plate 9644a is displaced to the upper surface of the third path 9645 as described above, and the game ball can be thrown to the third path 9645.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), when two game balls are thrown to the third path 9645, the load applied to the upper surface of the variable plate 9644a disappears, so the variable plate 9644a is displaced by the biasing force and the other end side is displaced upward (to the position before the game ball is thrown).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 122(b), the game ball thrown to the third path 9645 can be thrown to the second connecting hole 8632 side. As a result, the two game balls roll on the third path 9645 and are thrown from the second connecting hole 8632 to the front side of the base plate 9630 .

That is, when two game balls are continuously thrown to the path member 9640 , both balls can pass through the second connecting hole 8632 and be thrown to the front side of the base plate 9630 .

Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, when two or more game balls flow down in the vicinity without winning the left start winning hole 26, the possibility of winning both of the two balls can be given. As a result, it is possible to easily give interest to the player.

Next, the path switching member 10670 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 130. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the ninth embodiment described above, the switching between the first route 9641 and the third route 9645 is performed by the load of the game ball. A case in which the switching of the path is performed by the displacement of the path switching member 10670 and the magnetic force will be described.

First, the configuration of the path switching member 10670 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 123(a) is a top view of the path switching member 10670 in the tenth embodiment, FIG. 123(b) is a front view of the path switching member 10670, and FIG. 123(c) is a path switching member 10670. is an exploded perspective front view of the.

As shown in FIG. 123, the path switching member 10670 mainly includes a cylindrical base member 10671 and a plurality of magnets 10672 arranged inside the base member 10671 .

The base member 10671 mainly includes a lower base member 10671b arranged downward in the direction of gravity and having a recessed interior, and an upper base member 10671a arranged above the lower base member 10671b. It is formed.

The lower base member 10671b has a groove portion 10671b1 that is recessed radially inward on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and a recess portion 10671b2 that is axially recessed from the upper surface side inside the groove portion 10671b1, and is formed through the center of the lower base member 10671b. through-holes 10671b3 and 10671b3.

The grooves 10671b1 are formed at a plurality of locations (four locations in this embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the lower base member 10671b. The groove portion 10671b1 is a surface that attracts a game ball to its inner surface by the magnetic force of a magnet 10672, which will be described later, and is recessed with a width smaller than the outer shape of the game ball.

The recessed portion 10671b2 is a hole that accommodates a magnet 10672, which will be described later, and is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the magnet 10672. As shown in FIG. This allows the magnet 10672 to be housed inside.

The through hole 10671b3 is a hole into which a magnet 10672 to be described later and a shaft of a drive motor (not shown) are fitted. The path switching member 10670 can be rotated by the driving force of the drive motor by connecting (internally fitting) the shaft of the drive motor to the through hole 10671b3.

The upper base member 10671a is formed to have substantially the same outer diameter as the lower base member 10671b, and is arranged to cover the upper portion of the lower base member 10671b, so that the magnet 10672 accommodated in the recess 10671b2 can be pulled out. can be prevented.

A through hole 10671a1 is formed through the axis of the upper base member 10671a. Rotation of the path switching member 10670 can be stabilized by fitting the shaft of the drive motor into the through holes 10671a1 and 10671b3.

The magnet 10672 is accommodated in the recess 10671b2 formed inside the groove 10671b1, so that a magnetic force can be applied to the outer peripheral surface of the groove 10671b1. Thereby, the game ball can be attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 (groove portion 10671b1).

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the path on which the path switching member 10670 is arranged will be described. FIG. 124(a) is a top view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, 10645. FIG. FIG. 124(b) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, 10645 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVb in FIG. 124(a). FIG. 124(c) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, 10645 viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124(a). FIG. 124(d) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, 10645 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a).

124(a) to 124(d), each route 10641, 10642, 10645 is schematically illustrated. Also, in FIG. 124(d), the second path 10642 and the third path 10645 are illustrated with chain lines.

As shown in FIGS. 124( a ) to 124 ( d ), the first path 10641 is curved along the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 . In addition, the first path 10641 is formed with a bottom surface located below the center position of the groove portion 10671b1 in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 123(b)) by approximately the radius of the game ball. The bottom surface of the first path 10641 is formed to be inclined toward the path switching member 10670 side, and walls are formed to stand upward in the direction of gravity from both ends in the rolling direction. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the first path 10641 can roll toward the path switching member 10670 side.

Moreover, the wall portion erected on the first path 10641 is not formed at a position along the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 . Thereby, the game ball rolling on the first path 10641 can be attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 10641a1 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 .

The upstream side of the first path 10641 is connected to the rear side of the second through holes 631b and 633b that are formed through the base plate 630 of the prize winning port unit 600 . Therefore, the game ball thrown into the second through-holes 631b and 633b can be guided to the path switching member 10670 by rolling the first path 10641 .

The second path 10642 is arranged such that the starting end side of the second path 10642 is spaced apart from the terminal side of the first path 10641 in the circumferential direction of the path switching member 10670 by a predetermined distance, and along the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 It is formed. The second path 10642 and the first path 10641 are formed at the same position in the axial direction of the path switching member 10670 .

In addition, the second path 10642 may be formed at a position higher than the first path 10641. In this case, as will be described later, the following game ball sticks to the preceding game ball and hangs down to the preceding game ball. When it does, it is possible to make it difficult to apply the load of the following game ball applied to the attracting surface.

The third path 10645 is formed below the second path 10642 in the gravitational direction (lower side in FIG. 124(d)). Further, the starting end side of the third path 10645 is formed to extend in the circumferential direction of the path switching member 10670 from the second path 10642 . That is, the starting end side of the third route 10645 is closer to the terminal end side of the first route 10641 than the starting end side of the second route 10642 .

The downstream side (terminal side) of the second path 10642 is connected to the rear side of the connecting hole 632b, and the downstream side (terminal side) of the third path is connected to the second connecting hole 8632e. That is, the game ball thrown to the third path 10645 can be more likely to win the through-hole 632a than the second path 10642.

Further, the path switching member 10670 is connected to the drive motor as described above, and is rotationally displaced by the drive of the drive motor. The rotation direction of the path switching member 10670 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from above (viewed in the direction of FIG. 124(a)).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126, the case where one game ball is thrown to the first path 10641 will be described. 125(a) is a top view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, 10645, and FIG. 125(b) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, 10645. 126(a) is a top view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, 10645, and FIG. 126(b) is a side view of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642, 10645.

125(b) corresponds to FIG. 124(b), and FIG. 126(b) corresponds to FIG. 124(d).

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, when the game ball is thrown to the first path 10641, the game ball rolls on the first path 10641 and rolls along the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670. be. In this case, as described above, the path switching member 10670 is formed with the groove 10671b1 on its outer peripheral surface, and the magnet 10672 disposed inside allows the game ball to be attracted to its outer peripheral surface. , the game ball rolling on the first path 10641 can be attracted to the inner surface of the groove portion 10671b1.

As described above, the path switching member 10670 is rotationally displaced by the drive motor, so by rotating the path switching member 10670 with the game ball attracted to the groove 10671b1, the game ball is sent to the second path 10642. can do.

In addition, the game ball transported to the second path 10642 in a state of being sucked to the groove 10671b1 is dropped from the groove 10671b1 by coming into contact with the standing wall formed on the side surface of the second path 10642.

As described above, when one game ball rolls on the first path 10641 , the game ball can be thrown to the second path 10642 .

In addition, when the game ball rolling on the first path 10641 is not attracted to the groove part 10671b1, the game ball in the gap formed between the end side of the first path 10641 and the start side of the second path 10642 is thrown to a predetermined recovery path.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130, the case where two game balls are continuously thrown (dropped) to the first path 10641 will be described. 127(a), 128(a), 129(a) and 130(a) are top views of the route switching member 10670 and the respective routes 10641, 10642 and 10645; 128(b), 129(b) and 130(b) are side views of the path switching member 10670 and the paths 10641, 10642 and 10645. FIG.

127(b) corresponds to FIG. 124(b), FIG. 128(b) corresponds to FIG. 124(c), FIG. 129(b) corresponds to FIG. 124(c), and FIG. c) and respectively. 127 to 130 sequentially illustrate transition states in which two game balls are thrown.

First, as shown in FIGS. 127(a) and 127(b), when two game balls are successively thrown to the first path 10641, the preceding game ball moves into the groove of the path switching member 10670. It is attracted to the inner surface of 10671b1. As a result, the attracted game ball (preceding game ball) is magnetized, and the subsequent game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the preceding game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 128(a) and 128(b), the path switching member 10670 rotates while the preceding game ball is attracted to the inside of the groove portion 10671b1, and the preceding game ball passes through the first path 10641 and When positioned in the gap of the second path 10642, the following game ball is suspended (suspended) below the preceding game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 130(b), when the path switching member 10670 is further rotated in a state in which the trailing game ball is suspended below the leading game ball, the leading game ball A tip portion 10642a formed on the first path 10641 side of the plate forming the bottom surface of the second path 10642 is inserted between the game ball and the following game ball.

The tip portion 10642a is formed in a tapered flat plate shape, and includes a game ball (preceding game ball) attracted to the lower surface of the path switching member 10670 and a game ball (rear game ball) attracted to the game ball and suspended downward. Since it is arranged in a substantially horizontal posture at a height position where the tip is inserted into the adsorption position between the path switching member 10670 and the game ball that runs, the game ball preceding the lower surface of the path switching member 10670 is adsorbed and its When the following game ball is attracted to the preceding game ball, the attraction between these game balls is smoothly released, and only the following game ball (the game ball hung below) is released. Can be easily removed.

Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b), the following game ball is dropped from the outer peripheral surface of the preceding game ball. Therefore, the preceding game ball can be thrown to the first path 10641, and the following game ball can be thrown to the second path 10642, respectively. That is, when game balls are continuously thrown to the first path 10641, one ball can be thrown to an advantageous path. As a result, it is possible to give interest to the player.

Thus, the guide means for guiding the game ball includes a rotatably formed path switching member 10670 and a magnet disposed on the path switching member 10670 that attracts the game ball to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 in a hanging state. 10672, the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the route switching member 10670 by the magnet 10672 is positioned on the trajectory accompanying the rotation of the route switching member 10670, so that the game ball comes into contact with the game ball and falls out of the route switching member 10670. The tip portion 10642a is located below the first (preceding) game ball attracted to the outer surface of the route switching member 10670 in the direction of gravity, and the outer surface of the route switching member 10670 A game ball dropped from the path switching member 10670 due to contact with the tip portion 10642a is more likely to enter the through-hole 632a than a game ball that is sucked and thrown. can be improved.

That is, one (or two or more) game balls are further attracted to the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the route switching member 10670 than when only one game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the route switching member 10670. (The number of game balls passing through the passage member can change the ease of ball entry into the through hole 632a.) The player can also be made to pay attention to the number of game balls that have failed to enter 27. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, in the tenth embodiment, even if a plurality of game balls roll toward the path switching member 10670, if the game balls are connected, the game ball preceding the path switching member 10670 While attracting and easily attracting the game ball following the preceding game ball, at least the following game ball can be easily entered into the through hole 632a, while the game balls are separated by a predetermined interval. , the game ball preceding the path switching member 10670 can be attracted, but the game ball following the preceding game ball cannot be attracted, and the following game ball is also the path switching member 10670 (with the preceding game ball is attracted to another magnet 10672). That is, both the leading and trailing balls are made difficult to enter the through hole 632a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the number of game balls but also to how they are connected. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the tenth embodiment, the game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the route switching member 10670 in a hanging state, and the game ball is thrown in the hanging state as the route switching member 10670 rotates. It is also possible to form a mode in which the game ball drops out of the path switching member 10670 as an unstable state of swinging due to variations in the rolling speed, rolling direction, attraction position, and the like. That is, even when only one game ball is attracted to the path switching member 10670 (when it does not come into contact with the tip portion 10642a), the game ball falls off and is easily made to enter the through hole 632a. can perform.

Furthermore, when only one game ball is attracted to the path switching member 10670, it is possible to suppress the tip portion 10642a from acting on the game ball, making it easier to maintain the attraction of the game ball. That is, even if the attraction-like body of the game ball to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 is unstable, when the game ball is thrown to the entrance of the second path 10642, it is not obstructed by the third path 10643. 2 paths 10642.

Therefore, when only one game ball is attracted to the path switching member 10670 and hangs down (hanging), and when two or more game balls are attracted to the path switching member 10670 and hang down in a row The difference in the ease with which a ball can enter the through-hole 632a at 1 can be made clearer. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the number of game balls and how they are connected. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the variable winning device 11650 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 137. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the first embodiment, the connection hole 632b and the insertion hole 632c are formed separately, but in the eleventh embodiment, the connection hole 11632b and the insertion hole 11632c are connected.

First, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133, the configuration of the winning opening unit 11600 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 131 is a front view of the winning opening unit 11600 in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 11600. FIG. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 11600. FIG. In FIG. 131, the illustration of the decorative plate 610 is omitted, and the outer shape of the path member 11640 is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, a prize winning port unit 11600 in the eleventh embodiment includes a decorative plate 610 having a plurality of prize winning ports 26, 27 and 28, and a A base plate 11630 that forms a flow-down path for game balls, a path member 11640 that forms a ball-throwing path for game balls between the base plate 11630, and a decorative plate 610 and the base plate 11630. It is mainly formed with a variable winning device 11650 that guides the game ball flowing down between and to the through hole 632a.

The central recessed portion 632 of the base plate 11630 includes a through hole 632a penetrating through the base plate 630 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, two through holes 11632c penetrating on both sides of the through hole 632a, and the through holes 11632c. and a connecting hole 11632b continuously formed above the .

The insertion hole 11632c is an opening into which a variable plate 11652 of a variable prize winning device 11650, which will be described later, is inserted.

The connecting hole 11632b is an opening through which a game ball thrown through the path member 11640, which will be described later, is discharged to the front side of the base plate 11630. and formed through.

The path member 11640 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box shape with the base plate 630 side opened. The path member 11640 is a member for forming a path that connects the second through holes 631b, 633b and the connecting hole 11632b, and is formed on the left side of the front view, and the second through hole 631b and the base plate 630 are on the left side of the front view. and a second path 11642 formed on the right side in front view and connecting the second through hole 633b and the connection hole 11632b on the right side in front view of the base plate 11630. be.

In addition, a recessed portion 11647 cut vertically is formed on the bottom surface of the first path 11641 and the second path 11642 on the center side in the left-right direction. A variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 is arranged inside the recessed portion 11647 . Thereby, the game ball rolling on the first path 11641 and the second path 11642 can be thrown to the top of the variable plate 11652 before passing through the connecting hole 11632b.

In the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650, a plurality of concave portions 11652a extending in the left-right direction are formed in parallel in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the tip side thereof. The concave portion 11652a is formed linearly, and extends in different directions on the side far from the through hole 632a and on the side close to the through hole 632a. The recess 11652a on the far side from the through hole 632a is formed parallel to the left-right direction. On the other hand, the recessed portion 11652a formed closer to the through hole 632a is inclined toward the front side toward the through hole 632a.

Next, referring to FIG. 134, the displacement of variable winning device 11650 will be described. 134(a) and 134(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 11600 taken along line CXXXIV-CXXXIV in FIG. 134(a) shows the variable winning device 11650 before displacement, and FIG. 134(b) shows the variable winning device 11650 after displacement. In addition, although illustration of the decorative plate 610 is omitted in FIG. 131 , the decorative plate 610 is illustrated in FIG. 134 .

As shown in FIGS. 134(a) and 134(b), the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 before being displaced is positioned such that the concave portion 11652a is adjacent to the end of the first path 11641. As shown in FIGS. On the other hand, the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 after being displaced is arranged at a position where the concave portion 11652a protrudes to the front side of the base plate 11630 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b), with the game ball on the top of the variable board 11652, the variable board 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 is extended to the front side. give an explanation.

135(a) and 135(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 11600. FIG. 135(a) corresponds to FIG. 134(a), and FIG. 135(b) corresponds to FIG. 134(b). Further, only the rolling of the game ball on the left side in the horizontal direction will be described below, and the description on the right side will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b), when a game ball is thrown to the upper part of the variable plate 11652 which is retracted to the rear side, the variable plate 11652 is displaced to the front side. Then, as the variable plate 11652 is displaced, the game ball can be displaced forward.

In this case, since the concave portion 11652a is formed on the upper surface of the variable plate 11652, the frictional force between the variable plate 11652 and the game ball can be increased. to prevent it from staying in that position. Therefore, the game ball can be displaced forward as the variable plate 11652 is displaced.

As described above, the game ball can be displaced to the front side (the front side of the base plate 11630) along with the displacement of the variable plate 11652, so that the game ball can enter the through hole 632a more easily than in the first embodiment. can do.

That is, since the variable plate 11652 forms a bottom surface (rolling surface) connected to the connecting hole 632b of the path member 11640, even if the variable plate 11652 is not protruded (that is, is retracted), the game ball can be moved. It can be positioned on the variable plate 11652, and the time for the game ball to be positioned on the variable plate 11652 can be secured accordingly. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the path member 11640 can easily enter the through hole 632a, and the player can have a stronger expectation of entering the through hole 632a. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The upper surface of the variable plate 11652 forming the bottom surface of the path member 11640 is formed with a recess 11652a that guides the game ball positioned on the upper surface toward the through hole 632a. When the variable plate 11652 is projected from a state in which a game ball is positioned on the upper surface of a certain variable plate 11652, the game ball can be projected while being guided toward the through hole 632a by the action of the concave portion 11652a. , the game ball can be easily entered into the through hole 632a.

As the concave portion 11652a, a convex line or a concave groove (or a combination of these) is provided so as to extend in a direction closer to the through hole 632a toward the tip of the variable plate 11652 in the projecting direction, and to be convexly or concavely provided on the upper surface. are exemplified. The cross-sectional shape of the ridges and grooves is arbitrary, and examples thereof include rectangular cross-sections, polygonal cross-sections, and arcuate cross-sections (or cross-sections of shapes combining these).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136(a) to 136(c), description of the case where the variable plate 11652 of the variable winning device 11650 is retracted to the rear side while the game ball is on the top of the variable plate 11652 do.

136(a) to 136(c) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 11600. FIG. 136(a) corresponds to FIG. 134(b), FIG. 136(c) corresponds to FIG. 134(a), and FIG. 136(b) corresponds to FIGS. 136(a) and 136(c). An intermediate position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 136(a) to 136(c), when the game ball is rolling inside the variable plate 11652, when the variable plate 11652 is displaced to the rear side, the variable plate 11652 The game ball can be displaced to the through hole 632a side by the inclined surface of the concave portion 11652a formed in the inner portion.

Therefore, as the variable plate 11652 is displaced, the game ball can be displaced toward the through hole 632a, so that the game ball can easily enter the through hole 632a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, when the variable plate 11652 is displaced, the time during which the game ball can be affected by the variable plate 11652 will be described.

FIG. 137(a) is a time chart showing changes over time in the amount of displacement of the variable plate 11652, and FIG. 137(b) is a time chart showing changes over time in the amount of displacement of the variable plate 652 in the first embodiment. .

On the horizontal axis, "t0" is the time at which the variable plate 11652 and the variable plate 652 start sliding in the direction of projection (toward the front) from the retracted state, and "t5" is the retracted state. It shows the time when the slide displacement in the (retreat to the back side) direction is completed and the immersion state is reached. On the vertical axis, "open position" indicates that the variable plate 11652 and the variable plate 652 have been slid to the maximum projecting position.

In this embodiment, as described above, the variable plate 11652 forms part of the rolling surface of the path member 11640. Therefore, when the variable plate 11652 starts sliding displacement in the projecting direction, If a game ball exists (is placed on it), the game ball can be acted upon by the variable plate 11652 (the ball can easily enter the through hole 632a). That is, the action from the variable plate 11652 can be applied to the game ball from time t0 in FIG. 137(a). Note that the time t4 is a time that has elapsed from the time t0 shorter than the time t3.

In addition, as described above, the upper surface of the variable plate 11652 is formed with a plurality of recesses 11652a. If there is a game ball in (if it is on), the game ball can be acted upon by the variable plate 11652 (recessed portion 11652a) (made easy to enter the through hole 632a). That is, until time t3 in FIG. 137(a), the action from the variable plate 11652 can be given to the game ball.

On the other hand, in the variable plate 652 of the first embodiment, when the variable plate 652 is retracted (retracted), the game ball receives action from the variable plate 652 (the game ball is made easier to enter the through hole 632a). ), and after the amount of protrusion of the variable plate 652 reaches a predetermined amount (the amount of protrusion on which the game ball is placed on the upper surface), it is possible to receive an action from the variable plate 652 . That is, the action from the variable plate 652 cannot be received until after time t2 in FIG. 137(b).

If the upper surface of the variable plate 11652 is formed as a closing and sliding surface like the variable plate 652 in the first embodiment, the upper surface of the variable plate 11652 is slidably displaced in the retraction direction. Even if a game ball exists (or is on it), the game ball cannot receive an action from the variable plate 652 (upper surface) (make it easier to enter the through hole 632a). In this case, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable plate 652, thereby making it easier to enter the through hole 632a. That is, the action from the variable plate 652 can be given to the game ball only until the time t4 in FIG.

Thus, according to this embodiment, the time during which the game ball can be affected by the variable plate 11652 can be made longer than in the case of the first embodiment (t4-t2<t3-t0). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the through hole 632a.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the case where the radially inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 of the rotating body 372R is formed on a plane orthogonal to the radial direction has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. may be formed so as to be inclined with respect to a direction orthogonal to the radial direction.

In the above-described first and third embodiments, when viewed in the radial direction of the rotors 372R and 3372R, the outer shape of the magnet 372Rb is formed smaller than the grooves 372Rc2 and 3372Rc2 of the second rotors 372Rc and 3372Rc. However, the outer diameter of the magnet 372Rb may be formed larger than the grooves 372Rc2 and 3372Rc2 of the second rotors 372Rc and 3372Rc. In this case, since the range where the game ball is attracted to the groove portion 372Rc2 can be increased, it is possible to create a state in which the game ball is more likely to be attracted by the outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating bodies 372R and 3372R.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the case where the magnets 372Rb and 2372Rb are disposed inside the rotors 372R, 2372R, 3372R and 4372R has been described. may be arranged at positions substantially corresponding to the outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R, and 4372R. That is, the magnets 372Rb and 2372Rb may be arranged in an exposed state.

It is preferable that the outer peripheral surfaces of the magnets 372Rb and 2372Rb are arranged so as to substantially match the recessed end surfaces of the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2 and 3372Rc of the second rotors 372Rc, 2372Rc, 3372Rc and 4372Rc. In this case, due to the rotation of the rotors 372R, 2372R, 3372R, 4372R, the game ball thrown to the sixth ball path KR6 can be directly attracted to the magnets 372Rb, 2372Rb and can be thrown to the seventh ball path KR7. Therefore, since the attracting surfaces of the magnets 372Rb and 2372Rb can be visually recognized by the store clerk or the player, when the magnets are damaged, the store clerk or the player can immediately recognize it, and the pachinko machine 10 can be damaged. We can respond immediately.

In the first to third embodiments described above, the rotors 372R, 2372R, 3372R move the sixth ball path KR6 when the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372c are disposed adjacent to the sixth ball path KR6. Although the case where the falling game ball is attracted has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the stopper portion 396 may be displaced, the game ball flowing down the sixth ball path may be stopped, and the stopped game ball may be attracted by rotating the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, and 3372R. In this case, by displacing the stopper portion 396, it is possible to form a case where the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R and the game ball are attracted to each other. 396 displacements can be shown. As a result, the player can visually recognize a plurality of throwing patterns, so that the player can be entertained.

In the above-described first embodiment, the variable winning device 650 in which the variable plate 652 is slidably displaced in the front-rear direction is disposed in the winning opening unit 600. However, the variable plate 652 is not necessarily limited to this. However, one end may be rotationally displaced around an axis. In this case, since the player can easily see the displacement of the variable plate 652 , the player can easily perform a game such as hitting a game ball into the game area in accordance with the movement of the variable plate 652 . Therefore, it is possible to give interest to the player.

In the first embodiment, the case where the variable plate 652 of the variable winning device 650 is arranged below the path member 640 in the direction of gravity has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the variable plate 652 of the variable prize winning device 650 may be formed as part of the lower end surface of the path member 640 .

That is, a part of the first path 641 and the second path 642 of the path member 640 may be formed on the upper surface of the variable plate 652 . In this case, when the variable plate 652 is slid with a game ball on its upper surface, the game ball can be displaced forward in accordance with the sliding displacement. Therefore, since the game ball can be brought closer to the through hole 632a in accordance with the slide displacement, the probability of the game ball winning (ball entering) the through hole 632a can be increased. In order to prevent the game ball on the upper surface from slipping when the variable plate 652 is slid, it is preferable that the upper end surface of the variable plate 652 is uneven to increase the frictional resistance.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the variable plate 9644a is inclined downward in the direction away from the second connecting hole 8632 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the variable plate 96644a may be inclined downward toward the second connecting hole 8632 .

In this case, the game balls sent to the third path 9645 and the fourth path 9646 can be smoothly sent to the second connecting hole 8632 . That is, the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the variable plate 9644a can be the direction toward the second connecting hole 8632e.

Further, the tilting direction of the variable plate 9644a may be inclined downward toward the back side of the winning opening unit 9600, or may be inclined downward toward the front side of the winning opening unit 9600.

In the fifth embodiment, when displacing the releasing member 5372Rd disposed on the rotating body 5372R, by displacing a part of the releasing member 5372Rd radially outward of the rotating body 5372R, the preceding game ball rotates. Although the case of releasing the adsorption with the body 5372R has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this.

Description will be made with reference to FIG. FIG. 138(a) is a side view of the rotating body 13572R, FIG. 138(b) is a top view of the rotating body 13572R, and FIG. FIG. 138(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 13572R taken along line CXXXVIIId-CXXXVIIId of FIG. 138(b).

As shown in FIG. 138, the release member 13572Rd is arranged on the rotating body 13572R in a rotatable state about one end thereof, and the magnet 372Rb is arranged on the release member 13572Rd.

The release member 13572Rd is formed by extending from the inner peripheral portion of a groove portion 372Rc2 recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 13572R, and a part of the releasing member 13572Rd protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 13572R. A pressing portion 5372Rd2 is provided.

The magnet 372b is positioned radially inward of the groove 372Rc2 and is attached to a portion of the release member 13572Rd extending from the inner peripheral portion of the groove 372Rc2.

Therefore, when the pressing portion 5372Rd2 is pressed by a following game ball, the magnet 372Rd can be displaced radially inward of the rotor 13572R. As a result, since the magnetic force of the magnet 372Rb acting on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 13572R is weakened, the preceding game ball attracted to the rotating body 13572 can be dropped.

In the above-described first embodiment, the recessed depth of the groove portion 372Rc2 describes the case where the game ball is brought into contact with the bottom surface of the groove portion 372Rc2, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the recess depth of the groove portion 372Rc2 may be set to a dimension such that the game ball does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 when the game ball is fitted in the groove portion 372Rc2. In this case, the inner edge of the groove portion 372Rc2 (the ridge between the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 and the outer peripheral surface of the rotor 372R) can be brought into contact with the game ball. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown with the rotation of the rotating body 372R, it is possible to suppress the game ball from wobbling in the rotating direction of the rotating body 372R, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being released from the adsorption. .

In particular, when the game ball is thrown with the rotation of the rotating body 372R, the vertical component of gravity acting on the game ball (groove portion 372Rc2) before and after passing the uppermost position in the direction of gravity is reduced. Since the direction is reversed, the game ball tends to wobble in the rotation direction of the rotating body 372R due to the reaction to the reverse. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the inner edge of the groove portion 372Rc2 (the ridge line between the inner surface of the groove portion 372Rc2 and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 372R) can be brought into contact with the game ball, that is, the rotating direction of the rotating body 372R. Since the game ball can be sandwiched between the inner edges of the groove portion 372Rc2 from both sides, it is possible to suppress the game ball from wobbling in the rotating direction of the rotating body 372R, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the release of the game ball from being sucked.

In the first embodiment, the case where the plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged on the rear side of each of the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b has been explained, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one LED 355a may be arranged at a position straddling the first irregular reflection portion 353d and the second irregular reflection portion 354b. In this case, since the number of LEDs 355a can be reduced, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

In the tenth embodiment described above, the case where two game balls are adsorbed (drooping) to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, three game balls may be adsorbed (hanging) on the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 .

In this case, by arranging the vertical position of the tip part 10642a of the second path 10642 below the first path 10641 by the diameter of the game ball, the preceding two game balls are placed on the second path 10642. After throwing, the following game ball can be thrown to the third path. In addition, by making the vertical position of the tip part 10642a of the second path 10642 substantially the same as that of the first path 10641, the leading game ball is thrown to the second path 10642, and the following two balls are thrown. A game ball can be thrown to the third path 10643 . That is, when a plurality of game balls are sucked (drooping) to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670, the number of balls to be thrown to the second path 10642 can be arbitrarily set, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In the tenth embodiment described above, when two game balls are adsorbed (drooping) to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670, the tip part 10642a is inserted between the game balls to divide them. It is not limited. For example, the abutting member may be brought into contact with the outer surface of the trailing game ball that hangs down from the leading game ball to drop the trailing game ball together with the leading game ball.

In addition, as a shape for dropping the following game ball together with the preceding game ball, the lower end side of the groove portion 10671b1 formed in the path switching member 10670 is connected to the lower surface side of the lower base member 10671b (path switching member 10670). It is preferable that the step between the lower surface of the groove portion 10671b1 and the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 is eliminated. By connecting the lower end side of the groove portion 10671b1 formed in the route switching member 10670 to the lower surface side of the lower base member 10671b (route switching member 10670), it follows the preceding game ball attracted to the outer surface of the route switching member 10670. When the game ball sticks (hangs down), the preceding game ball does not come into contact with the lower end surface of the groove portion 10671b1, so the preceding game ball can be easily displaced downward. Therefore, the preceding game ball and the following game ball can be dropped from the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 .

Further, the groove portion 10671b1 may be formed on the same peripheral surface as the outer peripheral surface of the lower base member 10671b (path switching member 10670). In this case, when the game ball following the preceding game ball attracted to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 is sucked (drooping), the preceding game ball does not contact the lower end surface of the groove portion 10671b1, so the preceding The game ball to be played can be easily displaced downward. Therefore, the preceding game ball and the following game ball can be dropped from the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 .

Further, the inner surface of the groove portion 10671b1 (the surface on which the preceding game ball is attracted) may be inclined radially inward toward the lower side in the direction of gravity. The inner surface of the groove portion 10671b1 (the surface on which the preceding game ball is attracted) is inclined downward in the direction of gravity inward in the radial direction, so that the game ball that follows the preceding game ball attracted to the outer surface of the path switching member 10670. When is attracted (drooping), the preceding game ball can be easily displaced downward. Therefore, the preceding game ball and the following game ball can be dropped from the outer surface of the path switching member 10670 .

In the tenth embodiment, the case where two game balls are attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the path switching member 10670 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, when three game balls are attracted, the load may be set so that the attraction between the preceding game balls and the path switching member 10670 is released. Alternatively, the preceding first game ball may be thrown to the second path 10642, the second game ball to the third path 10643, and the third game ball to the recovery port. .

In the first to third embodiments, the second rolling portion 381c extending along the outer surface of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R is formed above the axes of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second rolling portion 381c may be formed below the shafts of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, and 3372R. In this case, when the preceding game ball sticks to the outer surface of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R and the following game ball sticks to the preceding game ball, the preceding game ball and the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R It is possible to easily release the adsorption with the outer surface of the.

In the first to third embodiments, the case where the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372Rc2 formed in the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R are recessed has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372Rc2 may be formed on the same peripheral surface as the outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R.

In this case, when the preceding game ball sticks to the outer surface of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R and the following game ball sticks to the preceding game ball, the preceding game ball and the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R It is possible to easily release the adsorption with the outer surface of the.

Also, the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372Rc2 may be formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surfaces of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R. In this case, when the preceding game ball sticks to the outer surface of the rotating body 372R, 2372R, 3372R, and the following game ball sticks to the preceding game ball, the preceding game ball is removed from the grooves 372Rc2, 2372Rc2, 3372Rc2. It can be easily moved. The attraction between the preceding game ball and the outer surfaces of the rotating bodies 372R, 2372R, 3372R can be easily released.

In the seventh embodiment, the through-hole 7613e is formed through the center cover member 7613 from the rear surface to the front surface. Anything is fine. Also, instead of the recess, a portion projecting from the back side of the central cover member 7613 may hold the game ball.

In this case, when the following game ball collides with the preceding game ball, the following game ball repels toward the through hole 632a side, so that the central cover member 7613 and the base plate 630 face each other. It is preferable to set the interval between them to be substantially the same as the diameter of the two game balls.

In the seventh embodiment, the width of the connecting hole 632b is set substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the width of the connecting hole 632b may be set to a dimension sufficiently larger than the game ball diameter (for example, a diameter dimension for two game balls).

In this case, the inner edge of the through hole 7613e on the side away from the through hole 632a is displaced in the left-right direction of the base plate 630 between the side surface of the connecting hole 632b on the side away from the through hole 632a and the radius of the game ball. It is preferably formed at a position According to this, when the preceding game ball thrown to the inner edge of the through hole 7613e collides with the following game ball, the following game ball can be easily repelled to the through hole 632a side.

In the above seventh embodiment, the case where the width between the connecting holes 632b facing each other in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball (for example, 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball). In this case, since the game ball can be easily discharged from the connecting hole 632b, it is possible to prevent the game ball from clogging the connecting hole 632b.

In this case, the inner edge of the through hole 7613e on the side close to the through hole 632a is displaced in the left-right direction of the base plate 630 between the side surface of the connecting hole 632b on the side close to the through hole 632a and the radius of the game ball. It is preferably formed at a position According to this, when the preceding game ball thrown to the inner edge of the through hole 7613e collides with the following game ball, the following game ball can be easily repelled to the through hole 632a side.

In the above seventh embodiment, the case where the through hole 7613e is formed in a substantially circular shape has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the through hole 7613e may be formed in the shape of an elongated hole that is elongated in the left-right direction of the base plate 630, and the width dimension in the short direction may be formed to increase outward in the left-right direction. In this case, the game ball sent from the connecting hole 632b can be easily displaced in the left-right direction by the shape of the inner edge of the through hole 7613e. Therefore, since the through holes 7613e can be arranged with a degree of freedom, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the number of game balls that ride on the top of the variable plates 8644ba and 9644a is set to two, but the number is not necessarily limited to this. The operation of the variable plates 8644ba and 9644a may be switched between when two game balls ride on the upper part and when three game balls ride on the upper part by lengthening the length. That is, since the operation of the variable plates 8644ba and 9644a can be set arbitrarily, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the above-described second embodiment, the magnet 2372Rb is helically bent in the axial direction of the rotating body 2372R, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet formed in a straight line may be used.

In this case, it is preferable to arrange the magnet 2372Rb so as to be inclined in the direction of rotation of the rotating body 2372R toward the upstream side of the second rolling portion 381c. As a result, the game ball rolling on the second rolling portion 381c can be easily attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 2372R.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the movable ball entry accessory device 300 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a displaceable member disposed at a position visible to a player and switching the flow-down path of a game ball according to the displaced position, one or a plurality of light emitting means formed so as to emit light is provided. A substrate member mounted with a light emitting surface facing the front side; The distance between the second transmissive member and the substrate member is equal to the distance between the first transmissive member and the substrate member. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being set to a distance different from the distance.

Here, there is known a game machine provided with a displaceable member that is displaceably disposed at a position visible to the player and that switches the flow path of the game ball according to the displaced position (Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 8-131612). . In this case, by arranging a displacement member on the front side of a transparent member formed of a light-transmitting material and irradiating light from the rear side of the transparent member, the player can visually recognize the displacement member together with the light transmitted through the transparent member. A technique is also known in which the displacement member is focused on. However, in the conventional technology described above, since the displacement member is formed of a non-transmissive material that does not transmit light, the region (area) of the light visible to the player is reduced by the size of the displacement member. Performance effects are hindered.

In response to this, the applicant of the present application has proposed that by forming the displacement member from a light-transmitting material, not only the transmission member but also the light transmitted through the displacement member can be visually recognized by the player, and the light region ( area) has been developed (unknown at the time of filing). However, when the displacement member is made of a light-transmitting material, it has been found to be difficult for the player to specify the position of the displacement member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, one or a plurality of light-emitting means formed to emit light are mounted on the substrate member with the light-emitting surface facing the front side, and are arranged on the front side of the substrate member. a first transmissive member and a second transmissive member made of a light transmissive material, the displacement member being made of a light transmissive material and disposed in front of the second transmissive member; Since the distance between the substrate member is set to a distance different from the distance between the first transmission member and the substrate member, the position of the displacement member is maintained while ensuring the region (area) of the light visible to the player. can be easily specified by the player. That is, since the distances from the light emitting means are different between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, it is possible to make the light diffusion mode different when the light is transmitted through the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Therefore, the mode of light transmitted through the first transmissive member and visually recognized by the player can be made different from the mode of light transmitted through the second transmissive member and visually recognized by the player. As a result, the player can easily specify the position of the displacement member arranged on the front side of the second transparent member.

When a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the substrate member, the light emitting means are provided in both the first region facing the first transmissive member and the second region facing the second transmissive member among the regions of the substrate member. is not required to be mounted, and it is sufficient if it is mounted in at least one of the first and second regions. Also, the light emitting means may be mounted at a position overlapping both the first area and the second area.

A gaming machine A2 in the gaming machine A1, characterized in that unevenness is formed on at least one of the front surface and the back surface of the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member are formed with unevenness on at least one of the front surface and the back surface. Light transmitted through the transmission member and the second transmission member can be easily diffused by the unevenness. In this case, since the distance from the light emitting means differs between the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member, the mode of diffusion of the light transmitted through the first transmitting member and the mode of diffusion of the light transmitting through the second transmitting member differ. can be different. Therefore, the difference between the mode of light transmitted through the first transmissive member and visually recognized by the player and the mode of light transmitted through the second transmissive member and visually recognized by the player can be increased. As a result, the player can easily specify the position of the displacement member arranged on the front side of the second transparent member.

A game machine A3 characterized in that, in the game machine A2, the unevenness formed on the first transmissive member and the unevenness formed on the second transmissive member are substantially the same.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, since the unevenness formed on the first transmissive member and the unevenness formed on the second transmissive member are substantially the same, light is emitted from the light emitting means. In the non-lighted state, the first transparent member and the second transparent member (the second transparent member visible through the displacement member) can be visually recognized by the player as having the same appearance. That is, the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member, which have different appearances (patterns of light) after the light emission from the light emitting means, can have the same appearance before the light emission from the light emitting means. The appearance (mode of light) of the two transmissive members can be made different (different), and can be enhanced.

Even if the first and second transmissive members have the same unevenness, the first and second transmissive members are located at different distances from the light emitting means. can be made different in the mode of diffusion of light when passing through each. That is, the mode of light transmitted through the first transmissive member and visually recognized by the player can be made different from the mode of light transmitted through the second transmissive member and visually recognized by the player.

A game machine A4 in any one of the game machines A1 to A3, further comprising a connecting member for connecting the first transparent member and the second transparent member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A3, since it includes a connection member that connects the first transmission member and the second transmission member, the first transmission member or the second transmission member Light transmitted through one of them (the one with the smaller distance from the light emitting means) passes through the other of the first transmissive member or the second transmissive member (the one with the larger distance from the light emitting means) and the light emitting means. can be suppressed by the connecting member. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the first transparent member and the second transparent member to make the mode of the light (especially, brightness) different from the second transparent member and visible to the player. As a result, the player can easily specify the position of the displacement member arranged on the front side of the second transparent member.

The game machine A4 is characterized in that unevenness is formed on at least one of the front surface and the back surface of the first transparent member and the second transparent member, and unevenness is not formed on the front surface or the back surface of the connecting member. A game machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, unevenness is formed on at least one of the front surface and the back surface of the first transparent member and the second transparent member, and unevenness is formed on the front surface or the back surface of the connecting member. is not formed, the player can visually recognize the first transparent member and the second transparent member (the second transparent member visible through the displacement member) and the connecting member as different appearances. As a result, the boundary between the first transparent member and the second transparent member can be clarified by using the connecting member. Makes it easier to identify.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the distance between one of the first transmission member or the second transmission member and the light emitting means is the same as the other of the first transmission member or the second transmission member. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that the distance between said light emitting means is larger than said one side and said one side is located above said other side in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the distance between one of the first transmission member or the second transmission member and the light emitting means is the same as that of the first transmission member or the second transmission member. Since the distance between the other of the two transmissive members and the light emitting means is larger than the distance between them and one is positioned above the other in the gravitational direction, damage to the light emitting means can be suppressed.

That is, on the side where the distance to the light emitting means is small (narrow), compared to the side where the distance to the light emitting means is large (wide), the space becomes narrower, and the heat generated from the light emitting means heats the space. temperature rises, and the risk of damage to the light emitting means increases. On the other hand, according to the game machine A6, the air whose temperature is raised in the space on the side where the distance from the light emitting means is small (narrow) is transferred to the space (that is, the light emitting means) located above in the direction of gravity. It can be lifted to the space on the side where the distance between the As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the light emitting means on the side where the distance is small (narrow).

In the gaming machine A6, the distance between the first transmitting member and the light emitting means is made larger than the distance between the second transmitting member and the light emitting means, and the displacement member and the second transmitting member are separated from each other. A game machine A7 characterized in that a first flow-down path of a game ball is defined as a space between the two facing each other.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, the distance between the first transmitting member and the light emitting means is made larger than the distance between the second transmitting member and the light emitting means, and the displacement member and Since the space facing the second permeable member is the first flow-down path of the game ball, it is possible to reduce the size of the unit composed of the displacement member, the first permeable member and the second permeable member. That is, the space between the displacement member and the second transmission member, which are formed in order to change the form of the light visually recognized by the player, is used as the first flow path of the game ball, thereby effectively utilizing the dead space. There is no need to secure a separate space for the flow-down route. Therefore, the size of the unit can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the displacement member is formed as a plate-like body rotatably supported on the base end side, and formed with a thick plate portion having a thicker plate thickness on the tip end side. A gaming machine A8 characterized by:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the displacement member is formed as a plate-like body rotatably supported on the base end side, and has a plate thickness on the tip end side. Since the enlarged thickness portion is formed, out of the light that passes through the displacement member and is visually recognized by the player, the light that is transmitted through the thickness portion and visually recognized by the player is divided into other parts other than the thick portion. It can be made different from the light that passes through the part and is visually recognized by the player. Further, as the displacement member is rotated about the base end side, the position of the light that is visually recognized through the tip side (plate thickness portion) can be displaced. In other words, the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member can be easily recognized by the player by utilizing the fact that the position of the visible light transmitted through the distal end side (thickness portion) of the displacement member is displaced.

A game machine A9, wherein at least one of the front surface and the rear surface of the thick plate portion is curved in an arcuate cross-section in the game machine A8.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A8, at least one of the front surface and the back surface of the thick plate portion is curved in an arcuate cross-section. , refracts and diverges or converges the light incident on the plate thickness. As a result, of the light transmitted through the displacement member and visually recognized by the player, the light transmitted through the plate thickness portion and visually recognized by the player and the light transmitted through the other portions other than the plate thickness portion are transmitted to the player. The difference from visually recognized light can be made clearer. As a result, the player can easily recognize the displacement (rotation) motion of the displacement member.

A game machine A10 characterized in that in the game machine A8 or A9, the displacement member is formed so as to be arranged at a position substantially flush with the first transmission member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of the game machine A8 or A9, the displacement member can be disposed at a position substantially flush with the first transmission member, so that the displacement member and the first transmission member can be separated. The area (area) of the light emitted from the light emitting means and visually recognized by the player can be visually recognized as a larger area.

The game machine A10 includes a rolling member that is inclined downward toward the front of the displacement member and on which a game ball rolls, and the height position at the downstream end of the rolling member is substantially in plane with the first transmission member. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that the height position of the plate thickness portion of the displacement member arranged at the same position is lowered by the radius of the game ball.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects of the game machine A10, the rolling member is provided with a rolling member that is inclined downward toward the front of the displacement member and on which the game ball rolls, and the height position at the downstream end of the rolling member However, since it is lowered by the radius of the game ball from the height position of the plate thickness portion of the displacement member arranged at a position that is substantially flush with the first transmission member, the rolling portion rolls from the downstream end A game ball thrown toward the front of the displacement member can collide with the plate thickness portion of the displacement member whose strength is relatively high by increasing the plate thickness. As a result, damage to the displacement member can be suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Variable Unit 360 as an Example>
A substantially cylindrical rotating member rotatably formed with a rotating shaft directed in a horizontal direction; In a gaming machine in which the rotating member is rotated in a state where the game ball is attracted to the surface to throw the attracted game ball in the rotating direction of the rotating member, the rotating member is parallel to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. A gaming machine B1, characterized in that it comprises a rolling surface on which a game ball rolls, the rolling surface being positioned above the rotating shaft of the rotating member in the direction of gravity.

Here, it comprises a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with the rotating shaft oriented in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A game machine is known in which a game ball is rotated in a state in which the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface, and the game ball is thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotary member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-231890). Gazette). When two game balls roll continuously toward the rotating member, the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the game ball following the preceding game ball is attracted. Sometimes. In this case, when the rotating member is rotated, there is a problem that the weight of two balls is applied, and the suction between the rotating member and the preceding game ball is released.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, the rolling surface is provided side by side on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and on which the game ball rolls, and the rolling surface is above the rotating shaft of the rotating member in the direction of gravity. , for example, two game balls are rolled on the rolling surface in a row toward the rotating member, and the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the preceding game ball When the game ball following the ball is attracted, the preceding game ball can be easily placed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to release the attraction between the rotating member and the preceding game ball.

In the game machine B1, a receiving surface arranged in parallel with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the side opposite to the rolling surface with the rotating member interposed therebetween and receiving a game ball that is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and thrown. , wherein the receiving surface is located above the rotating shaft of the rotating member in the direction of gravity.

Here, the game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and thrown is received by the receiving surface arranged in parallel with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the side opposite to the rolling surface with the rotating member interposed therebetween. Another problem is that the game ball tends to bounce on the receiving surface, making it difficult to smoothly throw the game ball from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member to the receiving surface.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the receiving surface is positioned above the rotating shaft of the rotating member in the direction of gravity, so that the game ball is suppressed from bouncing on the receiving surface. , the game ball can be smoothly thrown from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member to the receiving surface. That is, according to the game machine B2, the game ball is received by the receiving surface before the downward displacement component in the direction of gravity increases with the rotation of the rotating member (that is, at the stage when the horizontal component is relatively large). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing on the receiving surface. Also, before the game ball is received by the receiving surface, the attraction of the game ball is released, and the game ball can be prevented from falling from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member to the receiving surface. Also from this point, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing on the receiving surface.

In the game machine B2, the receiving surface is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the rotating member.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the receiving surface is inclined downward in the direction away from the rotating member. The throwing direction of the game ball thrown with rotation can be brought close to the rolling direction of the game ball after being received by the receiving surface. As a result, it is possible to suppress the bouncing of the game ball on the receiving surface and smoothly throw the game ball from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member to the receiving surface.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the rotating member has a recess formed in its outer peripheral surface, and the magnet is arranged at a position for attracting the game ball to the inner surface of the recess. Characterized game machine B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the rotating member has a recess formed in the outer peripheral surface thereof, and the magnet is positioned to attract the game ball to the inner surface of the recess. Since it is arranged in the recess, the game ball can be supported by the inner surface of the recess (the step between the outer peripheral surface). As a result, for example, two game balls are rolled on the rolling surface in a row toward the rotating member, and the preceding game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the preceding game ball To make it difficult to release the attraction between a rotating member and a preceding game ball when the following game ball is attracted.

In the game machine B4, the recess depth of the recess is set to a dimension such that the game ball does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the recess when the game ball is fitted in the recess. .

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the recess depth of the recess is set to a dimension such that the game ball does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the recess when the game ball is fitted in the recess. Therefore, the inner edge of the recess (the ridgeline between the inner surface of the recess and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member) can be brought into contact with the game ball. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown with the rotation of the rotating member, it is possible to prevent the game ball from wobbling in the rotating direction of the rotating member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being released from adsorption.

In particular, when the game ball is thrown with the rotation of the rotating member, the direction of the vertical component of gravity acting on the game ball changes before and after the game ball (concave portion) passes the uppermost position in the direction of gravity. Because of the reversal, the game ball tends to wobble in the direction of rotation of the rotating member due to the reaction to the reversal. On the other hand, according to the game machine B5, the inner edge of the recess (the ridgeline between the inner surface of the recess and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member) can be brought into contact with the game ball, that is, the game can be played from both sides in the rotating direction of the rotating member. Since the ball can be sandwiched between the inner edges of the concave portion, it is possible to suppress the game ball from wobbling in the rotation direction of the rotating member, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the release of the game ball from being sucked.

In the game machine B4, a receiving surface arranged in parallel with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the side opposite to the rolling surface across the rotating member and receiving a game ball that is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and thrown. The recess depth of the recess is set to a dimension that allows the game ball to come into contact with the bottom surface of the recess while the game ball is fitted in the recess. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the size of the receiving surface side is set to be small.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the recess depth of the recess is set to a dimension that allows the game ball to come into contact with the bottom surface of the recess while the game ball is fitted in the recess. In addition, since the size of the receiving surface side is set smaller than that of the rolling surface side, when the game ball thrown with the rotation of the rotating member wobbles in the rotating direction of the rotating member, the game ball is placed in the concave portion. It can be easily rolled (dropped) from the side to the receiving surface side. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being released from the attraction and returning to the rolling surface.

A gaming machine B7 in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, wherein the rolling surface is formed as an inclined surface for rolling the game ball in a direction substantially parallel to the direction of the rotating shaft of the rotating member. .

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B6, the rolling surface is formed as an inclined surface for rolling the game ball in a direction substantially parallel to the direction of the rotation axis of the rotating member. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball that rolls on the rolling surface and the throwing direction of the game ball that is thrown with the rotation of the rotating member can be substantially perpendicular to each other. As a result, it is possible to change the movement of the game ball and secure the number of game balls that can be visually recognized at once, thereby improving the interest of the player.

The game machine B7 is provided with blocking means for blocking rolling of the game ball on the rolling surface, and the magnet of the rotating member is arranged at a position capable of attracting the game ball whose rolling is blocked by the blocking means. A game machine B8, characterized in that:

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machine B7, it is equipped with blocking means for blocking the rolling of the game ball on the rolling surface, and the magnet of the rotating member is a game ball whose rolling is blocked by the blocking means. Since the game ball rolling on the rolling surface is directly attracted to the rotating member, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface is blocked by the blocking means and then rotates. A form in which a game ball is attracted to a member (that is, a form in which a game ball that would have passed through the rotating member without being attracted to the rotating member if it had not been blocked by the blocking means can be attracted to the rotating member by being blocked by the blocking means); can be formed, and as a result, the player's interest can be improved.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Variable Unit 2360 as an Example>
A substantially cylindrical rotating member rotatably formed with a rotating shaft directed in a horizontal direction; In a gaming machine in which the rotating member is rotated in a state where the game ball is attracted to the surface to throw the attracted game ball in the rotating direction of the rotating member, the rotating member is parallel to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. and a rolling surface for rolling a game ball in a direction substantially parallel to the direction of the rotation axis of the rotating member; , and an upstream position upstream of the rolling surface of the attraction position.

Here, it comprises a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with the rotating shaft oriented in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A game machine is known in which a game ball is rotated in a state in which the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface, and the game ball is thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotary member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-231890). Gazette). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the game ball rolls on the rolling surface while swinging, the rotating member rotates, and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at the timing when it can face the adsorption position of the rotating member. Even when it moves, there is a problem that the game ball is difficult to be attracted to the attraction position.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the magnets are arranged at least at an attracting position where the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and an upstream position upstream of the rolling surface from the attracting position. Therefore, the game ball can be attracted to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member by the magnetic force of the magnet arranged at the upstream position, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from swinging and rolling on the rolling surface. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at the timing when it can face the attracting position of the rotating member, the game ball can be easily attracted to the attracting position.

The magnet arranged at the attracting position and the magnet arranged at the upstream position may be formed separately (that is, two magnets), or may be integrally formed. (ie, one magnet).

In the game machine C1, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the rotating member is provided with a concave portion which is recessed in the outer peripheral surface thereof and which serves as the suction position.

Here, it is necessary that the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member at the suction position, while the game ball is not attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member at the upstream position. To achieve this by using the difference in magnetic force between the magnets (that is, placing a magnet with strong magnetic force at the attraction position and a magnet with weak magnetic force at the upstream position, respectively), two types of magnets with different magnetic forces are prepared. and increase product costs.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the rotating member has a concave portion which is recessed in the outer peripheral surface thereof and serves as an attraction position, so that one magnet is embedded in the rotating member. By using the recess, the distance from the magnet to the game ball at the attracting position (the distance from the magnet to the bottom surface of the recess) is the distance from the magnet to the game ball at the upstream position) from the magnet to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. distance). That is, while the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member at the suction position, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member at the upstream position. Therefore, there is no need to use two types of magnets, and there is no need to complicate the shape of the magnets, so the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Also, when a game ball is attracted to the attraction position, the game ball can be held by the concave portion. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown with the rotation of the rotating member, it is possible to prevent the game ball from wobbling in the rotating direction of the rotating member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being released from adsorption.

In this case, the recess depth of the recess is preferably set to a dimension such that the game ball does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the recess when the game ball is fitted in the recess. This is because the inner edge of the recess (the ridgeline between the inner surface of the recess and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member) is brought into contact with the game ball, so that rattling of the game ball can be easily suppressed. However, the recess depth of the recess may be such that the game ball is brought into contact with the bottom surface of the recess while the game ball is fitted in the recess.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, at least a portion of the portion arranged at the upstream position of the magnet is arranged forward in the direction of rotation of the rotating member relative to the portion arranged at the attraction position. A gaming machine C3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, at least a part of the portion arranged at the upstream position of the magnet is arranged in the direction of rotation of the rotating member more than the portion arranged at the attracting position. Since it is arranged on the front side, the magnetic force of the magnet at the upstream position can be easily applied to the game ball rolling on the rolling surface toward the attracting position. That is, the game ball can be attracted to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member, and the game ball can be prevented from rolling while rocking on the rolling surface. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at the timing when it can face the attracting position of the rotating member, the game ball can be easily attracted to the attracting position.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the bottom surface of the recess is inclined upward toward the upstream position side and smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and at least on the upstream position side, a game ball is placed on the bottom surface of the recess. A game machine C4 characterized in that it is formed so as to be abuttable.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, the bottom surface of the recess is inclined upward toward the upstream position side and smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, at least on the upstream position side, Since the bottom surface of the recess is formed so that the game ball can come into contact, when the game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member by the magnet at the upstream position is fitted into the recess by the magnet at the attraction position, such game ball The ball can be smoothly fitted into the recess. In other words, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing (bouncing), making it easier to attract the game ball to the attraction position (recess).

In any one of game machines C1 to C4, a partition wall is provided upright from the rolling surface while facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member to partition the rolling area of the game ball, wherein the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and the The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the distance between the partition wall and the partition wall is set to be smaller toward the downstream side of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C4, the game machine C5 is provided with a partition wall that is erected from the rolling surface while facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and partitions the rolling area of the game ball. , the facing distance between the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member and the partition wall is set to be smaller toward the downstream side of the rolling surface, so that not only the action of the magnet (attraction by magnetic force) at the upstream position but also the partition wall Guiding by the wall can also prevent the game ball from rolling on the rolling surface while swinging. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated and the game ball rolls on the rolling surface at the timing when it can face the attracting position of the rotating member, the game ball can be easily attracted to the attracting position.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C5, a game in which a ball is thrown by being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and arranged side by side on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the side opposite to the rolling surface with the rotating member interposed therebetween. A game machine C6 comprising a receiving surface for receiving a ball, the receiving surface being inclined downward in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the rollers are arranged side by side on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the side opposite to the rolling surface across the rotating member and on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. A receiving surface for receiving a game ball sucked and thrown is provided, and the receiving surface is inclined downward in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member (attraction position) is formed. When the game ball attracted and thrown is received by the receiving surface, the game ball is rolled by the downward inclination of the receiving surface, and the game ball can be quickly separated from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling on the receiving surface from stagnation due to the attraction of the game ball to the magnet at the upstream position or the action of the magnetic force.

In the game machine C6, the receiving surface has a length dimension along the direction of the rotation axis set to be larger than a length dimension along the direction of the rotation axis of the magnet arranged on the rotating member. A gaming machine C7 characterized by:

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machine C6, the length dimension along the rotation axis direction of the receiving surface is larger than the length dimension along the rotation axis direction of the magnet arranged on the rotating member. is set to a large size, the game ball is attracted to a position other than the attracting position of the rotating member (i.e., attracted to the magnet at the upstream position) as the rotating member rotates. Even if a game ball is thrown, the game ball can be received by the receiving surface.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Winning Port Unit 600 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance arranged downstream of the first ball entrance in a game area, the first ball entrance is provided. A passage member forming a passage for game balls flowing down without being balled, a game board on which the game area is formed on the front side, and a plate formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the game board and to be immersed to the back side. A game ball passing through the passage member can be guided to the second ball entrance by the slide member protruding to the front side of the game board. Game machine D1.

Here, a game machine having a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance is known (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-013496). In this case, game balls that have not entered the first ball entry hole are not entered into the second ball entry hole, but are only collected from the out hole. Therefore, when the game ball hit aiming at the first ball entrance does not enter the first ball entrance, the player expects the subsequent destination of the game ball (the game ball flowing down). can't have Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot be sufficiently entertained.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, a passage member forming a passage for game balls that do not enter the first ball entrance and flow down, a game board having a game area formed on the front side, and A plate-shaped slide member formed so as to be protruding to the front side of the board and to be retractable to the back side, and the game ball passing through the passage member is moved by the slide member protruding to the front side of the game board to the second slide member. so that even if the game ball does not enter the first ball entrance, it is possible to draw attention to the flow of the game ball and enter the second ball entrance. Players can continue to have expectations for As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the slide member is formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the game board and to be retractable to the back side, when the slide member is not functioning, it can be retracted to the back side of the game board. A space can be secured on the front side of the board (expansion of the game area). That is, it is possible to expand the area in which the game ball can move in the game area.

The passage member may be, for example, a passage formed as a closed passage through which the game ball can pass, a passage formed by one or more nails that define the flowing direction of the game ball, or a passage member through which the game ball can roll. Examples include those formed as inclined surfaces (open passages).

Further, even when the slide member is retracted to the back side of the game board, it is of course possible that the game ball that has passed through the passage member can enter the second ball inlet. In this case, it is preferable that the ball is easier to enter the second ball entrance when the slide member is protruded than when it is retracted. This is because it is possible to draw attention to the state of the slide member and improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine D1, the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the second ball entrance is higher than the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the first ball entrance. A gaming machine D2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the player receives more benefits from the ball entering the second ball entrance than the profit given to the player by the ball entering the first ball entrance. Since the profit given is considered to be a higher profit, even if the game ball does not enter the first ball entrance, there is an expectation that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance. The player can hold it more strongly. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Examples of a form in which a player receives a high profit include a form in which a large number of prize balls are paid out as a result of entering a ball, and a form in which the ball is openable and closable. Examples include a mode in which the opening time of the movable wing is lengthened, a mode in which the number of times the movable wing is opened, a mode in which the opening range of the movable wing is increased, and the like.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the passage member includes a first opening for receiving game balls flowing down without entering the first ball entrance, and a game ball flowing in from the first opening to the game area. A gaming machine D3, characterized in that it comprises a second opening for flowing out, and is made of a light transmissive material.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1 or D2, the passage member includes the first opening for receiving the game ball flowing down without being entered into the first ball entrance, and the opening from the first opening. It is provided with a second opening through which the game ball that has flowed in flows out to the game area, and is formed from a light-transmitting material, so that the game ball that has flowed in from the first opening flows into the second opening (second ball entrance). It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the aspect of flowing down (passing) toward the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In game machines D1 to D3, a pair of the slide members are disposed on both sides of the second ball entrance in a posture inclined downward toward the second ball entrance. game machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, a pair of slide members are disposed on both sides of the second ball entrance in a downwardly inclined posture toward the second ball entrance, so that the slide members protrude. When such a state is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball flowing down from either the left or right side of the second ball entrance to enter the second ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation of entering the second ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, as a configuration for facilitating entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance, a pair of feather members whose base end side is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft protruding from the game board is provided as the second ball entrance. It is conceivable that the game ball is guided to the second ball entrance (so-called tulip) by disposing it in the mouth and opening the wing member. However, in such a configuration, a space for rotating (opening and closing) the wing members is required in the game area. In particular, space is required above the second entrance for the wing members to form a closed position. As a result, the size increases in the vertical direction, and the space for arranging other members (for example, the first ball entrance and the liquid crystal display device) is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, a pair of plate-shaped slide members formed so as to be able to protrude to the front side of the game board and to be retractable to the back side of the game board. However, since it is arranged in a posture inclined downward toward the second ball entrance on both sides of the second ball entrance, it is possible to achieve miniaturization in the vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members (for example, the first ball entrance and the liquid crystal display device).

A gaming machine D5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D4, the second opening of the passage member is arranged above the slide member in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4, the second opening of the passage member is disposed above the slide member in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting slide member can be used to move the game ball. It is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation of entering the second ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine D5, two sets of the first ball entrance and the passage member are provided, and the second opening of the passage member of one of the two sets is one of the pair of slide members. A game machine D6 is arranged above one slide member in the direction of gravity, and the second opening of the other set of passage members is arranged above the other slide member in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, two sets of the first ball entrance and the passage member are provided, and the second opening of the passage member of one of the two sets is One of the pair of slide members is arranged above one slide member in the gravitational direction, and the second opening of the other set of passage members is arranged above the other slide member in the gravitational direction. By utilizing each of the sliding members, it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation of entering the second ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The two sets of the first ball entrance and the passage member are spaced apart on both the left and right sides of the second ball entrance (for example, the second ball entrance is the width of the game area). It is preferable that two sets are arranged symmetrically in the width direction with the second ball entrance on both sides of the second entrance. A game ball flowing down on either one side or the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the second start port can be easily entered into the second ball entrance port, and can enter the second ball entrance port. This is because the player can have a stronger expectation of hitting the ball.

In the gaming machine D6, the edge of the slide member on the side of the second ball entrance is located between the lower edge in the direction of gravity and the upper edge in the direction of gravity of the second ball entrance. A gaming machine D7 characterized by:

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of the game machine D6, the edge of the slide member on the side of the second ball entrance is the lower edge in the gravity direction and the upper edge in the gravity direction of the second ball entrance. When the game ball is thrown (displaced) in the width direction of the game area, the game ball is placed between the edge of the second ball entrance side of the slide member in the projected state. , making it easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance. That is, a game ball that is thrown (displaced) from one side in the width direction of the game area passes through the second ball entrance and is thrown (displaced) to the other side in the width direction (the game ball enters the second entrance). It is possible to suppress the fact that the ball escapes in the width direction of the game area without entering the ball mouth.

In any one of the game machines D4 to D7, a bottom portion projecting from the lower edge of the second ball entrance in the direction of gravity toward the front side of the game board is provided, and the bottom portion is adapted to the second ball entrance. A gaming machine D8 characterized in that it is formed downwardly inclined toward the mouth.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D4 to D7, the bottom part projects from the lower edge of the second ball entrance in the direction of gravity to the front side of the game board. Since the portion is formed to slope downward toward the second ball entrance, the first entrance is formed not only when the slide member is protruded but also when the slide member is retracted. A game ball flowing down (passed through a passage member) without being entered into a ball opening can be easily entered into a second ball entry opening. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation of entering the second ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D8, the upper surface of the bottom portion has a ball-feeding surface located on the side closer to the second ball-entering port, and the second ball-entering surface connected to the ball-feeding surface and located closer to the ball-entering portion than the ball-feeding portion. an abutment surface located farther from the mouth is formed, and the angle of the downward inclination of the abutment surface in the direction toward the second ball entrance is the same as that of the throwing surface toward the second ball entrance. A game machine D9 characterized by being made larger than the angle of the downward inclination in the facing direction.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D8, the upper surface of the bottom portion has a ball-throwing surface positioned closer to the second ball entrance and a ball-throwing portion connected to the ball-throwing surface. A contact surface positioned farther from the second ball entrance than the second ball entrance is formed, and the angle of the downward inclination of the contact surface in the direction toward the second ball entrance is equal to the second entrance of the throwing surface. Since it is made larger than the angle of the downward inclination in the direction toward the ball opening, the game ball can be smoothly entered into the second ball entrance using the downward inclination of the contact surface. In particular, even when the slide member is retracted, the inclination of the abutment surface with a large downward inclination is used to allow the ball to flow down without entering the first ball entrance (passing through the passage member). ) It is possible to easily enter the game ball into the second ball entrance.

In the game machine D3, the first opening of the passage member is positioned above the first ball entrance in the direction of gravity, and the first ball entrance is arranged inside the passage member. Characterized game machine D10.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the first opening of the passage member is positioned above the first ball entrance in the direction of gravity, and the first ball entrance is located inside the passage member. is arranged, a part of the game ball that has flowed into the first opening of the passage member can enter the first ball entrance. That is, the game ball flowing down without entering the first ball entrance can be reliably made to flow into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player who enters the second ball entrance, and improve the interest of the game.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D10 includes detecting means for detecting a game ball flowing down the passage member and driving means for driving the slide member, and when the game ball is detected by the detecting means, the A game machine D11 characterized in that a slide member projects toward the front side of the game board by being driven by the drive means.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D10, it is provided with a detection means for detecting game balls flowing down the passage member and a drive means for driving the slide member, and the game balls are detected by the detection means. When the sliding member is driven by the drive means, the slide member projects toward the front side of the game board, so that the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball inlet. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the first ball entrance, the player is made to pay attention to the flow of the game ball, and the player continues to expect that the ball will enter the second ball entrance. can let As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The detection of the game ball by the detecting means and the driving by the driving means (protrusion of the slide member) may be performed at the same time, or the driving may be started after a predetermined time has passed after the detection. . However, in the latter case, it is preferable that the drive (projection operation of the slide member) is completed before the game ball reaches the projecting position of the slide member. This is because the function of the slide member that guides the game ball to the second ball entrance (makes it easier to enter) can be reliably exhibited.

A game machine D12 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the slide member forms a bottom surface connected to the second opening of the passage member.

According to the game machine D12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the slide member forms the bottom surface (rolling surface) connected to the second opening of the passage member, so the slide member does not protrude. The game ball can be positioned on the slide member even in the (that is, immersed) state, and the time for the game ball to be positioned on the slide member can be secured accordingly. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the passage member can be easily entered into the second ball entrance, and the player can have a stronger expectation of entering the second ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine D12 is characterized in that a guide portion for guiding a game ball positioned on the upper surface toward the second ball entrance is formed on the upper surface forming the bottom surface of the passage member of the slide member. A game machine D13.

According to the game machine D13, in addition to the effects of the game machine D12, the upper surface forming the bottom surface of the passage member of the slide member is provided with a guide for guiding the game ball positioned on the upper surface toward the second ball entrance. Since the portion is formed, when the slide member is protruded from the state in which the game ball is positioned on the upper surface of the slide member that has passed through the passage member and is in the immersed state, the game ball is moved to the second position by the action of the guide portion. Since it can be protruded while being guided toward the second ball entrance, the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance.

The guide portion may be a protruding line or a recessed groove (or any of these) that extends in a direction closer to the second ball entrance as it goes toward the tip of the slide member in the projecting direction and that is protruding or recessed on the upper surface. combination) are exemplified. The cross-sectional shape of the ridges and grooves is arbitrary, and examples thereof include rectangular cross-sections, polygonal cross-sections, and arcuate cross-sections (or cross-sections of shapes combining these).

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Winning Port Unit 600 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance arranged downstream of the first ball entrance in a game area, the first ball entrance is provided. A passage member forming a passage for game balls flowing down without being balled, and a second number smaller than the first number when a first number of game balls pass through the passage member. The gaming machine E1 is characterized by comprising change means for making it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance than when the game ball passes through the passage member.

Here, a game machine having a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance is known (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-013496). In this case, game balls that have not entered the first ball entry hole are not entered into the second ball entry hole, but are only collected from the out hole. Therefore, when the game ball hit aiming at the first ball entrance does not enter the first ball entrance, the player expects the subsequent destination of the game ball (the game ball flowing down). can't have Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot be sufficiently entertained.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, when the first number of game balls pass through the passage member that forms the passage for the game balls that do not enter the first ball entrance and flow down, has change means for making it easier for game balls to enter the second ball entrance than when a second number of game balls, which is smaller than the first number, passes through the passage member. To make a player pay attention to the downflow of the game ball even when the game ball does not enter the first ball entrance, and to continuously make the player expect the ball to enter the second ball entrance. be able to. In particular, since the ease of entering the second ball entrance is changed by the number of game balls passing through the passage member, the number of game balls that have leaked into the first ball entrance can also draw the player's attention. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The passage member may be, for example, a passage formed as a closed passage through which the game ball can pass, a passage formed by one or more nails that define the flowing direction of the game ball, or a passage member through which the game ball can roll. Examples include those formed as inclined surfaces (open passages).

Also, the first number is an integer of 1 or more, and the second number is an integer of 2 or more and is a number greater than the first number. For example, if the first number is 1, the second number is 2 or greater, and if the first number is 2, the second number is 3 or greater. be.

In the gaming machine E1, the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the second ball entrance is higher than the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the first ball entrance. A gaming machine E2 characterized by:

In the gaming machine E1, the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the first ball entrance is higher than the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the second ball entrance. A gaming machine E3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the player receives more benefits from the ball entering the second ball entrance than the profit given to the player by the ball entering the first ball entrance. Since the profit given is considered to be a higher profit, even if the game ball does not enter the first ball entrance, there is an expectation that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance. The player can hold it more strongly. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the second ball entrance is more than that of the game played by the ball entering the first ball entrance. Since the profit given to the player is considered to be a higher profit, normally, a game ball is hit aiming at the first ball entrance, but a game ball that leaks into the first ball entrance can be saved by making it possible to enter the second ball entrance. In particular, when the number of game balls passing through the passage member is greater than the predetermined number (when the first number is greater than the second number), the balls are made easier to enter the second ball entrance. Contradictory expectations for entering the first ball entrance and for failing to enter the first ball entrance (i.e., making it easier to enter the second ball entrance) Players can have expectations. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Examples of a form in which a player receives a high profit include a form in which a large number of prize balls are paid out as a result of entering a ball, and a form in which the ball is openable and closable. Examples include a mode in which the opening time of the movable wing is lengthened, a mode in which the number of times the movable wing is opened, a mode in which the opening range of the movable wing is increased, and the like.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the changing means includes a restricting means for restricting the flow of the first game ball passing through the passage member or flowing out from the passage member, and the restricting means When a second game ball follows one game ball, the second game ball is brought into contact with the first game ball whose flow is restricted, and the second game ball flows down. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that it is formed so as to direct the direction toward the second ball entrance.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the change means includes a regulation means for regulating the flow of the first game ball passing through the passage member or flowing out from the passage member. , the restricting means, when the second game ball follows the first game ball, makes the second game ball contact (collide) with the first game ball whose flow is restricted, Since the flow direction of the second game ball is directed toward the second ball entrance, the amusement of the game can be improved. That is, the case where the first game ball and the second game ball flow down can be easier to enter the second ball entrance (pass through the passage member) than the case where only the first game ball flows down. Since the ease of entering the second ball entrance can be changed depending on the number of game balls to be played), the player is also made to pay attention to the number of game balls that have leaked into the first ball entrance. be able to. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine E4, the game machine E5 is characterized in that the regulating means is formed as a recess formed in a wall surface facing the exit of the passage member.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E4, the restricting means is formed as a recess formed in the wall surface facing the exit of the passage member. The game ball is received in the recess, and the flow of the first game ball can be temporarily restricted (i.e., the first game ball is temporarily held so that the following second game ball can collide). On the other hand, the restriction on the flow of the first game ball can be released by causing the first game ball to drop (flow down) from the recess due to its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to restrict (hold) and release the restriction on the flow of the first game ball only by the shape of the restricting means, and it is possible to eliminate the need for an operation mechanism for switching between them (releasing the restriction). can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, according to the gaming machine E4, a member (for example, provided with a rolling surface inclined downward toward the second ball entrance) guides the game ball flowing out from the outlet of the passage member to the second ball entrance. , There is no member that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance by rolling the game ball on the rolling surface (the guiding member can be guided to the second ball entrance) The recess is used to insert the second game ball into the second ball entrance even in the state of being displaceable between the normal position and the non-guiding position and displaced to the non-guiding position. You can enter the ball.

In the gaming machine E5, the outlet of the passage member has a bottom surface on which game balls roll, and side wall surfaces that stand on both sides of the bottom surface in the width direction, and the facing distance between the side surfaces is the game A game machine E6 characterized in that the size is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the ball.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machine E5, the outlet of the passage member has a bottom surface on which game balls roll and side wall surfaces erected on both sides in the width direction of the bottom surface. Since the space between the side wall surfaces facing each other is set to a size substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, the trajectory of the game ball flowing out from the outlet of the passage member can be easily made substantially constant, and the game ball is controlled by the restricting means (recess). can be assured of acceptance.

In the game machine E5 or E6, the game machine E7 is characterized in that the depth of the recess increases in the direction away from the second ball entrance.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5 or E6, the depth of the recess is increased in the direction away from the second ball entrance, so that the game received in the recess is increased. The ball can be held in a positionally shifted direction in which the depth of the recess is increased (that is, the side away from the second ball entrance). Therefore, when the second game ball abuts (collides) with the first game ball held in the recess, the second game ball is directed to the second ball entrance to make it easier to enter. can.

In any one of the game machines E5 to E7, a slide member is provided in a position between the exit of the passage member and the recess and downward in the direction of gravity by being formed so as to be retractable and protruding, The game machine E8 is characterized in that the slide member is formed so as to be able to guide the game ball to the second ball entrance in the projected state.

According to the game machine E8, in any one of the game machines E5 to E7, it is arranged in a position between the outlet of the passage member and the recessed portion and downward in the direction of gravity by being formed so as to be retractable and projecting. A slide member is provided, and since the slide member is formed so as to be able to guide the game ball to the second ball entrance in the projected state, the first game ball held in the recess can be guided by the projected slide member. can be used to enter the ball into the second ball entrance. That is, when the first game ball is dropped (dropped) from the recess, the first game ball can be received by the slide member and guided to the second ball entrance by the slide member. As a result, the first game ball can enter the second ball entrance.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the changing means includes rolling means for rolling game balls passing through the passage member, and is connected to the rolling means so as to be interlockable with the first position. and a second position for changing the course of the game ball passing through the passage member, wherein the course changing means is displaced to the second position. The path of the ball is set so that it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance than the path of the game ball in the state of being displaced to the first position; When the ball rolls, the course changing means is displaced to the second position, and when a second number of game balls smaller than the first number rolls on the rolling means. is a gaming machine E9 characterized in that said course changing means is displaced to a first position;

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the changing means is the rolling means for rolling the game balls passing through the passage member, and the rolling means is interlocked with the rolling means. a course changing means that is operably connected and formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position for changing the course of a game ball passing through the passage member, wherein the course changing means is displaced to the second position; The course of the game ball in the state of being displaced to the first position is set to be a course that makes it easier to enter the second ball entrance than the course of the game ball in the state of being displaced to the first position, and the rolling means is set to the first position. When a number of game balls roll, the course changing means is displaced to the second position, and when a second number of game balls, which is less than the first number, rolls on the rolling means, Since the course changing means is displaced to the first position, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

That is, the first number of game balls, which is larger than the second number, enters the second ball entrance than the second number of game balls. (The ease of entering the second ball entrance can be changed depending on the number of game balls passing through the passage member). The number can also draw the player's attention. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A gaming machine E10 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E9, the course changing means is arranged downstream of the rolling means.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E9, since the course changing means is arranged downstream of the rolling means, the destination (course) of the predetermined game ball can be changed to the predetermined game ball. It can be associated with the number of game balls following the ball and the degree of connection, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved. That is, when the trailing game balls are in a row, the course changing means is maintained at the second position while the number of game balls rolling on the rolling means is maintained at the first number. As a result, each game ball that has reached the course changing means can be easily entered into the second ball entrance, while the series of following game balls is broken, and the number of game balls rolling on the rolling means is reduced. When it becomes the second number or less, the course change means is displaced to the first position, and each game ball that reaches the course change means is described above (when the course change means is displaced to the second position ) makes it more difficult to enter the second ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of following game balls and the degree of connection thereof. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the changing means includes a rotatable rotating member, and a magnet disposed on the outer surface of the rotating member for attracting game balls to the outer surface of the rotating member in a hanging state. and contacting means for causing the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member by the magnet to be positioned on the trajectory accompanying the rotation of the rotating member so as to come into contact with the game ball and drop the game ball from the rotating member. wherein the abutting means is positioned below the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member in the direction of gravity, and is positioned above the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member and thrown. The gaming machine E11 is characterized in that the game ball dropped from the rotating member due to the contact of the contact means is more likely to enter the second ball inlet.

According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the change means includes a rotating member formed to be rotatable and a rotating member arranged on the outer surface side of the rotating member to rotate the game ball. A magnet attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member in a hanging state, and the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member by the magnet is positioned on the trajectory accompanying the rotation of the rotating member, so that it contacts the game ball and is ejected from the rotating member. The contact means is positioned below the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member in the direction of gravity, and is positioned below the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member and thrown. Since the game ball dropped from the rotating member by the contact of the contact means is more likely to enter the second ball entrance, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. That is, the case where the game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member is attracted to one or more game balls is more effective than the case where only one game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member. Since it is possible to make it easier to enter the second ball entrance (the ease of entering the second ball entrance can be changed depending on the number of game balls passing through the passage member), the first ball entrance The player can also be made to pay attention to the number of game balls that have leaked into the first ball. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, according to the gaming machine E11, even when a plurality of game balls roll toward the rotating member, when the game balls are connected, the preceding game ball is attracted to the rotating member. The following game ball can be easily attracted to the preceding game ball, and at least the following game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance, while the game balls are separated from each other by a predetermined interval. , the game ball preceding the rotating member can be attracted, but the game ball following the preceding game ball cannot be attracted, and the following game ball is also attracted to the rotating member. That is, it is made difficult for both the leading and trailing balls to enter the second ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the number of game balls but also to how they are connected. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the game machine E11, the game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member in a hanging state, and the game ball is thrown in the hanging state as the rotating member rotates, so the rolling speed and It is also possible to form a mode in which the game ball drops from the rotating member as an unstable state in which it swings loosely due to variations in the rolling direction, the suction position, and the like. That is, even when only one game ball is attracted to the rotating member (when it is not in contact with the abutting means), the game ball falls off and is easily made to enter the second ball entrance. You can perform a performance called

In the gaming machine E11, the abutment means is formed in a tapered flat plate shape, and includes a first game ball that is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member, and a second game ball that is attracted to the first game ball. A gaming machine E12 characterized in that it is arranged in a substantially horizontal attitude at a height position where the tip is inserted into a suction position between the two.

According to the game machine E12, in addition to the effects of the game machine E11, the abutment means is formed in a tapered flat plate shape, and the first game ball attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member and the first game ball Since it is arranged in a substantially horizontal posture at a height position where the tip is inserted into the adsorption position between the second game ball to be adsorbed, the first game ball is adsorbed to the outer surface of the rotating member. When the second game ball is attracted to the first game ball, the attraction of the first game ball and the second game ball is smoothly released, and only the second game ball is dropped. When only the first game ball is attracted to the outer surface of the rotating member, the action of the abutment means on the first game ball is suppressed to attract the first game ball. can be easily maintained. Therefore, when only one game ball is attracted to the rotating member and hangs down, and when two or more game balls are attracted to the rotating member and hang down in a row, the entrance to the second ball entrance The difference in ease of hitting the ball can be made clearer. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the number of game balls and how they are connected. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Variable Unit 360 as an Example>
A substantially cylindrical rotating member rotatably formed with a rotating shaft directed in a horizontal direction; In a game machine in which the rotating member is rotated while the game ball is attracted to a surface to throw the attracted game ball in the rotating direction of the rotating member, the magnet of the rotating member is provided with a first magnet. release means for facilitating release of the adsorption between the magnet of the rotating member and the first game ball when the second game ball is magnetically attached to the first game ball while the second game ball is attracted A gaming machine F1 characterized by comprising:

Here, it comprises a substantially cylindrical rotating member that is rotatable with the rotating shaft oriented in the horizontal direction, and a magnet that is disposed on the rotating member and attracts the game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, A game machine is known in which a game ball is rotated in a state in which the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface, and the game ball is thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotary member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-231890). Gazette). In this case, when two game balls roll continuously toward the rotating member, the preceding game ball (first game ball) is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the preceding game ball When the game ball (second game ball) following (the first game ball) is attracted, both the preceding game ball and the following game ball are thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating member. However, such a gaming machine has a problem that it is not possible to provide the player with a sufficient interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, when the first game ball is attracted to the magnet of the rotating member and the second game ball is magnetically attached to the first game ball, the magnet of the rotating member and Since the releasing means is provided to easily release the attraction to the first game ball, it is possible to suppress both the first game ball and the second game ball from being thrown in the rotation direction of the rotating member.

That is, when only the first game ball rolls toward the rotating member and is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet) of the rotating member, the first game ball can be thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating member. , In addition to the first game ball, the second game ball also rolls toward the rotating member, the first game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface (magnet) of the rotating member, and the first game ball is attracted to the first game ball. When the second game ball is attracted, both the first game ball and the second game ball can be prevented from being thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating member, so the first game ball is directed toward the rotating member. When the first game ball rolls, the player can be worried (throbbed) about whether another game ball (that is, the second game ball) is rolling behind the first game ball. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine F1, a first ball entrance into which a game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and sent in the direction of rotation of the rotating member enters, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member is not attracted. and a second ball entrance into which a game ball enters, and when the game ball enters at least the first ball entrance, a profit is given to the player, or the game ball enters the first ball entrance. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the profit given to the player by entering the ball is higher than the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the second ball entrance.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the first ball entrance into which the game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating member enters; and a second ball entrance into which the game ball that is not attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the is entered, and when the game ball enters at least the first ball entrance, a profit is given to the player, or the second ball entrance is provided. Since the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the first ball entrance is made higher than the profit given to the player by entering the ball into the second ball entrance, the interest in the game is improved. can be achieved.

That is, the player expects to obtain a profit by entering the ball into the first ball entrance, or to obtain a higher profit than in the case of entering the ball into the second ball entrance, so that the game ball is In the hope that the ball will stick to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and be thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotating member, and in the expectation that there will be more chances of receiving benefits, more game balls are placed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. We want the ball to stick to the surface and be thrown in the direction of rotation of the rotating member. On the other hand, when only the first game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, while the first game ball can be thrown in the rotating direction of the rotating member (first ball entrance), When the second game ball is attracted to the first game ball attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, not only the second game ball but also the first game ball moves in the direction of rotation of the rotating member. The ball is not thrown, and both players lose the opportunity to enter the first ball entrance. Therefore, when the first game ball rolls toward the rotating member, the game is checked whether another game ball (that is, the second game ball) is rolling behind the first game ball. It is possible to easily make people worry (easily make them excited), and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Examples of a form in which a player receives a high profit include a form in which a large number of prize balls are paid out as a result of entering a ball, and a form in which the ball is openable and closable. Examples include a mode in which the opening time of the movable wing is lengthened, a mode in which the number of times the movable wing is opened, a mode in which the opening range of the movable wing is increased, and the like.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the releasing means includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on the rotating member, and the displacement member is adapted to move the second game ball attracted to the first game ball. A game machine F3 characterized in that it is displaced by being brought into contact with the magnet, and the displacement enlarges the distance between the first game ball and the magnet.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the releasing means includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on the rotating member, and the displacement member is attracted to the first game ball. The second game ball is displaced by contact with the second game ball, and the displacement expands the distance between the first game ball and the magnet, so the second game ball is attracted to the first game ball. If so, the weight of the second game ball is used to release the attraction between the magnet and the first game ball, while the second game ball is attracted to the first game ball. If not, it is possible to prevent the attraction between the magnet and the first game ball from being released. In addition, since such switching is performed using the weight of the second game ball, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide a drive source for displacing the displacement member, thereby reducing the product cost accordingly. can be done.

The form in which the distance between the first game ball and the magnet is increased by displacement of the displacement member includes a form in which only the first game ball is displaced, a form in which only the magnet is displaced, and a first game. Any configuration in which both the sphere and the magnet are displaced is acceptable.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the release means is formed as a recess that is recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and receives the second game ball attracted to the first game ball. Game machine F4 to play.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, the releasing means is provided as a recess in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member for receiving the second game ball attracted to the first game ball. Since it is formed, the second game ball can be brought closer to the lower side of the first game ball in the gravity direction, and the gravity of the weight of the second game ball acting on the first game ball is increased accordingly. It is possible to easily increase the directional component. Therefore, it is possible to easily release the attraction between the first game ball and the magnet.

That is, when the second game ball is attracted to the first game ball, the weight of the second game ball is used to release the attraction between the magnet and the first game ball. When the second game ball is not attracted to the first game ball, the attraction between the magnet and the first game ball can be prevented from being released. In addition, as a means for using the weight of the second game ball, such switching can be achieved by only the concave portion formed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, so that it is not necessary to provide a displacement member or a driving source. , the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

A game machine K1, wherein the game machine is a slot machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, D1 to D13, E1 to 12 and F1 to F4. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A game machine K2, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine in any one of the game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, D1 to D13, E1 to 12 and F1 to F4. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Any one of game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, D1 to D13, E1 to 12, and F1 to F4 is characterized by combining a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. A game machine K3. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a substantially columnar rotary member formed to be rotatable with its rotary shaft oriented in the horizontal direction, and a game ball being attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member disposed on the rotary member. A game machine is known in which a game ball is rotated in a state in which a game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member, thereby throwing the game ball in the direction of rotation of the rotary member. Document 1: JP-A-2012-231890).
However, the game machine described above has a problem that the attraction between the rotating member and the game ball is released.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine that makes it difficult to release the attraction between the rotating member and the game ball.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 comprises a substantially cylindrical rotating member which is rotatable with its rotating shaft directed in the horizontal direction; and a magnet for attracting a game ball to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, by rotating the rotating member in a state where the game ball is attracted to the outer peripheral surface, the attracted game ball is moved in the rotating direction of the rotating member. It is provided with a rolling surface on which the game ball rolls while being arranged side by side on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the rolling surface is above the rotating shaft of the rotating member in the direction of gravity. To position.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the rotating member is arranged side by side on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the side opposite to the rolling surface with the rotating member interposed therebetween, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member A receiving surface is provided for receiving a game ball that is attracted to and thrown by the surface, and the receiving surface is positioned above the rotating shaft of the rotating member in the direction of gravity.
A gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the receiving surface is inclined downward in a direction away from the rotating member.
<effect>
According to the game machine described in technical idea 1, it is possible to make it difficult to release the attraction between the rotating member and the game ball.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, it is possible to suppress bouncing of the game ball on the receiving surface.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, the game ball can be smoothly thrown to the receiving surface.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board 26 Left start winning port (first entrance)
27 Right start winning entrance (first ball entrance)
331a receiving portion (rolling member)
352 variable plate (displacement member)
352d1 Bulging part (thickness part)
353d First irregular reflection part (first transmission member)
353f standing portion (connecting member)
354b second irregular reflection part (second transmission member)
355 light-emitting member (base member)
355a LED (light emitting means)
369 Stopper (blocking means)
370L, 2370L, 3370L, 4370L, 5370L Rotating body (rotating member)
370R, 2370R, 3370R, 4370R, 5370R Rotating body (rotating member)
372Rb, 2372Rb Magnets 372Lc2, 2372Lc, 3372Lc, 5372Lc Grooves (recesses)
372Rc2, 2372Rc, 3372Rc, 5372Rc groove (recess)
4372Rc5 recess (recess)
5372Rd, 5372Ld release member (displacement member)
373Ra, 373La recovery port (second ball entrance)
381c Second rolling part (rolling surface)
381d third rolling part (receiving part)
2381g Partition wall 382 V winning member (first entrance)
613a Guide plate (bottom part)
613a1 Contact surface 613a2 Rolling surface (ball feeding surface)
7613e through hole (recess)
631b second through hole (first opening)
632a through hole (second entrance)
632b connecting hole (second opening)
633b second through hole (first opening)
640, 8640, 9640, 11640 path member (path member)
10642a tip (contact member)
8644a variable plate (rolled means)
8644c Regulating member (route changing means)
652 variable plate (slide member)
11652a recess (guide)
655 solenoid (driving means)
SE1 sensor device (detection member)

Claims (3)

A substantially cylindrical rotating member rotatably formed with a rotating shaft directed in a horizontal direction; A game machine that throws the attracted game ball in the direction of rotation of the rotating member by rotating the rotating member while the game ball is attracted to the surface,
A game characterized by comprising a rolling surface arranged side by side on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member and on which game balls roll, the rolling surface being positioned above the rotating shaft of the rotating member in the direction of gravity. machine. A receiving surface is provided in parallel with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member on the side opposite to the rolling surface with the rotating member sandwiched therebetween and receives a game ball that is attracted to and thrown by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and receives the receiving surface. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the surface is positioned above the rotation axis of the rotating member in the direction of gravity. 3. A game machine according to claim 2, wherein said receiving surface is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from said rotating member.

Images